Heartland The heart and soul of home.
www.CustomCupboards.com
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Information Section Aging (Distressing)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Angles / Formulas.................................................................................................................................................................................27-30 Cabinet Box Construction.........................................................................................................................................................................22 Cabinet Care Suggestions......................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Classification of Orders................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Co-Op Advertising...................................................................................................................................................................................14-15 Credit Policy......................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Current Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Custom Cupboards & The Environment............................................................................................................................................... 16 Dealer Training.................................................................................................................................................................................................6 Delivery...............................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Display Programs.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Drawer Box & Guide Options.................................................................................................................................................................. 26 Expedited Service Orders - ESOs........................................................................................................................................................... 10 Finishes...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-20 Freight Charges...............................................................................................................................................................................................5 Hazardous Materials.......................................................................................................................................................................................6 Hinges and Overlays.............................................................................................................................................................................24-25 Hours of Operation.........................................................................................................................................................................................4 Interior Box Specifications....................................................................................................................................................................... 23 Jobsite Delivery Requirements..................................................................................................................................................................5 Lead Times........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Lifetime Limited Warranty Form.............................................................................................................................................................. 11 Memos / Forms.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Ordering & Confirmation Procedures......................................................................................................................................................9 Ordering Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................................................8 Our Mission........................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Packaged & Aged Finishes........................................................................................................................................................................ 21 Product Specifications Policy.................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Receipt of Product.........................................................................................................................................................................................6 Returned Goods..............................................................................................................................................................................................6 Shelf Policy...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Touch-Up & Final Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................. 12 Touch-Up Kits................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Unloading Time................................................................................................................................................................................................6 Warranty........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Website............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Who Do I Contact?.....................................................................................................................................................................................2-3 Woods.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-18
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-1-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Who Do I Contact ACCOUNT MANAGERS / ORDER ENTRY: Call your AM for questions pertaining to delivery of your cabinets, questions about your order or ESO’s, entry, quotes & pricing, billing, and as a starting point for a warranty issue.
Cristen Burkhart Ext.124 Customer Service Manager cristen@customcupboards.com
Angel Ortiz Ext.162
Jessica Rein Ext.130
Kheva Edwards Ext.171
angel@customcupboards.com
jessica@customcupboards.com
Kheva@customcupboards.com.
Laura Hay Ext. 101
Lori Chism Ext.156
laura@customcupboards.com
lori@customcupboards.com
NATIONAL TRAINER
Melissa Palmer Ext.102
melissa@customcupboards.com
Hollie Everitt Ext.106
hollie@customcupboards.com
MARKETING DESIGNER
Cesar Cantu Ext.114
cesarc@customcupboards.com
Dealer Training
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-2-
Daniel Albert Ext.157 daniel@customcupboards.com
SALES ASSISTANT
Tina Blasi Ext.158
tinab@customcupboards.com
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Who Do I Contact? SALES REPRESENTATIVES: Call your Sales Rep for questions pertaining to training issues, product issues, or anything with the exception of the status of orders and accounting / billing questions.
Jerry Goldman (972) 743-7407
Kevin Geiger (303) 204-0718
Shane Jardine (812) 369-5200
Joe Tanner (510) 928-6880
djerrygoldman@yahoo.com
keving@customcupboards.com
shanej@customcupboards.com
a-r@mindspring.com
Richard Palen (316) 650-8725
Jef Pearce (864) 506-1123
richardp@customcupboards.com
jef.pearce@gmail.com
THE BARONET SALES GROUP Darryl Minch, (561) 262-5802 darrylm@customcupboards.com
Derek Minch, (904) 449-4527 derekm@customcupboards.com
Lester Minch, (904) 945-8495 lesterm@customcupboards.com
Gwen Andersen, (949) 233-3911 gandersen@customcupboards.com
OTHER IMPORTANT NUMBERS:
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
President Mael Hernandez Ext. 121
CFO / Accounting Chris Flickinger Ext. 152
maelh@customcupboards.com
chrisf@customcupboards.com
Dir. Research & Development Todd Johnson Ext. 110
V.P. of Sales Bill Speights Ext. 109
todd@customcupboards.com
bills@customcupboards.com
-3-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Our Mission Our mission is to continuously improve the value of our products, customer experience and dealer support.
Hours of Operation Customer Service 7:30 a.m.—5:00 p.m. C.S.T. (Mon.—Fri.) Phone: (316)529-3431 Fax: (316)529-1738 Sales & Marketing / Library 7:30 a.m.—5:00 p.m. C.S.T. (Mon.—Fri.) Phone: (316)529-3431 Fax: (316)219-2798 Accounting 8:00 a.m.—5:00 p.m. C.S.T. (Mon.—Fri.) Phone: (316)529-3431 Fax: (316)469-1028
Credit Policy Custom Cupboards Inc. requires prospective customers to complete our credit application, be approved for credit, and have a credit line established prior to marketing our products to their prospective customers. We reserve the right to request updated credit information at any time. Our normal credit terms require full payment within 30 days of the invoice date. A finance charge of 1.5% per month (APR of 18%) will be assessed on all invoices not paid within 30 days. The finance charge will appear on your monthly statement that is mailed at the end of each month. We strongly encourage you to review / reconcile your monthly statement upon receipt. Custom Cupboards Inc. reserves the right to place customers on credit hold for violations of the above credit policies. When a customer is placed on credit hold, any of the following actions will be considered: cancellation of ship windows; we may hold the shipment of orders; change credit terms; or exercise other options depending on the situation at the time.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-4-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Freight Charges Please contact your Account Manager or Sales Representative for your current freight rate and shipping arrangements.
Delivery Delivery will be on 53-foot trailers according to our freight rate charges. There is a minimum delivery charge of $75 net per order, $10 net per ESO, delivered along with Work Orders. There is an additional $175 net drop charge per order for jobsite deliveries. Switching delivery routing or changing into a customer pick-up within one week of departure date will result in an additional $75 net charge per order. All deliveries are one man tailgate deliveries, including jobsite deliveries. We cannot effectively deliver to a dealer if an after hours phone number is not provided. Breakdowns, traffic, etc. are unpredictable and considering the mileage that the drivers must drive every day, it is difficult to provide an exact time that we will be at your location. The initial delivery date, supplied during the confirmation process, will be the Friday of the week that we will deliver your kitchen. Approximately two weeks before delivery you will receive a fax with the exact delivery date.
Jobsite Delivery Requirements Failure to meet any of the following criteria may result in the loss of future jobsite privileges. In order to adequately schedule for a jobsite delivery, the full address must be given when the order is placed. It is mandatory that the dealer and/or sales person provide a detailed jobsite map, meet the driver at the showroom or other agreed upon, convenient location, and lead the driver to the jobsite. Deliveries more than 50 miles from your showroom must be pre-approved and are subject to additional freight charges. See the JS form provided in the Forms section. The dealer must evaluate the delivery route to the jobsite, insure accessibility, and notify local authorities if necessary. The jobsite must be able to accommodate a 53’ semi trailer with no dead ends or cul’de’sacs. The jobsite must meet local and state guidelines for delivery vehicles of this size. The evaluation is to include bridge weight limits of not less than 48,000 lbs. gross weight minimum, low hanging obstacles (overpasses, power lines, tree limbs, etc.) with a minimum height of 13 ½’ required. If the driver deems the jobsite undeliverable, due to failure to meet any one of the above requirements, or due to current weather and/or road conditions, the job will be delivered to the dealer’s warehouse or to the dealer’s truck. However, if a jobsite delivery is attempted, or if the order changes from a jobsite to a warehouse delivery, after the truck has been loaded, the jobsite fee will still apply. Failure to comply with these requirements will be justification for additional delivery charges which may consist of, but will not be limited to: hourly rate based on time of delay; fines from local authorities; and payment for damage to property or Kustom Karriers’ equipment.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-5-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Receipt of Product Each item should be checked by the dealer or an “authorized person” as it is unloaded from the truck. Any shortages or damages must be noted on the shipping receipt at the time of delivery. Please call your Account Manager (AM) or the Co Truck Shipping contact immediately. Any damages beyond the scope of field repair should be returned on the truck to be replaced (see Returned Goods Authorization). The dealer or the authorized person must sign the shipping papers. This signature acknowledges receipt of the product in an acceptable and complete manner. If the order is signed as delivered complete, the dealer will be responsible for any freight charges accrued to re-deliver any item that has been left on our truck. Any delivery made by any method other than company truck (Fed-Ex, UPS, Common Carrier, etc.) and is received damaged should be refused or noted at the time of delivery. If refused, the package will be returned to Custom Cupboards, Inc. for repair or replacement. If kept, please take pictures for the claim, keep your original packaging and contact the ESO manager at ext. 148 immediately.
Unloading Time The driver’s responsibility is primarily to move the product to the tailgate of the truck. The dealer is responsible for providing qualified personnel to move the product into the warehouse or jobsite. It is imperative that the product is unloaded in a reasonable amount of time (one hour is usually sufficient) in order for the driver to remain on schedule with the other deliveries on the route. If unnecessary delays occur, the dealer may be charged at the rate of $75 net per hour.
Returned Goods Any products that need to be returned to the factory for any reason must have prior authorization from the factory and must be accompanied with a Return Authorization Form. Please call your Account Manager to have a copy faxed to you. Custom Cupboards, Inc. takes no responsibility for items returned without appropriate documentation.
Hazardous Materials Hazardous materials can only be shipped via UPS Ground, UPS Priority Overnight or company truck, to a business address only. A substantial hazardous material fee plus additional standard freight charges will be assessed when shipping UPS Ground or UPS Priority Overnight. Some finishes will require multiple components be sent, this may increase the shipping fees. Please contact the ESO shipping department for further information or questions at ext.148 or by email at esoshipping@customcupboards.com.
Dealer Training We offer various types of dealer training. Whether it’s a one-on-one session at your dealership with your sales representative, training at our facility in Wichita, KS or a city near you, or one-on-one help from our Product Trainer, Melissa Palmer, we’re here to help. Melissa can be reached at Ext. 102 or by email at melissa@customcupboards.com. If you are looking for a specific type of training, such as focusing on design or 20/20, please contact your sales representative to let him / her know you are interested. If we have enough interest, we will definitely plan a special focus meeting. Please keep an eye out in our “Dealer’s Only” section on the website for upcoming training events.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Lead Times Our lead times are posted at all times on our website. Incomplete order will not receive the posted lead time, as posted lead times are for confirmed orders only. Monday dates are given, meaning the job will deliver no later than the Friday of the week posted. Please call your Account Manager if you have any questions.
Calendar in “DEALERS ONLY” section in website
Current Multiplier* *When price increases occur, the dealership is responsible for manually updating the multipliers on individual orders in the pricing program, as well as, verifying the correct multiplier in the pricing program (maintenance/utilities, edit system variables).
Your current pricing multiplier is: ______
Classification of Orders A Orders: No custom cabinets; no drawings; 2-4 working days to process; confirmation process. NOTE: This is only for the Heartland and Revola manufacturing lines B Orders: Custom drawings; 4-7 working days to process; confirmation process. Ordering a wood hood, mantel or work table other than what is in the catalog automatically makes the order a “B”. Some items in catalog will note it as “custom”, making the order a “B”. NOTE: This is only for the Heartland and Revola manufacturing lines C Orders: (Confirmed A Order) Allows an “A” order to utilize a quicker lead time. You will not get a confirmation to sign off, but will receive a final copy of the order. To take advantage of this option, please select Order type “C”. NOTE: This is only for the Heartland and Revola manufacturing lines D Orders: Discovery cabinets only; no drawings; you will not get a confirmation to sign off, but will receive a final copy of the order. NOTE: This is only for the Discovery manufacturing line
ESO: This is a quick ship item needed to finish up a job; ships approximately 2-3 weeks from receipt of the order depending on delivery method and availability of a company truck; maximum of 3 cabinets. Must have an original work order number provided with the order. All cabinet manufacturing lines available on an ESO. There is no surcharge for this option, this program is not meant for additional rooms. NOTE: If these items are missing, it will prevent you from receiving a window. 1. Job site maps 2. Serial # for sample doors 3. Floor plans 4. WT/Cutout forms 5. Drawings 6. Multiple questions
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-7-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Ordering Guidelines Please read the following instructions before placing an order, then use the checklist to ensure your order is complete. Please note that all orders should be final, not works in progress or a rough draft when submitted.
1.
All orders must be entered using the Custom Cupboards pricing program. Orders must be sent in electronically. Submitting orders electronically will reduce re-entry errors. Handwritten orders will not be accepted. The first copy of our pricing program will be sent at no charge. Extra copies may incur a $119 list charge. Please call your Account Manager for more information.
2.
List groups of cabinets together working clockwise around the kitchen. Wall cabinets first, followed by bases, vanities, talls, then moldings and miscellaneous items last.
3.
Dimension / Measuring: All dimensions stated in this catalog are WIDTH by LENGTH. The length runs with the grain. Cabinets are measured across the front (the width) X the height X the depth.
4.
Use correct nomenclature to avoid potential errors.
5.
Layouts must be included with each order. Layouts are used throughout the inspection process and in the staging rooms. Layouts are not checked for accuracy.
6.
Supply a drawing for any special cabinets. Make sure you note “See Drawing” in the description so we know to check the drawing. Drawings of special items should be faxed to the factory for a price quote prior to placing the initial order and must accompany the order once it’s placed to ensure you get the quoted price.
7.
Include all oven & microwave cutouts, as well as all appliance panel sizes. Dimensions can be supplied in the line entry or use the forms provided in the “Forms” section of the catalog or download them from our website. Be sure to note on your order to reference the forms if used. Failure to supply these forms / dimensions will delay your order.
8.
All cabinet ends are manufactured as unfinished, or “raw”, unless specified on the order. Specify by using Right, Left, or Both on the cabinet entry.
9.
Include all moldings, valances, fillers, etc. Finished toe board must be ordered.
10. Moldings must be priced and ordered by the lineal foot in 8’ increments. Toe board and Solid Stock will be priced and ordered by the piece.
11. Use the Check Order button prior to submitting the order electronically. This tool can alert you to missing information, required forms & common issues that may delay your order. This feature of the pricing program is a knowledge base that will continue to grow with your comments and suggestions.
12. Make sure a complete delivery address is specified at the time you submit your order. If it is a jobsite, include after hours contact number and a job-site map. Failure to supply this form will delay your order.
13. Provide a copy of door label job was sold from OR send serial number on the back of the door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Ordering & Confirmation Procedures Ship window: Upon receipt of the electronic order an email receipt will be sent for your records. If there are questions or missing information you will receive a STOP ORDER first. Your ship window and grade will not be assigned until all missing information is received and ready to be confirmed. If you do not receive one of these two forms or the email receipt within 24 hours of submitting the order please call your Account Manager to assure the order was received. DO NOT RESUBMIT ORDER. Approval A & B Orders: Once we have reviewed your order you will be faxed a copy of it to approve. Orders are processed on a first in, first out basis. Average turnaround times on orders depend on their complexity and are graded according to the “Classification of Orders” listed previously in this section. Check the confirmation immediately upon receipt. You are given 48 hours from the time you receive the confirmation to send it back to us. Please keep in mind that if you make numerous changes, especially changes that affect custom drawings, your ship window is subject to being moved out. Although we check your order entry, it is your responsibility to verify that your order is correct. This acknowledgement is our legal interpretation of your order, please check it closely. Telephone orders and telephone changes cannot be accepted. When reviewing the confirmation, please remember to: •• Answer any questions on the front page & body of the order •• Clearly note additions or changes next to the line item •• Sign & return the entire order, including all drawings •• Mark whether or not you want a final copy •• Mark whether or not you want put on the “move up” list; there is no surcharge or guarantee for this option •• Be sure you sign it off before you fax it back to us Approval C Orders: Once we have reviewed your order you will be faxed a final copy for your records. Because there is no confirmation process on C orders it is important to closely review the order prior to electronic submission. The window for making changes on a C order is very small, therefore we cannot guarantee that it can be done. It is imperative to review your final copy upon receipt. Scheduling: After the order has been approved by you &/or confirmed in our system by the engineering department, the order will be scheduled for production and delivery. You will receive your final delivery date approximately three weeks before shipping. Changes and/or cancellation of an order can be made after the order has been confirmed but must be made before the parts are generated. Call your Account Manager to check the status or your order before assuming you can make any changes or cancellations. You will be charged a paperwork charge of $100 net for each change that is made and your changes must be faxed to us in writing. Cancelled orders will be charged $100 net; this includes ESO orders. Orders cannot be changed or cancelled once production has begun. Additions to an order that has been scheduled into production will not be allowed. Additions to existing orders must be made on a separate order and may be required to ship at a later date or can be submitted on an ESO if the item(s) fall within the guidelines of an ESO order. Accuracy and completeness of your order is beyond our control, therefore, we cannot guarantee that all orders received at the same time will be produced and/or shipped at the same time.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-9-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Expedited Service Orders—ESOs The ESO program is a quick ship service used to assist dealers in finishing up their orders. These job completion orders are limited to 3 cabinets or less and are placed on an ESO form or by submitting through the pricing program. You can find this form in the FORMS section of this catalog. Although there is no surcharge for parts ordered through this system, to ensure a timely delivery of your parts, only the appropriate items should be ordered and must be accompanied with the original work order number. ESOs will be entered and acknowledged daily but do not require a confirmation, however, if you do find an error, please call ESO Order Entry immediately and the order will be corrected. If you realize that you have ordered the item incorrectly, call the ESO Account Manager to see if the item can still be changed. If the order has already gone into production, it will be too late for any changes. If a change is made, you will be subject to a $100 net paperwork charge. ESOs typically ship approximately 3 weeks from receipt of the order, depending on truck availability. Warranty items are separated from charge items and run under a separate order. Warranty orders list the replacement costs but you will not be invoiced. Your payment terms should state WARRANTY__. Warranty items are usually shipped via company truck, unless specified differently. We will make every effort to find a truck heading in your direction and we will cover any “add stop” fees. If a truck is not available, you will receive a call to go over your options. If you request 2nd day or Next day UPS shipping, you will be required to pay the difference. ESO wood & finish upcharges: A Wood & Finish Upcharge will be assessed to all finished wooden accessories that are not upcharged on a typical work order. This surcharge multiplies the finish & wood upcharge times the total list price of the finished accessories. If you are using the ESO form to submit ESOs, you will need to manually account for these upcharges. Shipping: The majority of items will be shipped via company truck. You may request alternate shipping options. If you do not have a truck scheduled, you will be charged $75 net plus additional mileage (call for a quote) for us to add a stop. If you do have a stop scheduled, the cabinet will be dropped at that stop and you will be charged a minimum of $10 for freight. If using the pricing program for ESOs, you must add additional charges for other carriers such as UPS. All tall cabinets and 48 x 96 panels MUST be shipped via company truck, NO EXCEPTIONS. If you do not have a company truck scheduled in this case, you will be contacted. All samples, library doors, door store doors, and sales aides will be shipped via UPS. Additional Shipping Options: UPS Ground (GND) = UPS 3 Day Select (3DS) = UPS 2nd Day Air (2DA) = UPS 2nd Day Air A.M. (2DM) = UPS Next Day Air Saver (1DP) = UPS Next Day Air (1DA) = UPS Next Day Air Early A.M. (1DM) = FedEx Freight =
Standard transit times Guaranteed 3 days (Good for AZ & CA only) Guaranteed 2 day delivery 2 day delivery by 10:30 a.m. Next day delivery by 3:00 p.m. Next day delivery by 10:30 a.m. Next day delivery by 8:00 a.m. Used to ship larger items
PLEASE REMEMBER THAT EXPRESS SHIPPING IS COSTLY, CALL THE ESO MANAGER FOR QUOTES!!! Handling charges: The following additional HANDLING charges will apply to all packages shipped UPS, USPS, or common carrier: 1 small package (UPS/USPS) = $10 net charge. The residential fee for common carrier is $78. This charge is in addition to the standard shipping charge. There is also a lift gate service charge of $135 if a lift gate is needed during a common carrier delivery. Contact the ESO organizer at extension 148 or the ESO shipping tech at esoshipping@customcupboards.com for estimated freight rates.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-10-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY Custom Cupboards, Inc. (CCI) warrants all of its cabinetry to be free of defects in material and/or workmanship when subject to normal use for as long as the original purchaser owns it. Subject to the provisions that follow, provided that the original purchaser retains ownership and is able to establish the date of purchase and the original cost of the defective product to CCI’s reasonable satisfaction, Custom Cupboards, Inc. will at its sole option elect to either repair or replace, at its discretion, the defective material or components, free of charge.
Our warranty does not cover expansion or contraction defects and/or joint separations that occur as a result of low (below 25%) or high (above 55%) humidity or moisture conditions or exposure to extremes of temperature. The color of the wood and finish may change during the lifetime of the product due to exposure to direct or indirect sunlight or other factors. The color change, known as mellowing, occurs in both the finish and the wood itself and is part of the natural aging process. This process is not to be considered a defect in material or workmanship.
The lifetime coverage offered by this warranty automatically ends upon the sale of the property or the death of the last original homeowner at the time of purchase of the product.
No dealer or other person(s) or entity is authorized to modify the foregoing warranty or to make any other warranty on behalf of Custom Cupboards, Inc.
The lifetime coverage in this warranty applies only to individual homeowners.
To file a warranty claim, the purchaser should contact their local authorized Custom Cupboards dealer/distributor. The dealer/distributor will then obtain the information necessary to make the claim decision and forward such information in writing to Custom Cupboards for action on the claim. Warranty claims must include a complete description of the defect.
Custom Cupboards Inc. also warrants its dovetail drawer box, hinges, and drawer suspension system to be free from defects in material and/or workmanship under normal usage to the original purchaser for the lifetime of the cabinets. This is a parts warranty only and excludes labor for removal or replacement of defective parts.
ITED LIM
This warranty shall not apply to cabinetry ordered unfinished, nor to cabinetry or parts of our cabinetry that have been subjected to alterations, abuse, misuse, negligence, or improper installation, storage and handling.
AR
Y
LIFETIME
W
RAN
T
Dealership
Street Address
City
Original Work Order
State Zip
PO#
Custom Cupboards, Inc. ▪ 3778 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
LimitedLifetimeWarranty0611 Effective June ‘11
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-11-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Warranty When submitting a warranty request, use the form (found in the forms section of the catalog & on the website) or submit electronically using the Pricing Program. The original work order number assigned by Custom Cupboards, as well as any other relevant information must be included. Warranty orders are processed as ESO orders. Warranty orders show replacement cost but are not invoiced to the dealer. The payment terms should state WARRANTY__. Finish: Complaints about finish require inspection by a representative of the factory. Issues dealing with color may require that both the sample that was sold from and an example from the job in question be submitted to the factory for review. Defective materials and/or workmanship: Replacement of cabinets and/or accessories will be done on a priority basis (ESO program). In most instances, you will be required to return the defective item at your expense. If the item was damaged in shipping, call the ESO manager to make arrangements for the carrier to pick up the item. Credit will then be issued after verification by the claims inspector. Slight variations of grain patterns and color are natural characteristics of wood products and are not acceptable reasons for replacement. Variations in color that fall within a window of acceptability between the sample and the job will also not be warrantable. Repair / Replacement: Custom Cupboards reserves the right to field repair or request that you return any cabinet or accessories to the factory for repair and/or replacement. If a field repair is possible, an accurate estimate of the cost must be obtained in writing and approved by the factory before any work is done. Custom Cupboards will not cover any expense involved in removing, reinstalling, or shipping the cabinet and/or accessory.
Shelf Policy Shelves over 36” long are not covered against deflection / sagging.
Touch-Up & Final Adjustment Touch up, the final adjustment of doors and drawers, and the correction of minor shipping damage is the dealer’s responsibility. If there is a customer complaint regarding damage, it is the dealer’s responsibility to investigate the complaint. If, after an initial visit, the complaint seems appropriate, contact your Custom Cupboards Sales Representative to determine further action.
Cabinet Care Suggestions DUSTING Use a soft lint-free cloth SPILLS Excess moisture can damage any cabinet finish; therefore, it’s important to clean spills immediately. Areas around the sink, dishwasher and cabinet baseboards are more susceptible. We recommend that excess moisture and spills be cleaned up with a soft cloth and mild soap if necessary. Wipe dry with a clean soft towel. GENERAL CLEANING Simply wipe surface of cabinet with water and mild soap if needed. Be sure to dry thoroughly. CAUTION • Do not use cleaners which contain abrasives • Do not use cleaners which contain ammonia - they may discolor • It is always recommended that a small, inconspicuous area be tested when using any cleaner • Avoid bearing down as this may cause burnishing CARE We understand that cabinets are going to get scratched and/or dented, especially if you live in your kitchen. We recommend using Tibet Almond stick (available online) for minor scratches. As this won’t “fix” the scratch, it helps in blending making it less noticeable. For significant scratches or damage, we recommend that a professional re-finisher be hired or visit the dealership in which your Custom Cupboards cabinets were purchased. Doing any “self repair” could void your warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-12-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Memos / Forms All of our memos from the past year are posted on our website. You will also find our forms on our website. To access any of these items please follow these directions:
•• •• ••
Log on to our website at www.customcupboards.com Go to “For the Pros” then click on “Dealers Only” Type in Username: ____________ and Password: _____________
Website
www.customcupboards.com
Please feel free to send your customers to our website. Our LOC is accessible on our site. It is also a valuable tool for you as you can order sales aides and Door Store doors, download forms, view past newsletters and take a look at the past year’s memos. Your username should be your dealer code + your first and last name. You will need to register on your first visit. (Ex. ABC001JoeSmith). Please contact Tina Blasi at ext. 158 if you have trouble logging in. Your Username:__________________________ Your Password:__________________________
Display Programs The following guidelines apply to all displays:
1.
A Request for Display Approval, using the Discount Request Form, must be submitted with your order. Sales & Marketing must approve the display, in writing, before the order is processed. This form can be found in the Forms section of our website and catalog.
2.
A floor plan must be submitted at the time of request for approval.
3.
Approved displays must be installed in your dealership showroom… no other locations will qualify.
4.
Your showroom must be open to the general public during normal business hours with adequate sales personnel present.
5.
Custom Cupboards has the right to question or not allow your choice of style or finish.
6.
ESO’s, sample doors & literature do not qualify for this program.
The following two display programs are available: 5% rebate program: The cost of the display will be paid back to the dealer by issuing a 5% rebate on each order processed after the display has been invoiced, NO EXCEPTIONS. This 5% rebate will apply to all orders invoiced within a one year period or until the display cost has been recovered, whichever comes first. 15% flat discount program: A one time 15% discount will be taken off the display invoice. If you have any further questions concerning these two programs, please call your Account Manager.
Product Specifications Policy All product specifications shown in this catalog are subject to change without notice. If you have any questions, please contact the Head of Research & Development, Todd Johnson, at extension 110 or by email at todd@customcupboards.com.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-13-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Co-Op Advertising The purpose of this Co-Op Advertising program is to help you develop and plan strategies to improve the effectiveness of your advertising while increasing your sales. Our goal is to support your efforts and help you successfully market and advertise Custom Cupboards Inc. How Co-Op is Earned Your Co-op consists of ½ of 1% of your previous fiscal year’s invoiced sales. No Carryover. Our fiscal year runs from May 1st – April 30th. Please note that your Co-op balance does not accrue throughout the year. General Guidelines •• A Custom Cupboards Marketing Rep or the Marketing Assistant, Wendy Hay, must approve all advertising before funds can be used - no exceptions. Please use our Co-Op Advertising Claim Form, found in the Forms section. •• The Custom Cupboards logo must appear on all ads. •• Your account must be current and in good standing. •• With receipt of paid, pre-approved ads, CCI will credit your account with funds earned from previous sales. Approved Media •• Newspaper •• Magazines •• Television / Radio commercials •• Billboards •• Direct mail •• Open Houses / In-House Promotions / Home Shows •• Literature & Sales Aids Any media other than the above (such as tournament involvement or special events, etc.) must be approved in advance by the V.P. of Sales & Marketing. Newspaper or Magazine Advertisements •• The CCI logo must be shown, along with your logo or name, on any size ad space. Your showroom location and phone number must also be included in the advertisement. •• A full-page tear sheet showing the publication name and date must be submitted for approval. If the same ad runs more than one time, you only need to submit one tear sheet per request as long as the invoice clearly states how many days the ad ran. •• A legible copy of the paid invoice for the ad(s) must be submitted. •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included. Open House / In House Promotion / Home Shows •• Custom Cupboards cabinetry must be displayed in at least an 8 foot run, or other pre-authorized configuration. •• Items such as T-shirts, hats, brochures will be co-op’d at 50% if the funds are available. •• Documentation must include: •• Photographs of the event or CCI representation •• Photographs of your display •• Copy of paid invoices for event items •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included.
Billboards •• The CCI logo must be shown, along with your logo or name, on any size ad space. Your showroom location and phone number must also be included in the advertisement. •• A legible copy of the paid invoice showing the date the sign was installed must be submitted. •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included. Direct Mail •• The CCI logo must be shown, along with your logo or name, on any size ad space. Your showroom location and phone number must also be included in the advertisement. •• The direct mail piece must contain an identifiable photograph of Custom Cupboards cabinetry. •• A copy of the direct mail piece, a copy of the paid invoice for printing, postage costs, and certification of mailing, showing quantity, date and type of mail must be submitted. Production charges such as typography, layout, paste up, and artwork are not eligible. •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-14-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Co-Op Advertising Television •• The words “Custom Cupboards” must be included in the first or second sentence of the audio portion. One additional time in a 30-second spot, or two (2) additional times in a 60-second spot. •• The video portion must contain identifiable Custom Cupboards cabinetry. •• The CCI logo must be shown in conjunction with your dealership name or logo, address and phone number in the video portions of the ad. •• A legible copy of the paid invoice showing the net amount of the ad(s) and the dates and times it aired must be submitted. •• A video tape of the ad must be submitted. •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included.
Radio
••
The words “Custom Cupboards” must be included in the first or second sentence of the audio portion. One additional time in a 30-second spot, or two (2) additional times in a 60-second spot. •• A legible copy of the paid invoice showing the net amount of the ad, the dates and times aired must be submitted. •• 50% Co-opable - see reimbursement expectations on the following page if other manufacturers included.
Sales Aids/Literature •• A copy of the paid invoice must be faxed to the Sales & Marketing Manager at 316-219-2798. Custom Cupboards will cover literature & all sales aids including starter kits, sample doors, brochures, etc. •• Reimbursement will be 25% of the invoice, excluding freight. Reimbursement •• Custom Cupboards will reimburse your dealership for half of the ad cost in the form of a credit to your account, unless other company logos are included. In this case, Custom Cupboards’ participation will be pro-rated as follows: •• Our logo only – We pay 1/2 Your ad costs $300 We pay $150 You pay $150 •• Our logo and one other (any company) – We pay 1/3 Your ad costs $300 We pay $100 •• Our logo and two others (any companies) – We pay 1/4 Your ad costs $300 We pay $75 •• Sales Aids/Literature - We pay 25% of total invoice cost Accounts are reviewed and credits are issued within 30 days of receipt of the copy of your invoice. Credits will not be issued if the advertisement was not pre-approved. Submitting Claims •• Complete the Co-Op Advertising Claim Form. This form can be downloaded from the “Forms” section of our website. •• Incomplete forms could result in delay or rejection of reimbursement. •• The completed claim and all required documentation should submitted by mail, email or fax to: Custom Cupboards, Inc. Attn: Sales & Marketing 3738 S. Norman Wichita, KS 67215 tinab@customcupboards.com fax: 316-219-2798 •• To be considered for co-op reimbursement and ensure prompt processing, all co-op claims must be submitted within 45 days of the date of advertising or invoice date. •• Claims will not be held until total claim amount is available. The current funds available will be applied and the claim will be closed.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-15-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Custom Cupboards & The Environment
CUSTOM CUPBOARDS HAS EARNED ENVIRONMENTAL STEWARDSHIP CERTIFICATION ADMINISTERED BY KCMA CUSTOM CUPBOARDS ENVIRONMENTAL MISSION STATEMENT Our goal is to foster partnerships that will enhance our local economy using environmental improvements that create cleaner and safer neighborhoods. Custom Cupboards will accomplish this by making a pledge to use sustainable forest products and manage current and future recycling programs to display our commitment to environmental awareness and reclaimable business practices. ESP CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS: Air Quality: Custom Cupboards uses low formaldehyde emitting raw materials to minimize hazardous air pollutants Product Resource Management: Custom Cupboards, in conjunction with our business partners, strives to purchase materials which have been recycled, recovered, and recognized through sustainable forestry programs. Process Resource Management: Custom Cupboards participates in active recycling programs and incorporates by-products as alternative energy sources. Environmental Stewardship: Custom Cupboards encourages our employees and business partners to commit to environmental quality and awareness. Community Relations: Custom Cupboards demonstrates community involvement through charitable organizations, schools, and local businesses. We hope that our participation in the Environmental Stewardship Program, along with other certified cabinet manufacturers, will promote the importance of commitment to the environment and sustainability of natural resources.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-16-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Woods Custom Cupboards offers a “clear” and “rustic or knotty” variation on most species. Although each set of cabinetry passes through multiple inspection stations and hand-sorts, we cannot control the frequency and where knots, sapwood, streaks, or other irregularities may fall. Because this is a product of nature, each kitchen will have its own unique characteristics. CLEAR (All Woods): Small pin knots (under 1/4” diameter) may be visible on the front, especially on Alder. Larger, unfilled knots are permitted on the backs of doors and drawer fronts. Pinholes, gum pockets, light mineral streaking, and flecks of grey (in Beech) and brown (in Cherry) may also be visible. “Clean” varieties are selected for minimal natural character marks, although some may make it through our hand-selection process. RUSTIC (Cherry, Beech): Rustic varieties will include a light and random distribution of open and secure knots of various sizes, bird pecks, or equivalent gum pockets. Open knots that can be completely seen through will be partially filled with epoxy resin. Every rustic door will include mineral streaks, sapwood (heartwood on maple) and other naturally occurring characteristics that are unique to the species, however, not every door will have knots; they are simply less frequently occurring on rustic species. Beech will also include heavy mineral coloring and streaking. KNOTTY (Alder, Red Oak): Includes larger, open, secure knots than clear varieties. Open knots that can be seen through are partially filled from the back with black epoxy resin as a means of securing the knot. In general, we strive for at least one knot per door, and in most instances, multiple knots per door. Knots in faceframes and finished ends are typically less frequent and cannot be considered a defect unless it compromises the integrity of the frame. Knots in plywood panels sometimes expose the tinted core of the plywood. This cannot be considered a defect due to the thin veneer and the brittleness of knots.
Alder
Knotty Alder
Reddish-brown to pale yellow wood with soft, straight grain, even texture, and a subtle figure. Alder can have small knots, under ¼” diameter, pin holes, and up to 1/2” oblong knots on the front. Larger, unfilled knots are permitted on the backs of doors and drawer fronts. Plywood will have closed knots of various sizes with up to two 3/4” diameter knots per 4 x 8 sheet; may be more visible with lighter stains. Alder lightens with age and exposure to light.
Same as Alder PLUS larger, open, secure knots. Open knots are partially filled from the back with black epoxy resin, only if they can be completely seen through or as a means of securing the knot. Plywood can have large, open, secure knots of various sizes with up to six 3/4” diameter knots per 4 x 8 sheet. No attempt is made to evenly distribute the knots. Knotty Alder lightens with age and exposure to light. Order as “K Alder SP”
Beech
Rustic Beech
Whitish to pale brown, straight-grained wood with small grey flecks and light mineral coloring & streaking. Beech is a strong wood with a density that is similar to maple. Light mineral streaking on the front is allowed. Plywood may have some light mineral streaks.
Same as Beech PLUS Rustic will include repaired knots of various sizes and heavy mineral coloring & streaking. No effort will be made to evenly distribute knots or those characteristics deemed “rustic” and their occurrence would be described as “random”. Plywood will have rustic characteristics.
Cherry
Rustic Cherry
Durable, moderately-strong hardwood with reddishbrown hue, straight grain, & fine texture. Cherry may have brown flecks, gum pockets, and pin holes. On light colors sapwood is NOT allowed on the face, unlike dark colors where some sapwood is acceptable. Plywood may have gum pockets. Cherry darkens with age and exposure to light.
The hard wood used in doors, drawer fronts and RPEs will allow all the natural color variations of cherry as stated for Clear Cherry. In addition, both open and secure knots, bird pecks or equivalent gum pockets are allowable. Open knots will be partially filled with epoxy resin only if they can be completely seen through. No effort will be made to evenly distribute knots or those characteristics deemed “rustic” and their occurrence would be described as “random”. Plywood will have gum pockets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-17-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Woods
Hickory
Maple
A dense, tough, coarse-textured wood with white sapwood and reddish-brown heartwood. The color and graining patterns will have variations from black to brown in the heartwood to yellow in the sapwood. Certain stains will amplify this effect. The finished look of a hickory kitchen is usually described as “Rustic”, “Wild”, or “Natural”.
Hard Maple (Sugar Maple) is a heavy, straightgrained wood with a fine texture. The sapwood is white and selected for its light color, maple does not generally take dark colors well and may appear blotchy. On light colors occasional mineral streaks up to 1/4” wide by 2” long my be present. On dark colors, mineral streaks can be 1/2” wide and 4” long. Plywood may have light mineral streaks.
Oak
White Quarter-Sawn Oak Red oak is a straight-grained hardwood with a coarse texture and a pinkish-red hue. The texture of the wood varies according to the rate of growth. Plywood will be clear of defects.
White Quarter-Sawn Oak is a very stable wood known for its uniform straight grain and high ray flake figure. Exhibits a beautiful grain texture. This grain structure has more resistance to warping than the conventional high yield cutting method. Plywood will be clear of defects.
MDF Paint Paintgrade Paint-grade hardwood (typically Maple) face frames, door rails and stiles; Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) center panels and slab drawer fronts with paint grade hardwood veneer cabinet ends. Used on painted finishes without aging (distressing).
Paint-grade hardwood (typically Maple) face frames, door rails, stiles, and center panels; paint grade hardwood veneer cabinet ends. Used with opaque finishes with burn-thru or any aging (distressing).
Craftwood Also known as, Medium Density Fiberboard, or MDF. Craftwood is an engineered wood product formed by breaking down softwood into fibers, often in a defibrator, combining it with wax and resin, and forming panels by applying high temperature and pressure. The advantage of using Craftwood for painted finishes is that it is less likely to shrink or expand. All Craftwood paints come standard with a STANDARD 21-25 degree sheen, but can be ordered with a FLAT/MATTE 6-10 degree sheen. Glaze, Aging (Distressing), Crackle or Fly Speck are not available. The #13, #60, #66 & #67 door edges are not available on Craftwood. Available only in one-piece door styles and their matching drawer fronts. Available door styles: #300-1 pc, 301-1 pc, 503-1 pc, 700-1 pc, 701-1 pc, 707-1 pc, 708-1 pc, 900-1 pc & 901-1 pc
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-18-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Finishes A world class finish starts with a quality base. Custom Cupboards uses only the finest, hand-selected hardwoods in their cabinet construction. Those hardwoods then go through a rigorous, seven step, automated sanding process to ensure a uniform grain pattern and stain application. Each piece is then hand-stained and rubbed to accentuate the natural beauty of the wood. Multiple coats of finish are then applied to seal in the color and protect the wood. Only the finest finishes are used to beautify and protect Customer Cupboards products. These UV inhibited finishes and conversion varnishes meet stringent AWI/ASTM standards and provide a hard and durable surface that resists abrasions, water staining, body oils, and household chemicals. Custom Cupboards spares no expense in providing quality products that retain their beauty over a lifetime of service. Standard Topcoat: Satin, 22-27º sheen, UV inhibited conversion varnish, seal, clear topcoat. Flat Topcoat: Matte, 8-12º sheen, UV inhibited conversion varnish. A lower sheen can result in a color difference. Please view a sample before ordering. Standard Finishes: Finishes without formulation numbers, such as Pecan, can be modified by adding any of our standard glazes, aging (distressing), or flat topcoat. Modifying standard finishes in this way will dramatically change the look of the finish and will require a new sample be made and approved. Packaged Finishes: Finishes with formulation numbers such as “A-001”, will include all of the processes listed on the formulation sheets. These processes may include, but are not limited to, glazing, aging (distressing), flat or standard topcoat, or any additional special processes. If any of these processes are modified they must be specifically called out on the order and will require prior approval. Adding or changing glaze, topcoat, aging (distressing), or crackle may dramatically change the look of a finish and will require a new sample be made and approved. Some packaged finishes have custom aging (distressing) that may look similar to, but are not the same as, our standard 1-10. Please call your Account Manager for specifications and upcharges. Crackle and Fly-specking are not considered aging (distressing). Painted Finishes: Our opaque finishes do not allow the wood grain to show through. Depending on the type of paint ordered your cabinets will receive one or two coats of primer, a coat of paint, and a topcoat. Semi-Opaque Finishes Our semi-opaque finishes vary from Paints and Opaque Finishes in that a certain degree of the wood’s natural beauty is designed to be visible. In most cases nail holes, joints, and minor surface defects are not puttied in order to allow the texture of the wood to show through and create an aged look. The amount of visible grain is affected by the texture of the wood and may not exactly match the sample you have viewed. Unfinished Cabinetry: Because the finishing process is outside of our control, warranty is limited to hardware only. On unfinished cabinetry, interior components, such as beech dovetail drawer boxes, will be finished natural; the box interior will not be finishable material unless finished interior is ordered. See the Consumer Information Form in the Forms section of the catalog. Custom Paint Match Program: All topcoats will come standard Flat unless specified as satin.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-19-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Finishes Glazes: Standard Glaze, highlighting, is applied to the entire surface of the cabinet and doors and then wiped off leaving hang-up in the recessed areas. Brushed Glazing is a special technique that leaves brush streaks over the entire surface. Glaze, in any application, will vary slightly from cabinet to cabinet. Glazing is a hand applied, artistic process and, like paintings, no two cabinets will be identical. See the Consumer Information Form disclaimer on glaze in the Forms section of the catalog. Four standard glazes are available over any of our standard stains or paints. Pewter (PTG) – Burgundy (BURG) – Van Dyke Brown (VDB) – Midnight Frost (MFG) –
pewter-grey deep reddish-brown chocolate brown black
When ordering Natural with a glaze, the “Natural deduct” does not apply. Heavy, light, or any other special glaze hang-up is not available as a request. Our glaze is hand-applied so what is heavy to one person may be considered standard to another. Custom Finishes: If you cannot find a color you like, Custom Cupboards will custom match virtually any finish. A color swatch or sample must be sent for evaluation & approval. You will be charged a Sample Door Color Development Fee (SDCDF) which includes one sample door. Because we never know how many matches we’ll have at one time, or how long each match will take, the lead time may vary anywhere from 2-6 weeks. We cannot give you the estimated upcharge for the match until the process is complete. CALL YOUR ACCOUNT MANAGER FOR AVAILABILITY OF CUSTOM MATCHES. Expired Samples: Custom Cupboards will not match expired samples. A new sample must be viewed and approved by the customer prior to the order process. Any expired sample doors sent in will be retained at the factory. Two Toned Cabinets: Please call your Account Manager for a quote on any two-toned cabinet request. Important Note: Many of our finishes will be toned on the back of the door to more closely resemble the color on the front. In some instances there is a noticeable difference. Please be sure to make your customer aware of this by showing them a sample door representation of the color they have chosen. We will not glaze or age (distress) the backs of the doors, but rather tone them to resemble the front. Crackle & Fly Specking: These Artistic Processes are used on some packaged finishes. Crackle is a non-controllable finishing process that can range from very subtle to a very heavy and extreme cracking appearance. Custom Cupboards cannot guarantee the consistency of this process, therefore, inconsistency in the size, shape and amount of crackle is not cause for replacement. Fly Specking is used to create a paint spattered look. These processes are not applied to the backs of the doors and drawer fronts. Crackle & Fly Specking are not considered aging (distressing). If you wish to delete either of these from a packaged finish, you must specify “no crackle” or “no fly speck”. These processes can dramatically change the appearance of the finish when added or deleted.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-20-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Aging (Distressing) Ten types of aging (distressing) are available in a variety of combinations. If you wish to modify the aging (distressing) in any way you must contact your Account Manager for a quote. Aging (Distressing) is a hand-made, artistic process and, like any fine art, no two pieces will be identical. Not all levels of aging (distressing) are available on all wood species. Aging (distressing) #6, #7, #9, & #10 will not appear on the faceframe edges, finished ends or on 3/4” plywood.
#1 WORM HOLES: Random ice-pick marks in small clusters #6 EASED EDGES/CORNERS: Worn edges, before stain #2 CRACKS: Simulated cracks of varied lengths
#7 SCREWED EDGES: Simulated saw marks on edges
#3 WIRE BRUSH HOLES: Very tiny, lightly patterened holes
#8 WIRE BRUSH SCRATCHES: Tiny scratches in a tight pattern
#4 DENTS: Random placement of shallow dents
#9 BURN THRU: Wear through, after stain;before glaze/ topcoat
#5 GRAVEL: Random dents of various size; deeper; more widespread
#10 KNIFE OUTS: Tear outs along the edges
#11 ALL OF THE ABOVE DISTRESSINGS
Packaged & Aged Finishes Packaged finishes are priced by quote and are subject to approval by the Custom Cupboards Finish Department. On all packaged finishes, Custom Cupboards must have a copy of the customer-approved sample label before the order will be approved for production. Packaged finishes are denoted by a formulation number (A-001, etc.) This formula is specific to the wood species and number. Packaged finishes include all processes in the total finish upcharge.
••
Packaged finishes will require a photocopy of the label on the back of the sample. Due to liability, shipping, and field application issues, we will not supply some of our packaged finishes for field use.
••
Adding or removing the aging (distressing) will alter the hang-up of glazes on Aged finishes, therefore changing the appearance.
••
Custom Cupboards will not use customer-supplied finishing materials.
••
For every job that goes through our shop, a retained sample is generated. This retained sample is kept at the factory for any future rework or warranty issues. We hold these samples for 6-9 months. If you have a warranty or ESO job after this time period, you will be asked to send in a sample to match. •• Crackle and fly specking are not considered aging (distressing). These processes dramatically change the appearance of the door when added or deleted. Custom Cupboards will not match age if job exceeds 18 months. A current color must then be selected instead.
Touch-Up Kits These kits consist of a wax crayon and a felt-tipped marker containing matching stain or paint, a second marker containing matching glaze will be included on standard colors that include a glaze. One is available at no charge on orders consisting of 3 cabinets or more. Test finishing a similar scrap of material before completing touch-up or finishing large quantities of material is recommended. Touch-up kits are available for every color in the LOC, due to the uniqueness of packaged finishes some components may not be included. Check for availability on any other packaged or custom finishes.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-21-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Box Construction 1 1/2” x 3/4” solid wood face frame
WALL
Back-band for superior strength
1/2” ceiling panel
1/2” Back Panel Polyurethane coated Maple print interior
3/4” thick x 10 3/8” wide adjustable shelves (formerly 10 5/8”)
1/2” end panel 1/2” floor panel
1/16” Floor to Faceframe Reveal
BASE
3” Wide I-Beams 1/2” Full Back Panel
1/2” End Panel
3/4” Thick x 15 1/2 Wide Adjustable Shelves 5/8” Solid Stock Dovetail Drawer with Undermount Guides
1 1/2” x 3/4” Solid Wood Faceframe
Bottom Dadoed into Sides & Faceframe 4 1/2” Toe Kick
1/16” Floor to Faceframe Reveal
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
1/2” Bottom Panel
-22-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Interior Box Specifications The interior box percentage will be applied to the Cabinet list price only.
DISCOVERY Features: Smooth, light beige, polyurethane coated maple print overlay interior surfaces. Sides: 1/2” particleboard sides with a 1/4” reveal where the side meets the face frame. Unfinished ends will be NT material. 3/4” particleboard/veneer sides for flushed finished ends. Face Frames: Solid hardwood 3/4” x 1 1/2” stiles & rails; pocket screwed & glued. Some cabinets will have 3” mid rails or stiles. Tops & Bottoms: 1/2” particleboard, let into sides and frame; glued & fastened. Tops of wall and tall cabinets will be polyurethane coated maple print overlay. Bottoms of walls are raw particleboard toned to finish of job. Shelves: Fully adjustable 3/4” particleboard; matching interior; edge-banded with matching material. . Base & Vanity are 2/3 depth; Walls & Talls are full depth unless otherwise noted. Backs: 1/2” two sided NT
DISCOVERY WHITE Features: Smooth, stark white polyurethane coated overlay interior surfaces. Sides: 1/2” particleboard sides with a 1/4” reveal where the side meets the face frame. Unfinished ends will be NT material. 3/4” particleboard/veneer sides for flushed finished ends. Face Frames: Solid hardwood 3/4” x 1 1/2” stiles & rails; pocket screwed & glued. Some cabinets will have 3” mid rails or stiles. Tops & Bottoms: 1/2” particleboard, let into sides and frame; glued & fastened. Tops of wall and tall cabinets will be polyurethane coated maple print overlay. Bottoms of walls are raw particleboard toned to finish of job. Shelves: Fully adjustable 3/4” particleboard; matching interior; edge-banded with matching material. . Base & Vanity are 2/3 depth; Walls & Talls are full depth unless otherwise noted. Backs: 1/2” two sided NT CAUTION: Only available when the finish is a solid paint. (Wood Species, MDF Paint, Craftwood, Paintgrade ONLY)
HEARTLAND Features: Smooth, light beige, polyurethane coated maple print overlay interior surfaces. Sides: 1/2” plywood sides with a 1/4” reveal where the side meets the face frame. Unfinished ends will be “raw” plywood. Optional 3/4” plywood sides for flush finished ends. Face Frames: Solid hardwood 3/4” x 1 1/2” stiles & rails; pocket screwed & glued. Some cabinets will have 3” mid rails or stiles. Tops & Bottoms: 1/2” plywood core, let into sides & frame; glued & fastened. Shelves: Fully adjustable 3/4” MDF; edge-banded with matching material. Base & Vanity are 2/3 depth; Walls & Talls are full depth unless otherwise noted. Plywood shelves are available as an optional upgrade. Backs: 1/2” plywood back, glued & mechanically fastened.
HEARTLAND WHITE PLY Features: Smooth, stark white polyurethane coated overlay interior surfaces. Sides: 1/2” plywood sides with a 1/4” reveal where the side meets the face frame. Unfinished ends will be “raw” plywood. Optional 3/4” plywood sides for flush finished ends. Face Frames: Solid hardwood 3/4” x 1 1/2” stiles & rails; pocket screwed & glued. Some cabinets will have 3” mid rails or stiles. Tops & Bottoms: 1/2” plywood core, let into sides & frame; glued & fastened. Shelves: Fully adjustable 3/4” MDF; edge-banded with matching material. Base & Vanity are 2/3 depth; Walls & Talls are full depth unless otherwise noted. Backs: 1/2” plywood back, glued & mechanically fastened. CAUTION: Only available when the finish is a solid paint. (Wood Species, MDF Paint, Craftwood, Paintgrade ONLY)
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-23-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Hinges and Overlays Standard Overlay (SO) Concealed or Knife Hinge: Doors & drawer fronts overlay the faceframe 1/2” in width & 3/8” in height. Overlay is determined by the hinge type.
CONCEALED (SO)
KNIFE HINGE (SO)
Features: 105˚, 6-way adjustable concealed hinge; +/- 1/8” height, +/- 1/16” side, & +/- 3/32”-1/32” depth adjustment.
Features: 180˚ Youngsdale hinge. Antique brass except on Paint White (white hinge will be used).
Soft-close Option: Mechanism can be added to the cabinet for an additional charge per door. Choose CONCEALED SC in the hinge type.
Soft-close Option: None
For loose doors hinged: add CONCEALED as a modification. Additional charge for each.
For loose doors hinged: add KNIFE HINGE as a modification. Additional charge for each.
Loose: add CONCEALED SS as an accessory. Additional charge for each.
Loose: add KNIFE SS as an accessory. Additional charge for each.
FORMULAS FOR CALCULATING DOOR/DRAWER FRONT SIZES WITH STANDARD OVERLAY
11/8” 1”
11/8” 1/8”
11/8”
1”
1”
11/8”
WALL
Concealed
End Panel
STANDARD OVERLAY - BUTT DOORS Concealed or Knife Hinge Overlay Opening Width + 7/8” / 2 = Door Size Width Opening Height + 3/4” = Door Size Height
1”
2”
WALL
STANDARD OVERLAY - NO BUTT DOORS Concealed or Knife Hinge Overlay Opening Width + 1” = Door Size Width Opening Height + 3/4” = Door Size Height
1 8
11 2 Face Frame
Door or Drawer Front 1
11/8”
1/8”
1”
11/8”
11/8”
1”
1”
2”
11/8”
BASE
1”
BASE
STANDARD OVERLAY - NO BUTT DRAWER FRONTS STANDARD OVERLAY - NO BUTT DOORS CONCEALED OR KNIFE HINGE OVERLAY Opening Width + 1” = Door / Drawer Size Width Opening Height + 3/4” = Door / Drawer Size Height
STANDARD OVERLAY - BUTT DRAWER FRONTS Opening Width + 7/8” / 2 = Drawer Front Size Width Opening Height + 3/4” = Drawer Front Size Height Vertical Reveals between stacked drawers are 3/4” CONCEALED OR KNIFE HINGE OVERLAY - BUTT DOORS Opening Width + 7/8” / 2 = Door Size Width Opening Height + 3/4” = Door Size Height
IF A CABINET HAS AN OPEN AREA ABOVE OR BELOW THE DOORS / DRAWER FRONTS, THE OVERLAY WILL BE 3/8”.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-24-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Hinges and Overlays Designer Overlay: Doors & drawer fronts overlay the faceframe 1 5/16” in width, choice of 1 1/4” or 3/4” at top & 1 1/4” at bottom. 1/4” reveal between doors & drawers in height. An 1/8” fill is required next to a wall or deeper cabinet when #60 or #65 door edge is selected; this includes any door styles with #60 or #65 edge as standard. Overlay is determined by the hinge type.
DESIGNER OVERLAY Features: 107˚ 6-way adjustable concealed hinge; +/- 1/8” height, +/- 1/16” side, & +/- 3/32”-1/32” depth adjustment. Soft-close Option: Mechanism can be added to the cabinet for an additional charge per door. Choose DESIGNER SC in the hinge type. For loose doors hinged: add DESIGNER as a modification. Additional charge for each Loose: add DO HINGE SS as an accessory. Additional charge for each
Wall Cabinet 3/4 or 1/4
Designer Overlay Hinge with Single Door Opening Width + 2 5/8” = Door Size Width Opening Height + 2 1/2” = Door Size Height;1/4” reveal at top Opening Height + 2” = Door Size Height; 3/4” reveal at top
3/16
End Panel
FORMULAS FOR CALCULATING DOOR/DRAWER FRONT SIZES WITH DESIGNER OVERLAY
Designer Full OverlayOverlay
1 12 Face Frame
1 8
1/8
3/16
1/4
Designer Overlay Hinge with Butt Door Opening Width + 2 1/2” / 2 = Door Size Width Opening Height + 2 1/2” = Door Size Height;1/4” reveal at top Opening Height + 2” = Door Size Height; 3/4” reveal at top
Door or Drawer Front 31 4 16
3/4 or 1/4 1/4
Designer Overlay - Butt Drawer Fronts Opening Width + 2 1/2” / 2 = Drawer Front Size Width Opening Height + 1 1/4” = Drawer Front Size Height;3/4” reveal at top Opening Height + 1 3/4” = Drawer Front Size Height;1/4” reveal at top
3/16
Designer Overlay Hinge - Butt Doors Opening Width + 2 1/2” / 2 = Door Size Width Opening Height + 2” = Door Size Height
1/8
1/4
3/16
B__ 3/4 or 1/4 1/4
3/16
*Choice of 1/4” or 3/4” at top of base, and/or walls/talls at no charge can be selected on the Order Info tab in the Pricing Program.
Designer Overlay - Top Drawer Opening Width + 2 5/8” = Drawer Front Size Width Opening Height + 1 1/4” = Drawer Front Size Height;3/4” reveal at top Opening Height + 1 3/4” = Drawer Front Size Height;1/4” reveal at top Designer Overlay - 2nd or 3rd Drawer Opening Width + 2 5/8” = Drawer Front Size Width Opening Height + 1 1/4” = Drawer Front Size Height
1/4
3/16 1/4
B__D3
Designer Overlay - Bottom Drawer Opening Width + 2 5/8” = Drawer Front Size Width Opening Height + 2” = Drawer Front Size Height
If a cabinet has an open area above the doors / drawer fronts, the overlay will be 3/4”. If a cabinet has an open area below the doors / drawer fronts, the overlay will be 1/2”. If ordering designer overlay without butt doors, the gap between the doors will be 3/8”.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-25-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Box & Guide Options Pull-Out Shelves are not specific to the drawer box or guide options that have been specified on the Order Info tab on the pricing program. POS will be added as a modification to the individual cabinet line item, therefore you can opt for a different guide or box.
BIRCH DRAWER BOX
Nomenclature
STANDARD DOVETAIL
Features: • Made from 5/8” birch hardwood pre-finished material • 1/4” thick captured bottom recessed 1/2”, laminated wood grain MDF • Maximum depth is 21” • Dovetails are not sanded or finished • Comes in 4 standard heights: - 2 1/2” pull-outs - 3 1/2” all standard top drawers - 6” standard bottom drawers of a D4 Cabinet - 8” middle & bottom drawers of a D3 Cabinet
“YOUR LOGO”
Guide Type: Works with both Tandem Bluemotion full extension and Solo undermount drawer guides Pull-Out Shelves: POS STND (Solo undermount) or POS STND BM (Blumotion undermount)
BEECH DOVETAIL
LOGO ENGRAVING AVAILABLE Additional Cost
Nomenclature
Features: • Dovetails are sanded and finished • 5/8” solid beech dovetail drawer box with a natural finish • 1/4” captive bottom recessed 1/2”, wood veneered MDF • Boxes over 23” in width will have reinforced bottoms • Maximum depth is 21” • Material can include pin knots, closed tight knots, and heavy mineral coloring • Comes in 6 standard heights: - 3” pullouts, - 4” All standard top drawers - 8 1/4” middle & bottom drawer on D3, - 6” standard bottom drawers of a D4 Cabinet - 10 1/4” file drawer, - 13” largest available. Guide Type: Works with both Tandem Bluemotion full extension and Solo undermount drawer guides
BEECH DOVETAIL
“YOUR LOGO”
LOGO ENGRAVING AVAILABLE Additional Cost
Pull-Out Shelves: POS (Solo Undermount) or POSTUFEBM (Blumotion undermount) The following guide options are available in our Heartland line. The minimum recommended opening width for all guides is 6” and the minimum cabinet depth is 11”. If cabinet depth is below 11” an apothecary type drawer will be used on wooden runners. Cabinets can be increased up to 32” deep but drawer box will not be more than 21” deep due to guide availability unless you upgrade to deeper guides. Call your account manager for availability. Each guide features a 75 lb. dynamic, in motion, capacity and a 100 lb. static, at rest, capacity. All references to the optional drawer guides also apply to optional pull-out shelves (POS). See POS upgrades and pricing in the Accessories & Modifications section of this catalog.
SOLO UNDERMOUNT Features: White epoxy coated, 3/4 extension undermount guide. Loose: Price=list cost per set
TANDEM BLUMOTION Features: Zinc coated steel, full extension undermount guide. Smooth and silent, Blumotion engages when the drawer is two inches from closing & applies resistance to the self-closing mechanism on the runner. Loose: Price=list cost per set w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-26-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angles / Formulas
Angle
Sine
Cosine
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0
0.009 0.017 0.026 0.035 0.044 0.052 0.061 0.070 0.078 0.087 0.096 0.104 0.113 0.122 0.131 0.139 0.148 0.156 0.165 0.174 0.182 0.191 0.199 0.208 0.216 0.225 0.233 0.242 0.250 0.259 0.267 0.276 0.284 0.292 0.301 0.309
1.000 1.000 1.000 0.999 0.999 0.999 0.998 0.998 0.997 0.996 0.995 0.995 0.994 0.992 0.991 0.990 0.989 0.988 0.986 0.985 0.983 0.982 0.980 0.978 0.976 0.974 0.972 0.970 0.968 0.966 0.964 0.961 0.959 0.956 0.954 0.951
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Tan gent 0.009 0.017 0.026 0.035 0.044 0.052 0.061 0.070 0.079 0.087 0.096 0.105 0.114 0.123 0.132 0.141 0.149 0.158 0.167 0.176 0.185 0.194 0.204 0.213 0.222 0.231 0.240 0.249 0.259 0.268 0.277 0.287 0.296 0.306 0.315 0.325
Angle
Sine
Cosine
18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 25.5 26.0 26.5 27.0 27.5 28.0 28.5 29.0 29.5 30.0 30.5 31.0 31.5 32.0 32.5 33.0 33.5 34.0 34.5 35.0 35.5 36.0
0.317 0.326 0.334 0.342 0.350 0.358 0.366 0.375 0.383 0.391 0.399 0.407 0.415 0.423 0.431 0.438 0.446 0.454 0.462 0.470 0.477 0.485 0.492 0.500 0.508 0.515 0.522 0.530 0.537 0.545 0.552 0.559 0.556 0.574 0.581 0.588
0.948 0.946 0.943 0.940 0.937 0.934 0.930 0.927 0.924 0.921 0.917 0.914 0.910 0.906 0.903 0.899 0.895 0.891 0.887 0.883 0.879 0.875 0.870 0.866 0.862 0.857 0.853 0.848 0.843 0.839 0.834 0.829 0.824 0.819 0.814 0.890
Tan gent 0.335 0.344 0.354 0.364 0.374 0.384 0.394 0.404 0.414 0.424 0.435 0.445 0.456 0.466 0.477 0.488 0.499 0.510 0.521 0.532 0.543 0.554 0.566 0.577 0.589 0.601 0.613 0.625 0.637 0.649 0.662 0.674 0.687 0.700 0.713 0.726
Angle
Sine
Cosine
36.5 37.0 37.5 38.0 38.5 39.0 39.5 40.0 40.5 41.0 41.5 42.0 42.5 43.0 43.5 44.0 44.5 45.0 45.5 46.0 46.5 47.0 47.5 48.0 48.5 49.0 49.5 50.0 50.5 51.0 51.5 52.0 52.5 53.0 53.5 54.0
0.595 0.602 0.609 0.616 0.622 0.629 0.636 0.643 0.649 0.656 0.663 0.669 0.676 0.682 0.688 0.695 0.701 0.707 0.713 0.719 0.725 0.731 0.737 0.743 0.749 0.755 0.760 0.766 0.772 0.777 0.783 0.788 0.793 0.799 0.804 0.890
0.804 0.799 0.793 0.788 0.783 0.777 0.772 0.766 0.760 0.755 0.749 0.743 0.737 0.731 0.725 0.719 0.713 0.707 0.701 0.695 0.688 0.682 0.676 0.669 0.663 0.656 0.649 0.643 0.636 0.629 0.622 0.616 0.609 0.602 0.595 0.588
-27-
Tan gent 0.740 0.754 0.767 0.781 0.795 0.810 0.824 0.839 0.854 0.869 0.885 0.900 0.916 0.932 0.949 0.966 0.983 1.000 1.018 1.036 1.054 1.072 1.091 1.111 1.130 1.150 1.171 1.192 1.213 1.235 1.257 1.280 1.303 1.327 1.351 1.376
Angle
Sine
Cosine
54.5 55.0 55.5 56.0 56.5 57.0 57.5 58.0 58.5 59.0 59.5 60.0 60.5 61.0 61.5 62.0 62.5 63.0 63.5 64.0 64.5 65.0 65.5 66.0 66.5 67.0 67.5 68.0 68.5 69.0 69.5 70.0 70.5 71.0 71.5 72.0
0.814 0.819 0.824 0.829 0.834 0.839 0.843 0.848 0.853 0.857 0.862 0.866 0.870 0.875 0.879 0.883 0.887 0.891 0.895 0.899 0.903 0.906 0.910 0.914 0.917 0.921 0.924 0.927 0.930 0.934 0.937 0.940 0.943 0.946 0.948 0.951
0.581 0.574 0.566 0.559 0.552 0.545 0.537 0.530 0.522 0.515 0.508 0.500 0.492 0.485 0.477 0.470 0.462 0.454 0.446 0.438 0.431 0.423 0.415 0.407 0.399 0.391 0.383 0.375 0.366 0.358 0.350 0.342 0.334 0.326 0.317 0.309
Tan gent 1.402 1.428 1.455 1.483 1.511 1.540 1.570 1.600 1.632 1.664 1.698 1.732 1.767 1.804 1.842 1.881 1.921 1.963 2.006 2.050 2.097 2.145 2.194 2.246 2.300 2.356 2.414 2.475 2.539 2.605 2.675 2.747 2.824 2.904 2.983 3.078
Angle
Sine
Cosine
72.5 73.0 73.5 74.0 74.5 75.0 75.5 76.0 76.5 77.0 77.5 78.0 78.5 79.0 79.5 80.0 80.5 81.0 81.5 82.0 82.5 83.0 83.5 84.0 84.5 85.0 85.5 86.0 86.5 87.0 87.5 88.0 88.5 89.0 89.5 90.0
0.954 0.956 0.959 0.961 0.964 0.966 0.968 0.970 0.972 0.974 0.976 0.978 0.980 0.982 0.983 0.985 0.986 0.988 0.989 0.990 0.991 0.992 0.994 0.994 0.995 0.996 0.997 0.998 0.998 0.999 0.999 0.999 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
0.301 0.292 0.284 0.276 0.267 0.259 0.250 0.242 0.233 0.225 0.216 0.208 0.199 0.191 0.182 0.174 0.165 0.156 0.148 0.139 0.131 0.122 0.113 0.104 0.093 0.087 0.078 0.070 0.061 0.052 0.044 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.009 0.000
Tan gent 3.172 3.271 3.376 3.487 3.606 3.732 3.867 4.011 4.165 4.331 4.511 4.705 4.915 5.145 5.396 5.671 5.976 6.314 6.691 7.115 7.596 8.144 8.777 9.514 10.38 11.43 12.71 14.30 16.35 19.08 22.90 28.64 38.19 57.29 114.1 ****
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angles / Formulas 15° ANGLE CHART 30°
CABINET DEPTH
CABINET DEPTH
WALL
9.318" 12.424" 15.529" 18.635" 2.412" 21.741" 24.847" 3.216" 4.020"
24"
45° T SA GTH THS LEN EP LE ET D ANGCABIN /2° 22 1RIOUS VA
12" 15" 18" 21"
135°
AT S THS H LENG DEPT NGLE BINET 15° AIOUS CA VAR
WALL
9"
22 1/2° ANGLE CHART
LL WA
150°
15" 18" 21" 24"
12"
9"
9.741" 12.988" 16.235" 19.482" 22.729" 3.726"
25.975"
4.968" 6.210"
4.824"
7.452"
5.628"
8.694" 9.936"
6.432"
22 1/2°
15° 15° ANGLE SINE = 0.259 COSINE = 0.966 TANGENT = 0.268
22 1/2° ANGLE SINE = 0.383 COSINE = 0.924 TANGENT = 0.414 FORMULAS: SINE = DIVIDE SHORT LEG BY THIS # TO GET LENGTH OF ANGLE. COSINE = DIVIDE LONG LEG BY THIS # TO GET LENGTH OF ANGLE. TANGENT = DIVIDE SHORT LEG BY THIS # TO GET LENGTH OF OTHER LEG.
45° ANGLE CHART 90°
60°
CABINET DEPTHS
24"
18" 21"
9"
10.391" 13.854" 17.318" 20.781" 24.245" 5.193" 27.709" 6.924"
WALL CABINET DEPTH
AT HS HS EPT GT D EN ET E L BIN GL CA AN US 30° RIO VA
WALL
12" 15"
WALL
120°
24"
21"
12" 15" 18"
9"
12.728"
21.213"
6" 9" 12"
21"
12.117"
24"
13.848" 30° 45° ANGLE SINE = 0.7071 COSINE = 0.7071 TANGENT = 1.00
-28-
33.941"
25.456"
18"
10.386"
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
16.971"
15"
8.655"
30° ANGLE SINE = 0.500 COSINE = 0.866 TANGENT = 0.577
6"
8.485"
S AT TH S EP TH D NG ET LE BIN LE CA NG US ° A IO 45 AR V
WA LL
30° ANGLE CHART
45°
29.698"
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angles / Formulas
TIME SAVING FORMULAS METRIC CONVERSION CHART (LINEAR MEASUREMENTS):
1 Millimeter (MM) = .03937" 1" = 25.4 MM 12" = 304.8 MM 1 Centimeter (CM) = .3937" 1" = 2.54 CM 12" = 30.48 CM 1 Meter (M) = 39.37" 1" = .0254 M 12" = .3048 M EXAMPLES; To convert 615.72 CM to inches, multiply by .3937 = 242.4" (242 13/32") To convert 151 3/8" (151.375") to CM, multiply by 2.54 = 384.5 CM.
REGULAR POLYGONS CIRCLES:
REGULAR OCTAGONS:
D
S
RIGHT TRIANGLES:
D
Any triangle with a 90° corner is called a RIGHT TRIANGLE. On right triangles, the short sides are customarily labelled "A" and "B"; the long side is "C" ON 30/60 RIGHT TRIANGLES:
ON ALL RIGHT TRIANGLES:
EXAMPLE: If the short sides of the A triangle are 17 and 23 1/2, multiply each by itself (17 x 17; 23.5 x 23.5), and add the results (841.25). Punch the square root key on the calculator, and the readout gives you the long side, in this case 29".
C
60°
B B = half of C C = twice B
~ = "Pi" = 3.143
ON 45/45 RIGHT TRIANGLES:
30°
A² plus B² = C²
d
Circumference = D times ~ D = circumference ~
D = 2.614 times S d = 2.414 times S D d S = 2.614 or 2.414
REGULAR HEXAGONS:
45° A
C
S
R D
45°
B A = B; B = A A or B = .7071 times C C = A or B ÷ by .7071
r
S = R; R = S D = 2 times S d = 1.732 times S S = 1.155 times r
d
Cabinet Front Measurements for Even Wall Dimensions Note: For dimensions more than noted add 41/4" to cabinet dimension for every 3" increments of wall dimensions. 33 "
" 33
12 "
-29-
FRONT DIMENSIONS 12 3/4" 17" 21 1/4" 25 1/2" 29 3/4" 34" 38 1/4" 42 1/2" 46 3/4" 51"
"
DI W M A EN L 2 S L 24 1 " ION S 27 " 30 " 3 " 36 3 " 3 " 4 9" 45 2 " " 4 51 8 " 5 " 57 4 " 60 " "
" 24
S LL ION WA NS M E 33" DI " 36 9" 3 " 4 2 5" 4 " 48 1" 5 " 54 " 57 0" 6
" 12
S LL ION WA S N E M 21" " DI 24 7" 2 " 30 3" 3 6" 3 " 39 2" 4 " 45 8" 4 " 51 " 54 " 57 0" 6
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
FRONT DIMENSIONS 12 3/4" 17" 21 1/4" 25 1/2" 29 3/4" 34" 38 1/4" 42 1/2" 46 3/4" 51" 55 1/4" 59 1/2" 63 3/4" 68"
DI W M A EN LL 3 SIO NS 36 3 " " 3 42 9 " " 4 48 5 " 5 " 54 1 " 57 " 24 60 " "
21 "
" 21
Base Cabinets
Wall Cabinets
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angles / Formulas Fraction to Decimal Conversion Chart
1/32
0.03125
17/32
0.53125
1/16
0.0625
9/16
0.5625
3/32
0.09375
19/32
0.59375
1/8
0.125
5/8
0.625
5/32
0.15625
21/32
0.65625
3/16
0.1875
11/16
0.6875
7/32
0.21875
23/32
0.71875
1/4
0.25
3/4
0.75
9/32
0.28125
25/32
0.78125
5/16
0.3125
13/16
0.8125
11/32
0.34375
27/32
0.84375
3/8
0.375
7/8
0.875
13/32
0.40625
29/32
0.90625
7/16
0.4375
15/16
0.9375
15/32
0.46875
31/32
0.96875
1/2
0.5
Formula for figuring cubes (for freight) W x H x D / 1728 w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-30-
Information HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
IMAGES / DESIGNS • • • • •
Patterns and textures - Shapes, artistic patterns, or repeatable elegant patterns. Artwork - Fine art, art deco, modern, vintage, contemporary, etc. Photography - images of people, landscapes, skylines, etc. Typography - poems, names, logos, etc Your Art - create your own custom piece using photos or custom drawings.
FILE RESOLUTION AND SIZES The higher the resolution the better your Facets project will look. The optimum resolution for pixel based images is 150dpi at 100% of the final printed size, but it can be as low as 72dpi at 100%. Vector based files are resolution independent and can be resized without image quality being affected.
NOMENCLATURE FACETS
Cabinets and paneling ( 1 image applied from Facets library) ( 1 sample included )
FACETS MS
Multiple images on a single cabinet
FACETS MM
Multiple images on multiple cabinets
FACETS SM
Single image on multiple cabinets
FACETS OI
User supplied image ( image evaluation and preparation ) *
FACETS DI
Custom design services ( 1 hr minimum )
FACETS SAMPLE
Additional Samples ( Actual Size 11 3/4” X 11 3/4” )
Every cabinet or part with Facets will at minimum have the FACETS nomenclature entered as a point number. The product the customer is placing an image on will determine whether or not further nomenclatures are needed. For pricing questions, contact Custom Cupboards Customer Service.
COMPONENTS THAT CAN RECEIVE FACETS • • •
Doors & Drawer Fronts – #50200 slab door Exterior Finished Backs Interior Finished Backs - A simple finished back - A 3/16” beadboard back - A finished “plank-cut” back - A 3/8” solid stock beadboard back
• • •
WOOD SPECIES 1/4” End Skins Loose Panels Solid Stock
Paints
Maple
Alder
Cherry
OTHER DETAILS • • •
Only available with Revola frameless and Designer overlays on framed cabinets. Images can be color or black and white. Colors – the printing process is applied to the natural wood/paint veneers of a plywood panel or the solid stock piece the customer specifies. This means the printing is applied directly to the wood and to any paint…no stain, no primer, no sealer, just the wood/paint and the application of the image.
MAXIMUM SINGLE PART SIZE The maximum size that can receive Facets printing is 48”W X 96”L X 2”T. No exceptions!
*COPYRIGHT LAWS - We abide by all copyright laws and cannot use images without proof of release (or receipt if purchased from a stock image website) for user-supplied images. We cannot produce merchandise bearing the trademarks of collegiate institutions, professional sports teams, brand names, logos, slogans, celebrity images and other copyrighted or licensed images.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-31-
Information
ARTISAN COLLECTION
STANDARD STAINS & PAINTS
HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALDER BEECH CHERRY MAPLE OAK HICKORY QSO
Bark Butter Pecan Bittersweet CafĂŠ Calico Canyon Sunset Caramel Apple Cinnamon Cracked Pepper Cranbrook Early Autumn Espresso Bean French Press London Fog Mocha Natural Pitch Black River Rock Root Beer Sienna
Not available on wood specie
Spiced Cider Spiced Rum Sweet Mist Tudor Brown Vermont White Wash
Chambray
French Silk
Sea Cliff Heights
Sandstone
Cotton
Soft Clay
Boulder
Potters Clay
Chalk White
Velour
Paint White
Antique White
Dolphin Grey
Havana Grey
Winter White
Charcoal Slate
Harbor Grey
Sea Salt Blue
Artisan Collection finishes come with FLAT TOPCOAT as standard. Satin topcoat available.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-32-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-1-
Index: Door & Drawer Style Section 1/4” Plywood Panel Door Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................4 1/4” Plywood Panel Door Series....................................................................................................................................................................... 29-30 Applied Molding Door Guidelines..............................................................................................................................................................................4 Applied Molding Series........................................................................................................................................................................................ 52-64 Applied Moldings............................................................................................................................................................................................................12 Beadboard Drawer Front Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................3 Beadboard Panel Door Series.............................................................................................................................................................................31-34 Beaded Raised Panel Door Series...................................................................................................................................................................40-45 Butt Door Policy...............................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Classic Raised Panel Door Series......................................................................................................................................................................35-39 Door Edge Profiles.........................................................................................................................................................................................................12 Door and Drawer Front Style information and page location................................................................................................................... 6-9 Drawer Front Information.............................................................................................................................................................................................5 Drawer Front Rail & Stile Profiles.............................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Five-Piece Applied Molding Drawer Fronts.........................................................................................................................................................74 Five-Piece Beadboard Panel Drawer Fronts........................................................................................................................................................ 71 Five-Piece Beaded Raised Panel Drawer Fronts................................................................................................................................................72 Five-Piece Flat Panel Drawer Fronts.............................................................................................................................................................. 69-70 Five-Piece Mitered Drawer Fronts...........................................................................................................................................................................73 Five-Piece Raised Panel Drawer Fronts................................................................................................................................................................72 Flat Panel Door Series............................................................................................................................................................................................18-28 Maximum Door Size Guidelines..................................................................................................................................................................................3 Minimum Door Size Guidelines...................................................................................................................................................................................3 Mitered Door Guidelines................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Mitered Door Series................................................................................................................................................................................................45-51 Mortise & Tenoned Door Guidelines.........................................................................................................................................................................3 Narrow Rail 5-Piece Drawer Fronts...........................................................................................................................................................................3 One-Piece MDF Door & Drawer Front Guidelines...............................................................................................................................................4 One-Piece MDF Drawer Fronts......................................................................................................................................................................... 68-69 One-Piece MDF Series............................................................................................................................................................................................14-18 Panel Profiles.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11 Solid Slab Drawer Fronts........................................................................................................................................................................................... 67 Specialty Door & Drawer Fronts................................................................................................................................................................................5 Stile & Rail Profiles.....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-11 Veneer Slab Door Series.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Veneer Slab Drawer Front Series............................................................................................................................................................................ 68 Warped Door Policy........................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mortise & Tenoned Doors Door, Drawer Front styles, and building techniques are subject to change without notice. Please read each door description for further details. Not all styles are available in all woods, finishes, heights or widths. Frame and panel doors are mortise & tenoned, glued & fastened. Panels are pinned and buffered to allow for normal expansion.
Maximum Door Sizes Width: Maximum single panel width is 24”. Doors over 24” will become double paneled in width (NA on arched doors). To override this size constraint, use SDPW (single door panel width). No warranty on doors over 24”. Single panel arched doors cannot be built wider than 24”. These include: #40000, #45000, #47500, etc. Height: Maximum single panel height is 42”. Doors over 42” tall will become double paneled in height, this includes glass, mullion, & lattice doors. To override this size constraint, use SDPH (single door panel height), this modification will void the warranty on the door. Double paneled doors over 57 3/4” tall will not be covered under warranty. Doors 39 3/4” & up will receive 3 hinges per door unless MBD, GD, or LDI, then 4 hinges per door. The largest standard wall cabinet with a single panel door is a 42” tall wall cabinet.
Minimum Door Sizes Minimum door sizes are listed on the page showing the door style. On many doors you will notice two minimum sizes listed, this feature is offered to take into consideration the tall, narrow cabinets such as the W1236 & the wide, short cabinets such as the W3612. Sizes that fall under the minimum width will have the stiles cut down if possible, otherwise they will be built as slab doors. Rails cannot be cut down to keep 5-piece door style. These substitutions will not be replaced under warranty. Doors and drawer fronts falling under the minimum will still be charged the door/ drawer front upcharge. These minimums are designed to allow our employees to safely produce your products.
Butt Door Policy Butt Doors will have an 1/8” gap between the doors & no center stile. When selecting butt doors on the Order Info tab on the pricing program, butt doors & drawer fronts will be added to all base, wall, & vanity cabinets 27”- 45” wide. Butt doors will be standard on Tall Broom cabinets 27” – 39” wide. See individual cabinet descriptions for BD options on sizes beyond these standards. Butt drawer fronts will keep the center stile for drawer guide function. To order a full width drawer front and/or drawer add FF or SD to the end of the cabinet nomenclature. (Ex. SB36FF or B36SD) When ordering wall, base and vanity cabinets that are under 24” wide & need butt doors, order the cabinet as the 24” BD equivalent and reduce the width.
Beadboard Drawer Fronts 76, 703, 720, 920, 921, & 994 drawer fronts feature a 720-beadboard center panel with vertical beads & graining. We make no attempt to line the beads up between the doors and drawer fronts. When ordering, consider using the MFD (Multi-Drawer Front) option. Due to their extreme panel width, drawer fronts over 24” wide will not be covered under warranty for warping and split panels.
Narrow Rail 5-Piece Drawer Fronts Drawer fronts with narrow rails can be modified to increase the height of the top & bottom rail to 2 1/4”, 2 3/4” or 3 1/2” on larger drawer fronts by using the MDFSB, MDFSM or MDFST modification. Drawer fronts will be subject to the minimum door size when using these modifications. See the Accessories & Modifications section for more details. Drawer fronts with narrow 1 1/4” rails, such as the #80, cannot be used in conjunction with the #35, #66 or #67 edge profiles. Due to the size of the rail only one peg or nail per corner can be applied on this style.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-3-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece Door & Drawer Fronts Available in selected styles only; see the One-Piece MDF door & drawer front series sections. These doors and fronts are made of MDF and are available in the solid painted finishes only can also add glazes; shown in the LOC book. Not available with applied moldings or the #13, #60, #66 or #67 door edges. When using glass, mullion or lattice doors, the door frame will be built like its 5-piece counterpart. This will result in seams at the rail & stile joints.
1/4” Plywood Panel Doors #10000, #11100, & #17000 doors are not as stable as solid panel doors and may warp up to ¼”. Plywood panels also tend to stain differently than solid wood panels and the veneer seams may show through on painted finishes. The backs of the panels may have large unfilled knots. If these doors are ordered in Knotty or Rustic wood the center panels will not have the Knotty/Rustic characteristics. These are not warrantable situations. 1/4” plywood paneled doors are NOT available in painted finishes, or unfinished on Paintgrade or MDF wood.
Mitered Doors Our mitered doors are available in all wood species with the exception of Hickory & Craftwood One-Piece MDF. These door styles come with a special edge that cannot be altered. Mitered doors are fastened using a doweled finger joint and panels are buffered to allow for expansion. Doors can be attached to a 3/4” panel substrate or finished cabinet end to be used in place of a loose or intergrated “wainscot” RPB panel.
Applied Molding Doors & Drawer Fronts ••
The applied molding upcharge is per door & drawer front and is included in the door & drawer front upcharge when using an applied molding style listed in the catalog such as the #30001 or #9303. Any doors or drawer fronts that fall below minimum will still incur the applied molding door charge.
••
The last two digits of the five digit door or four digit drawer front number signify the applied molding style. For example, the #30001 is the #30000 door including AM1 & #9303 is the #93 drawer front including AM3.
••
Applied moldings are not available on raised panel valances, or arched doors.
••
AM1, AM2, AM3, AM12 & AM14, which is applied to the face of the rails & stiles, making the door over 1” thick, will not work on pocket doors. If ordered, pocket doors will be built without the applied molding & the charges will still apply.
••
AM1, which is applied to the face of the rails & stiles, will not work when ordered with 5-piece style drawer fronts that have narrow 1 ¼” wide rails with a #15, #35, #66, #67 or #70 edge treatment.
••
AM2, which is applied to the face of the rails & stiles, will not work when ordered with 5-piece style drawer fronts that have narrow 1 ¼” wide rails with a #35, #66 or #67 edge treatment.
••
AM3, which is applied to the face of the rails & stiles, will not work when ordered with 5-piece style drawer fronts that have 2 1/4” wide rails with a #35 edge treatment.
••
AM2 is designed to be used with a raised panel door style.
••
AM4 includes nail pegs in corners of molding and knife cuts at joints of rails & stiles. See sample before ordering.
••
AM7 are soft maple. Due to their smaller size they tend to match most colors on most woods. Order at your discretion.
••
AM4, & AM7 or any applied molding that sits on a center panel and is prepped for glass or has MBDs will be shipped loose. The Applied Molding will be cut to size but will not be installed at the factory.
••
In some cases fillers should be used in conjunction with applied molding doors to ensure doors and/or drawers can clear adjacent cabinets or walls.
••
To add applied molding to doors not shown or listed, please call your Account Manager for availability.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-4-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Front Information All drawer fronts are 3/4” thick with the exception of some Applied Molding Series fronts and the #25 slab front.
Warped Door Policy Doors that are warped ¼” or less must be adjusted at the hinge. Doors that are warped over ¼” must be adjusted as much as possible and allowed to undergo one heating and cooling cycle before replacement will be considered. If cabinetry is delivered in cool weather, it must be given sufficient time to acclimate to a warm house, and vice versa. Over time, some cabinets will warp due to extremes in temperature and humidity. Custom Cupboards requires a relative humidity level of 25% to 55% be maintained in the residence to avoid these problems. In most situations, the door will return to its normal position after going through the heating/cooling cycle. When requesting a replacement, check to ensure that the door is warped instead of the cabinet being racked out of square during installation. In the interim, solid brass ball catches will be provided at no charge to pull the door tight against the cabinet. The catch has an adjustable tension feature, is easy to install, and is designed for use on all doors.
Specialty Doors & Drawer Fronts Specialty doors & fronts are available from outside sources with prior engineering approval. Call for pricing and availability. Expect extended lead times and limitations to the warranty of the doors.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-5-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
DOOR #
DOOR NAME
PANEL
RAIL
10000
Hamilton
100
300
300
30
1/4” Plywood Panel
11100
Harrison
100
301
710C
30
1/4” Plywood Panel
17000
Washington
100
700
700
31
1/4” Plywood Panel
300-1pc
1-pc Chisholm Classic
300
300
300
14
One-Piece MDF
30000
Chisholm Classic
300
300
300
36
Classic Raised Panel
30001
Chisholm Classic w/ AM1
300
300
300
53
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
301-1pc
1-pc Lexington
300
301
301
14
One-Piece MDF
30100
Lexington
300
301
301
36
Classic Raised Panel
30103
Lexington w/ AM3
300
301
301
53
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
30200
Valley Forge Raised
300
701
701
37
Classic Raised Panel
30202
Valley Forge Raised w/ AM2
300
701
701
54
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
30400
Valley Forge Beaded
375
701
701
41
Beaded Raised Panel
30402
Valley Forge Beaded w/ AM2
375
701
701
54
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
30600
Arlington Beaded
375
301
300
41
Beaded Raised Panel
30700
Arlington Flat
700
301
300
18
Flat Panel
31000
Providence
300
301
700
37
Classic Raised Panel
31100
Richmond
300
301
710C
38
Classic Raised Panel
31200
Covington
375
301
710C
42
Beaded Raised Panel
31300
Concord
375
301
700
42
Beaded Raised Panel
31600
Wilson
300
316
316
40
Classic Raised Panel
31700
Savoy
700
316
316
19
Flat Panel
37400
Charleston
375
301
301
43
Beaded Raised Panel
37401
Charleston w/ AM1
375
301
301
55
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
37403
Charleston w/ AM3
375
301
301
55
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
37500
Chisholm Beaded
375
300
300
43
Beaded Raised Panel
37501
Chisholm Beaded w/ AM1
375
300
300
56
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
38100
Timberline
380
301
710B
44
Beaded Raised Panel
38300
Delano
380
383
383
44
Beaded Raised Panel
38301
Delano w/ AM1
380
383
383
56
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
38400
Tuscan
384
384
384
45
Beaded Raised Panel
38500
Tuscan Flat
700
384
384
19
Flat Panel
40000
Vienna Classic
300
400/300
300
38
Classic Raised Panel
45000
Windsor Classic
300
450/300
300
39
Classic Raised Panel
46000
Windsor Beaded
375
450/300
300
45
Beaded Raised Panel
46600
Windsor Beadboard
720
450/300
300
32
Beadboard Panel
47500
Brentwood Classic
300
475/300
300
39
Classic Raised Panel
50100
Contempo I
NA
NA
NA
13
Veneer Slab
50200
Contempo II
NA
NA
NA
13
Veneer Slab
50300
Contempo III
NA
NA
NA
15
One-Piece MDF
700-1pc
1-pc Shaker
700
700
700
15
One-Piece MDF
70000
Shaker
700
700
700
19
Flat Panel
70001
Shaker w/ AM1
700
700
700
57
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70003
Shaker w/ AM3
700
700
700
57
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70004
Shaker w/ AM4
700
700
700
58
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70014
Shaker w/ AM14
700
700
700
58
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
701-1pc
1-pc Valley Forge
700
701
701
16
One-Piece MDF
70100
Valley Forge
700
701
701
21
Flat Panel
70104
Valley Forge w/ AM4
700
701
701
59
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70112
Valley Forge w/ AM12
700
701
701
59
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70114
Valley Forge w/AM14
700
701
701
60
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
70300
Mesa Beadboard
720
706
706
32
Beadboard Panel
70500
Grooved Shaker
705
700
700
33
Beadboard Panel
70600
Mesa Flat
700
706
706
21
Flat Panel
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
STILE
-6-
PAGE
DOOR SERIES
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
DOOR #
DOOR NAME
PANEL
RAIL
STILE
PAGE
707-1pc 70700
1-pc Vallejo Mission
700
707
707
16
One-Piece MDF
Vallejo Mission
700
707
707
22
Flat Panel
708-1pc
1-pc Modesto Mission
700
708
708
17
One-Piece MDF
70800
Modesto Mission
700
708
708
22
Flat Panel
71000
Penbrook
700
710C
710C
23
Flat Panel
71100
Huntington
700
301
710C
23
Flat Panel
71200
Brighton
700
301
700
24
Flat Panel
71400
Belmont
700
701
700
24
Flat Panel
71404
Belmont w/ AM4
700
701
700
60
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
71600
Craftsman
700
716
716
25
Flat Panel
71700
Santiago Mission
700
717
717
25
Flat Panel
72000
Beadboard Shaker
720
700
700
33
Beadboard Panel
72001
Beadboard Shaker w/ AM1
720
700
700
61
Applied Molding - Beadboard Panel
72004
Beadboard Shaker w/ AM4
720
700
700
61
Applied Molding - Beadboard Panel
72014
Beadboard Shaker w/ AM14
720
700
700
62
Applied Molding - Beadboard Panel
72100
Huntington Beadboard
720
301
710C
34
Beadboard Panel
75000
Country Shaker
700X2
700
700X3
27
Flat Panel
73000
Taos 2 1/4
700
730
700
26
Flat Panel
73100
Taos 2 3/4
700
731
716
26
Flat Panel
73200
Taos 3 1/2
700
732
701
27
Flat Panel
77600
Heritage Beaded
375
700
700
46
Beaded Raised Panel
77602
Heritage Beaded w/ AM2
375
700
700
62
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
77800
Heritage Classic
300
700
700
40
Classic Raised Panel
77802
Heritage Classic w/ AM2
300
700
700
63
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
900-1pc
1-pc Stafford
700
300
300
17
One-Piece MDF
90000
Stafford
700
300
300
28
Flat Panel
90001
Stafford w/ AM1
700
300
300
63
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
901-1pc
1-pc Salem
700
301
301
18
One-Piece MDF
90100
Salem
700
301
301
28
Flat Panel
90101
Salem w/ AM1
700
301
301
64
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
90103
Salem w/ AM3
700
301
301
64
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
90500
Cambria
700
383
383
29
Flat Panel
91500
Windsor Flat
700
450/300
300
29
Flat Panel
92000
Stafford Beadboard
720
300
300
34
Beadboard Panel
92100
Salem Beadboard
720
301
301
35
Beadboard Panel
94000
Sterling Raised Panel
940
940
940
47
Mitered
94007
Sterling Raised Panel w/ AM7
940
940
940
65
Applied Molding - Mitered
94500
Sterling Flat Panel
700
940
940
47
Mitered
95000
Stanton Raised Panel
940
950
950
48
Mitered
95500
Stanton Flat Panel
700
950
950
48
Mitered
98000
Clairmont
980
980
980
49
Mitered
98100
Bradford
981
981
981
49
Mitered
98400
Soho
700
984
984
46
Mitered
99000
Chelmsford
990
990
990
50
Mitered
99100
Alcott
940
991
991
50
Mitered
99200
Alcott Flat
700
991
991
51
Mitered
99300
Ralston Flat
700
993
993
51
Mitered
99400
Ralston Beadboard
720
993
993
52
Mitered
99500
Stonewall
700
995
995
52
Mitered
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-7-
DOOR SERIES
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
DRAWER DRAWER FRONT NAME FRONT # 10 Ogee Slab
PANEL
RAIL
STILE
PAGE
DRAWER FRONT SERIES
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
12
Chelmsford Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
13
Reverse Bead Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
14
Soho Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
15
Beaded Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
25
Raised Bead Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
30
Double-Cut Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
33
3-Piece Front 33
NA
NA
NA
69
Solid Slab
34
3-Piece Front 34
NA
NA
NA
69
Solid Slab
316
Wilson Raised
300
80DF
316
73
Classic Raised Panel
317
Savoy Flat
700
300
316
70
Flat Panel
35
Designer Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
383
Delano Flat
700
383DF
383
70
Flat Panel
38301
Delano Flat w/ AM1
700
383DF
383
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
384
Tuscan Flat
384
384
384
70
Beaded Raised Panel
501
Contempo I Vertical Grain Slab
NA
NA
NA
69
Veneer Slab
502
Contempo II Vertical Grain Slab
NA
NA
NA
69
Veneer Slab
60
Square Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
62
Contempo II Horizontal Grain Slab
NA
NA
NA
69
Veneer Slab
63
Contempo I Horizontal Grain Slab
NA
NA
NA
69
Veneer Slab
65
1/8” Round-Over Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
66
Double-Round Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
67
Decor Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
70
Beveled Slab
NA
NA
NA
68
Solid Slab
703
Mesa Beadboard
720
706DF
706
72
Beadboard Panel
706
Mesa Flat
700
706DF
706
70
Flat Panel
716
Craftsman
700
700
716
70
Flat Panel
717
Santiago Mission
700
707
717
70
Flat Panel
720
Beadboard Shaker
720
700
700
72
Beadboard Panel
730
Taos 2 1/4”
700
730
700
71
Flat Panel
731
Taos 2 3/4”
700
731
716
71
Flat Panel
732
Taos 3 1/2”
700
732
701
71
Flat Panel
74
3-Piece Front 74
NA
NA
NA
69
Solid Slab
76
Mixed Beadboard
720
300
700
72
Beadboard Panel
77-1pc
1-pc Vallejo Mission
700
707
707
69
One-Piece MDF
77
Vallejo Mission
700
707
707
71
Flat Panel
78-1pc
1-pc Modesto Mission
700
707
708
69
One-Piece MDF
78
Modesto Mission
700
707
708
71
Flat Panel
80-1pc
1-pc Classic Raised
300
80DF
300
69
One-Piece MDF
80
Classic Raised
300
80DF
300
73
Classic Raised Panel
8001
Classic Raised w/ AM1
300
80DF
300
75
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
81
Beaded Raised
375
80DF
300
73
Beaded Raised Panel
8101
Beaded Raised w/ AM1
375
80DF
300
75
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
82
Mixed Classic Raised
300
80DF
700
73
Classic Raised Panel
83
Mixed Beaded Raised
375
80DF
700
73
Beaded Raised Panel
84
Shaker Beaded Raised
375
84DF
700
73
Beaded Raised Panel
8402
Shaker Beaded Raised w/ AM2
375
84DF
700
75
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
86
Shaker Classic Raised
300
84DF
700
73
Classic Raised Panel
8602
Shaker Classic Raised w/ AM2
300
84DF
700
75
Applied Molding - Classic Raised Panel
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
DRAWER DRAWER FRONT NAME FRONT # 87-1pc 1-pc Wide Stile Classic Raised
PANEL
RAIL
STILE
PAGE
DRAWER FRONT SERIES
300
80DF
301
69
One-Piece MDF
87
Wide Stile Classic Raised
300
80DF
301
73
Classic Raised Panel
88
Wide Stile Beaded Raised
375
80DF
301
73
Beaded Raised Panel
89-1pc
1-pc Special Shaker
700
84DF
701
69
One-Piece MDF
89
Special Shaker
700
84DF
701
71
Flat Panel
8904
Special Shaker w/ AM4
700
84DF
701
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
8912
Special Shaker w/ AM12
700
84DF
701
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
8914
Special Shaker w/ AM14
700
84DF
701
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
90-1pc
1-pc Shaker
700
700
700
69
One-Piece MDF
90
Shaker
700
700
700
71
Flat Panel
9003
Shaker w/ AM3
700
700
700
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
91
Shaker w/ Cove
700
710C
700
71
Flat Panel
92-1pc
1-pc Wide Stile Shaker
700
700
701
70
One-Piece MDF
92
Wide Stile Shaker
700
700
701
71
Flat Panel
920
Stafford Beadboard
720
300
300
72
Beadboard Panel
9201
Wide Stile Shaker w/ AM1
700
700
701
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
921
Salem Beadboard
720
300
301
72
Beadboard Panel
9214
Wide Stile Shaker w/ AM14
700
700
701
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
93-1pc
1-pc Wide Stile Flat
700
300
301
70
One-Piece MDF
93
Wide Stile Flat
700
300
301
71
Flat Panel
9301
Wide Stile Flat w/ AM1
700
300
301
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
9303
Wide Stile Flat w/ AM3
700
300
301
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
94
Mixed Flat
700
300
700
71
Flat Panel
940
Sterling Raised Panel
940
940DF
940DF
74
Mitered
94007
Sterling Raised Panel w/ AM7
940
940DF
940DF
75
Applied Molding - Mitered
945
Sterling Flat Panel
700
940DF
940DF
74
Mitered
95-1pc
1-pc Flat Panel
700
300
300
70
One-Piece MDF
95
Flat Panel
700
300
300
71
Flat Panel
950
Stanton Raised Panel
940
950DF
950DF
74
Mitered
9501
Flat Panel w/ AM1
700
300
300
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
955
Stanton Flat Panel
700
950DF
950DF
74
Mitered
96-1pc
1-pc Narrow Rail Shaker
700
84DF
700
70
One-Piece MDF
96
Narrow Rail Shaker
700
84DF
700
71
Flat Panel
9601
Narrow Rail Shaker w/ AM1
700
84DF
700
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
9604
Narrow Rail Shaker w/ AM4
700
84DF
700
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
9606
Narrow Rail Shaker w/ AM6
700
84DF
700
74
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
9614
Narrow Rail Shaker w/ AM14
700
84DF
700
75
Applied Molding - Flat Panel
980
Clairmont
700
980DF
980DF
74
Mitered
98
Combo Classic Raised
300
84DF
701
73
Classic Raised Panel
9802
Combo Classic Raised
300
84DF
701
75
Classic Raised Panel
981
Bradford
700
981DF
981DF
74
Mitered
984
Soho Flat
700
984DF
984DF
74
Mitered
99
Combo Beaded Raised
375
84DF
701
73
Beaded Raised Panel
990
Chelmsford
990
990DF
990DF
74
Mitered
9902
Combo Beaded Raised w/ AM2
375
84DF
701
75
Applied Molding - Beaded Raised Panel
992
Alcott Flat
700
991DF
991DF
74
Mitered
993
Ralston Flat
700
993DF
993DF
74
Mitered
994
Ralston Beadboard
720
993DF
993DF
74
Mitered
995
Stonewall
700
995
995
74
Mitered
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-9-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Stile & Rail Profiles #300 #300
#316 #316
#301 #301
3 1/2 2 3/4 2 1/4
#383 #383
#700 #700
#384 #384
3 1/2
3 2 1/4
#701 #701
#707 #707
#706 #706
3 1/2
3 1/2 2 1/4
#716 #716
#710B #710B
#710C #710C
BEVEL
COVE
2 3/4 2 1/4
#730
2 1/4
#731
#732
#980 #980
#981 #981
2 1/4
#950 #950
3 2 9/16
2 9/16
#984 #984
#991 #991
#990 #990
3
3 2 1/4
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-10-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
#993 #993
2 1/4” at center
#450 #450
#995 #995
RAILS ONLY
2 1/2
2 1/4
4
Also applicable on 400 & 475
Drawer Front Rail & Stile Profiles 80DF
80DF
84DF 84DF
383DF 383DF
2 1/4
384DF 384DF
2 1/4
1 1/4
1 1/4
706DF
706DF
730DF
731DF
732DF
950DF 950DF
980DF 980DF
981DF 981DF
2 1/4
940DF
940DF
1 1/2
1 9/16
984DF
984DF
990DF 990DF
2 1/4
2 1/4
991DF 991DF
1 1/2
2 1/2
1 1/2
993DF 993DF
1 3/4
Panel Profiles 100 1/4"Plywood plywood 100 1/4”
384 Tuscan Beaded Raised Raised 384 Tuscan Beaded
Mitered Raised 940940 Mitered Raised
300 Classic Raised 300 Classic Raised
7/16" flat panel Panel 700 700 7/16” Flat
980981Clairmont Bradford
375 Beaded Raised 375 Beaded Raised
720 Beadboard
720 Beadboard
981 981Bradford Bradford
Grooves are 1-1/2" O.C.
380 Flat Raised Bead 380 Flat Raised Bead
705 V-groove
705 V-Groove
Grooves are 3" O.C.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-11-
Chelmsford 990990Chelmsford
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Edge Profiles #10 #10
#11 #11
5/16
#12 #12
9/32
3/16
The #11 edge profile is specific to the #99500 mitered door style & is not available for use on other doors or as a slab front.
#13 #13
The #12 edge profile is specific to the #99000 mitered door style & is not available for use on other doors.
#14 #14
5/16
#15 #15
1 9/32
1/2
The #14 edge profile is specific to the #98400 mitered door style & is not available for use on other doors.
#35 #35
#65 #65
#60 #60
3/16 1
On Designer Overlay, doors with the #60 & 65 edge profile will require an 1/8” fill on cabinets that butt into a wall or deeper cabinets. .
#66 #66
#67 #67
#70 #70
25/32
5/8
25/32
Applied Moldings Applied to Doors & Drawer Fronts. The left side of the moldings face the outside edges of the doors. Some moldings are available loose, see accessories and modifications section.
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
1/2” wide X 1/4” tall All wood species available.
5/8” wide X 7/16” tall All wood species available.
1-1/16” wide X 5/8” tall All wood species available.
5/16” wide X 13/16” tall (with nail pegs in corners). All wood species available.
AM7
AM12
AM14
5/32” wide X 1/8” tall Available is soft maple only.
Stile Mold: 1/2” wide X 7/16” tall Rail Mold: 1/2” wide X 9/16” tall All wood species available
15/16” wide X 9/16” tall. All wood species except Craftwood.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-12-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Veneer Slab Door Series CONTEMPO I
#50100
CONTEMPO II
#50200 TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
3 3/8 x 7 -or- 7 x 3 3/8
Minimum Size
3 3/8 x 7 -or- 7 x 3 3/8
Stile / Rail Size
NA
Stile / Rail Size
NA
Wood Species
All but Craftwood, Paintgrade, MDF Paint, Knotty or Rustic
Wood Species
All but Craftwood, Paintgrade, MDF Paint, Knotty or Rustic
Slab Drawer Fronts
#63 or #501
Slab Drawer Fronts
#62 or #502
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
Edge Profile
#65 only
Edge Profile
#60 only
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
MDF core
•
Solid Wood 3/16” edgebanding.
•
Edgebanding will run through on the left & right side of the doors and drawer fronts.
• • • •
•
No Paints or Aging Aging (Distressing)
•
Overlay fillers will be solid wood & will not include 3/16” edgebanding.
•
• •
Finger slots are not available on this door style. #70000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. Grain direction & potential color difference may be an issue.
#70000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. Grain direction & potential color difference may be an issue.
•
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
•
-13-
MDF core Standard veneer edgebanding. No Paints or Aging Aging (Distressing) Overlay fillers will be solid wood & will not include veneer edgebanding. Finger slots are not available on this door style.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Series 1-pc CHISHOLM CLASSIC #300-1pc
1-pc LEXINGTON
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
Craftwood
Wood Species
Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#80-1pc
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#87-1pc or #93-1pc
Edge Profile
See below
Edge Profile
See below
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• • •
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. Door edge #13, #60, #66 ,#67 & #35 on #80-1pc not available. #30000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• • • •
-14-
#301-1pc
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. Door edge #13, #60, #66 ,#67 & #35 on #87-1pc not available. #30100 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Series CONTEMPO III
1-pc SHAKER
#50300
#700-1pc
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
3 3/8 x 7 -or- 7 x 3 3/8
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
NA
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
Craftwood & MDF Paint Only
Wood Species
Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#90-1pc or #96-1pc
Edge Profile
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96-1pc & #60
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• •
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. #70000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• • •
-15-
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. Door edge #13, #60, #66 ,#67 & #35 on #96-1pc not available. #70000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Series 1-pc VALLEY FORGE
#701-1pc
1-pc VALLEJO MISSION #707-1pc
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
Craftwood
Wood Species
Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#89-1pc or #92-1pc
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#77-1pc
Edge Profile
See below
Edge Profile
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• • •
•
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. Door edge #13, #60, #66 ,#67 & #35 on #89-1pc not available. #70100 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-16-
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. #70700 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Series 1-pc MODESTO MISSION #708-1pc
1-pc STAFFORD
#900-1pc
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
Craftwood
Wood Species
Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#78-1pc
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#95-1pc
Edge Profile
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Edge Profile
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• •
•
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. #70800 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-17-
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. #90000 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Series 1-pc SALEM
Flat Panel Door Series
#901-1pc
ARLINGTON FLAT
#30700
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#93-1pc
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#95
Edge Profile
All but #13, #60, #66 & #67
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• •
•
One-piece MDF construction. Available in any Painted finishes & glazing without Aging (Distressing) or Crackle. Finger slots are not available on this door style. #90100 door will be used when ordering Glass, Mullion or Lattice. This may result in “cracks” at the rail & stile joint. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-18-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series SAVOY #31700
TUSCAN FLAT #38500
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
8 1/2 x 11 1/2 or 11 1/2 x 8 1/2
Minimum Size
10 X 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 3/4 rails and stiles
Stile / Rail Size
3x3
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#317
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#384
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Cononial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland) Door Plant: APE_ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
• •
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-19-
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish without Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Watch out for door minimums. On BLS, BLSS 33” cabinets, this door will revert to slab doors.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series SHAKER #70000 TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#90 or #96
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM1, AM3, AM4, AM6 & AM14
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS • • • •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1, AM3 & AM14 This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #700-1pc. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-20-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series VALLEY FORGE
#70100
MESA FLAT
#70600
TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
#10, #13, #15, #60 & #65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#89 or #92
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#706
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #89
Edge Profile
#10, #13, #15, #60 & #65
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM4, AM12 & AM14
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
• • • •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM12 & AM14 This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #7011pc. Watch out for door minimums. Top selling door
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-21-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Micro-Bevel on rail & stile. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series VALLEJO MISSION
#70700
MODESTO MISSION
#70800
TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All
Wood Species
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#77
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#78
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #707-1pc. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-22-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #708-1pc. Watch our for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series PENBROOK #71000
HUNTINGTON #71100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#91
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#91 or #94
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-23-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series BRIGHTON #71200
BELMONT #71400
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#94
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#90 or #96
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
AM4
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-24-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series SANTIAGO MISSION
CRAFTSMAN #71600
#71700
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
8 1/2 x 11 1/2 -or- 11 1/2 x 8 1/2
Minimum Size
8 1/2 x 11 1/2 -or- 11 1/2 x 8 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 3/4 x 2 3/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 3/4 x 2 3/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#716
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#717
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
OPTION
Pocket Doors NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-25-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series TAOS 2 1/4
#73000
TAOS 2 3/4 #73100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 and 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
8 1/2 x 11 1/2 and 11 1/2 x 8 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 rails and stiles
Stile / Rail Size
2 3/4 rails and stiles
Wood Species
ALL except Craftwood
Wood Species
ALL except Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#730
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#731
Edge Profile
All door edges/slab fronts
Edge Profile
All door edges/slab fronts
Mullions
Colonial and Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial and Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes
Pocket Doors
Yes
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-26-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series TAOS 3 1/2
COUNTRY SHAKER
#73200
#75000
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 and 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 1/2 x 13 -or- 13 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 rails and stiles
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
ALL except Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#730
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#90 or #96
Edge Profile
All door edges/slab fronts
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96
Mullions
Colonial and Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Use #70000 style door
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), No (Discovery) Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• • •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-27-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums. If below minimum, this door will revert to #70000 door style and minimum.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series STAFFORD #90000
SALEM #90100 TOP SELLING DOOR
TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All
Wood Species
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#95
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#93
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM1
Applied Moldings
AM1 & AM3
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• • •
• • •
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1. This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #900-1pc. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-28-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1 & AM3. This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #901-1pc. Watch out for door minimums. Top selling door.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Flat Panel Door Series CAMBRIA #90500
WINDSOR FLAT
#91500
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 x 12 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#383
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#95
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• • • •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-29-
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Maximum door width is 24” The lower door style to compliment this is #90000. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
1/4” Plywood Panel Door Series HAMILTON #10000
HARRISON #11100
1/4” Ply
1/4” Ply 1/4" Ply
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 x 10 -or- 10 x 7
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood, MDF or Paintgrade
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola) Yes for raised panels
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola) Yes for raised panels
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• • •
• • •
• •
1/4” plywood center panel. See #90000 door style for a solid wood center panel. Not available in Painted finishes, or Paintgrade/MDF Paint (even when ordered unfinished). If knotty or rustic wood is ordered, the center panels will not have knots, but may contain mineral streaks. See door information at the beginning of this section for more details.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-30-
1/4” plywood center panel. See #71100 door style for a solid wood center panel. Not available in Painted finishes, or Paintgrade/MDF Paint (even when ordered unfinished). If knotty or rustic wood is ordered, the center panels will not have knots, but may contain mineral streaks. See door information at the beginning of this section for more details.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
1/4” Plywood Panel Door Series WASHINGTON
#17000
1/4” Ply
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 x 10 -or- 10 x 7
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood, MDF or Paintgrade
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
None
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS • • • • •
1/4” plywood center panel. See #70000 door style for a solid wood center panel. Not available in Painted finishes, or Paintgrade/MDF Paint (even when ordered unfinished). If knotty or rustic wood is ordered, the center panels will not have knots, but may contain mineral streaks. See door information at the beginning of this section for more details.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-31-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beadboard Panel Door Series WINDSOR BEADBOARD #46600
MESA BEADBOARD
#70300
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 x 12 1/4
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
#10, #13, #15, #60 & #65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#920 or #95
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#703
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
#10, #13, #15, #60 & #65
Mullions
Colonial
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• • • •
• • •
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center. The lower door style to compliment this is #92000. Maximum door width is 24” Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-32-
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center. Micro-Bevel on rail & stile. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beadboard Panel Door Series GROOVED SHAKER
BEADBOARD SHAKER #72000
#70500
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#90 or #96
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#720, #90 or #96
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #96
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
AM1, AM4 & AM14
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
OPTION
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• •
Grooves are 3” on center.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-33-
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center. Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1& AM14
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beadboard Panel Door Series STAFFORD BEADBOARD #92000
HUNTINGTON BEADBOARD #72100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#76, #91 or #94
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#920 or #95
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
•
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-34-
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beadboard Panel Door Series SALEM BEADBOARD
#92100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#921 or #93
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS • •
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-35-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Classic Raised Panel Door Series CHISHOLM CLASSIC
LEXINGTON #30100
#30000 TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All
Wood Species
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#80
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#87 or #93
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #80
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #87
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM1
Applied Moldings
AM3
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
•
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1. This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #300-1pc. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-36-
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM3 This door style available as a one-piece MDF. See #301-1pc. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Classic Raised Panel Door Series PROVIDENCE #31000
VALLEY FORGE RAISED #30200
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#89, #92 or #98
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#82 or #94
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #89 & #98
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #82
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM2
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
•
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-37-
Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Classic Raised Panel Door Series VIENNA CLASSIC
RICHMOND #31100
#40000
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Minimum Size
10 1/2 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 1/2 x 12 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#82 or #94
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#80
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #82
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #80
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• • •
Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-38-
The lower door style to compliment this is #30000. Maximum door width is 24” Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Classic Raised Panel Door Series WINDSOR CLASSIC
BRENTWOOD CLASSIC
#45000
#47500
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 1/2 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 1/2 x 12 1/4
Minimum Size
10 1/2 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 1/2 x 12 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#80
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#80
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #80
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #80
Mullions
Colonial
Mullions
Colonial
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• • •
• • • •
The lower door style to compliment this is #30000. Maximum door width is 24” Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-39-
The lower door style to compliment this is #30000. Maximum door width is 24” Doors below 12” wide will resemble the #40000 door. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Classic Raised Panel Door Series HERITAGE CLASSIC
#77800
WILSON #31600
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
8 1/2 x 11 1/2 -or- 11 1/2 x 8 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 3/4 rail and stiles
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#86, #90 or #96
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#316
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #86 & #96
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66, #67 or #316
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door plant; APE_ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM2 & AM6
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
•
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-40-
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series VALLEY FORGE BEADED #30400
ARLINGTON BEADED
#30600
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#92 or #99
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#81
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #99
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #81
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM2
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
•
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2 Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-41-
Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series COVINGTON #31200
CONCORD #31300
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#83
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#83
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #83
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #83
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-42-
Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series CHARLESTON #37400
CHISHOLM BEADED
#37500
TOP SELLING DOOR
TOP SELLING DOOR
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#88 or #93
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#81
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #88
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #81
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM1 & AM3
Applied Moldings
AM1
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• • •
• •
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1 & AM3 Watch out for door minimums. Top selling door.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-43-
Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM1. Top selling door.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series TIMBERLINE #38100
DELANO #38300
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
11 3/4 x 11 1/4 -or- 8 3/4 x 14 1/4
Minimum Size
11 1/4 x 14 1/4 -or- 14 1/4 x 11 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#94
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#383
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• •
•
#65 door edge recommended when using the #25 drawer front with this door. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-44-
Watch out for door minimums. If below minimum, door will revert to the #90500 style and minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series WINDSOR BEADED
TUSCAN #38400
#46000
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 1/2 x 9 1/4 -or- 7 1/2 x 12 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3x3
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4 (top rail 2 1/4 at center)
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#384
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#81
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #81
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert?????
Mullions
Colonial
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• • •
Watch out for door minimums. On BLS, BLSS 33” cabinets, this door will revert to slab doors.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-45-
The lower door style to compliment this is #37500. Maximum door width is 24” Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beaded Raised Panel Door Series HERITAGE BEADED
#77600
Mitered Door Series SOHO #98400
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 11 1/2 -or- 11 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3” rail and stiles
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All except Hickory and Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
#14
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#84
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#984
Edge Profile
All but #35, #66 & #67 on #84
Edge Profile
#14
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM2 & AM6
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• •
•
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2
• •
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-46-
7/16” Thick solid wood center panels Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Exceptions on Pocket doors include AM2 An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Design Overlay
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series STERLING RAISED
#94000
STERLING FLAT
#94500
7/16" Solid Wood
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 9/16 x 2 9/16
Stile / Rail Size
2 9/16 x 2 9/16
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#940
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#945
Edge Profile
#65
Edge Profile
#65
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Applied Moldings
AM7
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
•
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-47-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series STANTON RAISED
#95000
STANTON FLAT
#95500
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 9/16 x 2 9/16
Stile / Rail Size
2 9/16 x 2 9/16
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#950
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#955
Edge Profile
#65
Edge Profile
#65
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
AM7
Applied Moldings
AM7
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into
•
7/16” thick solid wood center panel.
a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-48-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series CLAIRMONT #98000
BRADFORD #98100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 11/16 x 13 -or- 13 x 10 11/16
Minimum Size
10 11/16 x 13 -or- 13 x 10 11/16
Stile / Rail Size
3x3
Stile / Rail Size
2 9/16 x 2 9/16
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#980
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#981
Edge Profile
#65
Edge Profile
#65
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
No
Applied Moldings Pocket Doors
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
• • •
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Pocket doors not available on this door style due to panel rise. Watch out for door minimums.
• •
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-49-
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola) None Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Center panel may be MDF when ordering a painted finish w/out Aging (Distressing) #9 (burn thru). Watch out for door minimums. An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay. WARNING: Should be sold with glaze packages only.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series CHELMSFORD #99000
ALCOTT #99100
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
8 3/4 x 11 3/4 -or- 11 3/4 x 8 3/4
Minimum Size
10 11/16 x 13 -or- 13 x 10 11/16
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3x3
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#12
Slab Drawer Fronts
#13
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#990
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#992
Edge Profile
#12 only available on this door
Edge Profile
#13
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola) NA (Discovery)
None
Applied Moldings
None
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends Applied Moldings Pocket Doors NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
Watch out for door minimums.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
• •
#990 drawer front will not work on standard overlay top drawers due to 6 1/4” minimum height. Watch out for door minimums. An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-50-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series ALCOTT FLAT
#99200
RALSTON FLAT
#99300
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 11/16 x 13 -or- 13 x 10 11/16
Minimum Size
8 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 8
Stile / Rail Size
3x3
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/2 x 2 1/2
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#13
Slab Drawer Fronts
#60
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#992
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#993
Edge Profile
#13
Edge Profile
#60
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
• •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. Watch out for door minimums.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-51-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mitered Door Series RALSTON BEADBOARD #99400
STONEWALL #99500
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
8 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 8
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/2 x 2 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#60
Slab Drawer Fronts
None
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#994
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#995
Edge Profile
#60
Edge Profile
#11 only available on this door
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Inserts
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
None
Applied Moldings
None
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
Grooves are 1 1/2” on center.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
• •
7/16” thick solid wood center panel. This door will be available with a 5-piece drawer front. Any fronts that fall below minimum will be slab with a 3/16” 45º bevel.
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-52-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series CHISHOLM CLASSIC w/ AM1
#30001
LEXINGTON #30103 w/ AM3
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8001
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9303
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8001
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9303
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM3
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
• • •
•
#15, #35, #66, #67, & #70 edge profiles not available on the #8001 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-53-
#35 edge profile not available on #9303 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series VALLEY FORGE RAISED #30202 w/ AM2
VALLEY FORGE BEADED #30402 w/ AM2
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9802
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9902
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9802
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9902
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM2
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM2
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
• •
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9802 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-54-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9902 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series CHARLESTON w/ AM1
#37401
CHARLESTON #37403 w/ AM3
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9301
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9303
Edge Profile
All
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9303
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM3
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• • •
Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-55-
#35 edge profile not available on #9303 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series CHISHOLM BEADED w/ AM1
#37501
DELANO w/ AM1
#38301
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
11 1/4 x 14 1/4 -or- 14 1/4 x 11 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8101
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#38301
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8101
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), No (Discovery) Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS • •
NOTES / CAUTIONS
#15, #35, #66, #67, & #70 edge profiles not available on the #8101 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-56-
Watch out for door minimums. If below minimum, door will revert to the #90500 style and minimums.?????
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series SHAKER #70003 w/ AM3
SHAKER #70001 w/ AM1
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9601
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9003
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9601
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM3
Pocket Doors
No Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS • •
NOTES / CAUTIONS
#15, #35, #66, #67, & #70 edge profiles not available on the #9601 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
• •
•
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-57-
#35 edge profile not available on #9003 front & #70003 door. This door style has 2 1/4” rails & stiles, the AM3 molding is 1 1/16” wide which leaves only 1 3/16” exposed; larger door edges may not be pleasing to the overall appearance. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series SHAKER #70004 w/ AM4
SHAKER #70014 w/ AM14
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9604
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9614
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9604
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9614
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM4
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM14
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
•
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9604 front. Micro bevel on rails and stiles
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-58-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on the #9614 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series VALLEY FORGE w/ AM4
#70104
VALLEY FORGE w/ AM12
#70112
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x10
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8904
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8912
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8904
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8912
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM4 Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM12
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
• •
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #8904 front. Watch out for door minimums. Micro bevel on rails and stiles.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-59-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #8912 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series VALLEY FORGE w/ AM14
#70114
BELMONT #71404 w/ AM4
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x10
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 13 -or- 10 1/2 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8914 & #9214
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9604
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8914
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9604
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM4
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM14
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS • • • •
•
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #8914 front. The minimum size on the #9214 front is 6 1/4” x 11 1/2”, fronts below minimum will revert to the #8914. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
• •
-60-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9604 front. Watch out for door minimums. Micro bevel on rails and stiles.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series BEADBOARD SHAKER w/ AM1
BEADBOARD SHAKER w/ AM4
#72001
#72004
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9601
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9604
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9601
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9604
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM4
Pocket Doors
No Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS • •
NOTES / CAUTIONS
#15, #35, #66, #67, & #70 edge profiles not available on the #9601 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
• •
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-61-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9604 front. Micro bevel on rails and stiles.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series BEADBOARD SHAKER w/ AM14
#72014
HERITAGE BEADED w/ AM2
#77602
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9614
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8402
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9614
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8402
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM14
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM2
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
•
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #9614 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•
-62-
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #8402 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series HERITAGE CLASSIC w/ AM2
STAFFORD #90001 w/ AM1
#77802
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/4 x 2 1/4
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#8602
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9501
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #8602
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM2
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
•
•
•
#35, #66, & #67 edge profiles not available on #8602 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-63-
Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series SALEM w/ AM1
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9301
Edge Profile
All
Mullions
SALEM #90103 w/ AM3
#90101
Colonial or Prairie Style
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
10 x 13 -or- 13 x 10
Stile / Rail Size
3 1/2 x 3 1/2
Wood Species
All but Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
All
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#9303
Edge Profile
All w/ exceptions on #9303
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Raised Panel Ends
Yes (Heartland), Door Plant; APE__ (Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM1
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM3
Pocket Doors
No
Pocket Doors
No
NOTES / CAUTIONS
NOTES / CAUTIONS
• •
• •
Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding. Watch out for door minimums.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-64-
#35 edge profile not available on #9303 front. Pocket doors are not available due to applied molding.
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Molding Series STERLING #94007 w/ AM7
OPTION
AVAILABILITY
Minimum Size
7 1/2 x 10 1/2 -or- 10 1/2 x 7 1/2
Stile / Rail Size
2 1/2 x 2 1/2
Wood Species
All but Hickory & Craftwood
Slab Drawer Fronts
#65
5 Pc. Drawer Front
#94007
Edge Profile
#65
Mullions
Colonial or Prairie Style Insert
Prep for Glass
Yes
Lattice
Yes
Raised Panel Ends
Door Plants; APE__ (Heartland/Revola)
Applied Moldings
Comes w/ AM7
Pocket Doors
Yes (Heartland/Revola)
NOTES / CAUTIONS •
AM7 is available in soft maple only
•
An 1/8” fill must be used on any cabinet that butts into a wall or deeper cabinet with this door style in Designer Overlay.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-65-
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
Solid Slab Drawer Fronts
OGEE SLAB
#10
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 x 7
CHELMSFORD SLAB
#12
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 x 7
REVERSED BEAD SLAB
#13
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 x 7
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH THE #99000 DOOR
SOHO SLAB
#14
Minimum Size: 4 3/4 X 7
BEADED SLAB
#15
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 x 7
DOUBLE-CUT SLAB
#30
DESIGNER SLAB Minimum Size: 4 3/4 x 7
RECOMMENDED W/ RAISED PANEL DOOR W/ #10 EDGE. REVERTS TO #10 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM.
RECOMMENDED W/ WIDE RAIL & STILE DOORS. REVERTS TO #10 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM.
1/8” ROUND-OVER SLAB
#65
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 x 7
BEVELED SLAB
DOUBLE-ROUND SLAB
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
#35
SQUARE SLAB
#66
DECOR SLAB Minimum Size: 4 x 7
REVERTS TO #10 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM.
REVERTS TO #65 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM.
#70
-66-
#60
Minimum Size: 2 1/2 X 7
Minimum Size: 4 x 7
Minimum Size: 3 X 7
#25
RECOMMENDED W/ THE #38100 DOOR W/ #65 EDGE. REVERTS TO #65 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM. *7/8” THICK
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH THE #98400 DOOR. REVERTS TO #65 EDGE IF BELOW MINIMUM.
Minimum Size: 4 3/4 X 7
RAISED BEAD SLAB Minimum Size: 4 3/4 x 7
#67
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
Veneer Slab Drawer Fronts
CONTEMPO II HOR. GRAIN
#62
Minimum Size: 3 3/8 X 7
CONTEMPO II VER. GRAIN #502 Minimum Size: 4 3/4 X 7
3-PIECE FRONT
#74
Minimum Size: 4 x 9 3/4 Stiles: 3 1/2” with micro-bevel
CONTEMPO I HOR. GRAIN
#63
CONTEMPO I VER. GRAIN
#501
Minimum Size: 3 3/8 X 7
Minimum Size: 3 3/8 X 7
3/16” EDGEBANDING TO MATCH #50100 DOOR
3/16” EDGEBANDING TO MATCH #50100 DOOR
ALL 3 OF THESE DRAWER FRONTS ARE AVAILABLE AS TOP DRAWER FRONTS ONLY. PLEASE NOTE SOMEWHERE, NEED TO ORDER DFSM/B ON DEEPER DRAWERS
3-PIECE FRONT
#33
Minimum Size: 4 x 7 Stiles: 2 1/4”
3-PIECE FRONT
#34
Minimum Size: 4 X 9 3/4 Stiles: 3 1/2”
One-Piece MDF Drawer Fronts
1-PC VALLEJO MISSION #77-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
1-PC WIDE STILE CLASSIC RAISED #87-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” 1/2” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
1-PC MODESTO MISSION #78-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
1-PC SPECIAL SHAKER #89-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
-67-
1-PC CLASSIC RAISED
#80-1PC
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
1-PC SHAKER
#90-1PC
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
Door & Drawer Styles ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
One-Piece MDF Drawer Fronts
1-PC WIDE STILE SHAKER #92-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
1-PC WIDE STILE SHAKER #93-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
1-PC FLAT PANEL
#95-1PC
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
1-PC NARROW RAIL SHAKER #96-1PC • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
Five-Piece Flat Panel Drawer Fronts
SAVOY FLAT
#317
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO:11 3/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¾” S
MESA FLAT
#706
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
DELANO FLAT
#383
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
CRAFTSMAN FLAT • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO:11 3/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¾” S
TUSCAN FLAT
#716
SANTIAGO MISSION • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO:11 3/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¾” S
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section. w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-68-
#384
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO:11 3/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3” S
#717
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
Five-Piece Flat Panel Drawer Fronts
VALLEJO MISSION
#77
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SHAKER #90 • Minimum Size: 5 ¾ x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
WIDE STILE FLAT
#93
#96
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
TAOS 3 1/2
#78
SHAKER WITH COVE
MIXED FLAT
#91
#94
TAOS 2 1/4
#730
WIDE STILE SHAKER
FLAT PANEL
TAOS 2 3/4 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO:11 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¾” S
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-69-
#92
#95
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
#732
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO: 11 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
#89
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” FO:10 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13” 1/2” DO: 11 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SPECIAL SHAKER • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” FO:12” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
NARROW RAIL SHAKER
MODESTO MISSION • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
#731
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
Five-Piece Beadboard Panel Drawer Fronts
MIXED BEADBOARD
#76
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
STAFFORD BEADBOARD • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
MESA BEADBOARD
#703
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
#920
SALEM BEADBOARD
SHAKER BEADBOARD • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
#921
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 X 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
Beadboard drawer fronts will not line up w/ beadboord doors when used with a super drawer
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section. w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-70-
#720
Door & Drawer Styles HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
Five-Piece Raised Panel Drawer Fronts
CLASSIC RAISED
#80
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
MIXED CLASSIC RAISED
#82
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
WIDE STILE CLASSIC RAISED #87 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
COMBO CLASSIC RAISED
SHAKER CLASSIC RAISED
#86
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
#98
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
WILSON RAISED
#316
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 12 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:14 1/2” DO:12 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¾” S
Five-Piece Beaded Raised Panel Drawer Fronts
BEADED RAISED
#81
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
WIDE STILE BEADED RAISED #88 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
MIXED BEADED RAISED
#83
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
COMBO BEADED RAISED
SHAKER BEADED RAISED • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
#99
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section. w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-71-
#84
Door & Drawer Styles ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Five-Piece Mitered Drawer Fronts
STERLING RAISED
#940
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cab Width: SO: 9” DO: 9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 9/16” R, 1 9/16” S
STANTON FLAT
#955
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cab Width: SO: 9” DO: 9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 9/16” R, 1 9/16” S
SOHO FLAT
#984
RALSTON FLAT
#945
CLAIRMONT #980
CHELMSFORD #990
USE CAUTION WHEN ORDERING THE #990 FRONT, DUE TO LARGER MINIMUM REQUIREMENT TOP & SOME MIDDLE FRONTS MAY RESULT IN SLABS.
RALSTON BEADBOARD • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 9 • Min. Cab Width: SO:11” DO: 9 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¾” R, 1 ¾” S
BRADFORD #981
#994
BEADBOARD DF WILL NOT LINE UP W/ BEADBOARD DOORS.
ALCOTT FLAT
-72-
#992
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
STONEWALL #995 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section. w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
#950
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cab Width: SO: 9” DO: 9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ½” R, 1 ½” S
• Minimum Size: 6 1/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
#993
STANTON RAISED • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cab Width: SO: 9” DO: 9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 9/16” R, 1 9/16” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO:10 3/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 9 • Min. Cab Width: SO:11” DO: 9 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¾” R, 1 ¾” S
STERLING FLAT • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cab Width: SO: 9” DO: 9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 9/16” R, 1 9/16” S
Door & Drawer Styles ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Five-Piece Applied Molding Drawer Fronts
DELANO FLAT W/AM1
#38301
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8 • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
SHAKER BEADED RAISED W/AM2 #8402 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SPECIAL SHAKER W/AM12
#8912
WIDE STILE SHAKER W/AM1 #9201
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
#8001
SHAKER CLASSIC RAISED W/AM2 #8602 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
CLASSIC RAISED W/AM1
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SPECIAL SHAKER W/AM14 #8914 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
WIDE STILE SHAKER W/AM14 #9214 • Minimum Size: 6 1/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
USE CAUTION WHEN ORDERING THE #9214 FRONT, DUE TO LARGER MINIMUM REQUIREMENT TOP & SOME MIDDLE FRONTS MAY REVERT TO THE #8914 OR SLAB FRONT.
-73-
BEADED RAISED W/AM1
#8101
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SPECIAL SHAKER W/AM4
#8904
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
SHAKER W/AM3
#9003
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
WIDE STILE FLAT W/AM1 #9301 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
Door & Drawer Styles ALL DRAWER FRONTS ARE 3/4” THICK*
HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Five-Piece Applied Molding Drawer Fronts
WIDE STILE FLAT W/AM3 #9303 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 11 1/2 • Min. Cab Width: SO:13 1/2” DO:11 7/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
NARROW RAIL SHAKER W/AM1 #9601 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
COMBO CLASSIC RAISED W/AM2 #9802 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” 1/2” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
STERLING RAISED W/AM7 #94007 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 7 • Min. Cabinet Width: SO:9” DO:9” • Rails & Stiles: 1 9/16” R, 1 9/16” S
NARROW RAIL SHAKER W/AM4 #9604 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
FLAT PANEL W/AM1
NARROW RAIL SHAKER W/AM14 #9614 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” 1/2” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
COMBO BEADED RAISED W/AM2 #9902 • Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 14 • Min. Cab Width: SO:16” 1/2” DO: 14 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 1 ¼” R, 3 ½” S
See Narrow Rail 5-pc Drawer Front Section at the beginning of the Door Section. w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-74-
#9501
• Minimum Size: 5 3/4 x 10 • Min. Cab Width: SO:12” DO: 10 3/8” • Rails & Stiles: 2 ¼” R, 2 ¼” S
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Wall Section WALL CABINET INFORMATION.................................................... 2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION....................................................... 3 – 4 BLIND INFO......................................................................................... 25 ANGLED WALLS Wall Angle...................................................................................... 27 Extended Wall Angle................................................................. 27 Angle End Wall.............................................................................28 APPLIANCE GARAGE Appliance Garage Diagonal (tambour or door)..............20 Microwave built –in w/ Appliance Garage..........................18 Appliance Garage (tambour or door).................................. 15 Wall w/ Appliance Garage (tambour or door).................14 Microwave built –in w/ Appliance Garage..........................18 Wall Corner Diagonal w/ Appliance Garage...................... 21 Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG....................................... 23 BLIND CABINETS Blind Corner Walls............................................................... 24-25 Blind Corner Wall Peninsula....................................................26 COMBINED WALLS Combination Wall......................................................................... 13 Wall w/ Appliance Garage (tambour or door).................14 Wall Corner Diagonal w/ Appliance Garage...................... 21 Microwave built –in w/ Appliance Garage..........................18 Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG....................................... 23 Wall Plate Rack............................................................................ 35 CORNER CABINETS Wall Easy Reach..........................................................................24 COUNTERTOP TALL WALL CABINETS Combination Wall......................................................................... 13 WALL DRAWER.................................................................................... 11 Wall w/ Appliance Garage (tambour or door).................14 Microwave built –in w/ Appliance Garage..........................18 Microwave Countertop...............................................................19 Appliance Garage (tambour or door).................................. 15 Appliance Garage Diagonal....................................................20 Wall Corner Diagonal w/ Appliance Garage...................... 21 Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG....................................... 23 CUBBY CABINETS Wall Cubby Unit...........................................................................30 Wall Cubby Organizer...............................................................34 DIAGONAL CORNER CABINETS Wall Corner Diagonal..................................................................19 Appliance Garage Diagonal....................................................20 Wall Corner Diagonal w/ Appliance Garage...................... 21 Wall Lazy Susan............................................................................ 21 Corner Microwave....................................................................... 22 Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG....................................... 23 FILLERS Wall Panel Filler...........................................................................43 Wall Box Filler.............................................................................. 44 HOODS Basic Wood Hoods.....................................................................36 Flaired Wood Hoods..................................................................36 Valance Hood................................................................................ 37 Hood w/ Mantel........................................................................... 37 Curved Hood.................................................................................38 Wood Hood Fascia.....................................................................39 Custom Hood 1............................................................................ 40 Custom Hood 2.............................................................................41 Wood Hood Platform................................................................42
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
MEDICINE CABINETS Recessed Medicine Cabinet....................................................29 Surface Mount Medicine Cabinet..........................................29 Tri-View Medicine Cabinet.......................................................29 MICROWAVE CABINETS Microwave wall.............................................................................. 17 Microwave built-in........................................................................18 Microwave built –in w/ Appliance Garage..........................18 Microwave Countertop...............................................................19 Corner Microwave....................................................................... 22 OPEN SHELF (FINISHED INTERIOR) Wall Top Open Shelf................................................................... 12 Wall Bottom Open Shelf............................................................ 12 Microwave wall.............................................................................. 17 Corner Microwave....................................................................... 22 Wall Bath Open Shelf – 10” Deep..........................................28 Wall Cubby Unit...........................................................................30 Wall Plate Rack............................................................................ 35 What-Not Wall Shelf..................................................................42 PENINSULA WALLS Wall Peninsula...................................................................... 15 – 16 Blind Corner Wall Peninsula....................................................26 SPECIALTY CABINETS Wall Wine Holder........................................................................36 STANDARD WALLS Wall 12” – 18” tall............................................................................ 5 Wall 21”-27” tall.............................................................................. 6 Wall 30” – 36” tall..........................................................................7 Wall 39” – 48” tall.......................................................................... 8 Wall 54” – 60” tall......................................................................... 9 Three-Door Wall Cabinet..........................................................10 Wall Peninsula...................................................................... 15 – 16 Wall Bath Cabinets -10” Deep................................................28 STORAGE CABINETS Wall Lazy Susan............................................................................ 21 Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG....................................... 23 Wall Spice Pull-Out Cabinet....................................................30 REFRIGERATOR WALL 24” Deep refrigerator Wall.......................................................10 WALL W/ DRAWERS Wall Drawer..................................................................................... 11 Microwave Countertop...............................................................19 Wall Apothecary Unit – Standard Drawers........................ 31 Wall Apothecary w/ Exposed Dovetails............................. 32 Wall Apothecary Unit – Exposed Dovetails....................... 31 Wall Apothecary w/ Standard Drawers..............................33 WINE STORAGE Wall Wine Holder........................................................................36
-1-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Cabinet Information Helpful Notes About the Wall Cabinet Section • • • • • • • •
All wall cabinets are 12” deep unless stated otherwise. Minimum depth reduction is 4" deep as final size, otherwise custom quote is required. All wall cabinets have full depth adjustable shelves. All wood hood cabinets will have edgebanding on the bottom of the plywood side end panels You cannot reduce the height on a wall cabinet to less than ll” due to hinging problems, unless using the HDT modification. Selected wall cabinets will have base shoe molding added under the cabinet to help support the floor. This mainly affects the Wall Easy Reach and Walls with an Extended Bottom Rail. Flip-up pocket door is available on a single door appliance garage. This requires a minimum 18” deep cabinet and the cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOMWALL then add PD & HDT as a modification. HDT is available on the lower portion of the appliance garage cabinet; the door will not retract like it would on a pocket door. The cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOMWALL then add HDT as a modification. When adding finished interior, entire cabinet will be finished interior.
Oven Cabinet Cut-Outs In order to make the cabinet more stable during production and shipping, Custom Cupboards does not make a complete cut-out that is larger than 3” less than the overall cabinet width. We score the stile of the cabinet, starting and stopping 1 ½” from the top and bottom of the opening. Your trim carpenter will then finalize the cut on-site. The maximum cut-out for cabinets with: • Standard or Flush ends is 1 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width • One or both RPE is 2 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width • One or both BBE (3/8") is 2” less than the overall cabinet width These do not apply to corner cabinets requiring a cutout.
Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab. Minimum Cabinet Sizes for Wide Rail & Stile Doors (Stile not trimmed down); Minimum Door Size 13” W x 10” T • 28 1/8” W x 12 ¼” T for a standard overlay butt door cabinet • 15” W x 12 ¼” T for a standard overlay single door cabinet • 26 5/8” W x 11” T for a full overlay butt door cabinet • 13 1/2” W x 11” T for a full overlay single door cabinet • 26 1/2” W x 10 1/2” T (1/4” top reveal) or 11” T (3/4” top reveal) for a designer overlay butt door cabinet • 13 3/8” W x 10 1/2” T (1/4” top reveal) or 11” T (3/4” top reveal) for a designer overlay single door cabinet Minimum Cabinet Sizes for Wide Rail & Stile Doors (Stile not trimmed down); Minimum Door Size 10”W X 13” T • 22 1/8” W x 15 ¼” T for a standard overlay butt door cabinet • 12” W x 15 ¼” T for a standard overlay single door cabinet • 20 5/8” W x 14” T for a full overlay butt door cabinet • 10 1/2” W x 14” T for a full overlay single door cabinet • 20 1/2” W x 13 1/2” T (1/4” top reveal) or 14” T (3/4” top reveal) for a designer overlay butt door cabinet • 10 3/8” W x 13 1/2” T (1/4” top reveal) or 14” T (3/4” top reveal) for a designer overlay single door cabinet
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-2-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Construction Wall Cabinets: 12" D and 1 1/2" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets.
18" on 21" 15" on 18" 12" on 15" 9" on 12"
21
W_12-21
33" on 36" 30" on 33" 27" on 30" 24" on 27"
39" on 42" 36" on 39"
57" on 60" 51" on 54" 45" on 48"
27
39
33
W_24 W_27-36
3 3 W_39-42
3
5 W_48-60
W_48AG & WCD_48AG
5
WD_48
5
WD_54
W_54AG & WCD_54AG
NOTE: 34" TALL VARIES DOOR
10
10
VARIES DOOR
16
33
34
22
16
40
3
46
18
33
AGONALS DIAGONALS 45
MWCD_40
3
MWB_46 24
27
36
TOP VIEW
10 36
45
39
42
WBC_30
WBC_30OS
22
15
26 20
227
15
12 24
24
2
27
24
24
TOP VIEW
2
WMCSM_30
WMC_30
17
17 12
WMC_24 15
BA24_
45
42 15
39 36
24
24
1 25 2 *
3 29 4 *
WCD24__ WLS24__ WLSS24
65°
65° 15 open 9
AEW
WA12_
AEB24
27
1 21 4 *
24 1 25 2 *
12 12
17
12 15
-3-
3 29 4 * 12
BTC12L_
15 12
12
24
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
17
12
WER24_
17
6 open
3 12123/4 4
27 24
WCD24_ WER 24_ / WLS24_ / WLSS24_
WCD27_ / WLS27_ / WLSS27_
65° 65°
WER27__
12 12
WCD24_ / WLS24_ / WLSS24_ 17 *
24
6 open
AEW12_
17
15
24
27 24
3 12 3/4 12 4
24 24
12
WLSS27_
15 open 12
17 12
12 12
15
ons across the front of Dimensions base corner across diagonals. the front of base corner diagonals. 36 17 inch. up to the nearest quarter inch. sions quarter dimensions rounded 39 rounded up to the * 42 TOP VIEW nearest
12
12
WCD24_ / WLS24_ / WLSS24_ AEB24 AEW12_
WER24__
WCD27__ WLS27__ WLSS27
17
65° 65°
12
24 24
27
3 29 4 * 12
65°
24
12
4
12
12
12
1224
1217
WA12
12
MWC T_60
24
WCD24_ / WLS24_ / W WLSS24_ BA24_ A12_ 17 * Note:17 *These cabinets will have 1/4" backs to maximize interior space WCD27_ / WLS27_ / WLSS27_ WCD27_ / WLS27_ / WLSS27_ 1 1 21 * 21 * 1 25 2 *
24
12
24 12
2
15
12
65°
1 1/2"
DIAGONALS
3 5
MWC T_54 24 12
12
4
24
5
2
27
TVMC_
3
MWC T_48
1 1/2"
27
18
5
42 39
36
39
2
45
39
36
27
3 18
MW_46
42
18
VARIES MICRO C.O.
MWB_40
28
3
18
MWCD_34 MW_40
22
3 3
3 VARIES MICRO C.O.
MWB_34
16
VARIES DOOR
3
VARIES MICRO C.O.
MW_34
NOTE: 46" TALL
NOTE: 40" TALL
APG_17 & APGD_17
W_60AG & WCD_60AG
WD_60
BTC12L_
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Construction Wall Cabinets: 12" D and 1 1/2" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets.
25 1/2"
6
W1236WC
W2736WC
6
W3336WC W3036WC
W3936WC
W3636WC
W3336WC
201/2
25 1/2" 201/2
4
4
33/4
54
6
W1830AD
33/4 5
5
201/2
51/4 5
51/4
41/8
441/8
441/8
441/8
VALANCE 201/2 1/2 20
33/44 W2730AD 33/4 4 5 4W2130AD
5 51/4
W4536WC
W1530AD
W1830AD W1230AD
VALANCE
4 7/8 41/8
457/8
457/8
457/8
33/4 W2430AD W2130AD 5W1530AD 33/4 W1230AD W1830AD 51/4 51/4
W4236WC W1230AD
5 W2430AD 51/4
413/16
413/16
33/4 4 W3330AD 5 51/4 33/4
201/2
413/16343/4 3/16413/1641/4 43/4 3/16 55 43/4 3
3/16 453/16 4 1/4 14 541/4 1/441/4
W3630AD 3/16 4 551/4 4 5541/4 4 5W1530AD 43/16
W3030AD 4 5 51/4W1230AD 4 33/4 51/433/4 5
VALANCE VALANCE
8
VALANCE VALANCE
14 20
201/2
14 4 1/4
45/16
201/2
20 1/2
5
W4836WC
W2430AD W1830AD
5 47/8
201/2
41/4W1830AD 5 41/8443/16 541/84 W3330AD 4 1/8 443/16 14
W2430AD W1830AD W2130AD W2430AD
PRC_36 20 1/2
PRC_42
26 1/2
13 1/2
13 1/2 19 1/2
W_42AD 19 1/2
25 1/2
43/4 47/8 43/447/8 4 3/4 4 7/8 43/4 4 7/8 43/4 1314 1/2"
VALANCE VALANCE VALANCE WBO_36
8
8 88
WTO_30 WTO_30 W3930AD W3630AD
12 VALANCE VALANCE VALANCE VALANCE
VALANCE VALANCE VALANCE
WBO_42 8 88
12
14
14
W3330ADPRC_36 W3030ADPRC_36 W3630ADW_36AD W3330AD W3030AD W3330AD W4230AD
PRC_42
PRC_42
W3930AD W3630AD W3630AD W4530AD W4230AD WBO_36 W_36AD 5 5
W_42AD
W_42AD
201/2
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m 201/2
-4-
14
PRC_30 PRC_30 PRC_36 20 1/2
1920 1/2"
14
41/4 45/16
41/4 45/16
1920 1/2" 20 45/16 45/16 43/4 45/16 43/4 45/16 4 3/4
2614
26 1/2 45/16 43/4
5/16 443/4 14 2526 1/2"
12
12
WBO_42
WBO_42
W3930AD WBO_36
W3930AD W4830AD W4530AD WTO_36 WTO_36 PRC_36 WTO_36 PRC_36
WTO_42
43/4
26 1
5
5
44W_30AD 3/4 443/4 5/16 45/16 45/1645/16W_30AD 5/16 411/16 43/4 45/16 45/16 5 14 14
PRC_36
PRC_ 32 1/2
25 1/2 1414
4
14
WTO_42
20 1/2
14
43/4
W3930AD
VALANCE WTO_36
8
1314 1/2"
13/16 413/16 43/4 443/4 4 11/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 41/4 43/4 441/4 3/4 41/4 43/4 41/4 443/4 4 1/4413/16 4W4830AD 5/16 1/4 441/4 45/16 41/4 11/16 43/4 4 1/4 11/16 441/4 45/16 45/16 11/16 41/4 4413/16 443/4 13/16 3/4 4 3/4 43/4 1/4 43/445/1643/4 4 3/445/16 43/4 3/4 413/16441/4 413/16 41/4 41/4 43/4 3/4 41/4444 3/4 PRC_30 45/16 41/4 43/441/4 45/16 11/1641/4 41/4 3/4 41/4 43/4 45/16 411/16 W4530AD W4830AD 45/16 444 1/4 4 5/16 11/16PRC_30 3/4 W3330AD W3630AD W3930AD W4830AD 413/16 4 4513/16 4W_30AD 45/16 W4230AD41/4 WTO_30 W_30AD WTO_30 WBO_30 5 54 1/45 WBO_30
43/16 W4530AD 413/16 3/443/164413/16 3/16 43/16 W4230AD W3030AD 413/16 41/4 443/16 5PRC_30 5 43/16 43/16 PRC_30
43/4
20 447/8 43/4 41/4 4 3/4 41/443/4 41/443/4 41/4 43/441/4 43/4 1/4 2614
W2730AD
VALANCE
14
11/16 13/16 411/16 41/4 45/1641/4 45/1641/4 45/1641/4 1/4411/16 5/16 43/44 1/4 4411/16 45/16 411/16 43/4 443/16 5/16 1/4 5/1643/4 443/16 411/16 43/4 413/16 45/16 43/445/1643/4 13/1645/164411/16 45/16 43/445/1644 511/16 443/16 13/16 1/4 54 5 443/16 5 14 14 12 12
8 14
20
32 1/2 12
5
78 8 1/2"
VALAN
25 1/2
WBO_30 W2430AD W2730AD W3630AD W3330AD W3630AD
W_36AD
32 1/2 201/2 26 1/2
5
VALANCE VALANCE
20
32 1/2
W_30AD W2130AD W2730AD W2430AD W3330AD W3030AD W3030AD
47/8
47/8
W2730AD
VALANCE VALANCE
8
19 1/2
20 1/2
41/8
W2730AD W2430AD
W2130AD
447/8 4 1/4 7/8 4W2430AD 13/16 451/84513/16 4 7/8 1/847/8 41/8 447/8 41/4 41/44 7/8 1/4 43/16 4 3/16 41/8 7/84 47/8413/16 5W3930AD 5 41/8 5441/8 41/4441/8 1/4 4W2730AD 44 13/16 443/4 13/16 W3630AD W3930AD 13/16 3/4 413/16 W2130AD 457/8 43/16 1/8 47/8 1/8 47/8 4 1/4 4413/16 4 3/16 12
14
41/84 7/8 41/84 7/8 41/8
47/8
VALANCE
3/441/4 41/8 41/4 41/4 413/16 5 413/16 3/4 41/4 441/8 41/4413/16 43/4 5 4 3/4 5 4 1/443/4 41/4443/4 1/8 41/4 41/8 4 41/4 4413/1641/4 4 43/4 26 1/2 12
20
14
41/8 541/8 441/8W2730AD
41/8
4
4 7/8
4 7/8
47/8
47/8
13 1/2
8 201/2 1/214 20
1/2
VALANCE
41/8
VALANCE
14
PRC_30 D W1230AD W1830ADW1530AD W1230AD W2130AD W1530AD W1830AD W3030AD W1230AD W1830AD VALANCE
5
W2130AD W1530AD
20
16
41/8
41/8
8
201/2
1/2
1/2
W2436WC
W2136WC
25 1/2"
1/4
16
W1836WC
W1536WC
W4830AD W_36AD
PRC_42 PRC_42 WTO_42 PRC_42 WTO_42
45/16 5
W_36 5
W_42A
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Standard Wall Cabinets 12”-18” Tall 12" Tall Wall Cabinets
Shown with butt doors
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. No shelf included on 12”-18” tall. Hinge placement on 12" tall wall cabinet doors will be 2 1/2" from the end to the center. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width & height cabinets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-5-
Shelves
Doors
W1212
0
1
W1512
0
1
W1812
0
1
W2112
0
1
W2412
0
1
W2412BD
0
2
W2712
0
2
W3012
0
2
W3312
0
2
W3612
0
2
W3912
0
2
W4212
0
2
W4512
0
2
W4812
0
2
W48124D
0
4
15” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W1215
0
1
W1515
0
1
W1815
0
1
W2115
0
1
W2415
0
1
W2415BD
0
2
W2715
0
2
W3015
0
2
W3315
0
2
W3615
0
2
W3915
0
2
W4215
0
2
W4515
0
2
W4815
0
2
W48154D
0
4
18” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W1218
0
1
W1518
0
1
W1818
0
1
W2118
0
1
W2418
0
1
W2418BD
0
2
W2718
0
2
W3018
0
2
W3318
0
2
W3618
0
2
W3918
0
2
W4218
0
2
W4518
0
2
W4818
0
2
W48184D
0
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Standard Wall Cabinets 21”-27” Tall 21” Tall Wall Cabinets
W1524L shown
W2727 shown with butt doors
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. No shelf included on 21” tall; one adjustable shelf on 24” tall & two adjustable shelves on 27” tall. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
Shelves
Doors
W1221
0
1
W1521
0
1
W1821
0
1
W2121
0
1
W2421
0
1
W2421BD
0
2
W2721
0
2
W3021
0
2
W3321
0
2
W3621
0
2
W3921
0
2
W4221
0
2
W4521
0
2
W4821
0
2
W48214D
0
4
24” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W924
1
1
W1224
1
1
W1524
1
1
W1824
1
1
W2124
1
1
W2424
1
1
W2424BD
1
2
W2724
1
2
W3024
1
2
W3324
1
2
W3624
1
2
W3924
1
2
W4224
1
2
W4524
1
2
W4824
1
2
W48244D
1
4
27” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W927
2
1
W1227
2
1
W1527
2
1
W1827
2
1
W2127
2
1
W2427
2
1
W2427BD
2
2
W2727
2
2
W3027
2
2
W3327
2
2
W3627
2
2
W3927
2
2
W4227
2
2
W4527
2
2
W4827
2
2
W48274D
2
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Standard Wall Cabinets 30”-36” Tall 30” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shown with butt doors
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with two adjustable shelves on 30”-36” tall. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-7-
Shelves
Doors
W930
2
1
W1230
2
1
W1530
2
1
W1830
2
1
W2130
2
1
W2430
2
1
W2430BD
2
2
W2730
2
2
W3030
2
2
W3330
2
2
W3630
2
2
W3930
2
2
W4230
2
2
W4530
2
2
W4830
2
2
W48304D
2
4
33” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W933
2
1
W1233
2
1
W1533
2
1
W1833
2
1
W2133
2
1
W2433
2
1
W2433BD W2733 W3033
2 2 2
2 2 2
W3333
2
2
W3633
2
2
W3933
2
2
W4233
2
2
W4533
2
2
W4833
2
2
W48334D
2
4
36” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W936
2
1
W1236
2
1
W1536
2
1
W1836
2
1
W2136
2
1
W2436
2
1
W2436BD
2
2
W2736
2
2
W3036
2
2
W3336
2
2
W3636
2
2
W3936
2
2
W4236
2
2
W4536
2
2
W4836
2
2
W48364D
2
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Standard Wall Cabinets 39”-48” Tall 39” Tall Wall Cabinets
W2739 shown with butt doors
W2748 shown with butt doors Notice doors become double panel in height
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with three adjustable shelves on 39”-42” tall; Four adjustable shelves on 48” tall. Doors 39 3/4” T & up come with 3 hinges per door unless mullion, glass or lattice door inserts are used, then 4 hinges per door. Standard Wall cabinets over 42” tall will receive double panel doors. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets. If mullions are ordered, on the 48” tall wall cabinet will have 8 lights. As a result, 1 adj. shelf is deleted from 48” tall wall cabinets. This results in the most pleasing spacing for mullion grids.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Shelves
Doors
W939
3
1
W1239
3
1
W1539
3
1
W1839
3
1
W2139
3
1
W2439
3
1
W2439BD
3
2
W2739
3
2
W3039
3
2
W3339
3
2
W3639
3
2
W3939
3
2
W4239
3
2
W4539
3
2
W4839
3
2
W48394D
3
4
42” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W942
3
1
W1242
3
1
W1542
3
1
W1842
3
1
W2142
3
1
W2442
3
1
W2442BD
3
2
W2742
3
2
W3042
3
2
W3342
3
2
W3642
3
2
W3942
3
2
W4242
3
2
W4542
3
2
W4842
3
2
W48424D
3
4
48” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W948
4
1
W1248
4
1
W1548
4
1
W1848
4
1
W2148
4
1
W2448
4
1
W2448BD
4
2
W2748
4
2
W3048
4
2
W3348
4
2
W3648
4
2
W3948
4
2
W4248
4
2
W4548
4
2
W4848
4
2
W48484D
4
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Standard Wall Cabinets 54"-60" Tall
Shown with butt doors Notice doors become double panel in height
Single Door Cabinet Shown Notice door becomes double panel in height
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with four adjustable shelves on 54”-60” tall. Comes with 3 hinges per door on 54”-60” tall unless mullion, glass or lattice door inserts are used, then 4 hinges per door. Standard Wall cabinets over 42” tall will receive double panel doors. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-9-
54” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W954
4
1
W1254
4
1
W1554
4
1
W1854
4
1
W2154
4
1
W2454
4
1
W2454BD
4
2
W2754
4
2
W3054
4
2
W3354
4
2
W3654
4
2
W3954
4
2
W4254
4
2
W4554
4
2
W4854
4
2
W48544D
4
4
60” Tall Wall Cabinets
Shelves
Doors
W960
4
1
W1260
4
1
W1560
4
1
W1860
4
1
W2160
4
1
W2460
4
1
W2460BD
4
2
W2760
4
2
W3060
4
2
W3360
4
2
W3660
4
2
W3960
4
2
W4260
4
2
W4560
4
2
W4860
4
2
W48604D
4
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
24” Deep Refrigerator Wall
W331824 shown as standard with middle stile
•• •• ••
Additional wall cabinets are available in the 24” deep configuration by adding a CD (change depth) modification charge to those cabinets. No shelf unless opening is 21” tall or greater. Watch out for door minimums on smaller height cabinets.
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
W331224
0
2
W361224
0
2
W391224
0
2
W331524
0
2
W361524
0
2
W391524
0
2
W331824
0
2
W361824
0
2
W391824
0
2
W332124
0
2
W362124
0
2
W392124
0
2
W332424
1
2
W362424
1
2
W392424
1
2
W332724
2
2
W362724
2
2
W392724
2
2
Three-Door Wall Cabinet
WALL3DL SHOWN WITH BUTT DOORS ON RIGHT
•• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet consists of a single door and a pair of doors. (Width-9)/3=opening to calculate single door opening. Hinge direction notates single door side. 3/4” partition is between the single & double doors. Butt doors are optional on the 2 door opening, standard on butt door jobs. No shelf unless opening is 21” tall or greater.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-10-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
W48243D
1
3
W48303D
2
3
W48363D
2
3
W48423D
3
3
W51243D
1
3
W51303D
2
3
W51363D
2
3
W51423D
3
3
W54243D
1
3
W54303D
2
3
W54363D
2
3
W54423D
3
3
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Drawer Cabinets 48” tall (recommended for 84” tall applications)
Shelves
Doors
WD1248
3
1
WD1548
3
1
WD1848
3
1
WD2148
3
1
WD2448
3
1
WD2448BD
3
2
WD2748
3
2
WD3048
3
2
WD3348
3
2
WD3648
3
2
Shelves
Doors
WD1254
3
1
WD1554
3
1
WD1854
3
1
WD2154
3
1
WD2454
3
1
WD2454BD
3
2
WD2754
3
2
WD3054
3
2
WD3354
3
2
WD3654
3
2
Shelves
Doors
54” tall (recommended for 90” tall applications)
60” tall (recommended for 96” tall applications)
Shown as standard with middle stile. Notice door becomes double panel in height.
•• •• •• •• •• ••
One full width drawer in a 5” tall opening. Additional drawers may be ordered and will reduce the door opening height. To order additional drawers use WD DRAWER QTY. Please state the total number of drawers using WD DRAWER QTY. If you want drawers side by side, cabinet must be entered as CUSTOMWALL then add DRAWER as a modification. Door height is over 42” on the 54” & 60” tall units. Door will become double panel in height, split equally. If depth is less than 11”, cabinet will not have drawer guides.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-11-
WD1260
3
1
WD1560
3
1
WD1860
3
1
WD2160
3
1
WD2460
3
1
WD2460BD
3
2
WD2760
3
2
WD3060
3
2
WD3360
3
2
WD3660
3
2
To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet Height - 7 3/4” for 1/4” top reveal Cabinet Height - 8 1/4” for 3/4” top reveal Std.Overlay: Cabinet Height - 8 3/4"
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Top Open Shelf Cabinet
WTO4530 Shown Above Shown as standard with middle stile
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Entire cabinet has a finished interior. Opening is 8” from bottom of valance to top of center rail; 6” tall valance. Center face frame rail is 1 ½” wide. RH (reduce height) will affect the door opening. WTO comes with a standard valance; others can be specified. Add WTO MODIFY as a modification to change the top opening height (Bottom of valance to top of center rail).
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WTO2730
0
2
WTO3030
0
2
WTO3330
0
2
WTO3630
0
2
WTO3930
0
2
WTO4230
0
2
WTO4530
0
2
WTO4830
0
2
WTO2736
0
2
WTO3036
0
2
WTO3336
0
2
WTO3636
0
2
WTO3936
0
2
WTO4236
0
2
WTO4536
0
2
WTO4836
0
2
WTO2742
1
2
WTO3042
1
2
WTO3342
1
2
WTO3642
1
2
WTO3942
1
2
WTO4242
1
2
WTO4542
1
2
WTO4842
1
2
Wall Bottom Open Shelf Cabinet
WBO4530 Shown Above Shown as standard with middle stile
•• •• •• •• ••
Entire cabinet has a finished interior. Open section on WBO is 12” tall. Center face frame rail is 1 ½” wide. RH (reduce height) will affect the door opening. Add WBO MODIFY as a modification to change bottom opening height.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-12-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WBO2730
0
2
WBO3030
0
2
WBO3330
0
2
WBO3630
0
2
WBO3930
0
2
WBO4230
0
2
WBO4530
0
2
WBO4830
0
2
WBO2736
0
2
WBO3036
0
2
WBO3336
0
2
WBO3636
0
2
WBO3936
0
2
WBO4236
0
2
WBO4536
0
2
WBO4836
0
2
WBO2742
1
2
WBO3042
1
2
WBO3342
1
2
WBO3642
1
2
WBO3942
1
2
WBO4242
1
2
WBO4542
1
2
WBO4842
1
2
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Combination Wall Cabinets
CWCID1242L Shown
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Changes in height will affect the bottom opening. 3” rail between top & bottom openings Top opening is 9”, bottom opening is 27” on 42" tall. Top opening is 12", bottom opening is 30" on 48" tall. Top opening is 15", bottom opening is 33" on 54" tall. Top opening is 18", bottom opening is 36" on 60" tall. CWC MODIFY can be added as a modification to change the top opening of this cabinet.
STOP Watch out for door minimums on upper section & smaller
width cabinets; most wide rail & still doors will be slab on standard overlay.
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
CWC1D948
2
2
CWC1D1248
2
2
CWC1D1548
2
2
CWC1D1848
2
2
CWC1D2148
2
2
CWC1D2448
2
2
CWC2D2748
2
4
CWC2D3048
2
4
CWC2D3348
2
4
CWC2D3648
2
4
CWC2D3948
2
4
CWC2D4248
2
4
CWC2D4548
2
4
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
CWC1D954
2
2
CWC1D1254
2
2
CWC1D1554
2
2
CWC1D1854
2
2
CWC1D2154
2
2
CWC1D2454
2
2
CWC2D2754
2
4
CWC2D3054
2
4
CWC2D3354
2
4
CWC2D3654
2
4
CWC2D3954
2
4
CWC2D4254
2
4
CWC2D4554
2
4
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
CWC1D960
3
2
CWC1D1260
3
2
CWC1D1560
3
2
CWC1D1860
3
2 2
CWC1D2160
3
CWC1D2460
3
2
CWC2D2760
3
4
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
CWC2D3060
3
4
CWC1D942
2
2
CWC2D3360
3
4
CWC1D1242
2
2
CWC2D3660
3
4
CWC1D1542
2
2
CWC2D3960
3
4
CWC1D1842
2
2
CWC2D4260
3
4
CWC1D2142
2
2
CWC2D4560
3
4
CWC1D2442
2
2
CWC2D2742
2
4
CWC2D3042
2
4
CWC2D3342
2
4
CWC2D3642
2
4
CWC2D3942
2
4
CWC2D4242
2
4
CWC2D4542
2
4
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-13-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall with Appliance Garage •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
STOP
Specify hinge direction on 18"-24" wide single door cabinets. Cabinet available with tambour or hinged doors. Finished ends must be specified Appliance garage opening 16 ½” tall. Use APGOH to modify the appliance garage opening height. Allow 1 ½” clearance for tambour handle. To modify to single door in appliance opening, use APG ONE DOOR as a modification. See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material. 3” middle rail. Watch out for door minimums in lower section on smaller width cabinets. See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding optional flip up pocket door.
W2754AG Shown
W3054AGD Shown
To figure upper door height:
Lower door height:
Designer Overlay: Opening + 2" for 3/4" top reveal Opening + 2 1/2" for 1/4" top reveal Std.Overlay: Opening + 3/4"
Designer Overlay: 17 7/8" Std.Overlay: 16 3/4"
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-14-
Appliance Garage w/ Tambour
Shelves
Doors
W1848_AG
2
1
W2148_AG
2
1
W2448_AG
2
1
W2448AGBD
2
2
W2748AG
2
2
W3048AG
2
2
W3348AG
2
2
W3648AG
2
2
W1854_AG
2
1
W2154_AG
2
1
W2454_AG
2
1
W2454AGBD
2
2
W2754AG
2
2
W3054AG
2
2
W3354AG
2
2
W3654AG
2
2
W1860_AG
3
1
W2160_AG
3
1
W2460_AG
3
1
W2460AGBD
3
2
W2760AG
3
2
W3060AG
3
2
W3360AG
3
2
W3660AG
3
2
Appliance Garage w/Doors
Shelves
Doors
W1848_AGD
2
3
W2148_AGD
2
3
W2448_AGD
2
3
W2448AGDBD
2
4
W2748AGD
2
4
W3048AGD
2
4
W3348AGD
2
4
W3648AGD
2
4
W1854_AGD
2
3
W2154_AGD
2
3
W2454_AGD
2
3
W2454AGDBD
2
4
W2754AGD
2
4
W3054AGD
2
4
W3354AGD
2
4
W3654AGD
2
4
W1860_AGD
3
3
W2160_AGD
3
3
W2460_AGD W2460AGDBD W2760AGD
3 3 3
3 4 4
W3060AGD
3
4
W3360AGD
3
4
W3660AGD
3
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Appliance Garage With Tambour
Shelves
Doors
APG1517
0
0
APG1817
0
0
APG2117
0
0
APG2417
0
0
APG2717
0
0
APG3017
0
0
APG3317
0
0
APG3617
0
0
With Doors
Shelves
Doors
APG1517D
0
2
APG1817D
0
2
APG2117D
0
2
APG2417D
0
2
APG2717D
0
2
APG3017D
0
2
APG3317D
0
2
APG3617D
0
2
Shelves
Doors
APG1517DL/R
0
1
APG1817DL/R
0
1
APG2117DL/R
0
1
APG2417DL/R
0
1
With 1 Door
•• •• •• •• ••
17 ¾” high by 11” deep. Fits under wall cabinet. 5 ft. of APGM trim (CTE1) included - must be entered as the next line after the cabinet. Both ends always finished. See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material.
••
Change height up to 18” at no charge by entering CHNC or the depth to 12” at no charge by entering CDNC. •• APG has a 2 1/2” top rail. •• Watch out for door minimums on smaller cabinets. See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of STOP this section for information regarding optional flip up pocket door.
Wall Peninsula
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on 12"-24" wide cabinets. Single door cabinets always hinged on same side. 24" wide is available with butt doors front and back. 48" wide unit is available with 2 sets of butt doors. No shelf included on 21" tall
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-15-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WP1221
0
2
WP1521
0
2
WP1821
0
2
WP2121
0
2
WP2421
0
2
WP2721
0
4
WP3021
0
4
WP3321
0
4
WP3621
0
4
WP3921
0
4
WP4221
0
4
WP4521
0
4
WP4821
0
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Peninsula Continued... •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on 12"-24" wide cabinets. Single door cabinets always hinged on same side. 24" wide is available with butt doors front and back. 48" wide unit is available with 2 sets of butt doors. Also available in 27", 33" & 39" heights. Comes with one shelf in 24" tall; two shelves in 30" & 36" tall; three shelves in 42" tall.
WP2724 Shown Here
WP2730 Shown Here
WP2742 Shown Here
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-16-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WP1224
1
2
WP1524
1
2
WP1824
1
2
WP2124
1
2
WP2424
1
2
WP2724
1
4
WP3024
1
4
WP3324
1
4
WP3624
1
4
WP3924
1
4
WP4224
1
4
WP4524
1
4
WP4824
1
4
WP1230
2
2
WP1530
2
2
WP1830
2
2
WP2130
2
2
WP2430
2
2
WP2730
2
4
WP3030
2
4
WP3330
2
4
WP3630
2
4
WP3930
2
4
WP4230
2
4
WP4530
2
4
WP4830
2
4
WP1236
2
2
WP1536
2
2
WP1836
2
2
WP2136
2
2
WP2436
2
2
WP2736
2
4
WP3036
2
4
WP3336
2
4
WP3636
2
4
WP3936
2
4
WP4236
2
4
WP4536
2
4
WP4836
2
4
WP1242
3
2
WP1542
3
2
WP1842
3
2
WP2142
3
2
WP2442
3
2
WP2742
3
4
WP3042
3
4
WP3342
3
4
WP3642
3
4
WP3942
3
4
WP4242
3
4
WP4542
3
4
WP4842
3
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Microwave Wall
Shown as standard With middle stile.
•• •• •• •• ••
12” deep with an 18 ¾” deep protruding shelf (constructed of 3/4” material with CTE2 edge). Cut-outs can be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Microwave opening width is 3” less than the cabinet x 17 1/4" high unless otherwise specified. If specifying frame cut-out, allow 3/4” in height for the thickness of the protruding shelf. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
MW2734
0
2
MW3034
0
2
MW3334
0
2
MW2740
0
2
MW3040
0
2
MW3340
0
2
MW2746
0
2
MW3046
0
2
MW3346
0
2
••
Entire cabinet will have a finished interior and has a 1/2” back. Door overlaps mid-rail ½” on designer overlay and 3/8” on standard overlay. If you change the depth to 21” or deeper you will not get a protruding shelf. 3” middle rail.
STOP
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
••
STOP
-17-
Wide rail & stile doors may not meet minimum height requirements. Call your Account Manager for options to keep the 5 piece door.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Microwave Built-In
Shown as standard With middle stile.
•• •• •• ••
•• ••
Cabinet is 21” deep but you can change depth to 24” for no charge by adding CDNC as a modification. Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH Does not come with a finished interior, has a ½” continuous back and requires the use of a trim kit. Door overlaps mid-rail ½” on designer overlay and 3/8” on standard overlay. Finished interior can be added for additional charges. (FI) Entire cabinet would then be finished. Will receive an adjustable shelf in the upper section only if the opening height is 21” or greater.
••
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
MWB2734
0
2
MWB3034
0
2
MWB3334
0
2
MWB3634
0
2
MWB2740
0
2
MWB3040
0
2
MWB3340
0
2
MWB3640
0
2
MWB2746
0
2
MWB3046
0
2
MWB3346
0
2
MWB3646
0
2
3” middle rail.
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning STOP of this section for information regarding cutouts.
STOP
Wide rail & stile doors may not meet minimum height requirements. Call your Account Manager for options to keep the 5 piece door.
STOP
Watch out when using RH (reduced height) UPPER DOOR OPENING must be no less than 8" tall to receive doors.
Microwave Built-In w/ Appliance Garage
Shown as standard with middle stile.
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet is 21” deep x 60" tall; change depth to 24” for no charge by adding CDNC as a modification. Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH Does not come with a finished interior, has a ½” continuous back and requires the use of a trim kit. Door overlaps midrail ½” on designer overlay & 3/8” on standard overlay. Will receive an adjustable shelf in the upper section only if the opening height is 21” or greater. 16 ½” tall Appliance Garage opening; adjustable by using APGOH as a modification. Allow 1½" clearance for tambour handle.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-18-
•• •• ••
Cabinet with Tambour
Shelves
Doors
MWB2760AG
0
2
MWB3060AG
0
2
MWB3660AG
0
2
with Doors
Shelves
Doors
MWB2760AGD
0
4
MWB3060AGD
0
4
MWB3660AGD
0
4
Finished interior can be added for additional charges. (FI) Entire cabinet would then be finished. To modify to single door in appliance opening, use APG ONE DOOR Top Rail is 1 ½”, 2 Middle Rails are 3”. See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material.
STOP See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts & optional flip up pocket door.
STOP Wide rail & stile doors may not meet minimum height requirements. Call your Account Manager for options to keep the 5 piece door.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Microwave Countertop Cabinet
Drawers
Doors
MWCT2748
1
2
MWCT3048
1
2
MWCT2754
1
2
MWCT3054
1
2
MWCT2760
1
2
MWCT3060
1
2
Shown as standard With middle stile.
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet is 21” deep but you can change depth to 24” for no charge by adding CDNC as a modification. Cut-outs can be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Microwave opening width is 3” less than the cabinet x 18" high unless otherwise specified. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH Drawer opening is 5" tall. Entire cabinet has a finished interior & has a 1/2” continuous back. Door overlaps mid-rail ½” on designer overlay and 3/8” on standard overlay.
•• ••
Will receive an adjustable shelf in the upper section only if the opening height is 21” or greater. 3” middle rails.
STOP
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
STOP
Wide rail & stile doors may not meet minimum height requirements. Call your Account Manager for options to keep the 5 piece door.
Wall Corner Diagonal
•• •• •• WCD2430 Shown
•• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
24”W x 24”D with 12” Sides
Shelves
WCD2424
0
1
WCD2430
2
1
Doors
WCD2436
2
1
WCD2442
3
1
27”W x 27”D with 15” Sides
Shelves
Doors 1
WCD2724
0
WCD2730
2
1
WCD2736
2
1
WCD2742
3
1
Specify hinge direction. Add WCD TWO DOOR as a modification to modify to butt doors. Cabinet must maintain the 45˚ angle when modifying width or depth, otherwise the cabinet becomes custom and must be entered as CUSTOMWALL. If not modified, the opening is always 14” wide with a 15” wide door or standard overlay in width. 24" wide has 12" deep sides; 27" wide has 15" deep sides. 1/4" backs to maximize interior space.
-19-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Appliance Garage Diagonal
TO IED AL PPL ON 1 A IAG CTEAGE D F E O AR CTE1 MPL E G EXAPLIANC AP
•• •• •• •• ••
APGD2417 is 23” wide with molding by 17 ¾” tall. Fits under a WCD, WLS, or WLSS. APG2717 is 26” wide with molding by 17 ¾” tall. Fits under a corner cabinet 27”W x 15”D. APGD33 is 32” wide by 13 ¼” tall. Fits under the MWCD33__ diagonal microwave cabinet. APGM (5 feet of CTE1) is furnished to scribe appliance garage to above cabinet (see drawing above) - must be entered as the next line item after the cabinet. 2 1/2" top rail.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• •• •• STOP
-20-
APGD with Tambour
Doors
Clearance
APGD2417
0
13 ¾” tall
APGD2717
0
13 ¾” tall
APGD3313
0
9 ¼” tall
APGD with Doors
Doors
Clearance
APGD2417D
2
15 ¼” tall
APGD2717D
2
15 ¼” tall
APGD3313D
2
10 ¾” tall
To modify to single door in appliance opening, use APG ONE DOOR as a modification. See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material. Both ends are always finished. No back in cabinet. Watch out for door minimums on smaller cabinets. See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning up pocket door.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Corner Diagonal w/ Appliance Garage
48” unit used in 84” tall applications 54” unit used in 90” tall applications 60” unit used in 96” tall applications WCD2448RAG Shown
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction. 16 ½” tall Appliance Garage opening; adjustable by using APGOH as a modification. Allow 1 1/2" clearance for tambour handle. Change height will affect the upper opening Cabinet must maintain the 45˚ angle when modifying width or depth, otherwise the cabinet becomes custom and must be entered as CUSTOMWALL Both ends are always finished. Add WCD TWO DOOR as a modification to modify to butt doors. To modify to single door in appliance opening, use APG ONE DOOR as a modification.
•• •• •• •• •• ••
With Tambour
Shelves
Doors
WCD2448_AG
2
1
WCD2454_AG
2
1
WCD2460_AG
3
1
WCD2748_AG
2
1
WCD2754_AG
2
1
WCD2760_AG
3
1
With Doors
Shelves
Doors
WCD2448_AGD
2
3
WCD2454_AGD
2
3
WCD2460_AGD
3
3
WCD2748_AGD
2
3
WCD2754_AGD
2
3
WCD2760_AGD
3
3
See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material. 3” middle rail. If not modified, the door opening will be 14” wide with a 15” wide door. 24" wide has 12" deep sides; 27" wide has 15" deep sides. Watch out for door minimums in lower section. 1/4" back to maximize interior space.
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding optional flip up STOP pocket door.
Wall Lazy Susan 24”W x 24”D with 12” sides
WLS2424R Shown
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction. Lazy Susans (WLS __ __) use 20” diameter revolving plastic trays with a center post Super Susans (WLSS __ __) use 20” diameter revolving wooden trays attached to adjustable shelves (no center post) Cabinet must maintain the 45˚ angle when modifying width or depth, otherwise the cabinet becomes custom and must be entered as CUSTOMWALL If not modified, the door opening will be 14” wide with a 15” wide door. 24" wide has 12" deep sides; 27" wide has 15" deep sides. 1/4" back to maximize interior space.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
STOP
-21-
# Turns
Doors
WLS2424
2
1
WLS2430
3
1 1
WLS2436
3
WLS2442
4
1
WLSS2424
2
1
WLSS2430
3
1
WLSS2436
3
1
WLSS2442
4
1
27”W x 27”D with 15” sides
# Turns
Doors
WLS2724
2
1
WLS2730
3
1
WLS2736
3
1
WLS2742
4
1 1
WLSS2724
2
WLSS2730
3
1
WLSS2736
3
1
WLSS2742
4
1
If width or depth reductions, finished back or RPB back are needed use the WCD cabinet as these modifications may eliminate the rounds.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Corner Microwave
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
MWCD3334
0
2
MWCD3340
0
2
MWCD3346
0
2
Cut-outs can be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Microwave opening width is 26 3/4” wide x 18" high unless otherwise specified. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH Entire cabinet has a finished interior & has a 1/4” backs to maximize interior space. Use of a trim kit is optional. Cabinet must maintain the 45˚ angle when modifying width or depth, otherwise the cabinet becomes custom and must be entered as CUSTOMWALL This cabinet has butt doors Cabinet is 33” x 33” with 12” sides 3” middle rail.
STOP
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
STOP
Wide rail & stile doors may not meet minimum height requirements. Call your Account Manager for options to keep the 5 piece door.
-22-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Lazy Susan Cabinets w/ APG
WLS2454RAG Shown
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
WLS2454RAGD Shown
Specify hinge direction. 16 ½” tall Appliance Garage opening; adjustable by using APGOH as a modification. Allow 1 1/2" clearance for tambour handle. Change height will affect the upper opening Cabinet must maintain the 45˚ angle when modifying width or depth, otherwise the cabinet becomes custom and must be entered as CUSTOMWALL Both ends are always finished. Add WCD TWO DOOR as a modification to modify to butt doors. To modify to single door in appliance opening, use APG ONE DOOR as a modification. Lazy Susans (WLS __ __) use 20” diameter revolving plastic trays with a center post Super Susans (WLSS __ __) use 20” diameter revolving wooden trays attached to adjustable shelves (no center post) If not modified, the door opening will be 14” wide with a 15” wide door. 24" wide has 12" deep sides; 27" wide has 15" deep sides. 3” middle rail. See the ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS section for notes about the tambour material. Watch out for door minimums on lower section. 1/4" back to maximize interior space.
STOP
See Wall Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding optional flip up pocket door.
STOP
If width or depth reductions, finished back or RPB back are needed use the WCD w/ APG cabinet as these modifications may eliminate the rounds.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-23-
24”W x 24”D w/12” sides w/ Tambour
# Turns
Doors
WLS2448_AG
3
1
WLS2454_AG
3
1
WLS2460_AG
4
1
WLSS2448_AG
3
1
WLSS2454_AG
3
1
WLSS2460_AG
4
1
24”W x 24”D with 12” sides w/ Doors
#Turns
Doors
WLS2448_AGD
3
3
WLS2454_AGD
3
3
WLS2460_AGD
4
3
WLSS2448_AGD
3
3
WLSS2454_AGD
3
3
WLSS2460_AGD
4
3
27”W x 27”D w/15” sides w/ Tambour
#Turns
Doors
WLS2748_AG
3
1
WLS2754_AG
3
1
WLS2760_AG
4
1
WLSS2748_AG
3
1
WLSS2754_AG
3
1
WLSS2760_AG
4
1
27”W x 27”D with 15” sides w/ Doors
#Turns
Doors
WLS2748_AGD
3
3
WLS2754_AGD
3
3
WLS2760_AGD
4
3
WLSS2748_AGD
3
3
WLSS2754_AGD
3
3
WLSS2760_AGD
4
3
48” unit used in 84” tall applications 54” unit used in 90” tall applications 60” unit used in 96” tall applications
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Easy Reach 24”W x 24”D with 12” sides WER2424
Pie-cut hinge shown
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction Standard overlay doors come with a 45˚ piano hinge in center, pie-cut hinge can be added as a modification. Designer overlay & mitered doors come with pie-cut hinge in center. 27” x 27” should be considered the maximum and is the limit under the warranty. To change the width on one back leg, use CWL, CWR, RWL, RWL To change both back legs equally, add 1 CW charge.
•• •• ••
Shelves
Doors
1
2
WER2430
2
2
WER2436
2
2
WER2442 27”W x 27”D with 15” sides WER2724
3
2
Shelves
Doors
1
2
WER2730
2
2
WER2736
2
2
WER2742
3
2
May change depth of one side only by using RDL, RDR, or CDL, CDR. 24" wide has 12" deep sides; 27" wide has 15" deep sides. 1/4" back to maximize interior space.
Information you should know about Wall Blind Cabinets ••
3”
12” 3”
••
7.5” 42”
6”
30”
•• ••
27” 4.5”
1.5”
•• ••
30”
24” 42”
3”
18”
19.5” 6” 15” 1.5” 4.5”
34.5”
24”
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Door opening width = stated dimension minus 27” (19 1/2” + 6” + 1 1/2”) See Base section
Due to decorative hardware on blind base drawers, a 3” pull from wall is recommended. (Especially with designer overlay). To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Standard, Designer Overlay fillers for use on adjacent cabinet can be found in the Accessories & Modifications section.
3”
12”
BLIND CORNER WALL CABINETS - 12” DEEP Single or Butt Door opening width = stated dimension minus 15” (7 1/2” + 6” + 1 1/2”) Standard Double Door opening width = stated dimension minus 18” (7 1/2” + 6” + 3” + 1 1/2”) See previous page BLIND CORNER BASE CABINETS - 24” DEEP
3” Filler, Ear or 4.5” Custom Wide Stile
-24-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Blind Corner Walls
XW3030L Shown here
•• •• •• ••
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify L for blind left and R for blind right Full blind has a 6” finished intermediate stile with 7 ½” unfinished blind panel. 36" wide available with butt doors by adding BD after the product nomenclature. (Ex. XW3630LBD) Blind cabinets must be pulled a minimum of 1 ½”; maximum pull is 4”. A 3” pull is recommended, especially with designer overlay. To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Adjacent cabinet should also have a filler or ear the same width as the pull. Adjust accordingly for any knobs or hardware added to the doors and/or drawer fronts. On single or butt door cabinets, 24” – 36” wide, the opening width equals the stated width minus 15” On double door (no BD) cabinets, 39” – 48” wide, the opening width equals the stated width minus 18” divided by 2 To finish the blind add FBLIND as a modification to the cabinet. To modify door opening, add MODIFY BLIND as a modification & specify the opening. Reductions in width will affect the opening.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-25-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
XW2424 XW2724 XW3024 XW3324 XW3624 XW3924 XW4224 XW4524 XW4824 XW2430 XW2730 XW3030 XW3330 XW3630 XW3930 XW4230 XW4530 XW4830 XW2436 XW2736 XW3036 XW3336 XW3636 XW3936 XW4236 XW4536 XW4836 XW2442 XW2742 XW3042 XW3342 XW3642 XW3942 XW4242 XW4542 XW4842
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Blind Corner Wall Peninsula Specify 12, 15 or 18 as the second dimension for these heights.
Plywood
6" Stile
Shown as standard with middle stile
Specify 27 or 30 as the second dimension for these heights.
•• •• ••
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify L for blind left and R for blind right. Corner cabinets can be pulled up to 4” from the wall. Blind cabinets must be pulled a minimum of 1 ½”; maximum pull is 4”. A 3” pull is recommended, especially with designer overlay. To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Adjacent cabinet must have a filler equal to the width of the pull. Adjust accordingly for any knobs or hardware added to the doors and/or drawer fronts. Full blind has a 6” finished intermediate stile with 7 ½” unfinished blind panel. Single or butt door (on blind side) cabinets, 24” to 36” wide, the opening width equals the stated width minus 15”. Double (no BD) door (on blind side) cabinets, 39” to 48” wide, the opening width equals the stated width minus 18” divided by 2 To finish the blind add FBLIND as a modification to the cabinet. To modify the door opening, add MODIFY BLIND as a modification and specify door opening width. 2” wide stile on back, same side as blind.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-26-
12", 15" or 18" Tall Cabinet
Shelves
XWP24__
0
2
XWP27__
0
3
XWP30__
0
3
XWP33__
0
3
XWP36__
0
3
XWP39__
0
4
Doors
XWP42__
0
4
XWP45__
0
4
XWP48__
0
4
24" Tall Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
XWP2424
1
2
XWP2724
1
3
XWP3024
1
3
XWP3324
1
3
XWP3624
1
3
XWP3924
1
4
XWP4224
1
4
XWP4524
1
4
XWP4824
1
4
27" or 30" Tall Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
XWP24__
2
2
XWP27__
2
3
XWP30__
2
3
XWP33__
2
3
XWP36__
2
3
XWP39__
2
4
XWP42__
2
4
XWP45__
2
4
XWP48__
2
4
36" Tall Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
XWP2436
2
2
XWP2736
2
3
XWP3036
2
3
XWP3336
2
3
XWP3636
2
3
XWP3936
2
4
XWP4236
2
4
XWP4536
2
4
XWP4836
2
4
42" Tall Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
XWP2442
3
2
XWP2742
3
3
XWP3042
3
3
XWP3342
3
3
XWP3642
3
3
XWP3942
3
4
XWP4242
3
4
XWP4542
3
4
XWP4842
3
4
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Angle
Width
TOP VIEW Depth 12"
•• •• •• •• •• ••
1-1/2"
12"
1-1/2"
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WA1230
2
1
WA1236
2
1
WA1242
3
1
Diagonal end is 45˚. Door opening is 11 13/16” wide. Specify hinge direction. Finished ends are not available. When modifying dimensions: L= width; R=depth. Use SP RETURN to modify the returns equally, up to 8”.
Approximate measurement across the front: 12” = 14 7/8”
Extended Wall Angle 24" 65
12"
EWA2436R R=Angleon Right 15 3/8"
10 1/4"
•• •• •• ••
Door widths for EWA Designer Overlay = 18” W & 12 7/8” W Std. Overlay = 16 3/8” W & 11 1/4” W
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-27-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
EWA2430
2
2
EWA2436
2
2
EWA2442
3
2
65˚ angle matches the AEB24. Cabinet will maintain 65˚ angle when changing width or depth. 24” wide x 12” deep. Butt doors are not available. Angled opening is 10 ¼” wide and front opening is 15 3/8” wide. To hinge both doors the same direction add BDHL or BDHR as a modification.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angle End Wall TOP VIEW
9" 6 5
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
AEW1230
2
2
AEW1236
2
2
AEW1242
3
2
140 9" 65
•• •• •• ••
9 0
Door openings are 6” wide. Finished ends are not available. Butt doors are not available. Watch out for door minimums.
Door widths for AEW Designer Overlay = 2) 8 5/8” W Std. Overlay = 2) 7” W
Wall Bath Cabinets - 10" Deep
•• •• ••
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WBC2430
2
2
WBC2730
2
2
WBC3030
2
2
WBC3330
2
2
WBC3630
2
2
WBC3930
2
2
Designed to fit over bathroom stool for storage 10” deep with butt doors Both ends are always finished
Wall Bath Open Shelf - 10" Deep
•• •• •• •• •• To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet height - 13 1/4” for 3/4" top reveal Designer Overlay: Cabinet height - 12 3/4” for 1/4" top reveal Standard Overlay: Cabinet height - 13 3/4”
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-28-
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WBC2430OS
1
2
WBC2730OS
1
2
WBC3030OS
1
2
WBC3330OS
1
2
WBC3630OS
1
2
WBC3930OS
1
2
Designed to fit over bathroom stool for storage 10” deep with butt doors Both ends are always finished Bottom opening is 10” tall Entire cabinet will have a finished interior
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Recessed Medicine Cabinet Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
4
1
4
1
4
1
WMC1624 14”x22” wall opening WMC1630 14”x28” wall opening WMC1830 16”x28” wall opening
•• ••
To figure door size: Width: Cabinet width - 3” Depth: Cabinet height - 3 1/4”
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction Allow 2” less than the stated frame dimensions for wall openings. Box will be 2 7/8" smaller than frame in width & height. Overall cabinet depth is 4 3/4” 2” wide rails and stiles on frame Designer overlay do not affect this cabinet. Doors will be standard overlay size. To order prepped for mirror, add GD (glass doors) as a modification. Mirror is not included.
Surface-Mount Medicine Cabinet
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WMCSM1230
3
1
WMCSM1530
3
1
WMCSM1830
3
1
WMCSM2130
3
1
Specify hinge direction Overall cabinet depth is 4” Designed for surface mounting Both ends finished Top & Bottom not finished as standard. Order FFT to finish the top & FBTMF to finish the bottom. To order prepped for mirror, add GD (glass doors) as a modification. Mirror is not included.
Tri-View Medicine Cabinet Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
3
NA
3
NA
3
NA
TVMC30 28” x 26” wall opening 3) 8 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
TVMC36 34” x 26” wall opening 3) 10 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
TVMC48 46” x 26” wall opening 3) 14 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
•• •• •• •• ••
Depth is 4 ¼” x 28” tall frame height Cabinet designed for surface mounting Finished on both sides, top, & bottom Can also be recessed into wall opening Three ¼” mirrors with pivot hinges and spring loaded magnetic catches. Hinged right, right, left
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
Comes with silver hinges. Gold hinges available upon request. •STOP • No modifications available.
-29-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Cubby Unit
•• •• •• •• WCU630 Shown
WCU930 Shown
•• ••
Frameless
Openings
WCU630
5
WCU636
6
WCU642
7
WCU648
8
WCU654
9
WCU660
10
Faceframe
Openings
WCU930
5
WCU936
6
WCU942
7
WCU948
8
WCU954
9
WCU960
10
6" wide unit is frameless; ¾” plywood construction with ¼” thick edgebanding. Finished ends are only available on frameless unit with the understanding that pin nails may be visible Faceframe unit has 1 ½” rails & stiles Vertical unit is standard, but can be modified into a horizontal unit upon request for no charge. This does create a custom drawing. Finished Interior is standard. Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe. Order 6" wide frameless unit & change width if needed.
Wall Spice Pull-Out Cabinet
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-30-
Cabinet
Doors
WSPO930
1
WSPO936
1
WSPO942
1
WSPO1230
1
WSPO1236
1
WSPO1242
1
Three shelf spice rack mounts to door and pulls out on full extension drawer guides. Soft close guides are not available. Rack is 1” less than opening. Chrome Rails. NO modifications to this cabinet without prior authorization Shelf placement can be changed by adding an OM-SP as a modification. Watch out for door minimums.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Apothecary Unit - Standard Drawers Frameless
Openings
WAU630S
5
WAU636S
6
WAU642S
7
WAU648S
8
WAU654S
9
WAU660S
10
Faceframe
Openings
WAU930S
5
WAU936S
6
WAU942S
7
WAU948S
8
WAU954S
9
WAU960S
10
WAU930 Shown
•• •• •• ••
Frameless unit is ¾” plywood construction with ¼” thick •• edgebanding. Finished ends are only available on frameless unit with the understanding that pin nails may be visible. Faceframe unit has 1 ½” wide rails & stiles STOP Vertical unit is standard, but can be modified into horizontal unit upon request for no charge. This does create a custom drawing.
Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe Order 6" wide frameless unit & change width if needed. This cabinet always comes with 1/4" reveals on both sides, top, bottom & between fronts.
Wall Apothecary Unit - Exposed Dovetails Frameless
Openings
WAU630D WAU636D WAU642D WAU648D WAU654D WAU660D
5 6 7 8 9 10
Faceframe
Openings
WAU930D WAU936D WAU942D WAU948D WAU954D WAU960D
5 6 7 8 9 10
WAU930D Shown
•• •• •• ••
Frameless unit is ¾” plywood construction with ¼” thick edgebanding. Finished ends are only available on frameless unit with the understanding that pin nails may be visible. Faceframe unit has 1 ½” wide rails & stiles. Vertical unit is standard, but can be modified into
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-31-
horizontal unit upon request for no charge. This does create a custom drawing. Exposed dovetails are stained to match the exterior. Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe. Order 6" wide frameless unit & change width if needed.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Apothecary w/ Exposed Dovetails To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet height – 8 ¼” for 3/4" top reveal Cabinet height – 7 ¾” for 1/4" top reveal Std.Overlay: Cabinet height – 8 ¾”
W3036AD shown standard with middle stile
Doors
Drwrs
Shelves
W1230AD
1
2
0
W1248AD
1
2
2
W1830AD
1
3
0
W1848AD
1
3
2
W2430AD
1
4
0
W2448AD
1
4
2
W2430ADBD
2
4
0
W2448ADBD
2
4
2
W3030AD
2
5
0
W3048AD
2
5
2
W3630AD
2
6
0
W3648AD
2
6
2
W4230AD
2
7
0
W4248AD
2
7
2
0
W4848AD
2
8
2
4
8
2
Cabinet
W4830AD
••
2
8
W4830AD4D
4
8
0
W4848AD4D
W1236AD
1
2
1
W1254AD
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
3
1
W1854AD
W2436AD
1
4
1
W2454AD
1
4
2
W2436ADBD
2
4
1
W2454ADBD
2
4
2
W3036AD
2
5
1
W3054AD
2
5
2
W3636AD
2
6
1
W3654AD
2
6
2
W4236AD
2
7
1
W4254AD
2
7
2
W4836AD
2
8
1
W4854AD
2
8
2
W4836AD4D
4
8
1
W4854AD4D
4
8
2
W1242AD
1
2
2
W1260AD
1
2
2
W1842AD
1
3
2
W1860AD
1
3
2
W2442AD
1
4
2
W2460AD
1
4
2
W2442ADBD
2
4
2
W2460ADBD
2
4
2
W3042AD
2
5
2
W3060AD
2
5
2
W3642AD
2
6
2
W3660AD
2
6
2
W4242AD
2
7
2
W4260AD
2
7
2
W4842AD
2
8
2
W4860AD
2
8
2
W4842AD4D
4
8
2
W4860AD4D
4
8
2
W1836AD
•• ••
Cabinet
Doors Drwrs Shelves
Drawer slides on wooden slides. Exposed dovetail boxes with scooped front will be stained to match the exterior. Apothecary openings are 5” tall.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-32-
Stiles between apothecary drawers are 1 ½” wide. Mid rail is 1 ½” wide. Change in height will affect the door opening.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Apothecary w/ Standard Drawers To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet height – 8 ¼” for 3/4" top reveal Cabinet height – 7 ¾” for 1/4" top reveal Std.Overlay: Cabinet height – 8 ¾”
Knobs not included. W2736AS shown standard with middle stile
Cabinet
Cabinet
Drwrs Shelves
Doors
Drwrs Shelves
W1230AS
1
2
0
W1248AS
1
2
2
W1830AS
1
3
0
W1848AS
1
3
2
W2430AS
1
4
0
W2448AS
1
4
2
W2430ASBD
2
4
0
W2448ASBD
2
4
2
2
5
2
W3030AS
2
5
0
W3048AS
W3630AS
2
6
0
W3648AS
2
6
2
W4230AS
2
7
0
W4248AS
2
7
2
W4830AS
2
8
0
W4848AS
2
8
2
W4830AS4D
4
8
0
W4848AS4D
4
8
2
W1236AS
1
2
1
W1254AS
1
2
2
W1836AS
1
3
1
W1854AS
1
3
2
W2436AS
1
4
1
W2454AS
1
4
2
W2436ASBD
2
4
1
W2454ASBD
2
4
2
W3036AS
2
5
1
W3054AS
2
5
2
W3636AS
2
6
1
W3654AS
2
6
2
W4236AS
2
7
1
W4254AS
2
7
2
1
W4854AS
2
8
2
8
1
W4854AS4D
4
8
2
W4836AS
•• •• •• ••
Doors
2
8
W4836AS4D
4
W1242AS
1
2
2
W1260AS
1
2
2
W1842AS
1
3
2
W1860AS
1
3
2
W2442AS
1
4
2
W2460AS
1
4
2
W2442ASBD
2
4
2
W2460ASBD
2
4
2
W3042AS
2
5
2
W3060AS
2
5
2
W3642AS
2
6
2
W3660AS
2
6
2
W4242AS
2
7
2
W4260AS
2
7
2
W4842AS
2
8
2
W4860AS
2
8
2
W4842AS4D
4
8
2
W4860AS4D
4
8
2
Drawer slides on wooden slides. Drawer fronts cover apothecary drawers. Apothecary openings are 5” tall. Stiles between apothecary drawers are 1 ½” wide. Mid rail is 1 ½” wide.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• Change in height will affect the door opening. •• Drawer fronts do not come with knobs •• When ordering designer overlay, the drawer fronts will STOP not be equal. The two end fronts will be larger than the middle fronts.
-33-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Cubby Organizer
W2736WC Shown as standard with middle stile
36” Tall
Doors
Shelves
W1236WC
1
2
2
W1536WC
1
2
3
W1836WC
1
2
3
W2136WC
1
2
2
W2436WC
1
2
2
W2436WCBD
2
2
2
W2736WC
2
2
4
W3036WC
2
2
4
W3336WC
2
2
6
W3636WC
2
2
6
W3936WC
2
2
6
W4236WC
2
2
8
W4536WC
2
2
8
W4836WC
2
2
10
W4836WC4D
W2748WC Shown as standard with middle stile
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Entire cabinet has a finished interior. Cabinets 21” wide and up have a 12” horizontal phone book holder/divider in center. RH will affect the upper opening. The total number of vertical dividers includes the two vertical dividers attached to the horizontal phone book holder, if applicable. The opening height of the cubbies can be changed for no charge by adding WC HEIGHT as a modification. The cubby quantity &/or configuration can be changed by entering as a CUSTOMWALL. Add EXT DOORS as a modification to extend the door down over the cubbies. On double door cabinets must be butt doors. To place a hinged drawer front over the cubbies, the cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOMWALL, and specify. Cubby section is 6” tall inside the frame opening.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-34-
Dividers
4
2
10
42” Tall
Doors
Shelves
Dividers
W1242WC
1
2
2
W1542WC
1
2
3
W1842WC
1
2
3
W2142WC
1
2
2
W2442WC
1
2
2
W2442WCBD
2
2
2
W2742WC
2
2
4
W3042WC
2
2
4
W3342WC
2
2
6
W3642WC
2
2
6
W3942WC
2
2
6
W4242WC
2
2
8
W4542WC
2
2
8
W4842WC
2
2
10
W4842WC4D
4
2
10
48” Tall
Doors
Shelves
Dividers
W1248WC
1
3
2
W1548WC
1
3
3
W1848WC
1
3
3
W2148WC
1
3
2
W2448WC
1
3
2
W2448WCBD
2
3
2
W2748WC
2
3
4
W3048WC
2
3
4
W3348WC
2
3
6
W3648WC
2
3
6
W3948WC
2
3
6
W4248WC
2
3
8
W4548WC
2
3
8
W4848WC
2
3
10
W4848WC4D
4
3
10
Standard Valan ce
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
14 Wall Plate Rack WITH STANDARD ARCHED VALANCE PRC _ _ (with standard valance)
Cabinet
# of Plates
Standard Valan ce
PRC2430
10
PRC _ _ CR (Country Routed Valance)
Shown with standard arched valance, Other valance options can be specified.
PRC2730
12
PRC3030
14
PRC3330
16
PRC3630
16
14
PRC2436
10
PRC2736
12
14
PRC3036
14
PRC3336
16
PRC _ _ CR (Country Routed Valance)
PRC _ _ WD (With Doors)
PRC3636
16
PRC2442
10
PRC2742
12
PRC3042
14
PRC3342
16
PRC3642
16
WITH DOORS (NO VALANCE) Cabinet # of Plates/Doors
14
PRC2430WD(BD)
14 1 4
12/2
PRC3030WD
14/2
PRC3330WD
16/2
PRC3630WD PRC2436WD(BD)
PRC _ _ WD (With Doors)
•• •• •• •• •• •1 •
12” deep. Both openings have finished interior, including the PRC__WD. The lower portion has wooden dowel (3/8") plate racks spaced on 2” centers. Lower opening is 14” tall. Wooden dowels are removable for cleaning. RH will affect the upper opening. 4To add plate racks to other cabinets, see the Accessories and Modifications section.
To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet height – 17 ¼” for 3/4" top reveal Cabinet height – 16 ¾” for 1/4" top reveal Standard Overlay: Cabinet height - 17 3/4”
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-35-
10/1(2)
PRC2730WD
16/2 10/1(2)
PRC2736WD
12/2
PRC3036WD
14/2
PRC3336WD
16/2
PRC3636WD PRC2442WD(BD)
16/2 10/1(2)
PRC2742WD
12/2
PRC3042WD
14/2
PRC3342WD
16/2
PRC3642WD
16/2
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Wine Holder
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
WWH2730
0
2
WWH3030
0
2
WWH3330
0
2
WWH3630
0
2
Entire cabinet is finished interior. Upper opening is 13 ½” tall; Lower opening is 12” tall Change height will affect lower opening. No changes in width allowed over 36" without prior approval. Reductions in depth are not allowed. Clipped Corners and Wide Stiles are not available on this cabinet
Basic Wood Hoods Wood Hood w/ Doors
Side View
Wood Hood w/ Doors
Doors
WH3024
2
WH3624
2
Beadboard Wood Hood
Doors
WHB3024
0
WHB3624
0
6 30 or 36
Beadboard Wood Hood
Side View
•• •• •• •• ••
30” outside, 28 ½” inside. 36” outside, 34 ½” inside. Cabinet sides are flush and made of 3/4” material. The doors are functional on Wood Hood with doors. A metal liner and blower unit are sold separately (See Accessories & Modifications section).
6 30 or 36
Flaired Wood Hoods Flaired Wood Hood
Side View
Flaired Wood Hood 12" 12
16" 16
FWH3036 FWH3636
30 WHP3009CR4 36 WHP3609CR4
add 4-1/2" to width for CR4 molding
•• •• ••
19" 19 2121 1/4" 4
Side View of FWH
Available in 30" & 36" wide. Units are 19” deep, not including molding, and 36” tall Add 4 ½” to width and 2 ¼” to depth for standard CR4 crown on wall mount (add 4 ½” to depth on the peninsula).
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-36-
A metal liner and blower unit sold separately (See Accessories & Modifications section)
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Valance Hood 10”
18” 12
Doors
WHRPVAL3036
0
WHRPVAL3048
0
WHRPVAL3636
0
WHRPVAL3648
0
36”
12
36”
Wood Hood w/ Doors
12 18” •• •• ••
Not all door styles are available. This is very important and a STAGE 1 design consideration. No mitered doors, no applied moldings. Raised Panel Valance on this hood will have a 2 ¼” top and bottom rail & a 3" rise. 19” deep with an 18 ¼” internal clearance.
•• •• •• ••
7 1/8” to bottom shelf. CR2 used as standard. Bead molding is used at the seam. Overall width of cabinet is 30” or 36”; CR2 adds an additional 3” to the width. A metal liner and blower unit are sold separately. See Accessories & Modifications section.
Hood with Mantel Hood w/ Mantel WHM3030 WHM3630 WHM4230 WHM3036 WHM3636
30”
WHM4236 WHM3042 WHM3642
8.5”
WHM4242 WHM4830
19”
3" rise
•• •• •• •• ••
Mantel shelf is 4” deep and 2 ¼” tall. •• Box is 19” deep with an 18 ¼: internal clearance. Doors are functional. •• Roman valance is standard, others can be specified in the cabinet comments. Country French and Country Routed are not available. Corbels are Enkeboll CBL TXO minis (only available in Oak, Maple, Alder, & Cherry – Oak corbels are substituted on Hickory jobs; Maple corbels are substituted on Beech jobs so slight variation is possible).
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
WHM4836 WHM4842
-37-
A metal liner and blower unit sold separately, See Accessories & Modifications section. 48" wide unit will have a 3" mid-stile, no butt doors. If you would like butt doors, add BD as a modification.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Curved Hood
•• •• ••
CR3, UCM and BM moldings used, moldings had additional width of 4 1/4" to stated size. No modifications allowed or dimension changes. Cabinet is 48" tall x 19" deep, moldings will increase the overall depth.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-38-
Curved Hood
Doors
CWH3048
0
CWH3648
0
CWH4248
0
A metal liner and blower unit sold separately, see Accessories & Modifications section.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wood Hood Fascia
16 7/8”
24”
30"
5 3/4”
5 5/8”
24”
16 7/8”
Wood Hood Fascia - Flat w/ Batton
Wood Hood Fascia - Flat
7.25”
7.25”
30"
36"
36" Hood
Doors
Hood WHFFL3024
Doors 0
WHFFB3024
0
WHFFL3624
0
WHFFB3624
0
Wood Hood Fascia - Beaded
5 3/4”
5 3/4”
24”
16 7/8”
16 7/8”
24”
Wood Hood Fascia - Applied Doors
36"
36" Hood
7.25”
30"
7.25”
30"
Doors
Hood
WHFBE3024
0
WHFAD3024
0
WHFBE3624
0
WHFAD3624
0
Wood Hood Fascia - Raised Panel
16 7/8”
••
5 3/4”
24”
•• •• •• ••
7.25”
30" 36"
Hood
Doors
WHFRP3024
0
WHFRP3624
0
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-39-
Doors
Available in 30" & 36" wide and 5 configurations. Fascia units are 7 ¼” deep and 24” tall Designed to be placed between two wall cabinets. A special notched metal liner and blower unit is sold separately. See Accessories & Modifications section. ICM is used on the lower portion of the fascias.
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Custom Hood - Hood 1 REMOVEABLE DOORS - USE UNINCONNECTORS - FULL OVERLAY SHOWN A
3/4" R 1/4"R
1/4"R 1/2" R
1/2" R B
3/4" R
CR3
KEYSTONE
CORBEL
I
CORBEL
C
J
J
MINIMUM C DIMENSION 13" FOR CORBEL TO FIT
H
TOP OF MANTEL SHELF
K SPICE PULLOUT
SPICE PULLOUT
D
3/4" R G
F
E
MAKE SURE YOUR DIMENSIONS ADD UP!
Cabinet HOOD1
•• •• •• •• ••
Please use the forms found in the FORMS section to fill in the missing dimensions when placing your order. The corbels on these hoods are the CBL A01 (4 ¾” wide x 9 ½” tall x 3 ¾” deep) from Enkeboll. They will be supplied by Custom Cupboards. If the middle panel is over 23 ½” wide and your customer wants a single panel, there will be no warranty on the panel. SDPW must be added as a modification. The left & right sides will be flush. Bottom of hood & inside ends of the Spice Pull-outs will be finished.
••
Any modifications will require pre-approval and will affect the price. •• Cabinet has 1/4" backs. •• Cubes will NOT calculate due to the flexibility in size. STOP You will have to figure the cubes and put them in using CUBES__ as a modification to insure your freight will add up correctly. The formula for figuring cubes is W x H x D ÷ 1728.
This hood is considered custom & will cause your order to be graded as a “B”.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-40-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Custom Hood - Hood 2 A
3/4" R
1/4"R
1/4"R REMOVEABLE - USE UNIVONNECTORS
FIXED
1 1/2" THICK WOOD TOP FOR MANTEL SHELF
F IXED
FULL OVERLAY SHOWN
3/4" R F CR3
B G
MINIMUM B DIMENSION IS 15 3/4" FOR CORBEL TO FIT
CORBEL
CORBEL MAKE SURE YOUR DIMENSIONS ADD UP!
E
C
D MINIMUM E AND C DIMENSION IS 9 1/2" FOR CORBEL TO FIT
Cabinet HOOD2
•• •• •• •• ••
Please use the forms found in the FORMS section to fill •• in the missing dimensions when placing your order. The corbels on these hoods are the CBL A01 •• (4 ¾” wide x 9 ½” tall x 3 ¾” deep) from Enkeboll. They •• will be supplied by Custom Cupboards. STOP If the middle panel is over 23 ½” wide and your customer wants a single panel, there will be no warranty on the panel. SDPW must be added as a modification. Left & Right sides will be flush. Bottom of hood & inside ends of the legs will be finished.
Any modifications will require pre-approval and will affect the price. Cabinet has 1/4" backs. Cubes will NOT calculate due to the flexibility in size. You will have to figure the cubes and put them in using CUBES__ as a modification to insure your freight will add up correctly. The formula for figuring cubes is W x H x D ÷ 1728.
This hood is considered custom & will cause your order to be graded as a “B”.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-41-
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wood Hood Platform Wood Hood Platform w/ CR1
Wood Hood Platform w/ CR2
9” 30 WHP3009CR1 36 WHP3609CR1 add 2-3/8" to width for CR1 molding
9” 19” 20 3/16”
30 WHP3009CR2 36 WHP3609CR2 add 2-7/8" to width for CR2 molding
19” 20 3/16”
CR1 (Add 2 3/8” to width for molding)
CR2 (Add 2 7/8” to width for molding)
WHP3009CR1
WHP3009CR2
WHP3609CR1
WHP3609CR2
Wood Hood Platform w/ CR3
Wood Hood Platform w/ CR4
9”
9”
19” 21 1/8”
30 WHP3009CR3 36 WHP3609CR3 add 4-1/4" to width for CR3 molding
30 WHP3009CR4 36 WHP3609CR4 add 4-1/2" to width for CR4 molding
19” 21 1/4”
CR3 (Add 4 1/4” to width for molding)
CR4 (Add 4 1/2” to width for molding)
WHP3009CR3
WHP3009CR4
WHP3609CR3
WHP3609CR4
Wood Hood Platform w/ CR5 9” 30 WHP3009CR5 36 WHP3609CR5 add 5-3/4" to width for CR5 molding
19” 21 7/8”
CR5 (Add 5 3/4” to width for molding) WHP3009CR5 WHP3609CR5
•• •• ••
Available in 30" & 36" wide with 5 different molding options. Units are 19” deep, not including molding, and 9” tall. Molding will increase the overall width and depth. See details above.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
-42-
A metal liner and blower unit is sold separately. See Accessories & Modifications section. Top is flush; Bottom is inset 4 1/8” The shelf is ½” material; the front and sides are ¾” material
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
What-Not Wall Shelf 3 x 3 clip
Cabinet WNWS_630 WNWS_636 WNWS_642 WNWS_1230 WNWS_1236 WNWS_1242
STYLE A
•• ••
STYLE B
STYLE C
12” deep, designed to fit on the end of a wall cabinet. Style A available in 12" width. Style B & C are available in 6” or 12” widths. Four ¾” solid wood shelves equally spaced in height. There is a cove route on the exposed edges of each shelf.
•• ••
•• ••
Choose style in nomenclature (Ex. WNWSB630) 90˚ top & bottom shelf is available on all styles for no charge by specifying in the cabinet notes.
Wall Panel Filler 1 ½” Wide Panel Fillers
Top View 1 1/2"
WPF1.5 30 12
WPF1.5 36 WPF1.5 42 WPF1.5 48
3"
WPF1.5 54
Top View
WPF1.5 60 12
3” Wide Panel Fillers WPF3 30 WPF3 36
6"
WPF3 42 WPF3 48
Top View
WPF3 54 12
•• •• •• ••
••
WPF3 60
½” plywood panel with 1 ½”, 3”, or 6” stile attached. Indicate ¼” reveal left or right; this will automatically finish the end. Can be increased up to 16” deep at no charge by using CDNC. Change dimensions are available at Half of the Standard Charge (width, height, and depth over 16"). Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost and specify the dimension change. Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-43-
6” Wide Panel Fillers WPF6 30 WPF6 36 WPF6 42 WPF6 48 WPF6 54 WPF6 60
Wall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Box Filler 3” Wall Box Fillers
Wall Box Filler
WBF330 WBF336 WBF342 WBF348 WBF354
Top View
3
WBF360 6” Wall Box Fillers
12
WBF630 WBF636 WBF642 WBF648 WBF654 WBF660
Peninsula Box Filler
Top View
3
3” Peninsula Box Fillers WBFP330 WBFP336 WBFP342 WBFP348 WBFP354 WBFP360 6” Peninsula Box Fillers WBFP630 WBFP636 WBFP642 WBFP648 WBFP654 WBFP660
3
Angled Box Filler TOP VIEW
3
3
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
3” or 6” wide x 12" deep. Both ends are always finished. Box filler has a ¼” reveal on the sides and a flush toe kick. Can be increased up to 16” deep at no charge by using CDNC. Peninsula Box Filler has a stile on the front and back. Must specify left or right on the angled fillers Change dimensions are available at Half of the Standard Charge (width, height, and depth over 16"). Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost and specify the dimension change. Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-44-
3” Angled Wall Box Fillers WBFA330 WBFA336 WBFA342 WBFA348 WBFA354 WBFA360
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Base Cabinets BASE CABINET INFORMATION..................................................... 2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION.............................................................. 3 BLIND INFORMATION..................................................................... 27 ANGLED CABINETS Angle End Base............................................................................29 Base Angle.....................................................................................29 Base Transition Cabinet ...........................................................29 BASE CABINET (DOOR AND DRAWER) Base Cabinet- 24” Deep............................................................. 5 Inverted Base Cabinet................................................................. 5 Three Drawer Base....................................................................... 6 Base 2 Drawer / Door Combo...................................................7 Base Peninsula............................................................................. 23 Base Organizer..............................................................................10 BASE FULL DOOR Base Full Door Peninsula.......................................................... 23 Base Full Door – 12” Deep.......................................................... 4 Base Full Door – 24” Deep........................................................ 4 Sink Base Full Door..................................................................... 13 Three-Door Base w/ Full Height Doors................................ 6 BLIND CABINETS Blind Cabinet Base.....................................................................28 Blind Corner Peninsula..............................................................28 COOK TOP Base CookTop Vent...................................................................... 9 2 Drawer Cooktop Cabinet........................................................ 9 CORNER CABINETS Corner Recycle Bin.....................................................................24 Base Easy Reach.........................................................................24 Base Lazy Susan..........................................................................24 DIAGONAL CORNER CABINETS Diagonal Sink Front.................................................................... 23 Base Lazy Susan Diagonal....................................................... 25 Base Lazy Susan Diagonal w/ Drawer................................ 25 Base Diagonal Corner................................................................ 25 Sink Base Diagonal.....................................................................26 Recessed Sink Base Diagonal.................................................26 DRAWER BANKS 2 Drawer Base...............................................................................14 3 Drawer Base...............................................................................14 3 Drawer Base w/ Equal Fronts..............................................14 4 Drawer Base............................................................................... 15 4 Drawer Base w/ Equal Fronts.............................................. 15 Base Apothecary.......................................................................... 21 Split 4 Drawer Base.....................................................................16 Split 5 Drawer Base.....................................................................16 FILLERS Base Panel Filler..........................................................................30 Base Box Filler..............................................................................30
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
MICROWAVE AND OVEN CABINETS Base Microwave Built-In............................................................10 Base Oven Cabinet....................................................................... 11 PENINSULA CABINETS Base Full Door Peninsula ........................................................ 23 Base Peninsula............................................................................. 23 Blind Corner Peninsula..............................................................28 RANGE BASE Range Base...................................................................................... 8 Range Base Drawer Stack......................................................... 8 RECYCLE / TRASH BIN CABINETS Recycle Bin Center......................................................................18 Recycle Bin Deluxe......................................................................18 Corner Recycle Bin.....................................................................24 Mid Line Trash Bin........................................................................18 Base Trash Bin...............................................................................19 Trash Bin Bottom Mount...........................................................19 SINK BASE Farm Sink Base............................................................................. 12 Sink Base......................................................................................... 12 Sink Base Full door...................................................................... 13 Clipped Corner Sink Base – 27” Deep.................................. 13 Diagonal Sink Front.................................................................... 23 Sink Base Diagonal.....................................................................26 Recessed Sink Base Diagonal.................................................26 STORAGE CABINETS Dispensa Base Pull-Out.............................................................16 Spice Base....................................................................................... 17 Spice Base Frameless................................................................. 17 Clipped Spice Base...................................................................... 17 Base Lazy Susan..........................................................................24 Base Lazy Susan Diagonal....................................................... 25 Base Lazy Susan Diagonal w/ Drawer................................ 25 SHELF (OPEN) Base Cubby Unit........................................................................... 21 Base End Shelf............................................................................. 22 Base Bookcase – 12” deep....................................................... 22 SPECIALTY Base Apothecary unit................................................................. 21 Base Cubby Unit........................................................................... 21 Base Organizer..............................................................................10 WARMING DRAWER Drawer Stack w/ Warming Drawer..........................................7 Drawer Stack w/ Warming drawer in Middle .....................7 Warming Drawer Cabinet w/ Doors....................................... 8 WINE RACK Base Wine Rack - 12” deep......................................................20 Base Wine Holder - 24” deep.................................................20 Base Wine Cubby - 24” deep.................................................20
-1-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Cabinet Information Helpful Notes About Base Cabinet Section •• Bases are 34 1/2” tall x 24” deep, unless otherwise stated. •• On designer overlay, choice of 1/4” or 3/4” reveal at tops of base & vanity cabinets must be specified in the field below hinge type.
Oven Cabinet Cut-Outs In order to make the cabinet more stable during production and shipping, Custom Cupboards does not make a complete cut-out that is larger than 3” less than the overall cabinet width. We score the stile of the cabinet, starting and stopping 1 ½” from the top and bottom of the opening. Your trim carpenter will then finalize the cut on-site. The maximum cut-out for cabinets with: •• Standard or Flush ends is 1 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both RPE is 2 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both BBE (3/8”) is 2” less than the overall cabinet width
Entering a Faceframe and Door Only •• For a full door cabinet, enter a 12” deep base cabinet, then enter FFDO as a modification. •• For a cabinet with doors and drawer fronts, enter a sink base cabinet, then enter FFDO as a modification.
Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-2-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Construction Base Cabinets: 34 1/2” H x 24” D and 1 1/2” W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets. Toe kick is 4 1/2” T x 3 1/4” D without toe board.
5
5
5
5
5
27
5
5
3
9 1/2
20 1/2
20 1/2 34 1/2
30
5
Equal
7 1/2
Equal
20 1/2
14
12 3/4
9 1/2 5
4 1/2
Specify Cutout
12 3/4
SB_
B_
BFD_
B_D2
B_INVERT
B_2D
BWD_
B_D4
B_D3
12 5
5 11 1/2
3
3
Varies Micro C.O. 34 1/2
11 1/2
5
12 6
30
20 1/2 A
3 Varies
BMWB_
4 1/2
24
A = XB36=9" XB39=12" XB42=15" XB45=18" XB48=21"
14
17
XB_
BO_
BTC12L_
36
24
42, 45, or 48
65˚
TOP VIEW 17 1/4" 24 3/8 23 1/4
24
24
42, 45, or 48
24 7/16
65˚
36
2 1/4
35 Frame Opening: RSBD42 = 20-5/16 RSBD45 = 24-9/16 RSBD48 = 28-13/16
24
3 12 4
15 open
in
g
4 1/2
AEB24
O
pe n
1 1/2
12 18 3/4
RSBC_
2 1/4 4 1/2
Note: 1/4” backs. Wall side backs to maximize space
24 1 1/2
BLS36 / BER36 / CRB36
24
DIAGONALS
36
45
12
24
42 39 36
39 45 42
17 1/4" 24
12
36
TOP VIEW
36
BA12_
24 17 * 21 1/4 * 25 1/2 * 29 3/4 *
17
BA24_ 24
BLSD36 / SBD36
Dimensions across the front of base corner diagonals. * dimensions rounded up to the nearest quarter inch.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-3-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Full Door - 12” Deep Cabinet
Shown without BD option
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. 12” deep cabinet comes with two full-depth adjustable shelves. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
•• ••
Doors
BFD912
1
BFD1212
1
BFD1512
1
BFD1812
1
BFD2112
1
BFD2412
1
BFD2412BD
2
BFD2712
2
BFD3012
2
BFD3312
2
BFD3612
2
BFD3912
2
BFD4212
2
BFD4512
2
BFD4812
2
BFD48124D
4
The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Base Full Door - 24” Deep Cabinet
Shown without BD option
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with one 15 ½” deep adjustable shelf. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-4-
Doors
BFD9
1
BFD12
1
BFD15
1
BFD18
1
BFD21
1
BFD24
1
BFD24BD
2
BFD27
2
BFD30
2
BFD33
2
BFD36
2
BFD39
2
BFD42
2
BFD45
2
BFD48
2
BFD484D
4
The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Cabinet - 24” Deep Cabinet
Shown without BD option
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with one 15 ½” deep adjustable shelf. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors.
•• •• •• ••
Doors Drawers
B12
1
1
B15
1
1
B18
1
1
B21
1
1
B24
1
1
B24BD
2
1
B27
2
1
B30
2
2
B33
2
2
B36
2
2
B39
2
2
B42
2
2
B45
2
2
B48
2
2
B484D
4
2
Super drawers (full width) are available on 30”– 36” cabinets by adding “SD” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. B36SD) Watch out for door & drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets. 20 ½” tall door opening. Use FMS to add fixed mid shelf in between door & drawer opening behind rail.
Inverted Base Cabinet - 24” Deep Doors
Drawers
B12 INVERT
Cabinet
1
1
B15 INVERT
1
1
B18 INVERT
1
1
B21 INVERT
1
1
B24 INVERT
1
1
B24BD INVERT
2
1
B27 INVERT
2
1
B30 INVERT
2
2
B33 INVERT
2
2
B36 INVERT
2
2
Shown with “SD” option & no BD
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with one 15 ½” deep adjustable shelf. Super drawers (full width) are available on 30”– 36” cabinets by adding “SD” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. B36SD INVERT)
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-5-
Watch out for door & drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets. Use BTM opening if you want to adjust bottom drawer opening to something taller.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Three-Door Base - 24” Deep
•• •• •• ••
••
Hinge direction notates single door side. Comes with two 15 ½” depth adjustable shelves; one on each side of the partition. Three equal openings if no butt doors. Butt doors standard on double door side if entered on order info tab.
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs
Openings
B483DL/R
3
3
13”
B513DL/R
3
3
14”
B543DL/R
3
3
15”
Super drawer (full width) is available over the double doors by adding “SD” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. B483DLSD).
Three-Door Base w/ Full Height Doors - 24” Deep Cabinet
•• Hinge direction notates single door side. •• Comes with two 15 ½” depth adjustable shelves; one on each side of the partition.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
3
13”
BFD513DL/R
3
14”
BFD543DL/R
3
15”
•• Three equal openings if no butt doors. •• Butt doors standard on double door side if entered on order info tab.
-6-
Doors Openings
BFD483DL/R
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base 2 Drawer / Door Cabinet - 24” Deep
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinet. (Ex. B12L2D) No shelves included. Drawer openings are 5” tall & 14” door opening. Changes in height will affect door opening.
Cabinet B12_2D B15_2D
Doors 1 1
Drawers 2 2
B18_2D
1
2
B21_2D
1
2
B24_2D
1
2
B24BD2D
2
2
B272D
2
2
B302D
2
2
B332D
2
2
B362D
2
2
Drawer Stack w/ Warming Drawer - 24” Deep
r rawe ing D Warm
••
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH.
Cabinet
Doors
Drawers
BWD27
0
2
BWD30
0
2
BWD33
0
2
BWD36
0
2
•• •• ••
No back in cutout section. 3” rail and a fixed shelf below the cut-out. Two equal height openings below.
STOP
See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
Drawer Stack w/ Warming Drawer in Middle - 24” Deep
awer ing Dr Warm
••
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• •• •• STOP
-7-
Cabinet
Doors
Drawers
BWDM27
0
2
BWDM30
0
2
BWDM33
0
2
BWDM36
0
2
No back in cutout section. 3” rails above and below cut-out. Fixed shelves above and below warming drawer cut-out opening. Top drawer opening is 5” tall; bottom drawer opening will vary based on cut-out height. See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Warming Drawer Cabinet w/ Doors - 24” Deep
awer ing Dr Warm
Cabinet
Doors
BWD27WD
2
BWD30WD
2
BWD33WD
2
BWD36WD
2
Shown with BD option
••
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH
•• •• •• •STOP •
No back in cutout section. No adjustable shelf included. 3” mid rail and fixed shelf below the cut-out. See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
Range Base - 24” Deep Cabinet
Doors
RB27
2
Fronts 1
RB30
2
2
RB33
2
2
RB36
2
2
RB39
2
2
RB42
2
2
RB45
2
2
RB48
2
2
Shown without BD option
•• ••
Full width false fronts are available on 30”– 36” cabinets •• at no charge by adding “FF” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. RB33FF) Comes with one 15 ½” depth shelf.
48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
Range Base Drawer Stack - 24” Deep
•• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Cabinet
Fronts
Drawers
RBDB27
1
2
RBDB30
1
2
RBDB33
1
2
RBDB36
1
2
Full width false front at top. Middle and bottom openings are 9 ½” high. Drawer boxes are 18” deep to allow for ducting and power supplies. Change height will affect the lower openings equally
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Cooktop Vent - 24” Deep Cabinet
Doors
CT36
2
Drawers 1
CT39
2
2
CT42
2
2
CT45
2
2
CT48
2
2
CT484D
4
2
CT36 Shown w/ BD option Other widths have 2 drawers
•• •• ••
12” deep top drawer with scoop leaving a 2 ½” tall drawer box. Shelf is 10 3/8” deep; cabinet has a ¾” partition used as a removable, false back at 12” deep. POS not available in this cabinet.
•• ••
48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors.
2 Drawer Cooktop Cabinet - 24” Deep
••
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Top rail width can be specified; 1 ½” is standard. Use TRW (cook-top top rail width) to modify.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet
Drawers
CT2D27
2
CT2D30
2
CT2D33
2
CT2D36
2
•• Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are OW & OH. •• No web frame at top. •• See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of STOP
-9-
this section for information regarding cutouts.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Organizer - 24” Deep
••
•• ••
Cabinet
Doors
Drawers
BO39
2
4
BO42
2
4
Includes two deep drawers that can accommodate bread drawer modification and two drawers in center that can accommodate cutlery or utility trays. (Accesories not included) Two full width dovetail pull-out shelves behind butt doors. (Butt doors are standard on this cabinet) Change height will affect door openings. Change width will equally affect drawer openings.
Base Microwave Built-In - 24” Deep To figure drawer front height: Designer Overlay: Add 2” to drawer opening Standard Overlay: Add 3/4” to drawer opening
••
•• •• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures •• as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. •• Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH STOP A finished interior may be ordered. If added, entire cabinet will be finished. Cabinet has a ½” back. Top & bottom rails are 1 ½” wide. Middle rail is 3” wide. STOP Cabinet becomes custom when modifying rail width &
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-10-
Cabinet
Doors
Drawers
BMWB27
0
1
BMWB30
0
1
BMWB33
0
1
BMWB36
0
1
must be entered as CUSTOMBASE. One drawer in lower opening. Height of drawer varies with the cut-out size. Use of a trim kit is required. See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts. Maximum cut-out height to keep drawer is 20”
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Oven Cabinet - 24” Deep Cabinet BOC27 BOC30 BOC33 BOC36 BOC39
•• ••
••
Designed to accept oven in an under-the-counter ap•• plication. Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms •• section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant informa- STOP tion will affect the lead time. Cutout nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & STOP TOHH
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-11-
Rails are equal size. If you need your rails to be unequal use BOCTR to specify top rail. Inside cutout depth is 23 1/4” with back. The maximum cut-out height is 28” See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of this section for information regarding cutouts.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Farm Sink Base - 24” Deep
To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Add 2” to door opening Standard Overlay: Add ¾” to door opening
Cabinet
Doors
FSB27
2
FSB30
2
FSB33
2
FSB36
2
FSB39
2
FSB42
2
FSB45
2
FSB48
2
Shown with BD option
••
•• •• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are FSOH & FSOW. Top rail width can be specified; 1 ½” is standard. Solid top rail, to be cut on-site, can be specified using FSTRW. Use FSOH of 0 in addition to FSTRW.
••
Door overlaps top rail ¾” on designer and 3/8” on standard overlay. •• No web frame. •• See Base Cabinet Information page at the beginning of STOP this section for information regarding cutouts.
Sink Base - 24” Deep Cabinet
Shown without BD option
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. No Shelf included 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-12-
Doors
Fronts
SB18
1
1
SB21
1
1
SB24
1
1
SB24BD
2
1
SB27
2
1
SB30
2
2
SB33
2
2
SB36
2
2
SB39
2
2
SB42
2
2
SB45
2
2
SB48
2
2
SB484D
4
2
Full width false fronts are available on 30”-36” cabinets at no charge by adding “FF” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. SB36FF)
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Sink Base Full Door - 24” Deep Cabinet
Shown without BD option
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets •• No shelf included 8” top rail sits behind the doors; special hinge placement
Doors
SBFD18
1
SBFD21
1
SBFD24
1
SBFD24BD
2
SBFD27
2
SBFD30
2
SBFD33
2
SBFD36
2
SBFD39
2
SBFD42
2
SBFD45
2
SBFD48
2
48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
Clipped Corner Sink Base - 27” Deep Cabinet
Doors
Fronts
SB30CCFF
2
1
SB33CCFF
2
1
SB36CC
2
2
SB39CC
2
2
SB42CC
2
2
Shown without BD option
•• •• •• •• ••
Sink base with 3”x 3” clipped corners. No shelf included. Overall cabinet width is the size stated. Overall cabinet depth is 27”. Flutes and other decorative details can be added see MODIFICATIONS section.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-13-
Full width false fronts are available on 36”– 42” cabinets at no charge by adding “FF” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. SB36CCFF)
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
2 Drawer Base - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 14” w/ ¾” top reveal Top = 14 ½” w/ ¼” top reveal Bottom = 14 ¾” Std.Overlay: Both = 13 ½”
• • •
•
Maximum height is 34 ½”. Two equal sized openings. Opening are at 12 ¾”. Reduced height will affect both openings equally.
Cabinet
Drawers
B12D2
2
B15D2
2
B18D2
2
B21D2
2
B24D2
2
B27D2
2
B30D2
2
B33D2
2
B36D2
2
36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty. Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
•
3 Drawer Base - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 ¼” w/ ¾” top reveal Top = 6 ¾” w/ ¼” top reveal Middle = 10 ¾” Bottom = 11 ½” Std.Overlay: Top = 5 ¾” Middle & Bottom = 10 ¼”
•• ••
Frame Openings: Top = 5” tall; Middle & Lower = 9 ½” tall. Change height will affect the lower openings equally.
••
Cabinet B12D3 B15D3
Drawers 3 3
B18D3
3
B21D3
3
B24D3
3
B27D3
3
B30D3
3
B33D3
3
B36D3
3
36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty. Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
••
3 Drawer Base w/ Equal Fronts - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights:
Cabinet
Drawers
B12D3E
3
Designer Overlay: All = 9 ½” w/ ¾” top reveal All = 9 21/32” w/ ¼” top reveal
B15D3E
3
B18D3E
3
B21D3E
3
B24D3E
3
B27D3E
3
B30D3E
3
B33D3E
3
B36D3E
3
Std.Overlay: All = 8 ¾”
•• •• ••
Frame openings are not necessarily equal. Change height will affect drawer fronts equally. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-14-
Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
4 Drawer Base - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 ¼” w/ ¾” top reveal Top = 6 ¾” w/ ¼” top reveal Middle = 6 ¼” Bottom = 9 ½” Std.Overlay: Top 3 = 5 ¾” Bottom = 8 ¼”
•• •• •• ••
Frame Openings: Top three = 5” tall; Bottom = 7 ½” tall. Change height will affect bottom opening. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty. Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
••
Cabinet
Drawers
B12D4
4
B15D4
4
B18D4
4
B21D4
4
B24D4
4
B27D4
4
B30D4
4
B33D4
4
B36D4
4
On ¼” top reveal top front will be 6 ¾” and the middle fronts will be 6”. Consider using a D3 cabinet.
•STOP • Cannot reduce the height to less than 31”
4 Drawer Base w/ Equal Fronts - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: All = 7 1/16” w/ ¾” top reveal All = 7 3/16” w/ ¼” top reveal Std.Overlay: All = 6 ⅜”
•• •• ••
Frame openings are not necessarily equal. Change height will affect drawer fronts equally. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-15-
Cabinet
Drawers
B12D4E
4
B15D4E
4
B18D4E
4
B21D4E
4
B24D4E
4
B27D4E
4
B30D4E
4
B33D4E
4
B36D4E
4
Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets. Change height to 48” to use this cabinet in a walk-in closet
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Split 4 Drawer Base - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 ¼” w/ ¾” top reveal Top = 6 ¾” w/ ¼” top reveal Middle = 10 ¾” Bottom = 11 ½”
Cabinet
Drawers
B30SD4
4
B33SD4 B36SD4
4 4
Std.Overlay: Top = 5 ¾” Middle & Bottom = 10 ¼”
•• ••
••
Frame Openings: Top = 5” tall; Middle & Lower = 9 ½” tall. Change height will affect the lower openings equally.
36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty.
Split 5 Drawer Base - 24” Deep Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 ¼” w/ ¾” top reveal Top = 6 ¾” w/ ¼” top reveal Middle = 6 ¼” Bottom = 9 ½”
Cabinet
Drawers
B30SD5
5
B33SD5
5
B36SD5
5
Std.Overlay: Top 4 = 5 ¾” Bottom = 8 ¼”
•• •• ••
Frame Openings: Top three = 5” tall; Bottom = 7 ½” tall. Changed height will affect bottom opening. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty.
••
On ¼” top reveal top front will be 6 ¾” and the middle fronts will be 6”. Consider using a B__SD4 cabinet. •STOP • Cannot reduce the height to less than 31”
Dispensa Base Pull-Out - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet
Doors
DBPO12
1
DBPO15
1
DBPO18
1
DBPO21
1
No Reduce Heights No Change Depths No Reduce Widths on the 12” Comes with 2 trays Always door mount Champagne; non-slip finish Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
-16-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Spice Base Cabinet - 24” Deep
•• ••
SBC12 Shown
••
••
Three shelf spice rack mounts to door and pulls out on two full extension drawer guides. Not available with soft close guides. Rack is 1” less than opening. Chrome rails.
•• •• ••
••
Cabinet
Doors
SBC9
1
SBC12
1
Insert is accessible on both sides. NO modifications to this cabinet without prior authorization. Shelf placement can be changed by adding an OM-SP as a modification. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Spice Base Frameless Cabinet - 24” Deep REDESIGNED
Cabinet
Doors
SBC6L/R
1
SBCFF6L/R
1
SBCFF6 Shown
••
Door is slab must add overlay to flush out with doors. Filler Face will be flush with cabinet frame. Three shelf spice rack mounts to door and pulls out on two full extension drawer guides. Rack is ¾” less than opening. Chrome rails. Specify left or right to designate which side the shelves are accessible on.
•• •• ••
•• •• •• ••
NO modifications to this cabinet without prior authorization. Shelf placement can be changed by adding an OM-SP as a modification. SBCFF6 comes with an FTK, ⅛” reveal top & bottom & ¼” reveal left & right. It should be used with decorative attachments, i.e. table legs. See Clipped Spice Base cabinet for details on attaching table legs.
Clipped Spice Base Cabinet - 24” Deep Cabinet
6”
CCSBC6L CCSBC6R 1½”
4¼
”
••
1½”
•• ••
CCSBC6R Shown
•• •• ••
Three shelf spice rack mounts to 3” clip and pulls out on two full extension drawer guides. Chrome rails. A 3” clip sits flush to adjacent cabinet frame with an ⅛” reveal on both sides and top.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-17-
Shelves are accessible from the deepest side. Specify L or R to designate the shortest side. (Ex: CCSBC6R) 24” on the deepest side. NO modifications to this cabinet without prior authorization. If ordering one CCSBC6 with a table leg attached, charge for one leg + SPLIT LEG as a modification to split the leg. If ordering a pair, there will only be one leg charge and one fee to split. To attach table leg to clip add OM-ATT as a modification.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Recycle Bin Center - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs
RBC18-2
1
1
Bins 2
RBC30-4
2
2
4
Available in 2 and 4 bin units. Each plastic bin has a 27 qt. capacity. Door mounted units are available by adding RBMD as a modification. The 30” unit has 2 independent pairs of bins so the left & right sides will pull out separately. No depth changes available on these units. Width changes are available: minimum opening for 2 bin = 12” / 4 bin = 23 ½” Weight capacity: 150 lbs. Butt doors are standard on RBC30-4.
Recycle Bin Deluxe
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Bins
RBC24DLX
2
Unit consists of a heavy duty brushed aluminum frame w/ epoxy covered wire cage. Recycle bins pull out on full extension soft close guides. Only available as door mount. Unit comes with three 25qt.polymer bins for glass, plastic, and aluminum in blue, yellow & green. A forth section is occupied by a canvas bag for recycleable paper. Weight capacity: 100 lbs No dimension changes.
Mid-Line Trash Bin
•• •• •• SOFT-CLOSE
•• •• ••
High quality bottom mount bin. Only available as a door mount. 15" wide unit has one 36 qt. Trash Bin and small storage space at back for trash liner storage.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
-18-
With Full Door
Doors
Drwrs
BTB15M
1
0
Bins 1
BTB18M
1
0
2
With Drawer
Doors
Drwrs
Bins
BTB15MWD
1
1
1
BTB18MWD
1
1
2
18" wide units will have (2) 36 qt. bins. Full extension drawer slides with 110 lbs weight capacity with soft-close. Trash bins are white polymer plastic. Guides are also white. No dimension changes. Lids available for trash bins. See LID TB SS in the accessories & Modifications section. Use FMS to add fixed mid shelf in between door & drawer opening behind rail.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Trash Bin - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
With Full Door
Doors
Drwrs
BTB15
1
0
Bins 1
BTB18
1
0
2
BTB21
1
0
2
BTB24
1
0
2
With Drawer
Doors
Drwrs
Bins
BTB15WD
1
1
1
BTB18WD
1
1
2
BTB21WD
1
1
2
BTB24WD
1
1
2
Unit is made of UV coated maple material. Trash bins pull-out on white epoxy coated full extension side mount guides & are not self closing. Only available as door mount. 15” wide unit has one 35 qt. trash bin & small storage space at back for trash liner storage. 18”, 21” & 24” wide units have two 35 qt. trash bins. Trash bins are 35 quart white polymer plastic Weight capacity: 150 lbs. No dimension changes. Lids available for trash bins. See LID TB SS in the Accessories & Modifications section. Use FMS to add fixed mid shelf in between door & drawer opening behind rail.
Trash Bin Bottom Mount - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• SOFT-CLOSE
•• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-19-
With Full Door
Doors
Drwrs
BTB15BM
1
0
Bins 1
BTB18BM
1
0
2
BTB21BM
1
0
2
With Drawer
Doors
Drwrs
Bins
BTB15BMWD
1
1
1
BTB18BMWD
1
1
2
BTB21BMWD
1
1
2
Unit consists of a bottom mount off white wire cage. Trash bins pull-out on full extension soft closed guides. Door mount is standard. 15” wide unit has one 35 qt. trash bin & small storage basket at back for trash liner storage. 18” & 21” wide units have two 35 qt. trash bins. Trash bins are 35 quart white polymer plastic Weight capacity: 100 lbs. No dimension changes. Lids available for trash bins. See LID TB SS in the Accessories & Modifications section. Use FMS to add fixed mid shelf in between door & drawer opening behind rail.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Wine Rack - 12” Deep Cabinet
•• •• ••
Wine grid on 4” spacing; the number of holes depends on the cabinet size. The number of bottle openings listed is an estimate; actual number may vary. This cabinet comes with a finished interior, a ½” back, and a full top.
••
••
Approx. # of Openings
BWR1212
3
BWR1512
11
BWR1812
11
BWR2112
17
BWR2412
17
BWR2712
25
BWR3012
25
BWR3312
25
BWR3612
31
Wine racks are available in other cabinets by adding WWR as a modification which may make the cabinet custom. See Accessory & Modification section for this option. Recessed toe kick is standard
Base Wine Holder - 24” Deep Cabinet BWH27 BWH30 BWH33 BWH36
•• •• •• ••
••
Comes with a standard base depth, full width drawer. Finished interior is standard. A ¾” false back set at 12” deep in the lower opening. Bottom opening is 20 ½” tall.
••
No dimension changes or modifications without approval. Recessed toe kick is standard
Base Wine Cubby - 24” Deep
•• •• •• ••
BWC9 Shown
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-20-
Cabinet
# Openings
BWC6
5
BWC9
5
6” wide unit is frameless; ¾” construction. Finished ends only available with the understanding that pin nails may be visible. 9” wide unit is framed; 1 ½” wide stiles & rails. Finished interior is standard. Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe. Order 6” wide frameless unit & change width if needed.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Apothecary Unit - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• •• BAU95D Shown
W/ Drawer Front
Drawers
BAU65S
5
BAU95S
5
Exposed Dovetail
Drawers
BAU65D
5
BAU95D
5
6” wide unit is frameless; ¾” plywood construction with edgebanding. Finished ends are only available on frameless unit with the understanding that pin nails may be visible 9” wide unit is framed; 1 ½” wide stiles & rails. Exposed dovetails are finished to match the exterior. Fronts may not be equal in height. Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe. Order 6” wide frameless unit & change width if needed.
Base Cubby Unit - 24” Deep Cabinet
# Openings
BCU6
5
BCU9
5
BCU15 2ROWS
10
BCU18 2ROWS
10
BCU9 & BCU15 2ROWS Shown
•• •• ••
6” wide unit is frameless; ¾” plywood construction with edgebanding. Finished ends are only available on frameless unit with the understanding that pin nails may be visible 9”, 15”, & 18” units are framed; 1 ½” wide stiles & rails.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-21-
Finished interior is standard. Reduce width is not available on the 9” unit due to faceframe. Order 6” wide frameless unit & change width if needed.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base End Shelf - 24” Deep Cabinet BES
•• •• ••
BES-L Shown
•• •• •• ••
12” wide x 24” deep; designed to fit at the end of a base cabinet. Specify left or right to indicate which side the shelves are open on. Standard with an 8” radius; optional with a 3” x 3” clip by specifying in the cabinet notes. Cove route on exposed edges of shelves. Shelves are secured with screws. 9 ½” between shelves Sides constructed of ¾” material.
Base Bookcase - 12” Deep Shown with Roman arch valance
Cabinet BBC2412 BBC2712 BBC3012 BBC3312 BBC3612
•• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-22-
Finished interior is standard. Comes with Standard Valance as top rail; can be changed by specifying in the cabinet notes. See Accessories & Modifications section for valance options. Shelves come standard with CTE2. Shelves constructed of ¾” material. Recessed toe kick is standard
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Full Door Peninsula - 24” Deep Cabinet
BFDP24L Shown
•• •• ••
Full-height doors & recessed toe kick on both sides. One full depth adjustable shelf. 48” wide cabinet will always come with a center stile
Doors
BFDP24
2
BFDP24BD
4
BFDP27
4
BFDP30
4
BFDP33
4
BFDP36
4
BFDP39
4
BFDP42
4
BFDP45
4
BFDP48
4
unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
Base Peninsula - 24” Deep Cabinet
•• •• ••
Base cabinets with doors & recessed toe kick on both sides. Drawers on the kitchen side & false fronts on the other. One full depth adjustable shelf. Super drawers (full width) are available on 30”– 36” cabinets by adding “SD” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex: BP36SD)
••
Doors
Drwrs
Fronts
BP24
2
1
1
BP24BD
4
1
1
BP27
4
1
1
BP30
4
2
2
BP33
4
2
2
BP36
4
2
2
BP39
4
2
2
BP42
4
2
2
BP45
4
2
2
BP48
4
2
2
48” wide cabinet will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
Diagonal Sink Front 42" 39" 36"
Doors
Fronts
DSF36
1
1
DSF39
1
1
DSF42
2
1
2 17 25 1 1/ " 1/ 4" 2"
42"39"36"
Cabinets
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Frame is mitered at 45º. Stiles are 1 ½” wide at face. Size denotes wall requirements. Toe kick shipped attached.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-23-
Bottom is not included. Order loose ¾” NTO paneling to be fit on site. 1” reveal on each side on both standard, full and designer overlay jobs.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Corner Recycle Bin Cabinet
Doors
CRB36
2
•• ••
Three removable, 32 qt. bins; pole mounted. Specify hinge direction. Bi-pass doors available upon request. •• ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space. •• When placing this cabinet next to an appliance, STOP a PIE-CUT hinge is recommended and is standard on designer overlay jobs.
Shown with Bi-Pass doors
Base Easy Reach Cabinet
Doors
BER33
2
BER36
2
•• ••
Specify hinge direction. Bi-pass doors available upon request and recommended when you have requested a change in width. 33” x 33” and 36” x 36” with one ½” thick fixed shelf. Cabinets may be built with a back dimension longer than 36”, but it is not recommended. To change the legs to different dimensions use CWL, CWR, RWL, RWR, CDL, CDR, RDL, RDR.
•• •• ••
The Super Susan cabinet is deeper overall than the regular Susan and Base Easy Reach cabinets, therefore, Super Susan shelves cannot be retrofit later in the BER or BLS cabinets. •• This cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOMBASE if you opt to delete the fixed shelf. •• ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space. •STOP • Any time you order a 33” BER33, #384 door will fall below min & will be slab doors on 33" units. •STOP • When placing this cabinet next to an appliance, a PIE-CUT hinge is recommended and is standard on designer overlay jobs.
Base Lazy Susan Plastic Trays
Doors
Trays
BLS33
2
2) 28” dia. 2) 28” dia.
BLS36
2
Wood Trays
Doors
Trays
BLSS33
2
2) 28” dia.
BLSS36
2
2) 32” dia.
BLS33L Shown Above
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction. Bi-pass doors available upon request. 33” x 33” and 36” x 36”, changes in width & depth are not recommended. May eliminate rounds. To change the legs to different dimensions you need to charge 1 ½ CW charges. The standard susan, BLS, comes with plastic trays attached to a center pole, due to the pole RH (reduced height) is not allowed. If needed you should order as a BLSS instead.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
The Super Susan, BLSS, comes with wooden revolving shelves attached to fixed shelves (no center pole). •• ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space. Any time you order a 33” BLS or BLSS, #384 door will STOP fall below min & will be slab doors on 33" units. •STOP • Removable, recessed toe kick on super susan cabinet. Recessed on all sides. Any finished end will not include the toe kick portion. •• When placing this cabinet next to an appliance, a STOP PIE-CUT hinge is recommended and is standard on designer overlay jobs.
-24-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Lazy Susan Diagonal
•• ••
Doors
Trays
BLSD33
1
2) 28” dia. 2) 28” dia.
BLSD36
1
Wood Trays
Doors
Trays
BLSSD33
1
2) 28” dia.
BLSSD36
1
2) 32” dia.
••
The Super Susan, BLSSD, comes with wooden revolving shelves attached to fixed shelves (no center pole). Specify hinge direction. • • The BLSSD36 can be reduced to a minimum of 35” to 33” x 33” and 36” x 36”, changes in width & depth are keep thev standard tray size. not recommended. May eliminate rounds. •• ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space. 30” frame to clip on BLSD. 34” frame to clip on BLSSD. •• Removeable, recessed toe kick on super susan cabinet. The standard susan, BLSD, comes with plastic trays attached •• STK is standard on Super Susans. to a center pole, due to the pole RH (reduced height) is not •STOP • Recessed on all sides. Any finished end will not allowed. If needed you should order as a BLSSD instead. include the toe kick portion. BLSD33R Shown
•• ••
Plastic Trays
Base Lazy Susan Diagonal w/ Drawer Wood Trays
Doors
Drwrs
Trays
BLSSD33WD
1
1
2) 28” dia.
BLSSD36WD
1
1
2) 32” dia.
••
The Super Susan, BLSSD__WD comes with wooden revolving shelves attached to fixed shelves (no center pole). •• ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space. •• STK is standard on Super Susans. •• Removeable, recessed toe kick on super susan cabinet. STOP Recessed on all sides. Any finished end will not include the toe kick portion.
BLSSD33WD Shown
•• ••
Specify hinge direction. 33” x 33” and 36” x 36”, changes in width & depth are not recommended. May eliminate rounds. One drawer; 5” tall opening. 34” frame to clip on BLSS.
•• ••
Base Diagonal Corner
BDC36R Shown
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. One drawer (on BDC only); one ½” thick fixed shelf centered in door opening. Butt doors on 42” - 45” cabinets is standard.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
-25-
With Drawer
Doors
Drwrs
BDC36
1
1
BDC39
1
1
BDC42
2
1
BDC45
2
1
Full Door
Doors
Drwrs
BDCFD36
1
0
BDCFD39
1
0
BDCFD42
2
0
BDCFD45
2
0
30” frame to clip. This cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOMBASE if you opt to delete the fixed shelf. ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Sink Base Diagonal With Drawer
Doors
Fronts
SBD36
1
1
SBD39
1
1
SBD42
2
1
SBD45
2
1
SBD36R Shown
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
SBD48
2
1
Full Door
Doors
Fronts
SBDFD36
1
0
SBDFD39
1
0
SBDFD42
2
0
SBDFD45
2
0
SBDFD48
2
0
Will have a shipping strut. Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Butt doors on 42” – 48” cabinets is standard. False front on SBD. 30” frame to clip. No shelf ¼” backs are standard to maximize interior space.
Recessed Sink Base Diagonal 42, 45, or 48
TOP VIEW
Cabinet
Doors
Fronts
RSBD42
1
1
RSBD45
2
1
RSBD48
2
1
24
24
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Top View
5
41 2
21 4
1 1/2 X 18 1/8
1 12
41 2
3
11 2
Front View 21
1 1/2 X 18 1/8 18 1/8
3 X 30 1/2
18 3/4”
21 4
1 1/2 X 18 1/8
3 X 30 1/2
g
1 24
Op en in
42, 45, or 48
24 7 16 Door Opening: Frame Opening: RSBD42 = =2020-5/16 5/16” RSBD42 RSBD45 = =2424-9/16 9/16” RSBD45 RSBD48 RSBD48 = =2828-13/16 13/16”
30 1 2
21 4
Opening 41 2
1 42
11 2
3
24 1/8
•• •• •• •• ••
-26-
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Frame is recessed 4 ½”. False front. 24 7/16” frame to clip. FFDO not available for this cabinet.
1
1 2
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Information you should know about Blind Cabinets
3"
12"
3"
4½7 "
30"
½"
XW 423 0L
6"
0 03 W3
42" Pul led 3" Fro mW 27" all 1½ "
4½ " 30"
12"
3" Cu Fille sto r, m WEar 3" ide or 4 Sti ½" le
24"
42" XB 42L Pul led 3" Fro mW all 6"
3" 18" R B18
19½ " 4½ "
15" 1½ " 4½ "
34½ "
3" Cu Fille sto r, m Ear Wi or de 4½ Sti " le
24"
•• •• ••
BLIND CORNER WALL CABINETS - 12” DEEP Single or Butt Door opening width = stated dimension minus 15” (7 1/2” + 6” + 1 1/2”) Standard Double Door opening width = stated dimension minus 18” (7 1/2” + 6” + 3” + 1 1/2”) See Wall section
•• ••
BLIND CORNER BASE CABINETS - 24” DEEP Door opening width = stated dimension minus 27” (19 1/2” + 6” + 1 1/2”) See next page
Due to decorative hardware on blind base drawers, a 3” pull from wall is recommended. (Especially with designer overlay). To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Standard, Designer Overlay fillers for use on adjacent cabinet can be found in the Accessories & Modifications section.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-27-
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Blind Corner Base - 24” Deep With Drawer
•• ••
Doors
Drwrs
Opening
XB36
1
1
9”
XB39
1
1
12”
XB42
1
1
15”
XB45
1
1
18”
XB48
1
1
21”
XB48BD
2
1
21”
Full Door
Doors
Drwrs
Opening
XBFD36
1
0
9”
XBFD39
1
0
12”
XBFD42
1
0
15”
XBFD45
1
0
18”
XBFD48
1
0
21”
XBFD48BD
2
0
21”
•• ••
Door is hinged on the blind side; specify blind left or right. Full blind has a 6” finished intermediate stile with 19 ½” unfinished blind panel. One 15 ½” depth adjustable shelf. Blind cabinets must be pulled a minimum of 1 ½”; maximum pull is 4”. A 3” pull is recommended, especially with full or designer overlay. To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Adjacent cabinet should also have a filler or ear the same width as the pull. Adjust accordingly for any knobs or hardware added to the doors and/or drawer fronts. Opening width is stated dimension minus 27”. To modify door opening, add MODIFY BLIND as a modification & specify the opening. To finish the blind add FBLIND as a modification to the cabinet. Reductions in width will affect the opening.
STOP
Blind corner Accessory Hardware will not work on 36” or 39”
•• ••
•• •• ••
Blind Corner Peninsula - 24” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Two doors on the back and one on the front, hinged on the blind side. Specify left or right. Full blind has a 6” finished intermediate stile with 19 ½” unfinished blind panel. Two working drawers and one full depth shelf. Opening width is stated dimension minus 27”. Corner base cabinets can be pulled up to 4”. Blind cabinets must be pulled a minimum of 1 ½”; maximum pull is 4”. A 3” pull is recommended, espe-
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
-28-
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs/Frts
XBP36
3
2/1
Opening 9”
XBP39
3
2/1
12”
XBP42
3
2/1
15”
XBP45
3
2/1
18”
XBP48
3
2/1
21”
cially with designer overlay. To create a built in pull use MODIFY BLIND as a modification. Adjacent cabinet must have a filler equal to the width of the pull. Adjust accordingly for any knobs or hardware added to the doors and/or drawer fronts. To finish the blind add FBLIND as a modification to the cabinet. 2” wide stile on back, same side as blind.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Angle - 12” or 24” Deep TOP VIEW Depth
Width
24" 1-1/2"
24"
•• •• •• •• •• ••
1-1/2"
BA24 Shown
STOP Approximate measurement across the front: 12” = 14 13/16” 24” = 31 13/16”
12”x 12” Unit
Doors
BA12 24”x 24” Unit
1 Doors
BA24
2
Comes with a full top. Diagonal end is 45º. 1 ½” finished return to wall. One full depth adjustable shelf. Finished ends are not available. When modifying dimensions: L=width, R=depth. Use SP RETURN as a modification to modify the returns equally. Quantity of doors will not change! A center stile is standard unless ordering butt doors on a 24" cabinet
Angle End Base - 24” Deep O
90
65
O
•• ••
O
140
65
•• ••
O
Cabinet
Doors
AEB24
2
One adjustable shelf. 140˚ between frames; 65˚ to adjacent cabinet. Approx. 18” wide frames. Butt doors are not available. Comes with a full top.
DOOR WIDTH SIZES: Designer Overlay: 17 5/8” Std.Overlay: 16 1/16”
Base Transition Cabinet - 24” Deep 24"
•• 12"
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
Std.Overlay: 14”
Doors 1
BTC12L
1
12"
17"
DOOR WIDTH SIZES: Designer Overlay: 15 7/8”
Cabinet BTC12R
••
-29-
Single door base cabinet with one full depth adjustable shelf. Cabinet is always hinged on the short side. Changes in depth will maintain a 45˚ angle; both sides will change the same amount in depth. Changes in width will maintain a 45˚ angle which will affect the short depth side. Comes with a full top.
Base Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Panel Filler Cabinet BPF1.5 BPF3 Top View
BPF6
1 1/2"
45˚ Angle On Front
24 24”
BPFA3 BPFA6
•• •• •• ••
½” plywood panel with 1 ½”, 3”, or 6” stile. •• Indicate ¼” reveal left or right; this will automatically finish the end. Flush toe kick is available at no charge by adding FTK as •• a modification. Can be increased up to 30” deep by using CDNC.
Change width & height available. Change depth over 30” available. Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost & specify the dimension change. Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
Base Box Filler Cabinet
BBF3
BBF3
BBF6 With 45˚ Angle
BBFA3 BBFA6 Peninsula
BBFP3 BBFP6 •• •• ••
BBFA3
•• ••
TOP VIEW
3 3
•• •• ••
BBFP3
3
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Top View
3
-30-
3” or 6” wide Both ends are always finished. Box filler has a ¼” reveal on the sides and a flush toe kick. Can be increased up to 30” deep by using CDNC. Change width and height available. Change depth over 30” available. Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost & specify the dimension change. Peninsula Box Filler has a stile on the front and back. Must specify left or right on the angled fillers Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Vanity Section VANITY CABINET INFORMATION................................................ 2 VANITY CABINET CONSTRUCTION............................................ 3 ANGLED CABINETS Vanity Angle...................................................................................10 COMBO CABINETS Vanity Special w/ Drawers..........................................................7 Vanity Sink w/ Double Stack.................................................... 8 Vanity Sink Base w/ Drawers.................................................... 8 Vanity Sink Base Combo............................................................ 9 DESK CABINETS Pencil Drawer.................................................................................10 Vanity Drawer................................................................................10 Vanity File Drawer........................................................................ 12 Desk Panel Leg.............................................................................. 13 DIAGONALS Vanity Corner Diagonal............................................................... 9 DRAWER BANKS Vanity 3 Drawer............................................................................. 6 Vanity 4 Drawer..............................................................................7 Vanity Special w/ Drawers..........................................................7 Vanity Sink w/ Double Stack.................................................... 8 Vanity Sink Base Combo............................................................ 9 Vanity File Drawer........................................................................ 12
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
FILLERS Vanity Panel Filler........................................................................ 13 Vanity Box Filler............................................................................ 13 FULL DOOR CABINETS Vanity Full Door – 12” deep....................................................... 4 Vanity Full Door – 21” deep....................................................... 4 MEDICINE CABINETS Recessed Medicine Cabinet...................................................... 11 Surface-Mount Medicine Cabinet........................................... 12 Tri-View Medicine Cabinet........................................................ 12 SINK BASE Vanity Sink Base............................................................................ 5 Vanity Special w/ Drawers..........................................................7 Vanity Sink w/ Double Stack.................................................... 8 Vanity Sink Base w/ Drawers.................................................... 8 Vanity Sink Base Combo............................................................ 9 VANITY BASE Vanity Base...................................................................................... 5 WALLS Wall Bath Cabinets – 10” deep................................................. 11 Wall Bath Open Shelf – 10” deep............................................ 11
-1-
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Cabinet Information Helpful Notes About Vanity Cabinet Section Vanities are 31 1/4”” tall x 21” deep, unless otherwise stated. Vanities are available at base height, 34 ½” tall. To order Base Height Vanities, add a “B” (base height) in front of the “V”. (Ex. BV24) – The only exceptions to this are the VFDC, VSF, and VBF cabinets. •• On designer overlay, choice of 1/4” or 3/4” reveal at tops of base & vanity cabinets must be specified in the field below hinge type. •• Vanity sink base units with drawers may not be large enough to receive 5-piece drawer fronts. Check drawer front minimums and notes on each cabinet. •• To figure drawer front sizes on vanity combo cabinets, add 2 5/8” for designer overlay or 1” for standard overlay. •• Mirror Frames to match the cabinetry are available. These can be found in the Accessories & Modifications section.
•• ••
Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab. Entering a Faceframe and Door Only •• For a full door cabinet, enter a 12” deep base cabinet, then enter FFDO as a modification. •• For a cabinet with doors and drawer fronts, enter a sink base cabinet, then enter FFDO as a modification.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-2-
Vanity Cabinets CONSTRUCTION HEARTLAND VANITY CABINET HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Cabinet Construction Vanity Cabinets: 31 1/4” H x 21" D and 1 1/2" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets. Toe kick is 4 1/2” Tall x 3 1/4” without toe board.
5
5
5
3 1/4 5 3/4
5
4 1/2
3
PD
VD 23 3/4 5
7 7/8
26 3/4 31 1/4
17 1/4
23 3/4
26 3/4 31 1/4
5
17 1/4 7 7/8
4 3/4
VFD
4 1/2
B
VSB/VSF
V
3
5
C
V_D3
V_D4
VFDC
5
B
5
5
7 7/8 26 3/4 31 1/4
3
A RW pulls from the
VSB__D (36" - 45") drawer openings.
4 1/2
3
17 1/4
VSBC__ (60" - 72")
17 1/4
A
7 7/8 B
A
A
7 7/8
3
17 1/4
4 1/2
7 7/8
A
RW pulls from the door openings.
VBSP__L
B
RW pulls from both openings equally.
Vanity Cabinet Opening Widths 5
3
26 3/4 31 1/4
5
3
3
3
17 1/4
A
B
4 1/2
VSB__D (48" - 60")
17 1/4
B
RW pulls from the left & right (center remains the same).
7 7/8 B
A
B
VSB__DB (45" - 60") RW pulls from the drawer banks.
1-7/8"
2"
1-7/8" 2" 15 1/2 27
7 7/8
26 1/4
27
26
2"
2" 2"
20
2"
Cabinet VSB36D VSB39D VSB42D VSB45D VSB48D VSB51D VSB54D VSB57D VSB60D
A 15 16 1/2 18 19 1/2 20 20 24 24 24
B 6 7 1/2 9 10 1/2 9 1/2 11 10 1/2 12 13 1/2
Cabinet VSBC60 VSBC63 VSBC66 VSBC69 VSBC72
A 21 21 24 24 24
B 9 12 9 12 15
Cabinet VBSP24 VBSP27 VBSP30 VBSP33 VBSP36 VBSP39 VBSP42 VBSP45 VBSP48
A 10 1/2 12 13 1/2 15 16 1/2 18 21 24 27
B 7 1/2 9 10 1/2 12 13 1/2 15 15 15 15
A 20 20 20 24 24 24
B 8 9 1/2 11 10 1/2 12 13 1/2
10 2"
1-7/8"
WBC_30
WBC_30OS
TVMC_
WMCSM_30
2"
WMC_30
WMC_24
24 1 1/2 12 1 1/2
24
VA18
12 VA12
1 1/2
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
1 1/2
-3-
Cabinet VSB45DB VSB48DB VSB51DB VSB54DB VSB57DB VSB60DB
C 15 15 15 15
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Full Door - 12” Deep Cabinet
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. 12” deep cabinet comes with one full depth adjustable shelf. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
•• ••
Doors
VFD912
1
VFD1212
1
VFD1512
1
VFD1812
1
VFD2112
1
VFD2412
1
VFD2412BD
2
VFD2712
2
VFD3012
2
VFD3312
2
VFD3612
2
VFD3912
2
VFD4212
2
VFD4512
2
VFD4812
2
VFD48124D
4
The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Vanity Full Door Cabinet
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with one 15 ½” adjustable shelf. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-4-
Doors
VFD9
1
VFD12
1
VFD15
1
VFD18
1
VFD21
1
VFD24
1
VFD24BD
2
VFD27
2
VFD30
2
VFD33
2
VFD36
2
VFD39
2
VFD42
2
VFD45
2
VFD48
2
VFD484D
4
The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Watch out for door minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Base
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Comes with one 15 ½” deep adjustable shelf. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors.
•• ••
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs
V12
1
1
V15
1
1
V18
1
1
V21
1
1
V24
1
1
V24BD
2
1
V27
2
1
V30
2
2
V33
2
2
V36
2
2
V39
2
2
V42
2
2
V45
2
2
V48
2
2
V484D
4
2
Super drawers (full width) are available on 30” – 36” cabinets by adding “SD” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. V36SD) Watch out for door & drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Vanity Sink Base Cabinet
•• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. No Shelf included. 48” wide two-door cabinets will always come with a center stile unless BD (butt doors) is added as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
-5-
Doors
Fronts
VSB18
1
1
VSB21
1
1
VSB24
1
1
VSB24BD
2
1
VSB27
2
1
VSB30
2
2
VSB33
2
2
VSB36
2
2
VSB39
2
2
VSB42
2
2
VSB45
2
2
VSB48
2
2
VSB484D
4
2
The 48” wide four-door cabinets will come standard with two sets of butt doors. Full width false fronts are available on 30”-36” cabinets by adding “FF” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. VSB30FF)
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity 3 Drawer Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 1/4” w/ 3/4” top reveal Top = 6 3/4” w/ 1/4” top reveal Middle = 9 1/8” Bottom = 9 7/8” Std.Overlay: Top = 5 3/4” Middle & Bottom = 8 5/8”
•• •• ••
Frame Openings: Top = 5” tall; Middle & Lower = 7 7/8” tall. •• Change height will affect the lower openings equally. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
Cabinet
Drawers
V12D3
3
V15D3
3
V18D3
3
V21D3
3
V24D3
3
V27D3
3
V30D3
3
V33D3
3
V36D3
3
Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity 4 Drawer Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 1/4” w/ 3/4” top reveal Top = 6 3/4” w/ 1/4” top reveal Middle = 6” Bottom = 6 3/4” Std.Overlay: Top = 5 3/4” Bottom 3 = 5 1/2”
•• •• •• •• ••
Frame Openings: Top = 5” tall; Bottom three = 4 3/4” tall. Change height will affect bottom three openings. 36” wide cabinet is the maximum covered under warranty. Watch out for drawer front minimums on smaller width cabinets. Top drawer front will be slightly bigger than middle
Cabinet V12D4
Drawers 4
V15D4
4
V18D4
4
V21D4
4
V24D4
4
V27D4
4
V30D4
4
V33D4
4
V36D4
4
fronts. Consider using a D3 instead if concerned.
•• Reductions in height are not allowed. •• Bottom 3 fronts will be slab on standard overlay jobs STOP when five-piece drawer fronts are ordered.
Vanity Special w/ Drawers Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 1/4” w/ 3/4” top reveal Top = 6 3/4” w/ 1/4” top reveal Middle = 9 1/8” Bottom = 9 7/8” Std.Overlay: Top = 5 3/4” Middle & Bottom = 8 5/8” VBSP36R Shown
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify drawers right or left (Ex. Drawers left would be VBSP24L) All drawers in bank are functional on 39” W and larger. One false drawer front over door opening. Full width false fronts standard on VBSP24 & VBSP27. Two false fronts on 30” - 36” cabinets, for full width false front add “FF” to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. VBSP36LFF) Single doors hinge on opposite side of drawer stack. 45”- 48” comes with butt doors.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
Working Door Drawer Drawers Opening Opening
Cabinet
Doors
VBSP24
1
2
10 ½
VBSP27
1
2
12
9
VBSP30
1
2
13 ½
10 ½
7½
VBSP33
1
2
15
12
VBSP36
1
2
16 ½
13 ½
VBSP39
1
3
18
15
VBSP42
1
3
21
15
VBSP45
2
3
24
15
VBSP48
2
3
27
15
Butt doors available on the 42” by adding BD to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. VBSP42LBD) Change height will affect the lower drawer openings equally. Change width will affect both openings equally.
STOP Watch out for door & drawer front minimums when
-7-
ordering five-piece doors & fronts. See Vanity Information page at the beginning of this section.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Sink w/ Double Stack
•• •• •• ••
Drawer Front Heights: Designer Overlay: Top = 6 1/4” w/ 3/4” top reveal Top = 6 3/4” w/ 1/4” top reveal Middle = 9 1/8” Bottom = 9 7/8”
Std.Overlay: Top = 5 3/4” Middle & Bottom = 8 5/8”
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs
Door Opening
Drawer Opening
VSB45DB
2
6
20
8
VSB48DB
2
6
20
9½
VSB51DB
2
6
20
11
VSB54DB
2
6
24
10 ½
VSB57DB
2
6
24
12
VSB60DB
2
6
24
13 ½
Sink in the middle of two drawer banks. Center opening has butt doors. Change height will affect the lower drawer openings equally. Change width will affect the drawer openings equally.
STOP Watch out for door & drawer front minimums when ordering five-piece doors & fronts. See Vanity Information page at the beginning of this section.
Vanity Sink Base w/ Drawers
•• •• •• •• ••
Sink in the middle of two drawers. Center opening has butt doors on 48” width and up. Change width will affect the drawer openings equally. One false drawer front in center. Cabinet has one large opening; no center partitions.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet
Doors
Drwrs
Sink Opening
Drawer Opening
VSB36D
2
2
15
6
VSB39D
2
2
15
7½
VSB42D
2
2
15
9
VSB45D
2
2
15
10 ½
VSB48D
4
2
20
9½
VSB51D
4
2
20
11
VSB54D
4
2
24
10 ½
VSB57D
4
2
24
12
VSB60D
4
2
24
13 ½
•STOP • Watch out for door & drawer front minimums when ordering five-piece doors & fronts. See Vanity Information page at the beginning of this section.
-8-
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Sink Base Combo
••
VSBC60-63s have one door per sink area; the VSBC60BD, VSBC63BD & 66-72 have 2 doors per sink area. •• Full width false fronts are standard. •• Change height will affect the lower drawer openings equally. •• Change width will affect the door openings equally. •• Available with full doors on the 60” & 63” by adding “FD” to end of the product nomenclature. •STOP • Watch out for door & drawer front minimums when ordering five-piece doors & fronts. See Vanity Information page at the beginning of this section. Drawer Front Heights:
Cabinet VSBC60
Doors 2
Drwrs 3
VSBC60BD
4
3
VSBC60FD
2
3
VSBC60FDBD
4
3
VSBC63
2
3
VSBC63BD
4
3
VSBC63FD
2
3
VSBC63FDBD
4
3
VSBC66
4
3
VSBC69
4
3
VSBC72
4
3
Combos consist of: VSBC60 (VSB24-V12D3-VSB24) VSBC63 (VSB24-V15D3-VSB24) VSBC66 (VSB27-V12D3-VSB27) VSBC69 (VSB27-V15D3-VSB27) VSBC72 (VSB27-V18D3-VSB27)
Designer Overlay: Top = 6 1/4” w/ 3/4” top reveal Top = 6 3/4” w/ 1/4” top reveal Middle = 9 1/8” Bottom = 9 7/8”
Std.Overlay: Top = 5 3/4” Middle & Bottom = 8 5/8”
Vanity Corner Diagonal
•• •• •• •• •• VCD36R Shown
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-9-
12” Deep VCD3312
Doors 2
Drwrs 1
FF Width 29 11/16 33 15/16
VCD3612
2
1
VCD3912
2
1
38 3/16
21” Deep
Doors
Drwrs
FF Width
VCD33
1
1
17
VCD36
1
1
21 3/16
VCD39
2
1
25 7/16
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Vanity is 31 ¼” tall x 12 or 21” deep sides. The depth must be stated for 12” deep cabinet One drawer; one ½” thick fixed shelf centered in door opening. To use in a sink application add TDF (top drawer false) as a modification to replace the top drawer with a false front. 1/4” backs are standard to maximize interior space.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity Angle TOP VIEW Depth
Width
21" 1-1/2"
21"
Doors 2
VA21
2
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Comes with a full top. Diagonal end is 45˚. 1 1/2” finished return to wall. One full depth adjustable shelf. Finished ends are not available. When modifying dimensions: L=width, R=depth. Add SP RETURN as a modification to modify the returns equally. Quantity of doors will not change. •STOP • A center stile is standard unless ordering butt doors.
1-1/2" Shown with Butt Doors
Cabinet VA18
VA21 Shown
Approximate measurement across the front: 18” = 23 5/16” 21” = 27 1/2”
Pencil Drawer
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Pencil Drawer is 4 ½” high by 21” deep. 3” drawer opening. This cabinet has no lower face frame rail. May be built 24” deep (CDNC). Finished ends are not available; must order loose skins. The drawer on the PD42 is not covered under warranty. No reductions in height allowed.
Cabinet PD18
Drawers 1
PD21
1
PD24
1
PD27
1
PD30
1
PD33
1
PD36
1
PD42
1
•STOP • Slab style drawer front only when ordered at standard ••
height. Change height to 7” (DO) or 6 7/8” (SO) to line up with standard top drawer front then order DFST for a 5-pc front.
Vanity Desk Drawer
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Vanity Desk Drawer is 5 ¾” high by 21” deep. •• STOP Drawer opening is 3 ¼”. 30”-36” are available with a super drawer by adding “SD” •• to the end of the product nomenclature. (Ex. VD30SD) May be built 24” deep (CDNC). Finished ends are not available; must order loose skins. 1 1/2” top rail and 1” bottom rail.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-10-
Cabinet VD18
Drawers 1
VD21
1
VD24
1
VD27
1
VD30
2
VD33
2
VD36
2
VD39
2
VD42
2
Slab style drawer front only when ordered at standard height. Change height to 7 1/4” (DO) or 7 1/2” (SO) to line up with standard top drawer front then order DFST for a 5-pc front.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Bath Cabinet - 10” Deep
•• •• ••
Cabinet WBC2430
Shelves 2
Doors 2
WBC2730
2
2
WBC3030
2
2
WBC3330
2
2
WBC3630
2
2
WBC3930
2
2
Designed to fit over bathroom stool for storage 10” deep with butt doors Both ends are always finished
Wall Bath Open Shelf - 10” Deep Cabinet WBC2430OS
To figure door height: Designer Overlay: Cabinet height - 13 1/4” for 3/4" top reveal Designer Overlay: Cabinet height - 12 3/4” for 1/4" top reveal Standard Overlay: Cabinet height - 13 3/4”
•• •• •• ••
Shelves 1
Doors 2 2
WBC2730OS
1
WBC3030OS
1
2
WBC3330OS
1
2
WBC3630OS
1
2
WBC3930OS
1
2
Designed to fit over bathroom stool for storage 10” deep with butt doors Both ends are always finished Bottom opening is 10” tall
Recessed Medicine Cabinet Cabinet WMC1624 14”x22” wall opening WMC1630 14”x28” wall opening WMC1830 16”x28” wall opening
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-11-
Shelves
Doors
4
1
4
1
4
1
Natural maple print interior Specify hinge direction Allow 2” less than the stated frame dimensions for wall openings. Box dimension is 2 7/8” less than frame is width and height. Overall cabinet depth is 4 ¾” 2” wide rails and stiles on frame Designer overlay do not affect this cabinet. Doors will be standard overlay size. To order prepped for mirror, add GD (glass doors) as a modification. Mirror is not included.
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Surface-Mount Medicine Cabinet
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet WMCSM1230
Shelves 3
Doors 1
WMCSM1530
3
1
WMCSM1830
3
1
WMCSM2130
3
1
Specify hinge direction Overall cabinet depth is 4” Designed for surface mounting Both ends finished Top & Bottom not finished as standard. Order FFT to finish the top & FBTMF to finish the bottom. To order prepped for mirror, add GD (glass doors) as a modification. Mirror is not included.
Tri-View Medicine Cabinet
•• •• •• •• ••
Depth is 4 ¼” x 28” tall frame height Cabinet designed for surface mounting Finished on both sides, top, & bottom Can also be recessed into wall opening Three ¼” mirrors with pivot hinges and spring loaded magnetic catches. Hinged right, right, left
Cabinet
Shelves
Doors
TVMC30 28” x 26” wall opening 3) 8 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
3
NA
TVMC36 34” x 26” wall opening 3) 10 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
3
NA
TVMC48 46” x 26” wall opening 3) 14 5/8” x 23 7/8” mirrors
3
NA
••
Comes with silver hinges. Gold hinges available upon request. •STOP • No modifications available.
Vanity File Drawer 1/8” gap between fronts and no middle rail
•• •• •• •• •• ••
31 ¼” high x 21” deep 2 file drawers (12 1/8” opening) on TUFEBM guides; 11/16” Beech Dovetail Notched for letter and legal files. 17” minimum depth to accommodate files Cabinet does not have a middle rail between the drawers LOCK not available on bottom drawer
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet VFDC18
Drawers 2
VFDC21
2
VFDC24
2
VFDC27
2
VFDC30
2
VFDC33
2
VFDC36
2
•STOP • Both openings are affected by increased and reduced heights
•STOP • Reduced heights will result in the loss of file system in both drawers
•• Must charge a change height (CH) charge when STOP
-12-
increasing the height on this cabinet
Vanity Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Desk Panel Leg 21"
Cabinet 31 ¼” DPL
21"
DPLT Cabinet 34 ½” BDPL BDPLT
12"
DPL
DPLT
•• •• •• ••
¾” panel, edge banded one edge, finished both sides. To match desk cabinets, order 28 ½” tall using RH (reduced height) as a modification. Can be increased up to 24” deep, use Misc. and refer to Pricing Book. For use with PD or VD cabinets.
Vanity Panel Filler Cabinet VPF1 ½ VPF3 VPF6
•• •• •• •• •• •• VPF3R Shown
½” plywood panel with 1 ½”, 3”, or 6” stile. Indicate ¼” reveal left or right; this will automatically finish the end. Flush toe kick is available by adding FTK as a modification Can be increased up to 22”deep by using CDNC Change width available. Change depth over 30” available. Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost and specify the dimension change. Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
Vanity Box Filler Cabinet VBF3 VBF6
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
VBFP3 3” or 6” wide. VBFP6 Both ends are always finished. Box filler has ¼” reveal on the sides and a flush toe kick. Can be increased up to 22” deep by using CDNC Change width available. Change depth over 30” available. Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost & specify the dimension change. Peninsula Box Filler has a stile on the front and back Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section.
-13-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Tall Cabinets TALL CABINET INFORMATION...................................................... 2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION.............................................................. 2 OVEN CABINET GUIDELINES........................................................19 ANGLED CABINETS Tall Angled Broom........................................................................ 8 Angle End Tall Broom ................................................................. 9 Tall Angle Linen............................................................................. 15 Angle End Tall Linen...................................................................16 BAR CABINET Bar....................................................................................................... 11 BROOM CLOSETS (WITH OR WITHOUT SHELVES) 84” Tall Broom Cabinets............................................................. 4 90” Tall Broom Cabinets............................................................ 5 96” Tall Broom Cabinets............................................................. 6 120” Tall Broom Cabinets............................................................7 Tall Angled Broom........................................................................ 8 Angle End Tall Broom.................................................................. 9 FILLERS Tall Panel Filler............................................................................... 17 Tall Box Filler..................................................................................18 LINEN CABINETS 84” & 90” Tall Linen Closets..................................................... 12 96” & 120” Tall Linen Closets................................................... 13 Linen w/ Drawers.........................................................................14 Linen w/ Hamper..........................................................................14 Tall Angle Linen............................................................................. 15 Angle End Tall Linen...................................................................16
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
OVEN / MICROWAVE CABINETS Open-Shelf Oven.........................................................................20 Tall Oven.......................................................................................... 21 Oven w/ Drawer........................................................................... 22 Oven w/ 2 Drawers..................................................................... 23 Oven w/ Warming Drawer.......................................................24 Oven w/ Wide Bottom Rail..................................................... 25 Oven & Microwave w/ Drawer................................................26 Oven & Microwave w/ 2 Drawers.......................................... 27 Oven Microwave w/ Warming Drawer................................28 PANTRY CABINETS Pantry Pull-Out.............................................................................10 REFRIGERATOR CABINET Tall Refrigerator............................................................................. 11 Tall Panel Straight ....................................................................... 17 Tall Panel Filler............................................................................... 17 UTILITY CABINETS Multi Storage Unit........................................................................10
-1-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Cabinet Information Helpful Notes about Tall Cabinet Section •• When ordered on tall cabinets, the Glass Doors (GD) option only changes the top doors to Glass Doors. If you would like glass doors on the lower section, specify in the notes of the cabinet. •• Upper openings 21” and over will receive 1 shelf. Openings 24” and over will receive 2 shelves, unless otherwise stated. •• Separate Toe Kicks (STK) are available at no charge by specifying STK as a modification. If the cabinet has a flush toe, you must specify RTKF (recessed toe kick) if you order an STK. •• 22 3/8 deep adjustable shelf in 24” deep cabinets (cabinets depth - 1.625)
Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab.
Important Notes About 120” Tall Cabinets •• Standard ends will be constructed of 3/4” plywood and are NOT flush. You can order flush ends by adding FLE-(L/R) as a modification.
•• •• •• ••
Appliance/oven cabinets will have different maximum cutouts due to the 3/4” material, please see the oven section for more details. Not all cabinets are available in the 120” tall cabinet option. For any cabinets over 96” tall use the 120” option and add RH (reduce height) as a modification. On 120” tall cabinets, the interior will be finished to match exterior wood and finish. A natural finish is NOT available.
Entering a Faceframe and Door Only For a tall cabinet, enter a 12” deep broom cabinet without shelves then enter FFDO as a modification. To line up bottom broom doors (BBROH) with your base cabinets: Designer Overlay w/ 3/4” top reveal = use BBROH of 26 1/4” Designer Overlay w/ 1/4” top reveal = use BBROH of 26 3/4” Standard Overlay = use a BBROH of 27” To figure door height for Broom & Linen Cabinets: Designer Overlay = Add 2” (3/4” top reveal) or 2 1/2” (1/4” top reveal) to top & 2 3/4” to bottom opening Std.Overlay = Add 3/4” to opening
OUCH !!!
Cabinet Depth (RTK = Recessed toe kick / FTK = Flush toe kick) A C
B
(A x A) + (B x B) = the square root of C
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet Height
12” RTK
12” FTK
18” RTK
18” FTK
21” RTK
21” FTK
24” RTK
24” FTK
84”
84 ¾”
85 ¼”
85 ¾”
86 ¼”
86 ¼”
86 ¾”
86 ¾”
87 ¾”
90”
90 ¾”
90 ¼”
91 ½”
92”
92 ¼”
92 ¾”
92 ¾”
93 ½”
96”
96 ¾”
97”
97 ½”
98”
98 ¼”
98 ¾”
98 ¾”
99 ¼”
120”
120 ¾”
121”
121 ¼”
121 ¾”
121 ¾”
122 ¼”
122 ¼”
122 ¾”
Don’t Get Stuck!!! Ceiling heights needed to stand up a tall cabinet
-2-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Construction
55” on 120” 31” on 96” 25” on 90” 19” on 84”
29” on 96” 23” on 90” 17” on 84”
48” on 120” 24” on 96” 18” on 90” 12” on 84”
3 3
VARIES DOOR
VARIES DOOR
3
3
58.5” on 96” 46.5” on 84”
18 VARIES OVEN C.O.
3 VARIES OVEN C.O.
69 3
3
54 1/2
35 1/2 27 20 1/2
OVD_
OV2D_
5
3 5 3 5
4 1/2
BR_
4 1/2
4 1/2
R_
BAR_
OVOS_
54 3/4” on 120” 42 3/4” on 96” 39 3/4” on 90” 38 3/4” on 84”
60” on 96” 54” on 90” 48” on 84”
60” on 96” 54” on 90” 48” on 84”
VARIES MICRO C.O. 3
3
VARIES OVEN C.O.
54 3/4” on 120” 42 3/4” on 96” 39 3/4” on 90” 36 3/4” on 84”
5
8
8 20 1/2 3 8 5
4 1/2
OVMWD_
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
6
LC_
4 1/2
OVD_ OV2D_
Tall Cabinets: 84”, 90” 96” & 120” T and 1 ½" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Toe-kick is 4½” (FTK is 6”) T x 3¼” D without the toe board. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets.
VARIES DOOR
3
4 1/2
OV_
5
6
6
LCD_
LCHD_
-3-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
84” Tall Broom Cabinet 12” Deep BR1212
1/1
BR1512
1/1
BR1812
1/1
BR2112
1/1
BR2412
1/1
BR2412BD
2/2
BR2712
2/2
BR3012
2/2
BR3312
2/2
BR3612
2/2
BR3912
2/2
BR4212
2/2
BR4512
2/2
BR4812 24” Deep
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Heights: Upper = 19”; Lower = 54 1/2” Butt doors are standard on 27”-39”. Center stile between doors on 42”-48”. Butt doors are available by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. 21” deep cabinets are the same price. To order change 24 to 21 in nomenclature. (Ex: BR3021) Adjustments in height affect the upper opening. To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
Doors U/L
2/2 Doors U/L
BR1224
1/1
BR1524
1/1
BR1824
1/1
BR2124
1/1
BR2424
1/1
BR2424BD
2/2
BR2724
2/2
BR3024
2/2
BR3324
2/2
BR3624
2/2
BR3924
2/2
BR4224
2/2
BR4524
2/2
BR4824
2/2
Adjustable shelves are not standard in the top opening and upper section will not be drilled. •• Four adjustable shelves are optional in the lower opening. To order, specify BR__ __WS. •• For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. •• 73” tall is minimum height allowed unless BBROH STOP is minimized.
-4-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
90” Tall Broom Cabinet 12” Deep BR129012
1/1
BR159012
1/1
BR189012
1/1
BR219012
1/1
BR249012
1/1
BR249012BD
2/2
BR279012
2/2
BR309012
2/2
BR339012
2/2
BR369012
2/2
BR399012
2/2
BR429012
2/2
BR459012
2/2
BR489012 24” Deep
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
•• •• •• •• ••
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Heights: Upper = 25”; Lower = 54 1/2” Butt doors are standard on 27”-39”. Center stile between doors on 42”-48”. Butt doors are available by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. 21” deep cabinets are the same price. To order change 24 to 21 in nomenclature. (Ex: BR309021)
•• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-5-
Doors U/L
2/2 Doors U/L
BR129024
1/1
BR159024
1/1
BR189024
1/1
BR219024
1/1
BR249024
1/1
BR249024BD
2/2
BR279024
2/2
BR309024
2/2
BR339024
2/2
BR369024
2/2
BR399024
2/2
BR429024
2/2
BR459024
2/2
BR489024
2/2
To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height. One adjustable shelf is standard in the top opening. Four adjustable shelves are optional in the lower opening. To order, specify BR__ __WS. For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. Adjustments in height affect the upper opening.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
96” Tall Broom Cabinets 12” Deep BR129612
1/1
BR159612
1/1
BR189612
1/1
BR219612
1/1
BR249612
1/1
BR249612BD
2/2
BR279612
2/2
BR309612
2/2
BR339612
2/2
BR369612
2/2
BR399612
2/2
BR429612
2/2
BR459612
2/2
BR489612 24” Deep
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
•• •• •• •• ••
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on lower doors
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Heights: Upper = 31”; Lower = 54 1/2” Butt doors are standard on 27”-39”. Center stile between doors on 42”-48”. Butt doors are available by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. 21” deep cabinets are the same price. To order change 24 to 21 in nomenclature. (Ex: BR309621)
•• •• •• •• ••
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
Doors U/L
2/2 Doors U/L
BR129624
1/1
BR159624
1/1
BR189624
1/1
BR219624
1/1
BR249624
1/1
BR249624BD
2/2
BR279624
2/2
BR309624
2/2
BR339624
2/2
BR369624
2/2
BR399624
2/2
BR429624
2/2
BR459624
2/2
BR489624
2/2
To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height. One adjustable shelf is standard in the top opening. Four adjustable shelves are optional in the lower opening. To order, specify BR__ __WS. For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. Adjustments in height affect the upper opening.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
120” Tall Broom Cabinets 12” Deep BRT1212
1/1
BRT1512
1/1
BRT1812
1/1
BRT2112
1/1
BRT2412
1/1
BRT2412BD
2/2
BRT2712
2/2
BRT3012
2/2
BRT3312
2/2
BRT3612
2/2
BRT3912
2/2
BRT4212
2/2
BRT4512
2/2
BRT4812
2/2
24” Deep
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on upper and lower doors
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Shown with optional shelves and SDPH on upper and lower doors
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Heights: Upper = 55”; Lower = 54 1/2” Butt doors are standard on 27”-39”. Center stile between doors on 42”-48”. Butt doors are available by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. 21” deep cabinets are the same price. To order change 24 to 21 in nomenclature. (Ex: BRT3021) To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• ••
Doors U/L
Doors U/L
BRT1224
1/1
BRT1524
1/1
BRT1824
1/1
BRT2124
1/1
BRT2424
1/1
BRT2424BD
2/2
BRT2724
2/2
BRT3024
2/2
BRT3324
2/2
BRT3624
2/2
BRT3924
2/2
BRT4224
2/2
BRT4524
2/2
BRT4824
2/2
One adjustable shelf is standard in the top opening. Four adjustable shelves are optional in the lower opening. To order, specify BR__ __WS. •• For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. •• See Tall Information page at the beginning of this STOP section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets. •• It isn’t recommended to line up lower doors with base STOP cabinets at this height.
-7-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Angle Broom 84” Tall TAB1284
Doors U/L 1/1
TAB2484
2/2
TAB3684
2/2
90” Tall
Doors U/L
TAB1290
1/1
TAB2490
2/2
TAB3690 96” Tall
2/2 Doors
TAB1296
1/1
TAB2496
2/2
TAB3696 120” Tall
U/L
2/2 Doors
TABT12
1/1
TABT24
2/2
TABT36
2/2
U/L
Approximate measurement across the front: 12” = 14 7/8” 24” = 31 13/16” 36” = 48 3/4”
Shown with Butt Doors and SDPH
•• •• •• ••
•• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Height: Upper = Overall cabinet height – 65”; Bottom opening = 54 1/2” First dimension is width & depth; the second dimension is height. When modifying dimensions: L=width; R=depth. When modifying one dimension, we strongly recommend changing the other dimension to match to keep the cabinet from changing shape & altering the size of the doors. A recessed toe kick is standard, flush toe kick is available by adding FTK as a modification. Four adjustable shelves are standard in the lower opening. 90”, 96” & 120” tall units have one adjustable shelf in upper opening.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
1 ½” return to the wall is standard. Add SP RETURN to modify the 1 ½” returns. Maximum size for returns is 8”. •• To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height. •• Finished ends are not available. •• For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets. •STOP • It isn’t recommended to line up lower doors with base cabinets on 120” tall cabinets. •• 73” Tall is minimum height allowed unless STOP BBROH is minimized.
-8-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angle End Tall Broom 84” Tall
Doors U/L
AETB1284
2/2
AETB2484
2/2
AETB3684
2/2
90” Tall
Doors U/L
AETB1290
2/2
AETB2490
2/2
AETB3690
2/2
96” Tall
Doors U/L
AETB1296
2/2
AETB2496
2/2
AETB3696
2/2
120” Tall
Doors U/L
AETBT12
2/2
AETBT24
2/2
AETBT36
2/2
Shown with SDPH
•• •• •• ••
•• ••
Butt doors are not available. Opening Height: Upper = Overall cabinet height – 65”; Bottom opening = 54 1/2” The diagonal end is 65º, 12” deep unit has same top view as the AEW, 24” deep unit has the same top view as the AEB. When modifying one dimension, we strongly recommend changing the other dimension to match to keep the cabinet from changing shape & altering the size of the doors, otherwise cabinet will become a custom. A recessed toe kick is standard, 6” flush toe kick is available by adding FTK as a modification. Four adjustable shelves are standard in the lower opening. 90”, 96” & 120” tall units have one adjustable shelf in upper opening.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
To change the opening height (no charge), use the BBROH modification and specify the bottom opening height. •• Finished ends are not available. •• For formulas to calculate broom door heights and BBROH see the Tall Information page. •• See Tall Information page at the beginning of this STOP section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets. •STOP • It isn’t recommended to line up lower doors with base cabinets on 120” tall cabinets.
-9-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Pantry Pull-Out - 24” Deep 84” Tall PPO1224
Doors U/L 1/1
Shelves 0
PPO1524
1/1
0
PPO1824
1/1
0
90” Tall
Doors U/L
Shelves
PPO129024
1/1
1
PPO159024
1/1
1
PPO189024
1/1
1
Doors U/L
Shelves
PPO129624
1/1
1
PPO159624
1/1
1
96” Tall Shown with SDPH
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction for top door. 84” Opening Heights: 19” upper (or Cab ht. - 65”); 54 1/2” lower. 120” Opening Heights: 55” upper (or Cab ht. - 65”); 54 1/2” lower. Comes with a shelf in the upper opening. Pantry pull-out hardware is mounted at the top & bottom of the pull-out shelf system and slides out with the door. Pull-out unit is divided into one 15” lower opening and three 12” openings as standard. Pull-out unit supports 440 lbs. (200 kg). To change height to 90” or 96”, add CH as a modification. Comes with a shelf in the upper opening. Changes in width are limited. Please call for approval. To add the pantry insert to other cabinets, use CUSTOMTALL and add PANTRY as a modification.
PPO189624
1/1
1
Door
Shelves
PPOT1224
1/1
1
PPOT1524
1/1
1
PPOT1824
1/1
1
120” Tall
••
If using BBROH to modify bottom opening height, always state how pantry unit shelf spacing will need to modify. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets. •STOP • Minimum 18” deep allowed
Multi-Storage Unit - 24” Deep 84” Tall MSU18
•• •• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Opening Height: Upper = Overall cabinet height – 65”; Bottom = 54 1/2” MSU 36 has butt doors. The lower opening has 2 doormounted can racks, 2 swing-out can racks and 8 adjustable shelves. MSU18 lower opening has 1 door-mounted can racks, 1 swing-out can racks and 4 adjustable shelves. A 3” pull from any obstruction for door opening clearance is recommended.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
Doors U/L 1/1
MSU36
2/2
90” Tall
Doors U/L
MSU1890
1/1
MSU3690
2/2
96” Tall
Doors U/L
MSU1896
1/1
MSU3696
2/2
120” Tall
Doors U/L
MSUT18
1/1
MSUT36
2/2
Dimension changes are limited; no changes to the width. Modifications are limited, please call for approval. •• Do not place this cabinet next to a wall. Door must STOP open at least 105º in order for internal parts to operate. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
-10-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Bar - 24” Deep 84” Tall
Doors U/L
Drwrs
BAR39
4/2
1
BAR42
4/2
1
BAR45
4/2
1
BAR48
4/2
1
96” Tall
Doors U/L
Drwrs
BAR3996
4/2
1
BAR4296
4/2
1
BAR4596
4/2
1
BAR4896
4/2
1
BAR48 Shown with SDPH on upper doors
•• •• •• ••
•• ••
Upper opening is 46 ½” (84” tall) or 58 ½” (96” tall) Butt doors are standard on 39”-45” lower cabinets, but not covered under warranty on the 42” & 45”. The 48” lower cabinet will come with a 3” center stile. Butt doors are standard on all upper cabinets due to bi-fold doors. In upper portion and 2 half-depth adjustable shelves & bi-fold doors.
Entire cabinet will have a finished interior. The lower section of this cabinet lines up with the standard overlay base cabinet. If you want the doors to line up on a designer overlay job, enter the cabinet as CUSTOMTALL, then specify in the cabinet comments.
Tall Refrigerator - 24” Deep 84” Tall R3624 R3924 90” Tall R369024 R399024 96” Tall R369624 R399624 120’ Tall RT3624 RT3924
Butt Doors Shown
•• ••
•• ••
Door opening height is 12” on 84” tall, 18” on 90” tall, 24” on 96” tall, & 48”, double panel doors on 120” tall. Refrigerator opening clearance is 3” less than cabinet width by 69” high. To modify openings: RHH – Opening Height RHW – Opening Width Specify finished ends. Unit can be ordered with only 1 leg at no charge; add RLRO (Refrigerator Leg Right Only) or RLLO (Refrigerator Leg Left Only) as a modification. This will add 1 ½” clearance.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• •• •STOP • •STOP •
-11-
Door will overlay bottom rail 1/2” on designer overlay. No back in refrigerator space Entire cabinet will have a finished interior. See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for helpful information regarding shelves. See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
84” & 90” Tall Linen Closets 12” Deep 84” Tall LC1212
1/1
84” Tall LC12__
U/L 1/1
LC1512
1/1
LC15__
1/1
LC1812
1/1
LC18__
1/1
LC2112
1/1
LC21__
1/1
LC2412
1/1
LC24__
1/1
LC2412BD
2/2
LC24__BD
2/2
LC2712
2/2
LC27__
2/2
LC3012
2/2
LC30__
2/2
LC3312
2/2
LC33__
2/2
LC3612
2/2
LC36__
2/2
LC3912
2/2
LC39__
2/2
LC4212
2/2
LC42__
2/2
LC4512
2/2
LC45__
2/2
LC4812
2/2
LC48__
2/2
U/L
90” Tall
U/L
90”Tall
Shown with SDPH
•• •• •• ••
Shown with Butt Doors and SDPH
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Equal height openings with a 3” rail between 84” tall = 36 3/4” 90” tall = 39 3/4” Butt doors are only available on 42” – 48” wide units by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. 21” & 24” deep cabinets are the same price. To order, specify 21” or 24” in the nomenclature. (Ex. LC129021 or LC129024).
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• •• ••
-12-
21” or 24” Deep U/L
LC129012
1/1
LC1290__
1/1
LC159012
1/1
LC1590__
1/1
LC189012
1/1
LC1890__
1/1
LC219012
1/1
LC2190__
1/1
LC249012
1/1
LC2490__
1/1
LC249012BD
2/2
LC2490__BD
2/2
LC279012
2/2
LC2790__
2/2
LC309012
2/2
LC3090__
2/2
LC339012
2/2
LC3390__
2/2
LC369012
2/2
LC3690__
2/2
LC399012
2/2
LC3990__
2/2
LC429012
2/2
LC4290__
2/2
LC459012
2/2
LC4590__
2/2
LC489012
2/2
LC4890__
2/2
A 6” flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification. If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. Four full depth adjustable shelves in 84” cabinet and six in 90” cabinets. For formulas to calculate door heights see the Tall Information page.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
96” & 120” Tall Linen Closets 12” Deep 96” Tall
Shown with Butt Doors and SDPH
•• ••
Shown with Butt Doors and SDPH
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Equal height openings with a 3” rail between 96” tall = 42 3/4” 120” tall = 54 3/4” •• Butt doors are only available on 42” – 48” wide units by adding BD as a modification. This will not be covered under warranty. •• 21” & 24” deep cabinets are the same price. To order, specify 21” or 24” in the nomenclature. (Ex. LC129621 or LC129624). •• A 6” flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
21” or 24” Deep U/L
LC129612
1/1
96” Tall LC1296__
U/L 1/1
LC159612
1/1
LC1596__
1/1
LC189612
1/1
LC1896__
1/1
LC219612
1/1
LC2196__
1/1
LC249612
1/1
LC2496__
1/1
LC249612BD
2/2
LC2496__BD
2/2
LC279612
2/2
LC2796__
2/2
LC309612
2/2
LC3096__
2/2
LC339612
2/2
LC3396__
2/2
LC369612
2/2
LC3696__
2/2
LC399612
2/2
LC3996__
2/2
LC429612
2/2
LC4296__
2/2
LC459612
2/2
LC4596__
2/2
LC489612
2/2
LC4896__
2/2
120”Tall
U/L
U/L 1/1 1/1
LCT1212
1/1
LCT1512
1/1
120” Tall LCT12__ LCT15__
LCT1812
1/1
LCT18__
1/1
LCT2112
1/1
LCT21__
1/1
LCT2412
1/1
LCT24__
1/1
LCT2412BD
2/2
LCT24__BD
2/2
LCT2712
2/2
LCT27__
2/2
LCT3012
2/2
LCT30__
2/2
LCT3312
2/2
LCT33__
2/2
LCT3612
2/2
LCT36__
2/2
LCT3912
2/2
LCT39__
2/2
LCT4212
2/2
LCT42__
2/2
LCT4512
2/2
LCT45__
2/2
LCT4812
2/2
LCT48__
2/2
If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. •• Six full depth adjustable shelves in 96” & 120” cabinets. •• For formulas to calculate door heights see the Tall Information page. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
-13-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Linen with Drawers 84” Tall LCD12__
Drs 1
Drw 3
90” Tall LCD1290__
Drs 1
Drw 3
96” Tall LCD1296__
Drs 1
Drw 3
LCD15__
1
3
LCD1520__
1
3
LCD1596__
1
3
LCD18__
1
3
LCD1890__
1
3
LCD1896__
1
3
LCD21__
1
3
LCD2190__
1
3
LCD2196__
1
3
LCD24__
1
3
LCD2490__
1
3
LCD2496__
1
3
LCD24__BD
2
3
LCD2490__BD
2
3
LCD2496__BD
2
3
LCD27__
2
3
LCD2790__
2
3
LCD2796__
2
3
LCD30__
2
3
LCD3090__
2
3
LCD3096__
2
3
LCD33__
2
3
LCD3390__
2
3
LCD3396__
2
3
LCD36__
2
3
LCD3690__
2
3
LCD3696__
2
3
•• •• •• •• ail is 1
Mid-r
1/2”
•• •• •• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Upper opening is overall cabinet height - 36. Drawer openings are all 8” tall. The lower section of this cabinet lines up with the standard overlay base cabinet. If you want the doors to line up on a full or designer overlay job, enter the cabinet as CUSTOMTALL then specify in the comments. Two full depth adjustable shelves in the 84” & three full depth adjustable shelves in the 90”, & 96”. A 6” flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification. If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. 21” & 24” deep cabinets are the same price. To order, specify 21” or 24” in the nomenclature. (Ex. LCD1221 or LCD1224).
Shown with SDPH
Linen with Hamper 84” Tall LCHD18
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
U/L Drwrs 1/1 1
90” Tall LCHD1890
96” Tall LCHD1896
U/L Drwrs 1/1 1
Pull-out wooden hamper behind lower door, mounted on TUFEBM guides. Specify hinge direction. Can specify RBDM (door mount) on bottom as a modification. Upper opening is overall cabinet height - 36. Drawer opening is 5” and lower opening is 20 1/2”. The lower section of this cabinet lines up with the standard overlay base cabinet. If you want the doors to line up on a designer overlay job, enter the cabinet as CUSTOMTALL, then specify in the comments. Two full depth adjustable shelves in upper opening, A 6” flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification. If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. No deduct for deleting the hamper 21” & 24” deep cabinets are the same price. To order, specify 21” or 24” in the nomenclature. (Ex. LCHD1821 or LCHD1824).
Shown with SDPH
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
U/L Drwrs 1/1 1
-14-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Angle Linen Depth
84” Tall
h
idt
W
U/L
TAL1284
1/1
TAL2484
2/2
TAL3684
2/2
90” Tall
U/L
TAL1290
1/1
TAL2490
2/2
TAL3690
2/2
96” Tall
U/L
TAL1296
1/1
TAL2496
2/2
TAL3696
2/2
120” Tall
U/L
TALT12
1/1
TALT24
2/2
TALT36
2/2
Approximate measurement across the front: 12” = 14 7/8” 24” = 31 13/16” 36 = 48 3/4” Shown with Butt Doors and SDPH
•• ••
Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Equal height openings with a 3” rail between 84” tall = 36 3/4” 90” tall = 39 3/4” 96” tall = 42 3/4” 120” tall = 54 3/4” •• Butt doors are standard on 24” and 36” cabinets when specified in header. •• First dimension is width & depth; the second dimension is height. When modifying dimensions: L=width; R=depth. •• When modifying one dimension, we strongly recommend changing the other dimension to match to keep the cabinet from changing shape & altering the size of the doors.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
A flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification. •• If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. •• Four adjustable shelves are standard in all heights. •• 1 ½” return to the wall is standard. Add SP RETURN to modify the 1 ½” returns. Maximum size for returns is 8”. •• Finished ends are not available. •• For formulas to calculate door heights see the Tall Information page. •• See Tall Information page at the beginning of this STOP section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
-15-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angle End Tall Linen 84” Tall
U/L
AETL1284
2/2
AETL2484
2/2
AETL3684
2/2
90” Tall
U/L
AETL1290
2/2
AETL2490
2/2
AETL3690
2/2
96” Tall
U/L
AETL1296
2/2
AETL2496
2/2
AETL3696
2/2
120” Tall
U/L
AETLT12
2/2
AETLT24
2/2
AETLT36
2/2
Shown with SDPH
••
Equal height openings with a 3” rail between 84” tall = 36 3/4” 90” tall = 39 3/4” 96” tall = 42 3/4” 120” tall = 54 3/4” •• Butt doors are not available. •• The diagonal end is 65º, 12” deep unit has same top view as the AEW, 24” deep unit has the same top view as the AEB. •• When modifying one dimension, we strongly recommend changing the other dimension to match to keep the cabinet from changing shape & altering the size of the doors otherwise creates a Custom. •• A flush toe kick is standard, recessed toe kick is available at no charge by adding RTKF (recessed toe kick) as a modification.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
If ordering a STK (separate toe kick), you must also order a RTKF as a modification. •• Four adjustable shelves are standard in the 84” cabinet, five shelves in the 90”, 96” & 120” tall units. •• Finished ends are not available. •• For formulas to calculate door heights see the Tall Information page. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
-16-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Panel Straight 84” Tall TPS12 TPS24 TPS30 96” Tall TPS9612 TPS9624 TPS9630 120” Tall TPST12 TPST24 TPST30
•• •• ••
Available 12”, 24” & 30” D. Constructed of 3/4” plywood material with standard tape edge-banding on one long edge. Both sides are finished.
Tall Panel Filler 1 ½” Wide TPF84X24
3” Wide TPF(3)84X24
TPF84X27
TPF(3)84X27
TPF84X30
TPF(3)84X30
Top View
TPF96X24
TPF(3)96X24
TPF96X27
TPF(3)96X27
24” 24 27” 30”
TPF96X30
TPF(3)96X30
TPF120X24
TPF3X120X24
TPF120X27
TPF3X120X27
TPF120X30
TPF3X120X30
1 1/2"
•• •• •• •• •• ••
1 ½” or 3” stile; available 24”, 27” & 30” deep. •• Both ends are always finished. Indicate 1/4” reveal left or right. •• STOP FTK is standard Change dimensions available for 1/2 charge. Use MISC as a modification to enter the cost & specify the dimension change. Panel is ½” plywood up to 96” tall; Panel is 3/4” plywood on 120”.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-17-
Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section. See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Box Filler Cabinet TBF384 TBF684 TBF390
Top View
3
TBF690 TBF396
24 24”
TBF696 TBF3X120 TBF6X120
Cabinet TBFA384
TOP VIEW
3”
TBFA390 TBFA396
3”
3
•• •• •• •• ••
Top View
Peninsula
3
TBFP396
3” or 6” wide x 84”, 90”, 96”, or 120” tall x 24” deep. Both ends are always finished Box filler has ¼” reveal on the sides and a flush toe kick. Can be increased up to 30” deep by using CDNC. Change dimensions are available. Use Misc as a modification to enter the cost. See price list book for charges.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• •• ••
Peninsula Box Filler has a stile on the front and back. Must specify left or right on the angled fillers Flutes and other decorative details can be added see Accessories & Modifications section. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
-18-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven Cabinet Guidelines Helpful Notes about Tall Oven Cabinets •• Upper openings 21” and over will receive 1 shelf. Openings 24” and over will receive 2 shelves, unless otherwise stated. •• Separate Toe Kicks (STK) are available at no charge by specifying STK as a modification. Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab.
Oven Cabinet Cut-Outs In order to make the cabinet more stable during production and shipping, Custom Cupboards does not make a complete cut-out that is larger than 3” less than the overall cabinet width. We score the stile of the cabinet, starting and stopping 1 ½” from the top and bottom of the opening. Your trim carpenter will then finalize the cut on-site. 84”, 90”, and 96” Tall Ovens The maximum cut-out for cabinets with: •• Standard or flush ends is 1 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both RPE is 2 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both BBE (3/8”) is 2” less than the overall cabinet width 120” Tall Ovens The maximum cut-out for cabinets with: •• Standard ends is 2” less than the overall cabinet width •• Both flush ends is 1 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both RPE is 3” less than the overall cabinet width •• One or both BBE (3/8”) is 2 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width
Important Notes About 120” Tall Cabinets •• Standard ends will be constructed of 3/4” plywood and are NOT flush. You can order flush ends by adding FLE-(L/R) as a modification.
•• •• •• ••
Appliance/oven cabinets will have different maximum cutouts due to the 3/4” material, please see the notes above for 120” Tall ovens for more details. Not all cabinets are available in the 120” tall cabinet option. For any cabinets over 96” tall use the 120” option and add RH (reduce height) as a modification. Entire cabinet will be finished interior.
OUCH !!! Cabinet Depth (RTK = Recessed toe kick / FTK = Flush toe kick)
A C
Cabinet Height
12” RTK
12” FTK
18” RTK
18” FTK
21” RTK
21” FTK
24” RTK
84”
84 ¾”
85 ¼”
85 ¾”
86 ¼”
86 ¼”
86 ¾”
86 ¾”
87 ¾”
90”
90 ¾”
90 ¼”
91 ½”
92”
92 ¼”
92 ¾”
92 ¾”
93 ½”
96”
96 ¾”
97”
97 ½”
98”
98 ¼”
98 ¾”
98 ¾”
99 ¼”
120”
120 ¾”
121”
121 ¼”
121 ¾”
121 ¾”
122 ¼”
122 ¼”
122 ¾”
Don’t Get Stuck!!! Ceiling heights needed to stand up a tall cabinet B
(A x A) + (B x B) = the square root of C
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-19-
24” FTK
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Open-Shelf Oven - 24” Deep
•• ••
Cut-outs can be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Lower opening can be adjusted using FTO as a modification. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + opening + 3” mid rail. One full depth adjustable shelf in lower opening. Number of shelves will vary in top opening.
Doors (U/L) 2/2
OVOS3024
2/2
OVOS3324
2/2
OVOS3624
2/2
90” Tall
Doors (U/L)
OVOS279024
2/2
OVOS309024
2/2
OVOS339024
2/2
OVOS369024
2/2
96” Tall
Doors (U/L)
OVOS279624
2/2
OVOS309624
2/2
OVOS339624
2/2
OVOS369624
2/2
120” Tall
Doors (U/L)
OVOST2724
2/2
OVOST3024
2/2
OVOST3324
2/2
OVOST3624
2/2
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves.
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven
cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts.
OVOS_ _ 1 1/2 X
OVOS_ Rules: Open-Shelf Oven •• Open shelf is 3” less than cabinet width x 18” tall, cutouts can be specified. •• Height of lower opening is 35 1/2” with standard FTO. •• Height of upper opening with standard FTO: 84” = 17” 90” = 23” 96” = 29” 120” = 53” •• Entire cabinet will have a finished interior and 1/2” continuous back. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW and TOHH
Height changes in this opening
3X Finished Interior
18" is std. or TOHH
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
W - 3" is std. or TOHW 1 1/2 X
••
84” Tall OVOS2724
3X
FTO 44 ½” is standard
To figure upper door height: To figure lower door height: Add ____” to top opening Add ____” to bottom opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay = 2” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
(if36" given) 44 1/2” FTO (ifFTO given), is standard
35361/2
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ FTO: ______
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-20-
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Oven - 24” Deep
••
•• •• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Lower opening can be adjusted using FTO as a modification. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + opening + 3” mid rail. One full depth adjustable shelf in lower opening. Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven opening has no back.
84” Tall OV2724
Doors U/L 2/2
OV3024
2/2
OV3324
2/2
OV3624
2/2
90” Tall
Doors U/L
OV279024
2/2
OV309024
2/2
OV339024
2/2
OV369024
2/2
96” Tall
Doors U/L
OV279624
2/2
OV309624
2/2
OV339624
2/2
OV369624
2/2
120” Tall
Doors U/L
OVT2724
2/2
OVT3024
2/2
OVT3324
2/2
OVT3624
2/2
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves.
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven
cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts. 1.5 x
OV_
Height changes in this opening
Rules: Tall Oven
•• Oven cut-out must be specified. •• Height of lower opening is 27” with standard FTO. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW and TOHH
3x Oven cutouts must be specified
TOHH
TOHW
3x
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
To figure lower door height: Add ____” to bottom opening Designer Overlay = 2” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
27
TOHW:_____ X TOHH:_____ FTO:_____
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-21-
� €‚  „ ›€Œ ƒ …ƒ ƒ � ‚  Ž  �    €�  …€ �  � ‚ „ œ ‚ €� � � „ Tall Cabinets ƒ ƒ  Ž–  � �� ƒ��    �    € ‚„ ˆ‡ ‡� � …ƒ ƒ  Š„ ˜ �� HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14 � � „ ™ ‚ƒ… �  ‡  �‚  …€ƒ �  �  � ‘ � ‚ €�  „ Oven ƒ  ‚    €�‚€ ‚ w/ Drawer - 24� Deep  �� ƒ� � € Ž �    … �„
’ €��
– –– –— €��
– –– –— — €��
— – — –– — –— —
ƒ  Doors
84� Tall OVD2724
2
“ …
Drwrs 1
– 2 ‰ — 1 OVD3324 1 –— 2 ‰Ž
’ OVD3624 2 1 – Doors Drwrs ‰Ž œ 90� Tall OVD279024 1 – 2 ‰ŽŽ —
OVD3024
OVD309024
ƒ  22
OVD339024
1 “ … 1
“ …
– 2 ‰Ž — 1 96� Tall Drwrs –— Doors ‰Ž–
OVD279624 2 1 – 2 ‰Ž–œ OVD309624 1 OVD339624 1 – 22 ‰Ž — OVD369624 1
OVD369024
ƒ  Doors
120� Tall
– –— OVDT3324 OVDT3624 – – OVDT2724
2
OVDT3024
2 2 2
Drwrs
1 ‰Ž — 1 ‰Ž–
1 1 ‰Ž–œ ‰Ž —
”
” ” ”
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms •STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves. as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant informa- •STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven tion will affect the lead time. cabinets for important information regarding 120â€? tall •• Drawer opening can be adjusted using FTO as a modicabinets and maximum cutouts. Â? ‚  €‘  …€ Â?    € Â? ‚ƒ Â? ‚ƒ… Â? €Â?‚  Â? ž ƒ  ƒ € ‚ ‚  Â?  fication. FTO = 4 1/2â€? toe space + 1 ½â€? bottom rail + …ƒ ƒ  €  Â?€  €Â? – Â?    €Â?  €Â?Â? …€ Â?  Â? ‚ „ ˜  …    Â? Â?  …€ Â?  ž   €  Â? opening + 3â€? mid rail.  Â?   €Â?‚   Â?  Â? Â? „ Â&#x; ƒ  …€ Â? Â? Â?Â?  Â? Â? Â?€Â? š  …ƒ Â?   „ •• Number of shelves will vary in top opening. OVD_ •• Oven opening has no back.
Rules: Oven w/ Drawer ‡ ™›” ‡ ™ ‡ ¥”™ ¥ ™ ¥ •• Oven cut-out must be specified. ‚‚ ¢  � � •• Height of drawer opening is 5� with standard FTO. Reduction of FTO is not allowed. ‚‚ Ž £   � � ¤ Ž ¢    •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW and TOHH
™ ™ Â&#x; ‡” ™ Â&#x;
To figure upper door height: Add ____� to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4� top = 1 1/4� Designer Overlay 1/4� top = 1 3/4� Std.Overlay = 3/4�
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
To figure drawer front height: Add ____� to drawer opening Designer Overlay = 2� Std.Overlay = 3/4�
-22-
‰ Â’ Š ‡‰ ‚Â?‚ƒÂ† Â? Â? Â? Â? Â?ˆ Â?  ‡‚ Â?‚ ‡ Š Â? Â?ÂÂ?‚ƒ  „ Â… † “… …ˆ ‚  Â? Â? „ Â?ƒ Tall Cabinets ŠÂ?  Â? ‚ Â? Â… Â? ‚  ‡ˆˆ ‰ Š ‚  „Â?  ‡ Â?‚  † HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14 Â?  Š  Â ‡‚Š‡ Š† „ ˆÂ? Â?ˆ ‚ ‡ƒ ÂŽ Â?  „Â?    Â? ‚† Oven w/ 2 Drawers - 24â€? Deep ‚ ‚Â?‚ƒ „‡ ‚ ‡ •†
‡ˆˆ
••
••
•• ••
Â? Â
84� Tall OV2D2724
Doors 2
— —— —™
— —™ OV2D3324 OV2D3624 — 90� Tall — OV2D279024
‡ˆˆ
OV2D309024
2
— —— —™
OV2D339024
— 96� —™ Tall OV2D279624 — OV2D309624 — OV2D339624
2
™ ‡ˆˆ
OV2D369624
2
™ — ™ —— ™ —™ ™
120� Tall
— OV2DT3024 —™ OV2DT3324 — OV2DT3624 —
Doors
OV2DT2724
2
OV2D3024
Â? Â
Â
1 ˜ŽŽ™ 1 ˜Ž 2 1 2 ˜Ž ’ 1 Doors Drwrs ˜Ž— ™ 2 1
2
Â? Â
OV2D369024
– � Drwrs
– � 1
Â
1
˜Ž ™ 1 Doors ˜Ž’
Drwrs 2 1 ˜Ž’’ 2 1 2 ˜Ž™ ™ 1
2
2 2 2
1 – Â?Â
Â
˜Ž ™ 2 2 ˜Ž’
2 ˜Ž’’ 2 ˜Ž™ ™
Drwrs
‹ š
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms •STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves. modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information •STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven  Â?Â?Â?  „  Â? Â? ÂÂ?€  Â?ÂÂ?‚ƒ  „ Â? Â?‚  „ Â…     Â? ‚† …‡Â?ˆÂ?  ÂÂ? ˆÂ? ‡ˆˆ ˆ ‡‚ Â?‚Â? will affect the lead time. cabinets for important information regarding 120â€? tall ‡Â?Â?    „ ˆ ‡Š  Â? † Drawer opening can be adjusted using FTO as a cabinets and maximum cutouts. modification. FTO = 4 1/2â€? toe space + 1 ½â€? bottom rail ‹‡ŒÂ? Â?  Â? Â? ‰Â?Š „ Â? Ž ‘  „  ‡ Â?‚  ‰Â?Š „† + bottom drawer opening + 1 1/2â€? mid rail+ top drawer ‡ Â?‚ƒ Š ‡‰  Â? Â?   Â?Â?Â? Š† opening + 3â€? mid rail. OV2D_ Â?  Š  ‡  ‡‚Š‡ Š† Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven opening has no back. „ ˆÂ? Â?ˆ ‚ ‡ƒ ÂŽ Â?  „Â?    Â? ‚†
ˆ   „‡‚
Â?ÂÂ
‚ ‚�‚ƒ „‡ ‚ ‡ •†
Rules: Oven w/ 2 Drawers •• Oven cut-out must be specified. •• Height of drawer openings are 5� with standard FTO. Reduction of FTO is not allowed. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW and TOHH
To figure upper door height: Add ____� to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4� top = 1 1/4� Designer Overlay 1/4� top = 1 3/4� Std.Overlay = 3/4�
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
‡ˆˆ
Â? Â
– Â?Â
— —— —™
— —™ — —
˜ ™ ˜Ž
˜Ž ’ ˜ŽŽ ™
‡ˆˆ
Â? Â
– Â?Â
— —— —™
— —™ — —
˜Ž ™ ˜Ž—
˜Ž—’ ˜Ž ™
™ ‡ˆˆ
Â? Â
– Â?Â
™ — ™ —— ™ —™ ™
— —™ — —
˜Ž ™ ˜Ž—
˜Ž—’ ˜Ž ™
To figure drawer front height heights: Add ____� to _____ drawer opening Designer Overlay = 1 1/4� (top) & 2� (bottom) Std.Overlay = 3/4� (top) & 3/4� (bottom)
-23-
›
› › ›
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven with Warming Drawer - 24” Deep
•• ••
2
OVWD3024
2
OVWD3324
2
OVWD3624
2
90” Tall
Doors
OVWD279024
2
OVWD309024
2
OVWD339024
2
OVWD369024
2
96” Tall
Doors
OVWD279624
2
OVWD309624
2
OVWD339624
2
OVWD369624
2
120” Tall
Doors
OVWDT2724
2
OVWDT3024
2
OVWDT3324
2
OVWDT3624
2
See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves. See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts.
OVWD_ _ 1 1/2 X
OVWD_
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
3X
1 1/2 X
oven cutouts must be specified
Cabinet Height
Rules: Oven w/ Warming Drawer •• Oven and warming drawer cut-outs must be specified. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW, TOHH, WDHW and WDHH
Height changes in this opening
TOHH
TOHW
3X BOHW WDHW
WDHH BOHH
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
1 1/2 X
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms •STOP • section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant informa- •STOP • tion will affect the lead time. FTO will vary with warming drawer cut-out. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + warming drawer opening + 3” mid rail. Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven and Warming Drawer opening have no back.
Doors
-24-
FTO FTO (if given) varies w/ cut-out
••
84” Tall OVWD2724
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven w/ Wide Bottom Rail - 24” Deep 84” Tall OVWBR2724
••
•• •• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. FTO must be specified and will determine the size of the wide bottom rail. warming drawer cut-out. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + wide bottom rail. Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven opening has no back.
Doors 2
OVWBR3024
2
OVWBR3324
2
OVWBR3624
2
90” Tall
Doors
OVWBR279024
2
OVWBR309024
2
OVWBR339024
2
OVWBR369024
2
96” Tall
Doors
OVWBR279624
2
OVWBR309624
2
OVWBR339624
2
OVWBR369624
2
120” Tall
Doors
OVWBRT2724
2
OVWBRT3024
2
OVWBRT3324
2
OVWBRT3624
2
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves.
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven
cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts.
OVWBR_ _ 1 1/2 X
OVWBR_ Height changes in this opening
3X
Rules: Open w/ Bottom Rail •• Oven cut-outs must be specified. •• FTO must be specified. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW & TOHH, as well as FTO.
TOHH
TOHW
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
Cabinet Width
-25-
FTO given) FTO(ifrequired
RTK (toe kick)
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
oven cutouts must be specified
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven & Microwave with Drawer - 24” Deep
••
•• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. Drawer opening can be adjusted using FTO as a modification. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + opening + 3” mid rail. Number of shelves will vary in top opening.
••
84” Tall OVMWD2724
Doors 2
Drwrs 1
OVMWD3024
2
1
OVMWD3324
2
1
OVMWD3624
2
1
90” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMWD279024
2
1
OVMWD309024
2
1
OVMWD339024
2
1
OVMWD369024
2
1
96” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMWD279624
2
1
OVMWD309624
2
1
OVMWD339624
2
1
OVMWD369624
2
1
120” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMWDT2724
2
1
OVMWDT3024
2
1
OVMWDT3324
2
1
OVMWDT3624
2
1
Oven opening has no back.
•STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves.
•• See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven STOP
cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts.
OVMWD_
Rules: Oven & Microwave Cabinet with Drawer •• Oven and microwave cut-outs must be specified. •• Height of drawer opening is 5” with standard FTO. Reduction of FTO is not allowed. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW, TOHH, BOHW & BOHH.
Height changes in this opening
3x
Microwave cutouts must be specified
TOHH
TOHW 3x
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
To figure drawer front height: Add ____” to drawer opening Designer Overlay = 2” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
Oven cutouts must be specified
BOHH BOHW
NOTICE
3x
STARTING MARCH 1ST, 2013 IT WILL NO LONGER BE STANDARD FOR THIS CABINET TO HAVE A FINISHED INTERIOR
5 RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-26-
FTO (if given) 14” std.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven & Microwave with 2 Drawers - 24” Deep
••
••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms •• section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures •• as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. •• STOP Drawer opening can be adjusted using FTO as a modification. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + •• STOP bottom drawer opening + 1 1/2” mid rail+ top drawer opening + 3” mid rail.
84” Tall OVMW2D2724
Doors 2
Drwrs 2
OVMW2D3024
2
2
OVMW2D3324
2
2
OVMW2D3624
2
2
90” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMW2D279024
2
2
OVMW2D309024
2
2
OVMW2D339024
2
2
OVMW2D369024
2
2
96” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMW2D279624
2
2
OVMW2D309624
2
2 2
OVMW2D339624
2
OVMW2D369624
2
2
120” Tall
Doors
Drwrs
OVMW2DT2724
2
2
OVMW2DT3024
2
2
OVMW2DT3324
2
2
OVMW2DT3624
2
2
Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven opening has no back. See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves. See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts. OVMW2D_
Rules: Oven & Microwave Cabinet w/ 2 Drawers •• Oven and microwave cut-outs must be specified. •• Height of drawer openings are 5” with standard FTO. Reduction of FTO is not allowed. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW, TOHH, BOHW & BOHH.
Height changes in this opening
3x
Microwave cutouts must be specified
TOHH
TOHW
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
To figure drawer front height heights: Add ____” to _____ drawer opening Designer Overlay = 1 1/4” (top) & 2” (bottom) Std.Overlay = 3/4” (top) & 3/4” (bottom)
3x
BOHH BOHW
3x
NOTICE
5
STARTING MARCH 1ST, 2013 IT WILL NO LONGER BE STANDARD FOR THIS CABINET TO HAVE A FINISHED INTERIOR
5 RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-27-
FTO (if given) 20.5” std.
Tall Cabinets HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Oven Microwave with Warming Drawer - 24” Deep
••
•• •• ••
Cut-outs must be provided using the form in the Forms section or using the cut-out dimension nomenclatures as modifications. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect the lead time. FTO will vary with warming drawer cut-out. FTO = 4 1/2” toe space + 1 ½” bottom rail + warming drawer opening + 3” mid rail. Number of shelves will vary in top opening. Oven opening has no back.
84” Tall OVMWWD2724
Doors 2
OVMWWD3024
2
OVMWWD3324
2
OVMWWD3624
2
90” Tall
Doors
OVMWWD279024
2
OVMWWD309024
2
OVMWWD339024
2
OVMWWD369024
2
96” Tall
Doors
OVMWWD279624
2
OVMWWD309624
2
OVMWWD339624
2
OVMWWD369624
2
120” Tall OVMWWDT2724
Doors 2
OVMWWDT3024
2
OVMWWDT3324
2
OVMWWDT3624
2
••
Warming Drawer opening at bottom, oven in center, microwave opening above oven. •STOP • See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven cabinets for helpful information regarding shelves. •• See Oven Cabinet Guidelines page prior to the oven STOP cabinets for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets and maximum cutouts.
OVMWWD_ _ 1 1/2 X
OVMWWD_
Height changes in this opening
Rules: Oven & Microwave w/ Warming Drawer •• Oven, microwave & warming drawer cut-outs must be specified. •• Height of upper opening will vary based on cut-out height. •• Butt doors are standard. •• Cut-out nomenclatures for this cabinet are TOHW, TOHH, BOHW, BOHH, WDHW & WDHH.
specified
TOHW 3X
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
To figure upper door height: Add ____” to top opening Designer Overlay 3/4” top = 1 1/4” Designer Overlay 1/4” top = 1 3/4” Std.Overlay = 3/4”
oven cutouts must be specified BOHH BOHW
WDHW BOHW
STARTING MARCH 1ST, 2013 IT WILL NO LONGER BE STANDARD FOR THIS CABINET TO HAVE A FINISHED INTERIOR
-28-
WDHH BOHH
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
F T O FTO (if given) varies w/ cut-out
3X
NOTICE
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
3X oven cutouts microwave cut-outs must must be be specified TOHH
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Custom Furniture CUSTOM FURNITURE INFORMATION........................................ 2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION.............................................................. 3 BOOKCASE CABINETS Wall Bookcase................................................................................ 6 Tall Bookcase...................................................................................7 84” Tall Bookcase w/ Doors...................................................... 8 96” Tall Bookcase w/ Doors...................................................... 8 120” Tall Bookcase w/ Doors.................................................... 9 DESK CABINETS (OFFICE) Desk Cabinet................................................................................... 4 File Drawer Cabinet...................................................................... 4 File Drawer w/ 1 Drawer.............................................................. 4 Vanity File Drawer......................................................................... 5 Pencil Drawer.................................................................................. 5 Vanity Desk Drawer...................................................................... 5 Wall Bookcase................................................................................ 6 Desk Panel Leg..............................................................................10
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
HALLWAY Window Seat..................................................................................10 MANTEL (FIREPLACE) Mantel ............................................................................................... 11 WORK TABLES Work Table...................................................................................... 12 Peninsula Work Table................................................................. 12 Four Drawer Work Table........................................................... 12 Two Drawer Work Table............................................................. 12
-1-
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Custom Furniture Information Helpful Notes About Custom Furniture Section •• All bookcases come standard with a 1 ½” top rail. VALTR (valance as top rail, see Accessories & Modifications section) can be added as a modification. •• See the Accessories & Modifications Section for more bookcase shelving cap options. Bookcase shelves come standard with CTE2 but you may substitute CTE1, CAP1, or CAP2, for no additional charge. All bookcase shelves are constructed of 3/4” Plywood material. •• Please note that CAP1 & CAP2 are only ¾” in height & 3/8” thick. If you choose one of these for your bookcase shelving, your shelves will be 3/8” shorter than if you used CTE1 or CTE2. The warranty is also limited to 24” wide shelves and smaller due to the size. These do not provide the extra support that a bulky cap or CTE would provide Minimum Door Sizes Every effort will be made to provide the 5-piece door style. Mortise & Tenoned doors are programmed to have the stile trimmed down. Mitered doors below minimum will be slab. Important Note About 120” Tall Cabinet Guidelines •• Standard ends will be constructed of 3/4” plywood and are NOT flush. You can order flush ends by adding FLE-(L/R) as a modification. ••
Not all cabinets are available in the 120” tall cabinet option.
•• ••
For any cabinets over 96” tall use the 120” option and add RH (reduce height) as a modification. On 120” tall cabinets, the interior will be finished to match exterior wood and finish. A natural finish is NOT available.
Entering Custom Cabinets •• Use the following CUSTOM_____ nomenclature to enter Custom Cabinets when a similar cabinet exists, such as a Base Full Door cabinet with an Angle: •• CUSTOMBASE •• CUSTOMWALL •• CUSTOMTALL •• CUSTOMUNIT •• By using the above nomenclature, you will automatically be assessed a custom fee, added to the list price in the Pricing Program. •• Any accessories or modifications such as changed dimensions, ears, pull-out shelves, will still need to be added. •• Make sure to correct the door, drawer front, and shelf counts if there are changes to these so your pricing will be accurate. •• Be sure to fax in your quote and drawing with the order in case we have any questions. •• Use the CUSTQUOTECAB, CUSTOMHOOD, CUSTOMMANTEL, CUSTOMTABLE nomenclature when a similar cabinet does not exist. The number of doors, drawers, fronts, shelves, quoted list price, finished ends price, dimensions & volume (w x d x h / 1728) will need to be input in order to price correctly. Be sure to fax in your quote and drawing in case we have any questions.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-2-
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Cabinet Construction Custom Cabinets: 1 1/2" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Flush toe-kick is 6” T x 3 1/4” D without the toe board. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets.
85 1/2” on 120” 61 1/2” on 96” 55 1/2” on 90” 49 1/2” on 84”
112 1/2” on 120” 88 1/2” on 96” 82 1/2” on 90” 76 1/2” on 84”
3
24
6
BC_
6
BCD_
Office Cabinets: 28 1/2” or 31 3/4” T x 21" D and 1 1/2" W rails & stiles unless otherwise stated. Toe-kick is 4 1/2” Tall x 3 ¼” without the toe board. Refer to cabinet descriptions for more information about individual cabinets.
5
3
3
31/4
7 1/2 3
VD 1” Bottom Rail
28 1/2
14 1/2
12
12
4 1/2
4 1/2
D_
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
FDC_D1
FDC_
-3-
PD
4 1/2
5 3/4
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Desk Cabinet - 21” Deep
•• •• •• ••
Cabinet D12 D15
Drs/Drw 1/1 1/1
D18
1/1
D21
1/1
D24
1/1
Desk height; 28 ½” high by 21” deep. Specify hinge direction. One drawer at the top; one door below. No adjustable shelf; if needed, order a vanity cabinet and reduce the height.
File Drawer Cabinet - 21” Deep
•• •• •• ••
•• •• ••
Desk height; 28 ½” high by 21” deep. 2 small drawers (slab) at the top (3” openings). 5-pc drawer fronts are not an option at desk height. Upper drawers are affected by changed height equally. 1 file drawer (12” opening) on TUFEBM guides at the bottom, 5/8” beech dovetail.
Cabinet
Drawers
FDC12
3
FDC15
3
FDC18
3
FDC21
3
FDC24
3
FDC27
3
FDC30
3
FDC33
3
FDC36
3
17” minimum depth to work with files. Notched for letter and legal files. Change the height to a minimum of 32 1/2”, and use DFST & DFSM to get 5 piece fronts on this cabinet.
File Drawer w/ 1 Drawer - 21” Deep
•• •• ••
Desk height; 28 ½” high by 21” deep. 1 drawer at the top (7 1/2” opening), upper drawer is affected by changed height. 1 file drawer (12” opening) on TUFEBM guides at the bottom, 5/8” beech dovetail.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Cabinet
Drawers
FDC12D1
2
FDC15D1
2
FDC18D1
2
FDC21D1
2
FDC24D1
2
FDC27D1
2
FDC30D1
2
FDC33D1
2
FDC36D1
2
•• 17” minimum depth to work with files. •• Notched for letter and legal files. •STOP • Top drawer is not a file drawer
-4-
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Vanity File Drawer - 21” Deep 1/8” gap between fronts and no middle rail
•• •• •• •• •• ••
31 ¼” high x 21” deep 2 file drawers (11 7/8” opening) on TUFEBM guides; 5/8” Beech Dovetail Notched for letter and legal files. 17” minimum depth to accommodate files Cabinet does not have a middle rail between the drawers LOCK not available on bottom drawer
Cabinet
Drawers
VFDC18
2
VFDC21
2
VFDC24
2
VFDC27
2
VFDC30
2
VFDC33
2
VFDC36
2
•STOP • Both openings are affected by increased and reduced heights
•STOP • Reduced heights will result in the loss of file system in both drawers
•• Must charge a change height (CH) charge when inSTOP creasing the height on this cabinet
Pencil Drawer - 21” Deep
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Pencil Drawer is 4 ½” high by 21” deep. 3” drawer opening. This cabinet has no lower face frame rail. May be built 24” deep (CDNC). Finished ends are not available; must order loose skins. The drawer on the PD42 is not covered under warranty. No reductions in height allowed.
Cabinet
Drawers
PD18
1
PD21
1
PD24
1
PD27
1
PD30
1
PD33
1
PD36
1
PD42
1
•• Slab style drawer STOP ••
front only when ordered at standard height. Change height to 7” (FO/DO) or 6 7/8” (SO) to line up with standard top drawer front then order DFST for a 5-pc front.
Vanity Desk Drawer - 21” Deep
•• •• ••
Vanity Desk Drawer is 5 ¾” high by 21” deep. Drawer opening is 3 ¼”. VD30, 33, & 36 are available with one super drawer by adding “SD” to the end of the nomenclature (VD30SD). •• May be built 24” deep (CDNC). •• Finished ends are not available; must order loose skins. •• 1 1/2” top rail and 1” bottom rail. •• Slab style drawer front only when ordered at standard STOP height.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-5-
Cabinet
Drawers
VD18
1
VD21
1
VD24
1
VD27
1
VD30
2
VD33
2
VD36
2
VD39
2
VD42
2
Change height to 7 1/4” (FO/DO) or 7 1/2” (SO) to line up with standard top drawer front then order DFST for a 5-pc front.
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wall Bookcase - 12” Deep
48’s & 52’s have 3 shelves
•• •• •• ••
60’s & 64’s have 4 shelves
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
48” Tall
60” Tall
BC1248 BC1548 BC1848 BC2148 BC2448 BC2748 BC3048 BC3348 BC3648 BC3948 BC4248 BC4548 BC4848
BC1260 BC1560 BC1860 BC2160 BC2460 BC2760 BC3060 BC3360 BC3660 BC3960 BC4260 BC4560 BC4860
52” Tall
64” Tall
BC1252 BC1552 BC1852 BC2152 BC2452 BC2752 BC3052 BC3352 BC3652 BC3952 BC4252 BC4552 BC4852
BC1264 BC1564 BC1864 BC2164 BC2464 BC2764 BC3064 BC3364 BC3664 BC3964 BC4264 BC4564 BC4864
No bottom rail. 48” & 52” tall units have 3 adjustable bookcase shelves with CTE2 on the front edge; 60” & 64” tall units have 4. Shelves 39” & longer are not guaranteed against sagging. If ordered with wide stiles, partitions will be added at no charge to box in shelves.
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Tall Bookcase - 12” Deep 84” Tall BC1284 BC1584 BC1884 BC2184 BC2484 BC2784 BC3084 BC3384 BC3684 BC3984 BC4284 BC4584 BC4884
96” Tall BC1296 BC1596 BC1896 BC2196 BC2496 BC2796 BC3096 BC3396 BC3696 BC3996 BC4296 BC4596 BC4896
120” Tall
••
84” unit has 5 adjustable bookcase shelves with CTE2 on the front edge; 96” & 120” units have 6 shelves. •• 6” flush toe kick is standard. •• Shelves over 39” are not guaranteed against sagging. •• If ordered with wide stiles, partitions will be added at no charge to box in shelves. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-7-
BCT12 BCT15 BCT18 BCT21 BCT24 BCT27 BCT30 BCT33 BCT36 BCT39 BCT42 BCT45 BCT48
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
84” Tall Bookcase with Doors - 12” Deep Cabinet
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Door height opening is 24”. 1 adjustable shelf behind doors. Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Entire cabinet will be finished interior. 3 adjustable bookcase shelves with CTE2 on the front edge. 6” flush toe kick is standard. Shelves 39” & longer are not guaranteed against sagging. Use BCDRTF as a modification to change the lower opening for no charge.
Doors
BCD1284
1
BCD1584
1
BCD1884
1
BCD2184
1
BCD2484
1
BCD2484BD
2
BCD2784
2
BCD3084
2
BCD3384
2
BCD3684
2
BCD3984
2
BCD4284
2
BCD4584
2
BCD4884
2
BCD48844D
4
Shown with Butt Doors
BCDRTF = Opening + 6” toe & 3” midrail
•• •• ••
Concealed Order a BCDRTF of 30” to line up with a desk height cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 32 3/4” to line up with a vanity cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 36” to line up with a base cabinet
•• •• ••
Designer Overlay w/ 3/4” top reveals Order a BCDRTF of 30 1/4” to line up with a desk height cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 33” to line up with a vanity cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 36 1/4” to line up with a base cabinet
Designer Overlay w/ 1/4” top reveals •• Order a BCDRTF of 30 3/4” to line up with a desk height cabinet •• Order a BCDRTF of 33 1/2” to line up with a vanity cabinet •• Order a BCDRTF of 36 3/4” to line up with a base cabinet
96” Tall Bookcase with Doors - 12” Deep •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Door height opening is 23 1/2”. 1 adjustable shelf behind doors. Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. Entire cabinet will be finished interior. 4 adjustable bookcase shelves with CTE2 on the front edge. 6” flush toe kick is standard. Shelves 39” & longer are not guaranteed against sagging. Use BCDRTF as a modification to change the lower opening for no charge.
Shown with Butt Doors
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Cabinet
Doors
BCD1296
1
BCD1596
1
BCD1896
1
BCD2196
1
BCD2496
1
BCD2496BD
2
BCD2796
2
BCD3096
2
BCD3396
2
BCD3696
2
BCD3996
2
BCD4296
2
BCD4596
2
BCD4896
2
BCD48964D
4
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
120” Tall Bookcase with Doors - 12” Deep Cabinet
•• •• ••
Door height opening is 23 1/2”. 1 adjustable shelf behind doors. Specify hinge direction on single door cabinets. •• Entire cabinet will be finished interior. •• 4 adjustable bookcase shelves with CTE2 on the front edge. •• 6” flush toe kick is standard. •• Shelves 39” & longer are not guaranteed against sagging. •• Use BCDRTF as a modification to change the lower opening for no charge. •STOP • See Tall Information page at the beginning of this section for important information regarding 120” tall cabinets.
Doors
BCDT12
1
BCDT15
1
BCDT18
1
BCDT21
1
BCDT24
1
BCDT24BD
2
BCDT27
2
BCDT30
2
BCDT33
2
BCDT36
2
BCDT39
2
BCDT42
2
BCDT45
2
BCDT48
2
BCDT484D
4
Shown with Butt Doors
BCDRTF = Opening + 5 ½” toe & 3” midrail
•• •• ••
Concealed Order a BCDRTF of 30” to line up with a desk height cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 32 3/4” to line up with a vanity cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 36” to line up with a base cabinet
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Designer Overlay w/ 3/4” top reveals
•• •• ••
Order a BCDRTF of 30 1/4” to line up with a desk height cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 33” to line up with a vanity cabinet Order a BCDRTF of 36 1/4” to line up with a base cabinet
-9-
Designer Overlay w/ 1/4” top reveals •• Order a BCDRTF of 30 3/4” to line up with a desk height cabinet •• Order a BCDRTF of 33 1/2” to line up with a vanity cabinet •• Order a BCDRTF of 36 3/4” to line up with a base cabinet
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Window Seat
•• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Drawers
WS2418
1
WS2718
1
WS3018
1
WS3318
1
WS3618
1
16” tall by 18” deep window seat with a drawer. A 6” flush toe kick is standard. Drawer opening height is 8 1/2”. Unit does not include a top.
Desk Panel Leg 21"
Cabinet
21"
DPL DPLT Cabinet BDPL BDPLT
•• •• 12"
DPL
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
DPLT
-10-
¾” panel edge banded one edge, finished both sides. To match desk cabinets, order 28 ½” tall using RH (reduced height) as a modification. For use with PD or VD cabinets.
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mantel 7 3/8" 3 1/2"
12
A B
Total Width is “A” + 27” Total Width is A + 27" Total Height is “B” + 15 1/2” Total Height is B + 15 1/2"
4 1/4"
6"
9 1/2" 9 1/2"
4 1/4"
9 1/2"
Cabinet
MANTEL •• •• •• •• ••
Standard mantel unit is custom made to fit surround. Order unit by specifying opening width (A) and opening height (B). Overall height is B + 15 ½”. Overall width is A + 27”. Remember to include any extra clearance allowances as specified in specific area fire and building codes.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
•• CR4 is used at the top of this mantel. •STOP • Changing details of this mantel or the set dimensions
-11-
of “A” & “B” can cause your order to become a “B”.
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Work Table
•• •• •• *Slab fronts only 4” to shelf
•• ••
••
Island work-table with two TUFEBM drawers on front side and false fronts on backside. Unit is 34 ½” high by 24” deep.
Cabinet
Drawers
WT3624
2
WT3924
2
WT4224
2
WT4524
2
WT4824
2
6” tall frame with a 3” drawer opening.* UCM Molding is applied to bottom of frame as standard. Optional ¾” thick x 3” wide slatted bottom with a flush toe kick (as shown on the 4 drawer WT). Use SLATED BTM as a modification. Work top is not included. Wood & Butcher Block Top pricing is located in the Accessories & Modifications section.
Peninsula Work Table
•• •• *Slab fronts only 4” to shelf
•• •• •• ••
Peninsula work table with two TUFEBM drawers. Unit is 34 ½” high by 24” deep. 6” tall frame with a 3” drawer opening.* UCM Molding is applied to bottom of frame as standard.
••
Cabinet
Drawers
WTP3624
2
WTP3924
2
WTP4224
2
WTP4524
2
WTP4824
2
All exposed surfaces are stained to match. Optional ¾” thick x 3” wide slatted bottom with a flush toe kick (as shown on the 4 drawer WT). Use SLATED BTM as a modification. Work top is not included. Wood & Butcher Block Top pricing is located in the Accessories & Modifications section.
Four Drawer Work Table Shown with optional slatted bottom
•• •• •• •• ••
Four drawer island work table with raised panel sides and back. Styled to match drawer fronts. TUFEBM guides.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
••
-12-
Cabinet
Drawers
WT4D3624
4
WT4D3924
4
WT4D4224
4
WT4D4524
4
WT4D4824
4
Unit is 34 ½” high by 24” deep. 16” tall frame with 5 ¾” tall drawer openings. UCM molding is applied to bottom of frame as standard. Standard with plywood bottom shelf. Optional ¾” thick x 3” wide slatted bottom with flush toe as shown at the left. Use SLATED BTM as a modification. Work top is not included. Wood & Butcher Block Top pricing is located in the Accessories & Modifications section.
Custom Furniture HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Two Drawer Work Table
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
Cabinet
Drawers
WT2D4824
2
Two drawer island work table with solid wood sides and back. Unit is 34 ½” high by 24” deep x 48” wide. 7” tall frames with 5” tall drawer openings. 10 ½” clearance between drawers. 3 ½” square posts in the corners. Work top is not included. Wood & Butcher Block Top pricing is located in the Accessories & Modifications section. No UCM at bottom of frames. TUFEBM guides standard.
Custom Work Tables are also available, please send drawing in for a quote.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-13-
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Accessories & Modifications Section Angles................................................................................................... 5 Angle.................................................................................................. 5 Pipe Chase Angle.......................................................................... 5 Angled End Panels....................................................................... 5 Clipped Corners............................................................................. 5 Special Returns.............................................................................. 5 APPLIANCE CUT-OUTS..................................................................... 6 APPLIANCE PANELS...........................................................................7 Dishwasher door panel................................................................7 Dishwasher door panel - B.........................................................7 Refrigerator door panel...............................................................7 Appliance panel door dimensions...........................................7 APPLIQUES.............................................................................................7 Keystones..........................................................................................7 APPLIED PANEL ENDS...................................................................... 8 BEADBOARD ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS............. 8-9 Beadboard molding..................................................................... 8 Beadboard paneling..................................................................... 8 Beadboard backs.......................................................................... 9 Beadboard ends............................................................................ 9 BLIND CORNER ACC. & MODS.....................................................10 Blind corner swing out wood & wire....................................10 Blind corner pull out...................................................................10 Add blind.........................................................................................10 Finished blind................................................................................10 Pull slide pull..................................................................................10 Lemans.............................................................................................10 Lemans lid.......................................................................................10 Modify blind...................................................................................10 CHANGE DIMENSIONS..................................................................... 11 CORBELS..........................................................................................12-15 CORNER CABINET ACC. & MODS...............................................16 Modify WCD two doors.............................................................16 CUSTOM ACCESSORIES..................................................................16 DECORATIVE DETAILS.................................................................... 17 Attach loose accessory.............................................................. 17 Chamfer............................................................................................ 17 Edge Detail...................................................................................... 17 Flutes................................................................................................. 17 Rosettes............................................................................................ 17 DOOR ACCESSORIES/MODS................................................. 18-23 APG one door................................................................................18 Add stile...........................................................................................18 Ball catch.........................................................................................18 Butt doors.......................................................................................18 Both doors hinged right/left...................................................18 Bi-fold doors..................................................................................18 Bi-pass/170 hinge.........................................................................18 Concealed hinge...........................................................................18 170 concealed hinge....................................................................19 Designer hinge..............................................................................19 Doors battoned.............................................................................19 Doors strapped.............................................................................19 Door stays.......................................................................................19 Door not hinged...........................................................................19 Double door panel width..........................................................19 Extend doors down.....................................................................19 Finger slots....................................................................................20 Glass doors....................................................................................20 AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Glass door pins.............................................................................20 Hinge door at top........................................................................20 Knife hinge.....................................................................................20 Aventos Lift Up HF, HS, HL, HK............................................... 21 Lattice door inserts..................................................................... 21 Lock................................................................................................... 21 Mullion doors................................................................................ 22 No doors......................................................................................... 22 Pegs & Nails................................................................................... 22 Piano hinge.................................................................................... 22 Piecut............................................................................................... 23 Pocket doors................................................................................. 23 Mount door ................................................................................... 23 Ship door loose............................................................................ 23 Single door panel width & height......................................... 23 Uniconnectors.............................................................................. 23 DRAWER ACCESSORIES & MODIFICATIONS................. 24-28 Add apothecary drawers..........................................................24 Bean drawer...................................................................................24 Breadboard....................................................................................24 Bread drawer.................................................................................24 Non-butt drawer fronts.............................................................24 Cutlery tray plastic ....................................................................24 Cutlery tray wood....................................................................... 25 Double tier cutlery tray............................................................. 25 Drawer front style changes...................................................... 25 Loose guides................................................................................. 25 Drawer Organization System.................................................. 25 Add drawer.....................................................................................26 Loose drawer box........................................................................26 Drawer front extend....................................................................26 Drawer divider...............................................................................26 Add file drawer.............................................................................26 Full width false front...................................................................26 Glass drawer fronts.....................................................................26 Knife tray insert............................................................................26 Logo imprints................................................................................ 27 Modify drawer fronts.................................................................. 27 Multi-front drawer........................................................................ 27 No drawer box.............................................................................. 27 No drawer front............................................................................ 27 Drawer peg system..................................................................... 27 Scooped drawer........................................................................... 27 Spice drawer plastic & wood...................................................28 Super drawer.................................................................................28 Top drawer false...........................................................................28 Top drawer opening modify....................................................28 Tandem Blumotion......................................................................28 Utility tray plastic & wood........................................................28 Wall w/ drawer qty......................................................................28 FACE FRAMES....................................................................................29 Loose faceframes.........................................................................29 Add faceframe to cabinet side or back...............................29 Rail material...................................................................................29 FILLERS...........................................................................................30-31 Angled fillers..................................................................................30 Overlay fillers.................................................................................30 Base corner fillers........................................................................ 31 Designer overlay base corner fillers...................................... 31 Wall & Base filler pull out.......................................................... 31
AL=Accessory Loose
-1-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Accessories & Modifications Section FINISHED ENDS, INTERIORS, TOPS & BOTTOMS............... 32 Finished ends................................................................................ 32 Finish backs.................................................................................... 32 Flush ends....................................................................................... 32 Extend sides back........................................................................ 32 Finished bottom........................................................................... 32 Flush finished top........................................................................ 32 Seal cabinet sides........................................................................ 32 FINISHED OUTSOURCED...............................................................33 MIRROR FRAMES..............................................................................66 MODIFIED OPENINGS.....................................................................33 Bottom broom opening height..............................................33 Bookcase rail to floor.................................................................33 Combination wall modify..........................................................33 Wall bottom & top open modify............................................33 Wall cubby height........................................................................33 MOLDING.......................................................................................34-42 Countertop Edging.....................................................................34 Crown.......................................................................................34-36 Base............................................................................................37-38 Detail......................................................................................... 38-42 Pilaster.............................................................................................42 Solid stock.....................................................................................43 PANELING......................................................................................44-45 Loose paneling............................................................................. 44 Edgebanding................................................................................ 44 Panelized plywood end treatment........................................45 POS OPTIONS.....................................................................................46 Pull-out shelves.............................................................................46 POS height modify......................................................................46 POS scoop......................................................................................46 CD/VHS/DVD Media insert......................................................46 RAIL & STILE MODIFICATIONS...................................................47 Extend ears....................................................................................47 Extend top & bottom rail..........................................................47 Wide stiles......................................................................................47 Drill stile...........................................................................................47 No middle stile..............................................................................47 Stile to floor...................................................................................47 RAISED PANELS (WAINSCOT)....................................................48 Loose raised panels....................................................................48 Intergrated raised panels..........................................................48 Modify raised panels...................................................................48 Pilaster edge detail......................................................................48 REPLACEMENT & LOOSE PARTS.......................................49-53 Blind corner swing outs loose.................................................49 Bumper pads.................................................................................49 Concealed hinge loose...............................................................49 Concealed 170 hinge loose.......................................................49 Can rack loose...............................................................................49 Designer Overlay hinge loose.................................................49 Door stays loose...........................................................................49 Double tier cutlery tray loose.................................................49 Grocery bag holder loose.........................................................49 Hidden toe kick step stool loose............................................49 Knife hinge loose..........................................................................49 Knife tray insert loose................................................................49 Lids for trash bin..........................................................................49 AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Lazy susan shelves & hardware..............................................49 MSU loose.......................................................................................49 Protruding MWS shelf loose....................................................50 Nails loose.......................................................................................50 Pot & pan caddy loose...............................................................50 POS loose........................................................................................50 Pull out tray divider loose.......................................................... 51 Pull out wire basket loose.......................................................... 51 Pull out wooden hamper loose................................................ 51 Recycle bins loose........................................................................ 51 Sink mat loose................................................................................ 51 Spice drawer insert loose.......................................................... 51 Spice insert loose.......................................................................... 51 Tambour material loose.............................................................. 51 Trash bins loose............................................................................. 51 Under sink caddy loose.............................................................. 51 Wine glass holder loose............................................................. 51 REVEALS............................................................................................... 52 SIDE SHAPED PANELS.................................................................... 52 Side shaped panels..................................................................... 52 Extend sides down...................................................................... 52 SHELVES................................................................................................ 53 Adjustable shelf........................................................................... 53 Adjustable bookcase shelf....................................................... 53 Adjustable finished interior shelf.......................................... 53 Add additional shelves to cabinet........................................ 53 Fixed Mid Shelf............................................................................. 53 Modify to bookcase shelving.................................................. 53 Full depth shelves....................................................................... 53 No shelves...................................................................................... 53 Plate groove.................................................................................. 53 Shelf w/ POS................................................................................. 53 Shelf clips....................................................................................... 53 SINK BASE OPTIONS.......................................................................54 Knee relief.......................................................................................54 Sink mat...........................................................................................54 Tip out trays...................................................................................54 Towel bar.........................................................................................54 Under sink Portero clean agent..............................................54 Under sink caddy.........................................................................54 Under sink wire roll out.............................................................54 SPICE RACKS......................................................................................55 STAIN & TOUCH UP..........................................................................56 STORAGE SOLUTIONS..............................................................57-58 Center partitions.......................................................................... 57 Can rack........................................................................................... 57 Closet rod....................................................................................... 57 Grocery bag holder..................................................................... 57 Pantry............................................................................................... 57 Plate holder.................................................................................... 57 Pot & pan caddy........................................................................... 57 Plate rack added to cabinet..................................................... 57 Pop up mixer shelf.......................................................................58 Pull out tray divider.....................................................................58 Pull out wire basket.....................................................................58 Pull out wooden hamper...........................................................58 Wicker baskets..............................................................................58 Tray dividers wire & wood........................................................58
AL=Accessory Loose
-2-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Index: Accessories & Modifications Section TABLE LEGS & BUNN FEET....................................................59-60 Table legs........................................................................................59 S table leg.......................................................................................59 Turned post....................................................................................59 Slatted bottom..............................................................................59 Bunn feet........................................................................................ 60 TOE KICK OPTIONS..........................................................................61 Flush toe kick.................................................................................61 Hidden toe kick step stool.........................................................61 Recessed toe kick.........................................................................61 Seperate toe kick..........................................................................61 No toe kick......................................................................................61 Toe depth & height.......................................................................61 ADA-Special toe heights............................................................61 VALANCES...........................................................................................62 Loose valances..............................................................................62 Integrated valances.....................................................................62 Raised panel valances................................................................63
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
WINE RACK.........................................................................................63 Scalloped wine rack....................................................................63 Wine rack grid...............................................................................63 Wine glass holders......................................................................63 WOOD HOOD ACCESSORIES......................................................64 Liners & blower.............................................................................64 WOOD TOPS.......................................................................................65 Wood tops......................................................................................65 Dog bone joint system...............................................................65 Shape top........................................................................................65 Spline................................................................................................65 Butcher block tops.....................................................................65 Alder distressed butcher block top.....................................65
AL=Accessory Loose
-3-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Accessories & Modifications Helpful Notes About Accessories/Modifications Section
•• •• ••
Any accessories that are finished like the exterior will be subject to finish & wood upcharges and will be priced as such on the pricing program. Interior wood accessories are built with Beech; interior plywood accessories are built with Maple. Loose accessories are entered as an individual line item, accessories that will be installed, such as Pull Out Shelves, or Cabinet/Accessory Modfications are entered as a modification to the existing line item.
Modifications are added by using the “Add Mod or Accessory to Line#” button on the order entry program •• Put the cursor on the line item. Click the “Add Mod or Accessory to Line#” button or “Alt + M” on your keyboard while on the Items tab of the Pricing Program.
••
••
A window will pop up stating “For Line # __”, click OK.
Enter the quantity & the modification or accessory nomenclature.
••
Items entered using the “Add Line or Accessory” button, such as Cabinets or loose accessories, will be shaded green in the pricing program; items entered using the “Add Mod or Accessory to Line #” button will be shaded white.
••
Some items in this section will require the cabinet to be entered as a custom. Enter the cabinet using one of the applicable CUSTOM_______ cabinet options (the custom entry will automatically add a custom charge to the cabinet price of the cabinet), then add the modification(s). For example, a B24L with an Angle would be entered in the following manner:
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-4-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Angles ANGLE
Angle
1 angle charge ($300)
M
Add an angle to a cabinet. Virtually any angles are available on our cabinetry. A drawing showing configuration and the degree of angle is required. Full & Designer Overlay hinges require special consideration. Doors requiring angles will be done on a case by case basis; submit a quote for pricing and availability.
2 angle charges $400 ($600)
Shown are two examples and their charges.
PC ANGLE
Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add ANGLE as a modification.
Pipe Chase Angle
M
Add a pipe chase to a cabinet. A detailed drawing specifying all dimensions is required. If the PC angle is different than those shown, please submit a quote prior to ordering. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add PC ANGLE as a modification.
Top view of various pipe chases.
Clipped Corners M When ordering pull-out shelves in cabinets with clipped corners, a 3/4” partition will be added on each clipped side Flutes or other decorative details can be added as a modification.
CC(L/R) 3" x 3" Clip on Corner Top View Shown
CCC(L/R)
3
3
CCP(L/R)B
3
3
SP RETURN 1-1/2" Use SP RETURN to modify this dimension
1-1/2"
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Clipped Corner Left or Right Add a 3”x 3” clip to face frame. Face of clip will be 4 1/4” wide. This does not flush the cabinet end. Custom Size Clipped Corner Left or Right Add a custom sized clip to face frame. Please send a drawing. Clipped Corner Peninsula Back Left or Right Add a 3” x 3” clip to face frame on the back of a peninsula cabinet.
Special Returns on WA, BA, VA, & TA cabinets M Modify 1 ½” returns equally up to 8”. This modification will not affect the number of doors on the cabinet; if needed, cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM____, then add SP RETURN as a modification.add SP RRN as a modification.
AL=Accessory Loose
-5-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Appliance Cut-outs APGOH
M
APG Opening Height Modify appliance garage opening height.
BOHH
Bottom Oven Hole Height Used to specify lower cut-out height on oven cabinets. Use TOHH if cabinet only has one opening.
BOHW
Bottom Oven Hole Width Used to specify lower cut-out width on oven cabinets. Use TOHW if cabinet only has one opening.
FSOH
Farm Sink Opening Height Used to specify cut-out height on farm sink cabinets. Enter dimension as 0 if jobsite cut-out.
FSOW
Farm Sink Opening Width Used to specify cut-out width on farm sink cabinets.
FSTRW
Farm Sink Top Rail Width Used to specify top rail width on farm sink cabinets. This can be used to increase the rail width for a solid top rail to be cut in the field or in addition to FSOH to modify the standard 1 1/2” rail size.
FTO
Floor to Oven Measurement Measurement, in inches, from the floor to the top of the shelf the oven will sit on. Can be specified if the standard FTO won’t work. Tow kick is 4 1/2" tall if recessed, 6" if FTK
OH
Cook Top Opening Height Used to specify cut-out height on the 2-Drawer Cook Top cabinet. Enter dimension as 0 if jobsite cut-out.
OW
Cook Top Opening Width Used to specify cut-out width on the 2-Drawer Cook Top cabinet.
TRW
Cook Top Rail Width Used to specify top rail width on the 2-Drawer Cook Top cabinet. This can be used to increase the rail width for a solid top rail to be cut in the field or in addition to OH to modify the standard 11/2” rail size
RHH
Refrigerator Hole Height Used to specify refrigerator opening height.
RHW
Refrigerator Hole Width Used to specify refrigerator opening width
RLLO
Refrigerator Leg Left Only Modifies refigerator cabinet to one leg.
RLRO
Refrigerator Leg Right Only Modifies refigerator cabinet to one leg.
TOHH
Top Oven Hole Height Used to specify cut-out heights on oven or microwave cabinets. Use TOHH if cabinet only has one opening.
TOHW
Top Oven Hole Width Used to specify cut-out widths on oven or microwave cabinets. Use TOHW if cabinet only has one opening.
WDHH
Warming Drawer Hole Height Used to specify cut-out heights on oven cabinets with a warming drawer. Use TOHH if cabinet only has one opening.
WDHW
Warming Drawer Hole Width Used to specify cut-out widths on oven cabinets with a warming drawer. Use TOHW if cabinet only has one opening.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-6-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Appliance Panels The applied doors and/or drawer fronts are subject to any applicable style upcharges. When ordering appliance panels, state the overall size of the backer panel plus any reveals. MANUFACTURER SPECS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE!!! Due to continually changing manufacture specs we DO NOT keep track of the specs for individual models. It is your responsibility to supply all relevant information such as overall panel sizes and proper overlays for doors. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time. See Appliance Panel Forms in the FORMS section for this catalog. If you do not need the 1/4” backer panel(s), please order a loose door/drawer front. See the Accessory & Modification section for more information on ordering loose doors and drawer fronts.
DWDP
Dishwasher Door Panel
AL
Decorative door attached to a ¼” thick panel. If ordered, the lower access panel cover will not have a matching decorative onlay unless specified. Use form in FORMS section.
Access panel cover available upon request
DWDP-B
5/8
Dishwasher Door Panel B
Fixed
1/2 1/4
3/16 1/4
AL
Decorative door & front attached to a ¾” thick faceframe. No modifications. Built to line up with the surrounding base cabinets. If specs do not meet your needs, must be ordered as a FF&D. This is a fixed attachment, finished entirely. Matching revels on job.
29 7/8
3/16 1/4 Shown in Designer Overlay with 3/4" top reveals on bases
23 7/8 1/ 4
RDPL Refrigerator Door Panel
AL
Door attached to a ¼” thick panel. Use form in FORMS section. RDPs are available in virtually any configuration. No arched doors wider than 24”. Drawer fronts below minimum size will be slab style. An additional panel cover is included, only if specified with order. The access panel will not have a matching overlay unless specified. Door style will match the lower door section on the order. See door section for minimum and maximum door sizes. Use SDPW and SDPH for single door panel width and/or height. Warranty will be limited.
APDL
Appliance Panel Door Length &/or Width
M
Use as a modification to an appliance panel to specify the length & width of the decorative door.
APDW
Appliques CC KEYSTONE
Custom Built Keystone
6
6
1 ½” thick x 6” wide x 6” tall. 3/8” x 3” relief at top to allow keystone to set into valance. Edges are beveled. Specify if no relief needed.
4
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-7-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Applied Panel Ends
M
This modification will flush the end of the cabinet, size the door according to overlay, & attach it with matching reveals. Watch for double panel height/width doors. Add 3/4” per application to overall width of the cabinet. Finished end must be added. O n Ta l l A p p l i c a t i o n s : Brooms, Linens plants will align with doors on front. Bookcase w/ Door plants, lower door will align with doors on front, remaining door on top. Oven & Bookcase plants for cabinets w/out doors on front will receive two equally sized door plants. Doors may become double panel in height.
APEB(L/R)
24” Deep Bases get full height door.
APEB12(L/R)
12” Deep Bases get full height door.
APEV(L/R)
Vanities get full height door.
APEW(L/R)
Walls up to, but not including 48”
APETW(L/R)
Tall Walls 48” tall and up
APET(L/R)
24” Deep Tall
APET12(L/R)
12” Deep Tall
Beadboard Accesories & Modifications BBM
3” Beadboard Molding with or w/out bead 3” wide, 3/8" solid wood, tongue and groove, Beadboard Molding sold by the linear foot. Overall size is 3 1/8” wide and is available in 8’ increments.
BBM 3OC
( w/o u t ce n te r b e a d )
AL
3 1/4
3/8” 3/8
Beadboard Molding can be ordered cut to size by specifying number & length of pieces needed. A surcharge will be applied. Call Customer Service for a quote.
3 1/8
BBM shown above
BEADBOARD
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Beadboard Paneling 3/16” thick beadboard plywood paneling priced per square foot. Maximum size is 48” W x 96” L. Beads are 1 ½” on center. Pattern differs slightly from the beadboard molding. (NA in Knotty or Rustic woods)
AL=Accessory Loose
-8-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Beadboard Backs
M
Dimensions are WIDTH by LENGTH. The length runs with the grain. Beadboard can be ordered in an accent color, call your CSR for a quote. 3/16” Beadboard paneling is not available in Knotty or Rustic woods.
BBBI
Inlayed Beadboard Back
BBBI 3 OC
3/8” thick solid wood beadboard molding inlayed over the 1/2” plywood interior back. Available in 1 1/2” or 3” on center.
BBB
Beadboard Back 3/16” beadboard plywood paneling used for interior cabinet back Beadboard is NOT available on interior cabinet sides or exterior backs
BBB BOTH
Beadboard Interior Back 3/16” beadboard plywood paneling used for interior left & right backs of corner diagonal cabinets only.
Beadboard Ends
M 3/8” thick solid wood beadboard molding applied to cabinet ends. The cabinet end is not flush, an 1/8” reveal is standard. Available in 1 1/2” on center or 3” on center. No need to specify finished end. This modification will affect the maximum cut-out width on appliance cabinets.
BBEB(L/R) BBEB(L/R) 3OC
Base Cabinet
BBEB12(L/R)
12” Deep Base Cabinet
BBEW(L/R) BBEW(L/R) 3OC
Wall Cabinet Up to, but not including 48” tall.
BBETW(L/R)
Tall Wall Cabinet Walls 48” tall and up
BBET(L/R) BBET(L/R) 3OC
Tall Cabinet
BBET12(L/R)
12” Deep Tall Cabinet
BBE(L/R)
Beadboard End Paneling
M
3/16” thick beadboard plywood paneling applied to cabinet ends. Available on Walls, Bases, Vanities, & Tall cabinets. The cabinet end is not flush, a slight reveal is standard. Not available in Knotty or Rustic woods. No need to specify finished ends.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-9-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Blind Corner Accessories & Modifications NOTE: Pull-outs & swing-outs fit XB42 – XB48 cabinets and require a 13” minimum opening, unless noted.
BCP
Blind Corner Pull-Out AI Wire, two tier unit swings out then pulls out. 21” minimum cabinet depth
BCSWIRE
Blind Corner Swing-Out
AI
Wire, two tier unit swings out. 21” minimum cabinet depth.
BCSWOOD
BLIND
BCP shown at top BCSWIRE shown at bottom
Wooden Blind Corner Swing-Out AI Wood, two tier unit swings out then pulls out. 21” minimum cabinet depth.
Modify a standard cabinet to a blind cabinet M Add a blind to a cabinet. A drawing showing configuration & door opening must be supplied. Some restrictions apply. * Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add BLIND as a modification.
FBLIND
Finish Blind
M
Finished panel will have seam where panel meets 6” filler. Blind panel is constructed of 3/4” material.
LEMANS 18
Lemans AI
XBFD45
XBFD depth cannot be modified. (Min opening is 17 3/4" to accept) MUST be used on full door cabinet.
only available in
Champagne; non-slip finish. The Lemans makes some space very easy to use, but unfortunately, sacrifices the rest of the cabinet box. LEMANS 21 only available in XBFD48
See Hafele’s Arena Champagne literature for more details!
LEMANSLID
Lemans Lid Organizer
AL
17 3/4” W x 5 7/8” D x 1 5/8” H Insert only. Shipped loose.
MODIFY BLIND
Modify door opening on a Blind Cabinet
M
Modifying the door opening on the blind does not affect the number of doors on the cabinet. Door opening must be specified.
PSP
Pull-Slide-Pull
AI
Bottom mounted unit with 4 chrome baskets. Not available with door mount hardware. Minimum opening is 14 3/4” wide. Minimum cabinet depth is 20”. Overall height of unit is 20 ¾”. Minimal usage of top basket if used in a cabinet with a drawer. Capacity 25 lbs. per basket . Fits XBFD42 - XBFD48 full height for cabinet only. Baskets measure 11 3/4” W x 16 1/2” D x 4” H. Same basket sizes, regardless of cabinet size.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-10-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Change Dimensions
ďƒžM
If possible start with a larger cabinet and reduce dimensions. When modifying angled cabinets such as the BA & WA; the left back is adjusted with the width (CW, RW) and the right back is adjusted with the depth (CD, RD). When modifying the height or width of a cabinet, pay close attention to door & drawer front minimums and maximum single panel door sizes. See Door & Drawer Styles section.
RW
R e d u ce Wi d t h
RD
R e d u ce D e p t h Walls cannot be reduced to less than 4", bases and tall no less than 6" final depth, unless custom
RH
R e d u ce H e i g h t
CW
C h a n g e Wi d t h
CD
Change Depth
CDT
C h a n g e D e p t h Ta l l
CH
Change Height
CDNC
Change Depth No Charge For use when directed with select cabinets.
RDL
Reduced depth left side
RDR
Reduced depth right side
CWL
Change width left back
CWR
Change width right back
CDL
Change depth left side
CDR
Change depth right side
RWL
Reduced width left side
RWR
Reduced width right side
CWR RWR
CDR RDR
CWL RWL
CDL RDL
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-11-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Corbels
AL 8”
CORBAR 1
1” Corbel Bar Bracket Design 1 1” Thick solid wood brackets. 8” wide x 12” tall
1”
12”
CORBAR 2
8”
1” Corbel Bar Bracket Design 2 1” Thick solid wood brackets. 8” wide x 12” tall
1”
12”
Special Order Corbels CORBEL SP
AL
Custom Corbel Must send a drawing. We strongly advise sending in a quote before ordering.
CBL-AO1
Special Order Corbels Enkeboll’s Acanthus Corbel. This style is used on HOOD 1 & HOOD 2 shown in the Custom Furniture section. 4 3/4” wide x 9 1/2” tall x 3 3/4” deep.
Corbels - Outsourced
AL
These hand carved, hardwood corbels, available in many styles, are an ideal choice for fireplace mantels and range hoods. The top profile of many of these wood corbels accepts molding up to 3/4”. Wood corbels can be mounted with keyhole plates, provided and pre-attached, to your project. Custom Cupboards takes care of the ordering so you don’t have to. Available only in Maple, Oak, and Cherry. Acanthus Corbels
CORACA M
CORACA L
CORACA XL
Large
Medium
X-Large AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-12-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Americana Corbels
CORAME S
CORAME M
Small
CORAME L
Medium
Large
Art Deco Corbels
CORAD S
CORAD L
Small Large
Arts & Crafts Corbels
CORART S
CORART L
CORART XL
Small Medium Large
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-13-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Bordeaux Corbels
CORBOR M
CORBOR L
CORBOR XL
Large
Medium
X-Large Cottage Corbels
CORCOT S
CORCOT M
CORCOT L
CORCOT XL
Small Medium
Large X-Large Leaf Corbels
CORLV S
CORLV M
Small
CORLV L
CORLV XL
Medium
Large X-Large
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-14-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Rattan Corbels
CORRAT S
CORRAT M
CORRAT L
Medium
Small
Large
Traditional Corbels
CORTRAD S
CORTRAD M
Small
CORTRAD L
Medium Large
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-15-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Corner Cabinet Accessories WCD TWO DOOR
WCD Two Door M Use this to modify the Wall Corner Diagonal Cabinet to two doors.
Custom Accessories Section CUSTOM ACC.
Custom Accessory Use this to enter custom quoted accessories.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL
AL=Accessory Loose
-16-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Decorative Details OM-ATT
M
Attach Loose Accessory Used as a modification to a cabinet, solid stock or filler when attaching a loose accessory such as doors, onlays, etc.
CHAMFER
Front View
Side View
3
Chamfer ¼” deep x ¼” wide, approximately 3/8” across the diagonal. Can be added as a modification to faceframe or solid stock. Chamfer starts and stops 3” from the ends or 7 1/2” from bottom on cabinets with flush toe kicks.
EDGE DETAIL
Edge Detail Add edge detail to a cabinet frame or box fillers. Must specify the edge you want. See Solid Stock detail chart for available edges. (page 43)
FLUTE
Flutes
FLUTE 3/8
Fluting added to trim such as extended ears, wide stiles, fillers, clipped corners, or other flat stock. 2” wide minimum width. Price does not include material. Flute placement: Standard flutes start & stop 3” from top & bottom edges. Staggered flutes start & stop 3” from top & bottom edges. The outside flutes start & stop 1 ½” from center flute. To order specify in the item notes. All fluting on flush toe kicks will be moved up 4 1/2”. Fluting will start 1 ½” from any additional detailing such as rosettes. Flute placement can be specified for no additional charge.
ROSE
Rosettes
ROSE2
Rosettes are routed onto trim such as extended ears, wide stiles, fillers, clipped corners or other flat stock. Rosette detailing is typically placed 3” from the top, 7 1/2” up when used on the bottom of base cabinets. Price does not include material cost. See also plinth blocks
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-17-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications APG ONE DOOR
Appliance Garage w/ One Door
M
Used to modify the two lower doors on a Wall Appliance Garage w/ Door Cabinet to a single door. Hinging will be the same as upper door.
ADD STILE
M
Butt Door with Center Faceframe Stile
Adds center stile to butt door cabinet, keeping butt door reveals.
BALL CATCH
Ball Catch
AL
Solid Brass Catch & Strike has an adjustable tension feature and is easy to install. The strike may enter from either side or front and is designed for use on all doors. Includes catch & strike, four brass screws, mounting template and instructions. #1 phillips driver, 5/64” diameter drill bit, & a drill are required for installation.
BD
Butt Doors
Butt Doors will have an 1/8” gap between the doors & no center stile. When selecting butt doors on the Order Info tab on the pricing program, butt doors & drawer fronts will be added to all base, wall, & vanity cabinets 27”- 45” wide. Butt doors will be standard on Tall Broom cabinets 27” – 39” wide. See individual cabinet descriptions for BD options on sizes beyond these standards. Butt drawer fronts will keep the center stile for drawer guide function. To order a full width drawer front and/ or drawer add FF or SD to the end of the cabinet nomenclature. (Ex. SB36FF or B36SD) When ordering wall, base and vanity cabinets that are under 24” wide & need butt doors, order the cabinet as the 24” BD equivalent and reduce the width.
Butt Door option can be set as a default in the Pricing Program. Call your CSR for details.
BDHL BDHR
M
Both Doors Hinged Left / Right
M
Used on double door cabinets to allow both doors to swing in the same direction. Cannot be used with butt doors.
BFD
Bi-Fold Doors
M
1/8” gap between doors. Each set is hinged together and features a control arm to assist in holding doors open or closed. 2 sets pictured at left. Cabinets over 48” wide must be approved. Every attempt will be made to send the pivot arms in applications where possible. Frame will be notched in Full & Designer Overlay for the Concealed 170º Hinge.
BI-PASS/170
Bi-Pass/170 Hinge
M
Used on 2 door Lazy Susan or Wall Easy Reach. Due to hinge opening limitations, the 170˚ hinge is used in addition to Bi-Pass hinges on concealed, full & designer overlay jobs. Hinge direction dictates which door opens first. Not available on mitered, thermo foil, or applied molding doors.
CONCEALED Select as hinge type on order info tab
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Standard Overlay Concealed Hinge M 6-way adjustable concealed hinge opens 105˚. See the Information Section for reveals.
AL=Accessory Loose
-18-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications CON170
Concealed 170º Hinge
M
Not available on full overlay except for use on corner cabinets with the pie-cut hinge. In this case the faceframe will be routed out.
D BATTON
Door Battoned
M
Doors attached together with wood batton brace. Doors will maintain the same reveal as the job. This option makes the cabinet custom. Warranty is still based on door size; does not change because doors are joined. Does not delete cabinet mid rail. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add D BATTON as a modification.
D STRAPPED
Door Strapped
M
Doors attached together with metal strapping brace. Doors will be pulled together with no reveal between. This option makes the cabinet custom. Warranty is still based on door size; does not change because doors are joined. Does not delete cabinet mid rail. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add D STRAPPED as a modification.
DESIGNER
Designer Overlay Concealed Hinge M The 6-way adjustable designer overlay hinges opens 107˚. See the Information Section for reveals.
Select as hinge type on order info tab
DOOR STAY#1
Door Stay
One fitting system, two functions; braking or stopping. Easily convertible. Maximum opening angle 110˚. We install 2 stays per opening. Available on all door styles. Door Stay #1 used in openings below 12”, with a minimum of 8”. This is not selfclosing. Door Stay #2 features a hydraulic closing option on openings 12” or greater. Maximum opening height 16 1/2”.
DOOR STAY#2
DNH
M
Door Not Hinged
M
Single cabinet door will be shipped loose without hinging or hinge routing to be installed on jobsite. Add as a modification to the cabinet. SDL (ship door loose) should be added as a separate line # following the cabinet line during order entry to give door a shipping number.
DDPW
M
Double Door Panel Width
This modification will change a single panel door insert to a double panel in width. DDPW cannot be used on arched doors. 2 equal panels. This modification will affect any raised panel or applied panel ends on the cabinet.
OM-BD
Dust Strip
M
1/2” thick same-species strip, attached to the door to serve as a dust strip. Rabbet-routed to the back of the door.
EXT DOORS
Extend Doors Down
M
Extend doors down to cover cubby unit on the Wall Cabinet with Cubbies. Double door cabinets must have butt doors.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-19-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications FISL
M
Finger Slots
The finger slot is 4” wide, centered on the top & bottom of the back side of the door. The top drawer front will have 1 FISL centered on the bottom & the middle & bottom drawer fronts will have 1 FISL centered on the top. Not available on outsourced, thermofoil, or 50100 & 50200 doors. Not recommended with full or designer overlay. Special or modified placement of finger slots is not available.
Select this option on Order Info tab in prici n g p ro g ra m u n d e r D o o r s / D rawe r s
GD
Glass Doors
M
Doors prepped for glass only. Glass is not included. Larger doors are more likely to warp. If single opening is required on oversized doors, specify SDPH &/or SDPW. 50100 & 50200 styles get a 70000 style glass door. If cabinet has upper and lower doors, GD will only affect upper doors unless specified.
FORMULA FOR FIGURING GLASS DOOR SIZES 2 ¼” Rails & Stiles - Single Panel Subtract 3 ½” from overall width & height of door unless shaker style, then subtract 3 1/4” 3 ½” Rails & Stiles - Single Panel Subtract 6” from overall width & height of door unless shaker style, then subtract 5 3/4” If rail & stile combination is different such as the #71200 the formulas will be based on the two components. This is the opening size only, you may want to order your glass a slightly smaller to ensure proper fit. We strongly recommend using your finished doors for sizing glass. Call your Account Manager for a more accurate estimate. These formulas do not apply to double paneled doors. We cannot provide a formula for arched doors as the route follows the arch.
GDPINS
Glass Door Pins
AL
Provided at no charge, ONLY when requested with glass doors on the original order.
HDT
Hinge Door Top
M
Available on wall cabinets 15”–39” wide & 12”–18” tall. HDT is one door across the width of the cabinet. Doors over 24” wide will be double panel, specify SDPW for single panel. No arched doors over 24”
KNIFE HINGE
Standard Overlay Knife Hinge
M
180 opening Youngsdale hinge. Antique brass except on Paint White (white hinge will be used). KHS should be added as a line item for installation set screws.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-20-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications AVENTOS HF
Pull-up Door - Aventos HF
M
Use on cabinets 19” - 42” in height Use on cabinets 15” - 72” in width Soft close feature. Installation will clear crown molding. Minimum cabinet depth is 12”. Lift mechanism needs 11” of internal cabinet space in order to function. Enter cabinet as CUST WALL AVNT, NO CUSTOM CABINET CHARGE AVENTOS HS
Pull-up Door - Aventos HS
M
Use on cabinets 13 3/4” - 31 1/2” in height Use on cabinets 15” - 72” in width Soft close feature. Installation will clear most crown molding. Minimum cabinet depth is 12”. Lift mechanism needs 11” of internal cabinet space in order to function. Enter cabinet as CUST WALL AVNT, NO CUSTOM CABINET CHARGE. AVENTOS HL
Pull-up Door - Aventos HL
M
Use on cabinets 13 5/16” - 22 13/16” in height Use on cabinets 15” - 72” in width Soft close feature. Installation will clear crown molding. Minimum cabinet depth is 12”. Lift mechanism needs 11” of internal cabinet space in order to function. Enter cabinet as CUST WALL AVNT, NO CUSTOM CABINET CHARGE AVENTOS HK
Pull-up Door - Aventos HK
M
Use on cabinets 11 13/16” - 24” in height. Use on cabinets 15” - 72” in width. Hardware holds doors open in any position. Soft close feature. Installation will clear crown molding. Minimum cabinet depth is 10”. Lift mechanism needs 9” of internal cabinet space in order to function. Enter cabinet as CUST WALL AVNT, NO CUSTOM CABINET CHARGE LDI
Lattice Door Inserts
M
Diagonal wood lattice is inserted into door in place of the door panel. Diagonal pattern. Direction of lattice is always upper left to lower right. Maximum lattice size is 23 5/8” wide x 47 ¼” long & cannot be installed in doors that are larger than our maximum door sizes. Not available in thermofoil or mullion doors. Available in Alder, Cherry, Beech & Maple. Lattice dimensions are: -Overall thickness of 5/32” -Moldings measure 7/16” wide -½” cell size (openings)
LOCK
Lock
M
Antique finish lock installed on cabinet door or drawer front. Limited availability on drawer fronts. Not available on mitered doors or fronts. Please call when ordering locks to confirm that the location & application will work.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-21-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications Mullion Doors Style A is used when rails & stiles are G-cove; glued together. Style B is used when rails & stiles are shaker; fastened with glue & bowties on the back. 1” wide mullions on both styles. Insert grids must be used in some instances. See door descriptions for available door styles. Maximum single panel sizes apply. Consider using SDPH &/or SDPW in these instances. The number of lites on colonial style mullions will be equally s on double panel height doors Vertical or horizontal mullion may be removed when below minimum size required. Call your Account Manager for details.
MBD
MBD STYLE A
MBD STYLE B
Colonial Style Mullion Doors M Door height & # of Lights 4 Lites: up to & including 23” H 6 Lites: 23 1/16” H up to & including 36” H 8 Lites: 36 1/16” H up to & including 54” H 12 Lites: doors over 54 1/16” H
MBDPS
MBDPS STYLE A
MBDPS STYLE B
Mullions when ordered on cabinets that come with both upper and lower doors will only be added to upper doors as standard. Prairie Style Mullion Doors M Corners are 2” x 2”
MBDIG
INSERT MBD STYLE B 711 Style GD Door
MBDPSI Mullion Doors with Insert Grids M Available, but not standard, on all door styles except arched. The grid is constructed of ¼” thick x 13/16” wide flat stock; stapled on back. Used on mitered doors, doors with inconsistent rails & stiles, and many applied molding doors.
MBDCS
Mullion Doors - Custom M Send drawing for quote. Price & availability depend on complexity.
ND NDU (to delete upper doors only
No Doors M Deletes doors from cabinet. This modification does not finish the interior of the cabinet; finished interior must be ordered in addition if needed.
on a 2 door cabinet.
NDL (to delete lower doors only on a 2 door cabinet)
PEGS 1 NAIL 1 BLACK NAIL 1 SHINY PEGS 2 NAIL 2 BLACK NAIL 2 SHINY
PEG 1
PEG 2
PEG2 Diagonal
NAILS 1LB PIANO HINGE
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Nails & Wooden Pegs M One peg or nail will be centered in height, two will be equally spaced in height. Diagonal peg/nail placement can also be specified. If not specified, you will receive vertical placement. Pegs/nails are available on doors, drawer fronts, & raised panel ends. Not available on Thermofoil or mitered doors & fronts. Two pegs or nails will not work on 5-piece drawers with 1 ¼” rails. Send dimensioned drawing for special peg placement. Specify on the “Order Info” tab of the Pricing Program. Piano Hinge AL Shipped Loose
AL=Accessory Loose
-22-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Door Accessories & Modifications PIECUT
Pie-cut Hinge M Used on 2 door Lazy Susans & Easy Reach cabinets for an increased appliance clearance. Standard on these cabinets in Full & Designer Overlay. Price includes 170˚ hinges.
PD
Pocket Doors M Maximum cabinet box 39”W x 42”T; larger sizes may not function as well. Call for pricing and availability for larger doors. 18” minimum & 27” maximum cabinet depth. Inside distance between open pocket doors is 3 1/2” less than the overall cabinet width. If the pricing program will not let you order pocket doors on your standard cabinet, it is not available at this time. PD hardware does not work with any applied molding that is attached to the face of the door & some mitered doors. If ordered, the PDs will be built without the applied molding. Door style charges still apply & no credit will be issued.
Shown with optional pocket door partions.
Pocket Door Partitions
Pocket Doors
PDP
Pocket Door Partition M Allows for the use of adjustable shelves in a cabinet with pocket doors. Distance between pocket door partitions is 7” less that the overall cabinet width. 3/4” material. Shipped Loose.
SPDS
Ship Pocket Doors Seperate for Line #
RBMD
Mount Door to Bins M Mounts door to hardware.
SDL
Ship Doors loose for Line # AL Used as a line item to ship a loose door from a cabinet. See DNH modification.
SDPH
Single Door Panel Height & Width M This modification will change a double panel door insert to a single panel in width or height. Helpful when ordering appliance panels and large glass doors. Warranty will not apply on oversized panels.
SDPW UNICONNECTOR
Uniconnector AL False Front mounting bracket
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL
AL=Accessory Loose
-23-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Accessories & Modifications ADD
Add Dovetailed Apothecary Drawers M Add exposed dovetail apothecary drawer boxes with scooped top and no drawer front to a cabinet. Finished to match exterior of cabinet. This is a custom modification, therefore a detailed drawing must accompany order. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add ADD as a modification (specify qty).
ADSTD
Add Standard Apothecary Drawers M Add standard apothecary drawer boxes with fronts to a cabinet. This is a custom modification, therefore a detailed drawing must accompany order. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add ADSTD as a modification (specify qty).
Apothecaries will be included in the overall height of the cabinet and will reduce the door opening height. No guides; installed on wooden runners. On cabinets less than 11” deep, ADSTDs will be substituted. Standard wall and base cabinets are available with apothecary drawers. See the BAU, WAU, W__ __AD, & W__ __AS cabinets. Although you can specify the number of apothecary drawers when using the ADD & ADSTD modifications, we recommend: 1 in a 9” wide cabinet 5 in a 30” – 33” wide cabinet 2 in a 12” – 15” wide cabinet 6 in a 36” – 39” wide cabinet 3 in an 18” – 21” wide cabinet 7 in a 42” – 45” wide cabinet 4 in a 24” – 27” wide cabinet 8 in a 48” wide cabinet
BEAN
Bean Drawer M Drawer front with 3” wide rails & stiles, prepped for glass, with a partition placed 1” from front in the drawer box. 5-piece drawer front charge will apply. Not available on mitered or outsourced drawer fronts. Glass is not included. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add BEAN as a modification.
BRBD/CBD
Breadboard M ¾” laid up unfinished maple with matching front. B15-24 bread boards are 6” less than cabinet width. B27-48 bread boards are 18” wide and centered. To preserve the wood, finish with walnut oil. NO WARRANTY
BRDR B
Bread Drawer M Clear acrylic sliding lid is dadoed into side of the lower drawer on a three or four drawer base. Specify middle or bottom drawer.
BRDR M BDFN
Non-Butt Drawer Fronts M To order a single cabinet w/out butt drawer fronts, enter this as a modification to the individual cabinet.
CT
Cutlery Tray M White Plastic. Fits B15-24, B30-39. Available widths include: 10 3/8”, 13 3/8”, 16 3/8”, & 21 3/8”. Can be trimmed 2 ¼”. Will not fit vanity depth cabinet. To use plastic cutlery trays with super drawer cabinets a DRWRDVDR will be added.See also UTILITY TRAYS.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-24-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Accessories & Modifications CTW
Wood Cutlery Tray M Sized to opening; 5/16” solid beech; tray openings are approximately 2 ½”. Special configuration is available, enter as a CUST CAB ACC, additional charges apply. Call your account manager for a quote.
DTCT WOOD
Double-Tier Cutlery Tray M Beech wood. Fits B18 - B24 & B36 - B48. TUFEBM guides are recommended, otherwise you cannot access back of tray.
DFST
Drawer Front Style Changes M Alters only the middle, bottom, or top drawer front on an individual cabinet to a 5-piece front. Use when slab style top drawers and more intricate 5-piece style lower drawers are wanted. Take notice of minimum sizes on 5-piece drawers. Can modify drawer fronts to 2 ¼” rails by using MDFST, MDFSM & MDFSB, or 2 3/4 revels by using MDFST 2 3/4, MDFSM 2 3/4, MDFSB 2 3/4 or to 3 1/2” rails by using MDFST 3 1/2”, MDFSM 3 1/2 & MDFSB 3 1/2. This modification is listed later in this section. Cannot be used on mitered drawer fronts.
DFSM DFSB
DGSO15 DGSO18 DGSO21 DGSO24
Solo Undermount Guides Loose Rear mount Socket
DGTUFEBM12 DGTUFEBM15 DGTUFEBM18 DGTUFEBM21 DGTUFEBM24
AL
Specify depth of cabinet.
Tandem Undermount Full Extension Blumotion Guides Loose
AL
Specify depth of cabinet. üüüüüüü
Drawer Organization System The accessories can be placed in either an “A” or “B” position in the 3 different width cutlery trays (Birch material). The B18 unit will not accept any of the accessories designated for usage in an “A” position as it only has a “B” position. The B24 unit has both an “A” and a “B” position while the B36 unit has two “A” positions and a single “B” position. A customer can chose any designation they want to fill these areas, including choosing to leave a position open or putting two of the same accessories in the “A” positions in a B36 unit. For pricing, contact Custom Cupboards customer service. We will only install in the 3 sizes offered (18, 24, 36) if needing other sizes must order loose and modify at job-site.
CUTLERY OS18 CUTLERY OS24 CUTLERY OS36
B
B
338 (13 5/16”)
fit in slot
A
For outside cabinet width 36”
B
A
491 (19 5/16”) fit in slot
A
A
424 (16 11/16”)
For outside cabinet width 24”
For outside cabinet width 18”
Nomenclature
A
796 (31 5/16”)
fit in slot
A
We’ll offer the glass jar with the clear glass lid
fit in slot
Nomenclature
KNIFE HOLDER AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Nomenclature
Nomenclature
ROLL HOLDER
SPICE INSERT
AL=Accessory Loose
-25-
B
Nomenclature
CONTAINERS M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Accessories & Modifications DRAWER
Add Drawer to any Cabinet M Used to add drawers to any cabinet. Applicable drawer front & guides charges will apply. This is a custom modification, a detailed drawing must accompany order. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add DRAWER as a modification. Enter as shown below:
DRWR BOX DT
Loose 11/16” Dovetail Drawer Box AL To order a loose Solid Beech dovetail drawer box. Must specify sizes or cabinet dimensions. Guides not included.
DRWRDVDR
Drawer Divider M 5/8” solid natural wood beech dividers. Specify placement. Can be adjustable by specifying
DWR DEPTH
DRAWER DEPTH
REDUCED 12" 15" 18
CHANGE 24" 27" 30
To reduce the depth of the drawer boxes without affecting the cabinet box depth. It will apply to all drawers, if needing online one on a drawer bank on multi-cabinet, cabinet will become custom.
FILE
• A reduction of the drawer box is perfect when trying to allow for plumbing access. • Use change depth to 24, 27 or 30 on an island for deeper cabinet to maximize space. Cabinet must be at least 2" deeper than requested drawer depth.
File Drawer M Change drawer into file drawer. Increase opening height to 12” tall, add an 5/8” solid beech file drawer box with file hardware and Tandem Blumotion full extension guides. Recommended on cabinets 18” or wider with a 17” minimum cabinet depth. Back hanger is moveable to adjust for standard or legal files. Slots already drilled. Please refer to drawer front minimums. If used on a cabinet other than a B__D3, cabinet becomes custom and cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add FILE as a modification.
A change in height on the B__D3 will affect the middle opening if used in conjunction with file drawer modification.
_____FF
Full Width False Front Available on all double door sink base cabinets up to 36” wide. To order, add FF to the product nomenclature. (Ex.SB36FF)
OM-GD
Glass Drawer Fronts M Drawer front with 3” wide rails & stiles, prepped for glass; a partition is not included, see Bean Drawers if needed. 5-piece drawer front charge will apply. Not available on mitered or outsourced drawer fronts. Glass is not included. Cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add OM-GD as a modification.
KT INSERT
M Knife Tray Insert Features hardwood UV coated maple construction w/ up to 19 knife slots (if uncut), centered roughly 15/16” apart. Fits B12-48”, no depth modifications allowed. Spans full width of drawer on 12”-21”, partition will be installed on 24”-36” super drawers, left or right orientation must be specified. 24” will only have roughly 3” of space left or right of the partition.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-26-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Accessories & Modifications LOGO IMPRINT
Located on the Order Info tab of the Order Entry Program
MDFST MDFSM MDFSB MDFST 3 1/2 MDFSM 3 1/2 MDFSB 3 1/2 MDFST 2 3/4 MDFSM 2 3/4 MDFSB 2 3/4
Logo Imprint Your company’s logo laser-burned into the inside of the 5/8” beech dovetail drawer box. Burn area is approximately 2 ½” T x 4” W. E-mail a vector (.eps) or JPEG image (.jpg) of the logo to wendy@customcupboards.com. A sample of the logo will be sent for approval. Custom Cupboards logo can be used for the same price by specifying in the notes on the order. Logos come in all standard top drawers on base & vanity cabinets (5” openings).
M
Modified Drawer Fronts
Use on deep drawers to modify any five piece drawer front that comes standard with narrow rails into wider 2 ¼” or 3 1/2” rails. Makes larger drawer fronts more closely resemble a wide stile & rail door for a more consistent look. This modification will only alter the width of the rails on that particular drawer front. Used in conjunction with DFSB & DFSM or 5-piece drawer front in header. MDFST only works on B__D2 & Window Seat cabinets. When using this modification the minimum door sizes apply.
MFD
Multi-Front Drawer
M
Use multiple drawer fronts to cover one drawer box. Additional surcharges will apply to optional drawer fronts. Available on the top drawer of a Base or Wall Drawer cabinet only
Example of entry adding 4 additional fronts for a total of 5
NDB
No Drawer Box
M
Use this modification to delete the drawer box from a drawer stack cabinet.
NDF
No Drawer Front
M
Use this modification to delete the drawer front from a drawer stack cabinet.
DPS
Drawer Peg System
AL
Can be used in middle and bottom drawers only of Base Height D3 cabinets that are 36” wide or less. Comes with 12 pegs. Sent loose, must be cut down on site.
SCDR
Scooped Drawer M
SCDRC
Shallow Drawer Box. Recommended for use with drop in cook tops. The drawer box is reduced to 2 ½” tall, drawer opening remains the same. Check specifications of drop in when ordering to ensure that the drawer will function properly. Cannot be less than 2 ½”.
For scoop taller than 2 1/2”
DF Drwr box
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-27-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Drawer Accessories & Modifications SPD
Spice Drawer M Plastic. Fits Any size drawer in width. Minimum 5” tall opening.
SPDW
Wood Spice Drawer M ¾” solid beech, fits base cabinet drawers. Minimum 5” tall opening.
_____SD
Super Drawer Drawer box stretches the entire width of cabinet. Available on 30”-36” wide base & vanity cabinets. To order cabinets with super drawers, add “SD” to the nomenclature. (Ex: B36SD)
TDF
Top Drawer False M Used to eliminate the top drawer box of a cabinet. For use with any cabinet with a drawer at the top.
TOP OPENING
Top Drawer Opening M Used to modify the opening height of the top drawer of a base or vanity cabinet.
TUFEBM
Tandem Undermount Full Extension Blumotion Guides M Used as a modification to a cabinet when adding Blumotion guides to select drawers. Order as DGTUFEBM__ if ordering loose.
UT
Plastic Utility Tray M White plastic tray. Fits B18-B24. Available 13 3/8”, 16 3/8”, and 21 3/8” wide. Can be trimmed 2 1/4”. When using plastic cutlery trays with super drawer cabinets, a DRWRDVDR must be ordered.
UTW
Wood Utility Tray M Wood tray. Sized to fit drawer. Constructed with 3/8” solid beech. Tray openings are approximately 4” wide.
WD DRWR QTY
Wall w/ Drawer Quantity M Used only on a Wall w/ Drawer cabinet to state total number of drawers.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-28-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Face Frames FF
Faceframe
AL
Custom configurations loose faceframe (no doors). Specify frame openings. A detailed drawing must accompany the order. EDGE DETAIL can be added as a modification. Back of frame is NOT finished.
FF&D
Faceframe & Door(s)
AL
Custom configuration loose FF&D. Must add any applicable styling charges (style, hinge, colors, etc.) A detailed drawing must accompany the order. Back of frame is NOT finished.
FFDO
Loose Faceframe & Door - Standard Cabinet
M
To order a loose faceframe and door for a standard cabinet; enter the cabinet and add FFDO as a modification. Enter the least expensive cabinet (SB30 rather than a B30 or a 12” deep Broom cabinet w/o shelves rather than a 24” broom w/ shelves).
FF ADD
Add Faceframe or Faceframe & Door(s) to Cabinet Side or Back M Use this to add a frame with a fixed, working or no door to the end or back of a cabinet. This option makes the cabinet custom. The cabinet must be entered as a CUSTOM______, then add FF ADD or FF&D ADD as a modification. A detailed drawing must accompany the order. If applying to an angled faceframe, add an ANGLE modification as well.
Open faceframe
FF&D ADD Faceframe with fixed or working doors
When ordering a wall or base diagonal cabinet with a faceframe on one of the back sides, please specify which side receives the faceframe and the state the hinge direction. When ordering peninsula cabinets that are not currently present in our price book enter the same as adding to a cabinet side.
Example of how to enter a FF&D added to the cabinet side or back
Rail Material
AL
RAIL1
1” Wide FF Rail
RAIL1.5
1 ½” Wide FF Rail
RAIL2
2” Wide FF Rail
RAIL2.5
2 ½” Wide FF Rail
RAIL3
3” Wide FF Rail
RAIL3.5
3 ½” Wide FF Rail
RAIL4
4” Wide FF Rail
RAIL6
6” Wide FF Rail
RF
Reface Material
Face and Two long edges are finished as "standard", if something else is needed, call your Account Manger for pricing.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-29-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Fillers • • •
AL
Fillers are ¾” solid wood finished on the face, both edges, & one end unless specified. Available in 3” & 6” widths. Angled Fillers are ¾” solid wood, 4 ¼” across face with 45˚ angle on sides. Fills a 3” x 3” clip. Fluting and other decorative details can be added. See Decorative Details featured in this section of the catalog.
Fillers
Angled Fillers
F330
3” x 30”
FA330(L/R)
3” x 30”
F630
6” x 30”
FA630(L/R)
6” x 30”
TWF336
3” x 36”
TWFA336(L/R)
3” x 36”
TWF342
3” x 42”
TWFA342(L/R)
3” x 42”
TWF636
6” x 36”
TWFA636(L/R)
6” x 36”
TWF642
6” x 42”
TWFA642(L/R)
6” x 42”
TF3
3” x 84”
TFA3(L/R)
3” x 84”
TF6
6” x 84”
TFA6(L/R)
3” x 96”
TFT3
3” x 96”
TFTA3(L/R)
3” x 96”
TFT6
6” x 96”
TFTA6(L/R)
6” x 96”
TFT3X120
3” x 120”
TFT6X120
6” x 120”
FILLERS W/ OVERLAYS 3/4” fillers with 3/4” matching wood overlay edged to match doors. Available in 3” & 6” widths. Choose from Standard Overlay featuring 1/4" reveals on each side and 1 1/8" reveal top & bottom; Full Overlay featuring 1/4" reveals on each side, 3/4" reveal at top & 1/4" reveal at bottom; Designer Overlay featuring 3/16" reveals on each side, choice of 1/4" or 3/4" reveal at top & 1/4" reveal at bottom. The 4 1/2" toe space must be added to the bottom reveal on base, tall & vanity overlays. A 5-pc. drawer front charge will be added to the order if selected on the Order Info tab of the pricing program. When using the #50100 or #50200 doors the overlay fillers will be solid wood, therefore, they will not have edgebanding. Overlay filler will feature the matching door edge except in cases where size is an issue; the complementary solid stock edge may then be substituted. See the Door edge/CTE-2/SS edge details chart shown under Solid Stock featured in this section of the catalog. Any loose solid stock on the order with edge detailing may receive a slightly different edge detail if ordered unless specifically noted to use the matching door edge. Standard Overlay
Designer Overlay
Filler dimensions (overlay size varies)
SOVF3
SOTF384
DOVF3
3” x 31 ¼”
DOTF684
6” x 84”
SOVF6
SOTF684
DOVF6
6” x 31 ¼”
DOTF396
3” x 96”
SOBF3
SOTF396
DOBF3
3” x 34 ½”
DOTF696
6” x 96”
SOBF6
SOTF696
DOBF6
6” x 34 ½”
DOTF6120
3” x 120”
SOWF330
SOTF3120
DOWF330
3” x 30”
DOTF6120
3” x 120”
SOWF630
SOTF6120
DOWF630
6” x 30”
SOWF336
DOWF336
3” x 36”
SOWF636
DOWF636
6” x 36”
SOWF342
DOWF342
3” x 42”
SOWF642
DOWF642
6” x 42”
SOWF348
DOTF384
3” x 84”
SOWF648
DOWF348
3" x 48"
SOWF354
DOWF648
6" x 48"
SOWF654
DOWF354
3" x 54"
SOWF360
DOWF654
6" x 54"
DOWF360
3" x 60"
DOWF660
6" x 60"
SOWF660 AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-30-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Fillers
AL
Base Corner Fillers
BCF90
90 ̊ & 135 ̊ Base Corner Fillers
BCF135
3” x 3” x 34 1/2”. Base corner fillers are 3/4” fillers, finished on all sides. Used on a corner where added space is needed for clearance. Recessed toe kick is included.
DOBCF9030
90 ̊ & 135 ̊ Full Overlay Base Corner Filler
DOBCF13530
3” x 3” x 34 1/2”. Full overlay base corner fillers are 3/4” solid wood with a matching 3/4” solid wood overlay with a door edge and finished on all sides. Used in a corner where added space is needed for clearance. Recessed toe kick is included. The overlay has a 3/4” reveal at the top, 1/4” on the bottom, & 1/4” on each side. See notes on Fillers w/ Overlays on the previous page for exceptions on edge detail. 90 ̊ & 135 ̊ Designer Overlay Base Corner Filler 3” x 3” x 34 1/2”. Designer overlay base corner fillers are 3/4” solid wood with a matching 3/4” solid wood overlay with a door edge and finished on all sides. Used in a corner where added space is needed for clearance. Recessed toe kick is included. The overlay has a choice of 1/4" or 3/4” reveal at the top, 1/4” on the bottom, & 3/16” on each side. See notes on Fillers w/ Overlays on the previous page for exceptions on edge detail.
Base & Wall Filler Pull-Out Maple construction; adjustable shelves. On site assembly and installation required. Must have a cabinet or a Box or Panel Filler on both sides for installation. A 2 7/8” or 5 7/8” wide piece of solid stock must be ordered to attach to the front of the hardware (will be added during entry if missing). This piece will bring the unit flush with the face frame of the adjacent cabinets. A decorative overlay filler can be ordered separately and attached on site. The decorative overlay will be flush with adjacent doors. Base unit works beside a 24” deep base cabinet Wall unit works beside a 12” deep wall cabinet The 3” unit has approximately 2 1/4” space between rails; the 6” unit has approximately 5 1/4” space between rails.
BFPO3 BFPO6 WFPO330 WFPO336 WFPO342 WFPO630 WFPO636 WFPO642
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-31-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Finished Ends, Interiors, Tops & Bottoms
AI AL M
Select Right, Left, Both or leave blank in the finished ends field of the line item
Finished Ends 1/4” reveal where the side meets the faceframe. Clear alder finished ends may have small closed knots.
FB LEFT
Finish Back Left Use to finish the back left of a Corner Cabinet
FB RIGHT
Finish Back Right Use to finish the back right of a Corner Cabinet
FLE-(L/R)
Flush Ends You must also charge for a finished end.
ESB(L/R)
Extended Sides Back Used to extend the cabinet side back, up to 6”. Only the cabinet side is extended; the depth of the rest of cabinet is not increased.
Back of cab
TOPVIEW
FBTM 15/16
FBTMF
Raised Panel Ends (RPE’s) will be centered on full-depth of side including extension. For no charge you can specify for RPE to be centered on original cabinet depth only; extension will be additional stile.
Finished Bottom - Inset Inset with same wood species as the faceframe. This is automatic on all finished interior cabinets. Available on Wall cabinets only.
Finished Bottom - Flush Flush with same wood species as the faceframe. Available on Wall cabinets only. Plywood edges of the sides will be visible from bottom of cabinet.
FFT
Flush Finished Top Flush, finished top of cabinet. Available on a wall cabinets only.
FI
Finished Interior Interior is finished the same as the exterior. Interior sides & back receive little to no distressing. Shelves receive minimal distressing.
FB
Finish Back 3/4” back paneling. On FB over 48” wide add a spline charge. Cabinet will keep 1/4” reveals unless ordering FLE. Left & Right edges are edgebanded. Does not change depth of cabinet. Front & back widths will match (Ex. If you order an ear on the front, there will be an ear on the back on the same side when viewing the cabinet from the front.)
SEAL BOTH
Seal both sides of cabinet For use on cabinets set next to a dishwasher or sink cabinet. Ends are sealed only, not finished.
SEAL LEFT
Seal left side of cabinet only For use on cabinets set next to a dishwasher or sink cabinet. Ends are sealed only, not finished.
SEAL RIGHT
Seal right side of cabinet only For use on cabinets set next to a dishwasher or sink cabinet. Ends are sealed only, not finished.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-32-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Finishing Outsourced Product
AL
The pricing structure for finishing outsourced supplied products includes all onlays, corbels, turns, 8’ sticks of moldings, etc. These items will not be subject to an additional Finish Upcharge. If you have a “Build-A-Post”, we will finish all pieces for one charge if all the pieces are here at the time of finish. Larger items will need to be quoted individually by your CSR. These items MUST be received by your CSR before your order can be confirmed and scheduled for production. Your ship window will move out until they are received. Our finishes are the end result of a multi-step process that INCLUDES sanding. Custom Cupboards is not responsible for sanding an outsourced product, therefore, mill marks or poor sanding on non-detailed sides will most likely be present. Most often, the outsourced products we receive are of such intricate detail th at sanding the item(s) is out of the question. Therefore, the resulting finish may be quite different than the sample door or the rest of the kitchen. Often times the grade of wood, or even the species of the wood is different than the species we are using for the rest of the job. In such a case, we simply apply the process for that color to the piece – and the result is what it is. We make no effort to color match the outsourced items to the rest of the job. We simply could not manage such a task. Custom Cupboards is only responsible for replacement of the piece if we damage the physical product or overtly finish the product poorly or the wrong color. Wrong color, meaning an obvious mis-selection of product during the painting process, NOT an opinion that the color is not a match. Custom Cupboards will finish all sides of an outsourced product that have any type of decorative carving. If you desire to have the other sides of an outsourced product finished (top, bottom, or back(s) finished entirely) please specify and call for a quote please. FINISH 0%
282 for a no upcharge finish
KNOB 0%
35 for a no upcharge finish
FINISH 10%
353 for up to 10% finish charge
KNOB 10%
44 for up to 10% finish charge
FINISH 20%
423 for 11-20% finish charge
KNOB 20%
53 for 11-20% finish charge
FINISH 30%
494 for 21-30% finish charge
KNOB 30%
62 for 21-30% finish charge
FINISH 40% 564 for 31-40% finish charge
KNOB 40%
70 for 31-40% finish charge
FINISH 50%
635 for 41-50% finish charge
KNOB 50%
79 for 41-50% finish charge
FINISH 60%
705 for 51-up% finish charge
KNOB 60%
88 for 51-up% finish charge
Modified Openings
M
BBROH
Opening Height - Bottom Broom Opening Used to change the bottom opening height on a broom cabinet. The bottom opening height must be provided. See Tall section.
BCDRTF
Bookcase Door Rail to Floor Used to modify the door opening height of a bookcase with doors. Measurement is from the floor to the top of the fixed shelf. See Custom section.
CWC MODIFY
Combination Wall Cabinet Modify Used to modify the top door opening height on a Combination Wall cabinet.
WBO MODIFY
Wall Bottom Open Modify Used to modify the bottom opening height on the Wall Bottom Open cabinet.
WTO MODIFY
Wall Top Open Modify Used to modify the top opening height on the Wall Top Open cabinet.
WC HEIGHT
Wall Cubby Height Used to modify the cubby opening height on the Wall with Cubbies cabinet.
BTM OPENING
Bottom Opening Used to modify the bottom drawer opening on a base invert.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-33-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Moldings •• •• •• •• ••
AL
Trim moldings must be ordered in 8 foot increments. Moldings will be shipped in 8’ or 10’ sections, with a 12% waste factor or a minimum of 84” usable in a 96” piece. Lengths requested over 8’ are subject to availability and will include a surcharge. Not to exceed 10'. Moldings are priced per lineal foot (plf). One cube per 8’ stick will be charged for freight. May be available with a molding cleat, shipped loose, by adding an “F” to the front of the nomenclature (FCR3).
2”
Example of a crown molding with a cleat: Cleat shipped loose. Shown on CR4, but available on all crowns.
Counter Top Edging
CTE1
Counter Top Edging 1 .75 x 1.5 1 edge routed to complement the door edge (#10 edge shown)
0.750 1.500 CTE2
Counter Top Edging 2 .75 x 1.5 2 edges routed to complement the door edge (#10 edge shown)
0.750 1.500 CTE3
Counter Top Edging 3 .75 x 1.5
0.750 1.500
CTE4 0.750
Counter Top Edging 4 .75 x 1.5 3/4 radius
1.500
Crown Moldings
CR1
1.188
Wi t h C l e a t
FCR1
1.375
0.625
1 3/4” 1.188 x 1.375 1 3/4” across diagonal
Crown
1.827
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-34-
M=Modification
Mold
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Crown Moldings
CR2
2 1/4” Crown Mold 1.635 x 1.439 2 1/4” across diagonal
1.439
Wi t h C l e a t
FCR2
0.688
1.635
CR3
3 1/4” Crown Mold 2.688 x 2.125 3 1/4” across diagonal
2.125
Wi t h C l e a t
FCR3
2.688
0.750
CR4
3 1/2” Crown Mold 2.757 x 2.254 3 1/2” across diagonal Notched to accept BEAD, ROPE, or DENTIL
2.254
Wi t h C l e a t
FCR4
0.750
2.757
CR5
4 1/2” Crown Mold 3.632 x 2.877 4 1/2” across diagonal Notched to accept BEAD, ROPE, or DENTIL
2.877
Wi t h C l e a t
FCR5
0.750
3.632
SCR1
1 3/4” Smooth Crown Mold 1.25 x 1.25 1 3/4” across diagonal
1.25
With Cleat
FSCR1
1.75
SCR2
2 1/4” Smooth Crown Mold 1.5625 x 1.5625 2 1/4” across diagonal
1.5625
Wi t h C l e a t
FSCR2
2.25
SCR3
2.3125 .355
Wi t h C l e a t
FSCR3
3.25
.76
CMM
Mission Crown Mold
2.210
2.210 x 2.821 9' maximum lengths available.
Wi t h C l e a t
FCMM
3 1/4” Smooth Crown Mold 2.3125 x 2.3125 3 1/4” across diagonal
2.821 1.000
M-1400
2.877”
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1400
3.632”
M-1304
2.502
4 1/2” Crown Mold 3.632 x 2.877 4 1/2” across diagonal Modified CR5 notched 3/4" x 3/4" to accept CAP1 & 2, BS, 1/4ROUND .75, or ROPE3/4, M-1304 Crown Mold 2.503 x 2.502
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1304
2.503 0.750
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-35-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Crown Moldings
M-1402 Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1402
3.035
M-1402 Crown Mold 3.379 x 3.035
2.753
Traditional Crown Mold
3.379 0.750
CMT
3.734 x 2.753
Wi t h C l e a t
0.688
3.734
FCMT
M-1404
M-1404 Crown Mold 3.736 x 2.155
2.155
0.750
Wi t h C l e a t
3.736
FM-1404 M-1405
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1405
3.261
0.750
M-1406 Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1406
M-1405 Crown Mold 3.261 x 3.456
3.456
2.664 0.750
M-1406 Crown Mold 3.629 x 2.664
3.629
M-1501
M-1501 Crown Mold 4.250 x 3.196
3.196
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1501
4.250
0.687
CMDB
Double Bead Crown Molding
3.029
4.355 x 3.029
Wi t h C l e a t
FCMDB
4.355
1.000
M-1503
M-1503 Crown Mold 4.079 x 3.5
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1503 M-1601
M-1601 Crown Mold 4.849 x 3.561
3.561
1.500
Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1601
4.849
M-1602 Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1602
5.000
M-1701 Wi t h C l e a t
FM-1701
0.750
5.140 0.750
M-1701 Crown Mold 5.281 x 5.140
5.281
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
M-1602 Crown Mold 5 x 4.043
4.043
AL=Accessory Loose
-36-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Moldings
FO
Furniture Base
3.0
0.75
.75 x 3 Edge detail complements your door edge
M-2307
3.5
0.75
M-2307 Base Mold .75 x 3.5
M-2309 3.5
0.625
M-2309 Base Mold .625 x 3.5
M-2310 Base Mold .562 x 3.312
0.562
3.312
M-2310
B COL 0.562
3.25
Base Colonial .562 x 3.25
FO5
4� Furniture Base
4.25 4.75
0.75
.75 x 4.25 Edge detail complements your door edge
FBD5 0.562
Decorative Furniture Base 4.5 5
.562 x 5
FBSB 0.625
Single Bead Furniture Base 4.0
.625 x 4
M-2408 Base Mold .75 x 4.75
4.75
0.75
M-2408
M-2409 4.5
0.625
M-2409 Base Mold .625 x 4.5
M-2501 Base Mold .75 X 5
5.0
0.75
M-2501
M-2502 Base Mold .75 X 5.5
5.5
0.75
M-2502
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-37-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Base Moldings
FBLB
Large Bead Furn. Base .75 X 7.25 0.75
7.125
M-2801
Furniture Base 0.75
.75 x 8.75
8.75
Detail Molding
1/4ROUND .75
Quarter Round 0.75
BBM
.75 x .75 Beadboard Mold
3 1/4
BBM 3OC
3/8
.375 x 3 (3 1/8” w/ tongue)
Beadboard Mold 3" on Center 3 1/8 3.0 3/8” 0.375
BM
.375 x 3 (3 1/8” w/ tongue)
Batton Mold .25 x .75 4’ lengths available
BS
Base Shoe 0.5
.5 x .75 0.75
BEAD
Bead Mold
0.25
.25 x .5 Fits in CR4 & CR5
0.5
CM
Cove Mold
0.313
.75 x .875
0.75 0.875
DCM
Designer Corner Mold 0.75
0.225
DM
.75 x .875
Dental Mold .5 x .5 Fits in CR4 & CR5
.5 .5
ICDM
0.625
ICM
0.875
0.625
Inside Corner Designer Mold .625 x .625
Inside Corner Mold 0.75
.75 x .875 0.875
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-38-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Detail Molding
LVM
Light Valance Mold
Reveal 1/81/16 Reveal
.75 x 1.5 with .75 x .75 Cleat Edge complements door edge
1 1/2
3/4
OSC
Outside Corner Mold .75 x .875 4’ lengths available
0.75 0.499
0.25
OSC1
1” Outside Corner Mold 1x1
1.000 0.750
0.25
OSC1 1/4
1 1/4” Outside Corner Mold 1.25 x 1.25
1.250
1.000
0.25
OSC135
135 ̊ Outside Corner Mold 0.250
0.586
.25 thick x .876 across diagonal
0.876
ROPE
Rope Mold .25 x .5 Fits inside CR4 & CR5
ROPE 3/4
3/4” Rope Mold .375 x .75
SK
.25
.375
Skin Mold .250
.375 x .79
.790
SM
Scribe Mold .25 x .75 4’ lengths available
SM2
Scribe Mold .25 x 1.5 4’ lengths available
TOE4.5 4 1/2
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Toe Board .25 x 4 1/2 x 96 This item priced by the 8’ length Entered “per piece”
AL=Accessory Loose
-39-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Detail Molding
UCM
Under Cabinet Mold
0.75 0.125
1.062 x 1.438
1.062
1.438
UCM2
Under Cabinet Mold #2 .75
.75 x 1.625
1.625
UCM3
Under Cabinet Mold #3 1.0
1.5 x 1
.75 1.5
CAP1
Counter Top Edge CAP1 .375 x .75 Will not change the depth of the shelf. BC Shelf will be 3/8” shorter than the standard shelf using CTE. This style of edging does not provide the extra support that regular CTE provides. Not recommended on shelves more than 24” wide. NO WARRANTY on shelves more than 24” wide.
.375 .75
CAP2
Counter Top Edge CAP2 .375 x .75 Will not change the depth of the shelf. BC Shelf will be 3/8” shorter than the standard shelf using CTE. This style of edging does not provide the extra support that regular CTE provides. Not recommended on shelves more than 24” wide. NO WARRANTY on shelves more than 24” wide.
.375 .75
M-5123
M-5123 Detail Mold 1 x .625
.625 1.0
M-5124
.09 .50
M-5124 Detail Mold 1 x .5
1.0
M-5125
M-5125 Detail Mold 1.938 x .69
.69 1.938
M-5126
M-5126 Detail Mold 1.75 x .5
.50 1.75
M-5127 .375
M-5127 Detail Mold 1.125 x .375
1.125
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-40-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Detail Molding
M-5128
M-5128 Detail Mold 1.813 x .5
.50 1.813
M-5304
M-5304 Detail Mold .688 x 3
.688 3.0
WC COL
Colonial Window Casing .688 x 2.25 2.25
.688
WS COL
Colonial Window Stop .5 x 1.5 1.5 .50
M-2202
M-2202 Mold .75 x 2.375 2.375
.75
WL
Window Stool Ledge .75 2.5
M-5203
M-5203 Detail Mold .975 x 2 .975 2.0
M-5401 .75
M-5401 Detail Mold .75 x 4
4.0
M-5301 2.25
M-5301 Detail Mold 2.25 x 3
3.0
CSM1
Crown Starter Molding 1 3
3x3 Edge detail matches door edge profile 3
CSM2
Crown Starter Molding 2 6x3
6
3
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-41-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Detail Molding
AM1 LOOSE
Applied Molding 1 Shipped Loose .5 x .25
AM2 SP LOOSE
AM1
1/2" wide X 1/4" tall. All wood species available. $90 upcharge.
Applied Molding 2 Special Shipped Loose No notch .625 x .4375
AM3 LOOSE
Applied Molding 3 Shipped Loose 1.0625 x .625
AM7 LOOSE
AM3
Applied Molding 7 Shipped Loose
1-1/16" wide X 5/8" tall. All wood species available. $90 upcharge.
.15625 x .125
AM7
5/32" wide X 1/8" tall. Available in soft maple only. $90 upcharge.
Pilasters Pilasters are ¾” wide x 2” deep solid wood with a decorative edge detail on one ¾” edge. Pilasters are available precut in five sizes. Ideal for placement between two full or designer overlay cabinets to create an inset look. Specify edge detail choice at the end of the nomenclature. Ex. PIL 30.5A
PIL30.5__
3 0 1 /2 ” Ta l l
A
B
PIL36__
3/4"
3 6 ” Ta l l
PIL42__
C
D
2" “B” Shown Here
4 2 ” Ta l l
PIL84__
8 4 ” Ta l l
PIL96__
E
F
ONLY AVAILABLE IN 3/4” THICK MATERIAL
G
9 6 ” Ta l l
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-42-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Solid Stock If over 6” wide, SS cannot be taller than 96”. Specified thickness of solid wood with optional detailing. Face, one end, & both edges are finished unless otherwise specified.
SS AL
3/4” Thick Solid Stock
SS1.5 + SS BUILD UP AL
Up To 1 1/2” Thick Solid Stock
SS2.25 + SS BUILD UP AL SS BUILD UP SS DETAIL
Over 1 1/2 up to 2 1/4 Thick
M
Additional charge for Solid Stock over 3/4” thick
Solid Stock Detailing M Must specify placement of detailing. Solid stock edging will not be identical to the door edges, but will complement them. The reasons for this are: • The door shapers are designed to remove 1/16” with each pass. Removing this much material will leave the solid stock undersized. • The width and detail of the door edges will often not fit on smaller solid stock pieces. • The solid stock is done with routers of which matching router bits are often not available, therefore, we choose a design and detail that will fit on the smaller pieces that will complement the edging on the doors. If you have a piece of solid stock that needs a door edge on it, specifically note that this piece must match the door edge and make certain that the size has been adjusted to compensate for the 1/16” material removal that will occur per detail. Size restrictions apply, call your Account Manager for approval.
SS FINISHALL Standard finish is face, one end, both sides - must add SS FINISHALL to get any other finish.
DOOR EDGE
CTE-2
SS DETAIL
DOOR EDGE
10
11*
12*
13
14*
15
35
60
65
66
67
70
CTE-2
SS DETAIL
* Door edge #11 only available on #99500 door * Door edge #12 only available on #99000 door * Door edge #14 only available on #98400 door
A THIC
KNE SS
B
D
E END E
SID
CE FA END
F
H E
SID
C
BAC
K
G
L
W
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-43-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Paneling •• •• •• •• •• ••
AL
Finished paneling. (Material used is dependant on wood/interior choice) Finished on one side only. The largest available size in 1/4” & 1/2” is 48” wide x 96” long. The largest available size in 3/4” is 48” wide x 120” long. The grain always runs with the 2nd dimension. No dimension changes allowed. If size will vary from what we’ve offered, you need to order PANEL ¼. 1/4” LOOSE END SKINS
WES1230
11 1/4” W X 30” L
TES1296
WES1233
11 1/4” W X 33” L
TES2484
23 1/4” W X 84” L
WES1236
11 1/4” W X 36” L
TES2490
23 1/4” W X 90” L
WES1239
11 1/4” W X 39” L
TES2496
23 1/4” W X 96” L
WES1242
11 1/4” W X 42” L
VES1829
17 1/4” W X 28 1/2” L
BES2435
23 1/4” W X 34 1/2” L
VES2129
20 1/4” W X 28 1/2” L
BVES2135
20 1/4” W X 34 1/2” L
VES1832
17 1/4” W X 31 1/4” L
TES1284
11 1/4” W X 84” L
VES2132
20 1/4” W X 31 1/4” L
TES1290
11 1/4” W X 90” L
PAN1230
12” W X 30” L
PAN4835
48” W X 35” L
PAN2430
24” W X 30” L
PAN4848
48” W X 48” L
PAN4830
48” W X 30” L
PAN4896
48” W X 96” L
PAN2435
24” W X 35” L
PAN9648
96” W X 48” L Crossgrain panel sold in full sheets only. Rustic & Knotty NA.
11 1/4” W X 96” L
PRECUT 1/4” PANELS
CUSTOM SIZED PANELS MEASURING – Dimensions are WIDTH x LENGTH. Grain will ALWAYS run with the length (2nd dimension). Will receive all distressings except those applied to edges: #6, #7, #9, & #10
PANEL 1/4
Maximum size 48”W x 96”L Thickness will vary slightly between species, most being just under 7/32”.
PANEL 1/2
Maximum size 48”W x 96”L
PANEL 3/4
Maximum size without spline is 48”W x 96”L. ¾” Thick panels over 48” wide require a SPLINE charge
PANEL3/4 T
Maximum size 48”W x 120”L
PANEL 1/4NTO
Maximum 48” x 96” Maple print paper interior on one side, unfinished raw wood on the other.
PANEL 1/2NTB
Maximum 48” x 96” Maple print paper interior on both sides
PANEL 1/2NTO
Maximum 48” x 96” Maple print paper interior on one side, unfinished raw wood on the other.
PANEL 3/4NTB
Maximum 48” x 96” Maple print paper interior on both sides
EB
Edge banding Applied to ½” or ¾” paneling. Specify to match interior or exterior if loose. NA in Knotty Alder
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-44-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Paneling PECPLY__
Panelized Plywood End Treatment AL 3/4” plywood with pilaster attached to end. Order overall panel size.
Example of entry
A B C D E
See more accurate details in pilaster sub-section under the molding section.
F G
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-45-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
POS Options
AI
Pull-Out Shelves are adjustable on 1 ¼” spacing, 3” tall sides. No warranty on POS for cabinets over 36” wide. The adjustable shelf will be deleted on base cabinets if ordering multiple POS. To keep the shelff add SHELF W/POS as a modification to the cabinet. When ordering more than one POS on a base, the bottom POS will be mounted to the floor of the cabinet. When ordering a single POS in a base or vanity cabinet, the pull-out will be mounted to the floor of the cabinet and you will also receive a 1/2 depth adjustable shelf. Pull-outs in non-butt door cabinets will require a Center Partition. Weight limit is 75 lbs. dynamic (moving in & out) 100 lbs. static (standing still)
5/8” Solid Beech Dovetail Pull-Out Shelves with choice of undermount guides. Finished Interior POS to match the exterior of the cabinet will be the same wood species as the cabinet box.
POS
5/8” Natural Beech Dovetail Solo Undermount.
POS FI
5/8” Dovetail Solo Undermount finished to match exterior.
POSTUFEBM
5/8” Natural Beech Dovetail Tandem Blumotion.
POSTUFEBM FI
5/8” Dovetail Tandem Blumotion finished to match exterior.
5/8” Birch Dovetail Pull-Out Shelf with choice of undermount guides.
POSSTND
5/8” Birch Dovetail Solo Undermount.
POS STND BM
5/8” Birch Dovetail Tandem Blumotion.
Flat Pull-Out Shelf Options
FLAT POSBM
Flat POS with Blumotion guides. 1 ¼” tall FLAT POS
FLATPOSBM FI
Flat POS with Blumotion guides, finished to match exterior. 1 ¼” tall
These options can be added as a modification to your cabinet.
POSH M
Pull-Out Shelf Height Specify Height. Increase height of sides to a maximum of 8” on Beech Dovetail. In Birch, you can increase to the following sizes: 4”, 6”, 8” only.
POS SCOOP M
Pull -Out Shelf Scoop Scoop is 4” W x 1” T. Only available on 5/8” Solid Beech Dovetail.
POS DEPTH 24 M
For a 27" or deeper cabinet
POS DEPTH 27 M
For a 30" or deeper cabinet
POS DEPTH 30 M
For a 33" or deeper cabinet
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Our standard POS depth stops at 21" deep cabinet, the POS do not increase when a CD change depth is added to the cabinet. If you want deeper POS on those deeper cabinets you must add one of the following mods. One charge per POS.
AL=Accessory Loose
-46-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Rail & Stile Modifications
M
Extended Ears Used to extend the stile left or right. This modification adds to the width of the faceframe.
EL or ER
C u s to m S i ze L e f t o r R i g h t
EL1.5 or ER1.5
1 1 /2 ” L e f t o r R i g h t
EL3 or ER3
3” Left or Right
Extended Rails Used to extend the top or bottom rail. This modification adds height to the faceframe. An ETR1.5 increases the standard 1 ½” wide rails to 3” wide and a 3” ETR3 increases the overall rail size to 4 ½” side. The same applies to extended bottom rails. Finished ends are automatically extended in conjunction with Extended Top or Bottom Rails. To extend bottom rail & add valance, see valances.
ETR
ETR3
C u s to m S i ze E x te n d To p R a i l
3
ETR1.5
E x te n d To p R a i l 1 1 /2 ”
Side View
ETR3 EBR EBR1.5
E x te n d To p R a i l 3 ”
C u s to m S i ze E x te n d B o t to m R a i l
E x te n d B o t to m R a i l 1 1 /2 ”
EBR3
3
EBR3
E x te n d B o t to m R a i l 3 ”
Wide Stiles Wide stile modification increases the width of the stile but not the width of the faceframe. Opening will be reduced. Use to accommodate fluting, appliqués, rosettes, etc. without reducing the amount of interior cabinet space. If pull out shelves are being used in the cabinet, wide stile partitions will need to be added. When ordering custom sized wide stiles, state the amount of increase and the overall size of the stile.
WS(L/R)C
C u s to m S i ze Wi d e S t i l e s
WS(L/R)
4 1 /2 ” Wi d e S t i l e s
DRILL STILE
Drill Stile Drill center stile for shelves.
NMS
No Middle Stile This modification will delete the middle stile of the cabinet.
STFL
Stile to Floor Left This modification will end the left stile only of a base or tall cabinet to the floor.
STFR
Stile to Floor Right This modification will end the right stile only of a base or tall cabinet to the floor.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-47-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Raised Panels Loose Raised Panels Loose raised panels for base, wall, or tall applications. Available with most door styles except mitered or slab. Order the exact size needed. 48” W x 105” H maximum size on RPBT, 105"W x 48" H max size on RPBB & RPBW. Anything larger must be approved before ordering. When ordering an arched door style, the center stiles will run all the way up. The maximum width of a single panel is 30" panel width.
RPBB AL
Base or Vanity
RPBW AL
Wall
RPBT AL
Tall
MODIFY RP M
Modify Raised Panel Add as a modification to a loose raised panel or integrated raised panel end to change the rail and/ or stile size or number of door panels.
PECRP_ M
Pilaster Edge Detail on Loose Raised Panels Order RPB’s in the overall size needed then add PECRP_ as a modification. Chosen edge treatment will be routed directly on to specified edge (left, right, or both). Edge selections are shown in the Molding section under Pilasters.
Base or Vanity
Wall
Tall
6 1/2”
4”
6 1/2”
4”
“4 - 5”
4”
Bottom Rail Top Rail Stiles
To match door style
Middle Rail
To match door style
Middle Stile
To match door style
# of Door Panels
Add one panel for every 24” in width & 42” in height (up to 24” W & 42” H = 1 panel), over 84” has 3 panels.
Raised Panel Ends M
NOT AVAILABLE IN MITERED OR SLAB DOOR STYLES Integrated into the cabinet side or back. This application does not increase the width or depth of the cabinet. Cabinet end will be finished automatically with this modification. On a cabinet with a recessed toe kick the raised panel end will be notched for toe space. FTK (flush toe kick) or STF (stile to floor) can be added as a modification to the cabinet to avoid this.
RPB
Back
RPEB L or R
Base
RPEB12 L or R
Bases 12” Deep or les
RPEV L or R
Va n i t y 6 1/2
RPEW L or R
Wa l l s u p to, b u t n o t 4 8 ” t a l l
RPETW L or R
Ta l l Wa l l s 4 8 ” - 8 4 ”
RPET L or R
Ta l l s 8 4 ” a n d ove r 6 1/2
RPET12 L or R
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Ta l l s 8 4 ” a n d ove r, 1 2 ” o r less deep AL=Accessory Loose
-48-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Replacement & Loose Parts
AL
Additional items being added on a regular basis. Call your CSR for more details.
BCSWOOD SS
Loose Wood Blind Corner Swing-Out Hardware Shipped Loose
BUMPER PAD
Bumper Pads 132 door bumpers per sheet
CONCEALED SS
Standard Overlay Concealed Hinge Shipped Loose
concealed170
Concealed 170º Hinge Shipped Loose
CR SS
Can Rack Specify cabinet size. Shipped Loose.
DO HINGE SS
Designer Overlay Concealed Hinge Shipped Loose
D STAY #1 SS
Door Stay (set) Shipped Loose
D STAY #2 SS DRWRDVDR SS
Drawer Divider 5/8” beech dividers. Shipped loose. Divider is 3 1/4” tall. Maximum length is 19 5/8”
DTCT WOOD SS
Double tier cutlery tray wood Specify cabinet size. Shipped Loose.
GBH SS
Grocery Bag Holder Loose Unit is made of stainless steel and impact resistant plastic; 6 5/8” W x 3 5/8” D x 15 5/8” T. Holds up to 30 normal size plastic grocery bags. Can be mounted to door, adjustable shelf or side of cabinet.
HTKSS SS
Hidden Toe Kick Step Stool Loose This unit is comprised of a steel 2-step stool covered with non slip rubber treads and plastic non slip feet. For use in base cabinets 21” & up; depth must remain 24”. Toe kick space should be built out to form a 17” W cavity to house the step stool. In the collapsed position unit is 3 3/4” tall, leaving only a 3/4” clearance to slide in; this will be an issue with flooring laid after cabinet installation. Handle is not included. Load capacity is 330 lbs. For field installation.
KNIFE SS
Standard Overlay Knife Hinge Shipped Loose
KT INSERT SS
K n i f e Tray I n s e r t S h i p p e d L o o s e Features hardwood UV coated maple construction with 19 knife slots, centered roughly 15/16” apart. Fits B12-48” W x 24” D cabinet. Instructions for on site installation will be included. Unit is 18 1/2” W x 22” D x 2 3/8” T.
LID TB SS
Trash Bin Lid White plastic lid that mounts on all Custom Cupboards (Rev-a-Shelf) 35 quart trash bins. Only sold separately. On double trash units larger drawer front hardware may interfere with lid function; lid adds 7/8" - 1" to top of container.
LS HARDWARE
Lazy Susan Hardware Must be ordered in addition to loose LS SHELF for field installation.
LS SHELF
Lazy Susan Shelf Extra shelf. Shipped Loose. Specify wood or plastic & what type of cabinet it is for so we can determine the size & shape needed. Order LS HARDWARE as well.
MSU18S0 MSU36S0
Swing Out Section Add as a line item following the MSU Cabinet to ship the swing out section loose.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-49-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Replacement & Loose Parts MW SHELF 27 MW SHELF 30
AL
Protruding MWS Shelf Loose MW2734 Shelf (18” x 24”) & MW3034 Shelf (18” x 27”) for field installation
MW SHELF 33 NAILS 1LB
Black Doors Nails 1 lb. package of black nails typically added to doors.
P&PC SS
Pot & Pan Caddy Loose Unit is constructed of two independently operating pullout units on heavy duty full extension ball bearing slides. Heavy gauge frosted nickel wire frames; UV coated birch veneer plywood platforms. Minimum opening width & height of 21” and 24” depth. Recommended for use in a B24BD or B27.
Pull-Out Shelves are adjustable on 1 ¼” spacing, unless only one is ordered then it will be floor mounted. 3” Tall sides on Beech, 2½” Tall sides on Birch. No warranty on POS for cabinets over 36” wide. Weight limit is 75 lbs. dynamic (moving in & out) 100 lbs. static (standing still)
5/8” Solid Beech Dovetail Pull-Out Shelves with choice of undermount guides. Finished Interior POS to match the exterior of the cabinet will be the same wood species as the cabinet box.
POS SS
5/8” Natural Beech Dovetail Solo Undermount shipped loose.
POS FI SS
5/8” Dovetail Solo Undermount finished to match exterior shipped loose.
POSTUFEBM SS
5/8” Natural Beech DovetailTandem Blumotion shipped loose.
POSTUBMFI SS
5/8” Dovetail Tandem Blumotion finished to match exterior shipped loose.
5/8” Birch Dovetail Pull-Out Shelf with choice of undermount guides.
POS STND SS
5/8” Birch Dovetail Solo Undermount shipped loose.
POS STNDBM SS
5/8” Birch Dovetail Tandem Blumotion shipped loose.
Flat Pull-Out Shelf Options; constructed of 3/4” material.
FLATPOSBM SS
Flat 1 ¼” Tall POS with Blumotion guides shipped loose.
FLPOSBMFI SS
Flat 1 ¼” Tall POS, finished interior with Blumotion guides shipped loose.
When ordering POS loose for later jobsite installation add the following as an accessory to the order.
POSHARDWARE
Pull-Out Shelf Hardware Shims, Spacers, Screws, & Guides for jobsite installation.
POS TEMPLATE
Pull-Out Shelf Template Hole placement template for field installation of POS
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-50-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Replacement & Loose Parts POTRD SS
Pull Out Tray Divider Loose Made with heavy gauge frosted nickel wire frames mounted to a birch veneer base platform. Unit comes with heavy duty, full extension ball bearing slides; not self closing. Can be installed in B12”-15” and BFD12”15” cabinets. 9” minimum opening width, 15” minimum opening height & 24” minimum depth.
POWB SS
Pull Out Wire Basket Loose For field installation, specify cabinet size.
POWH SS
Pull Out Wooden Hamper For field installation, specify cabinet size.
RBC BINS18SS
Recycle Bin Hardware Comes fully assembled with 4 screws. Package includes: (2) containers, frame, full-extension guides, 100# weight rating. 18” includes (2) 27 qt. containers. 30” includes (2) 35 qt. containers. For field installation.
RBC BINS30SS
AL
RBC DLX BINS
Deluxe Recycle Bin Hardware For field installation
Sink Mat Loose SINKMAT-M SS 23 1/2" X 45 1/4". Natural maple, metallic silver or white. Full sheet will be sent SINKMAT-S SS SINKMAT-W SS
SPD SS
Spice Drawer Plastic Loose For field installation.
SPICE SS
Spice Insert Loose Specify cabinet size. For field installation.
TAMBOUR MAT.
BTB BIN 15
Tambour Material Loose
Available in all wood species. 3/4” Slat width, 5/16” thick. Solid wood. Maximum size is 36” x 60”.
BTB BIN18 BTB BIN21 BTB BIN24
BTB Hardware for 15”, 18”, 21” or 24" Wide Cabinets For onsite installation. Refer to Base cabinet section for more details regarding unit.
BTBBM18
For onsite installation. Refer to Base cabinet section for more details regarding unit.
BTBBM 15
Bottom Mount BTB Hardware for 15”, 18” or 21” Wide Cabinets
BTBBM21 USC15 SS USC18 SS USC21 SS
Under Sink Caddy
maple rack with a plastic top tray for sponge and scrub brush storage. Retain UV coated hardwood are nickle. Minimum opening height is 20”. ing rods and mounting brackets USC15 fits SB27”-33” w/ BD
USC21 fits SB21”-24” single door cabinet & SB42”-48” Wine Glass Holder Loose Specify what size cabinet parts are needed for. USC18 fits SB18 & SB36-39”
WGH SS
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose -51
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Reveals SP REVEALS M
Reveals - Wall Cabinets To change the reveals at the top of a Wall Cabinet Put a note in the “Notes” section of your order & add “OM-SP” as a line item at the end of your order. Qty is number of wall cabinets this will affect.
Shaped Side Panels 3 standard styles, shown below. Shaped side panels consist of flush ¾” thick solid wood sides with one of the three details shown below. The cabinet back will extend the length of the sides if a left and right SSP are ordered. Please specify back configuration if ordering only one SSP. The maximum height of cabinet including the extension is 48”, 54”, or 60” tall. For example, a 30” tall wall cabinet with an SSP48 would consist of a wall cabinet with an 18” tall leg. If specifying different extension height, enter cabinet as CUSTOMWALL. Specify left or right - choose Style A, B or C. 1” thick panels are available but may constitute a longer lead time and are shipped loose; recommended to flush out with the doors, size accordingly. A beadboard route (1 ½” on center) or pilaster route (front edge) may be added to the 1” thick loose panel. Submit a quote for custom pricing.
SSP_48(L/R)
M
SSP_54(L/R)
M
54” overall cabinet height
SSP_60(L/R)
M
60” overall cabinet height
SSP_ LOOSE
48” overall cabinet height
SSP A
SSP B
11"
7"
AL
SSP C
6
"
3/4” thick Loose Side Shaped Panel
Extended Sides Down AI AL M Extends the side & stile on a wall cabinet down to your specifications; 18" maximum extension. When extending both the left and right sides down, the back will also extend down unless noted. Enter cabinet as CUSTOMWALL, then add EXT LEFT and/or EXT RIGHT as a modification. EXT LEFT
Extend Left Side Down 18" maximum extension
Exit left
EXT RIGHT
Extend Right Side Down 18" maximum extension Exit right
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-52-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Shelves ADJ SHELF
Adjustable Shelf AL Use this when ordering a shelf or shelves loose. Shelf will be maple print paper interior material and will be edgebanded.
ADJ SHELF BC
Adjustable Bookcase Shelf AL Adjustable shelf with CTE on front edge. Use this when ordering a shelf or shelves loose. CTE2 is standard but may be substituted for CTE1, CAP1 or CAP2 for no additional charge.
ADJ SHELF FI
SHELVES
Adjustable Finished Interior Shelf AL Use this when ordering a finished interior adjustable shelf or shelves loose. Shelf will be finished to match the exterior and will be edgebanded.
Add Additional Shelf to Cabinet M Add a ¾” adjustable interior shelf to a cabinet on your order. Shelf will match interior of cabinet. Please specify total number of shelves needed. Qty is how many shelves you are adding; computer will ask for total shelves. Can only be used on a cabinet that already comes with shelves.
BCS
Bookcase Shelving M Modifies standard shelving into bookcase shelving. Use as a modification to a cabinet. CTE2 is standard but may be substituted for CTE1, CAP1 or CAP2 for no additional charge.
FDS
Full Depth Shelves M When added as a modification, cabinet will come with full depth shelves. Works on base cabinets only.
FMS
Fixed Mid-Shelf. Fixed 1/2" mid floor in between openings, to be used on a BTB_WD or a B_ cabinet. (drawer above door)
NS
No Shelves M Deletes shelves from cabinet; no shelf holes.
PLATE GROOVE
Plate Groove M Add plate groove to your shelf or the floor of a cabinet by adding this as a modification to the cabinet or shelf. ½” W x ¼” D . Plate Groove is placed 2” from the back of the cabinet or shelf.
SHELF W/POS
SC
Shelves w/ POS M Use as a modification to keep the adjustable shelf when multiple POS are added to a base cabinet.
Shelf Clips
AL
Provided at no charge when requested with loose shelves on original order. 50¢ each if ordered at a later date or separately.
How to figure adjustable shelf sizes Take 1 5/8” off cabinet depth to get width of shelf Take 1 9/16” off width of cabinet to get length of shelf If there is an RPE, take an additional 1/2” off width per side If there is a finished back, take an additional 1/2” of depth If it is a peninsula cabinet, take an additional 3/4” off depth
•• •• •• •• ••
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-53-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Sink Base Options KR
Knee Relief A knee relief is available on base or vanity cabinets, the door area is inset 1 ½”. Cabinets with knee relief will have butt doors. Always standard overlay in width (Concealed on Designer Overlay jobs).
SINKMAT-M SINKMAT-S SINKMAT-W
Sink Mat
TOT
Tip-Out Tray Stainless steel trays attach to tilt down false fronts. Available in 10”, 14 ¼”, 22”, & 25” widths. The widest possible trays will be used. Plastic trays substituted on narrow units.
TOT PLASTIC
Tip-Out Tray Plastic Plastic trays attach to tilt down false fronts. The widest possible trays will be used.
TB(L/R)
Towel Bar Brushed metal finish. Fits openings that are 6” wide or greater.
PCA1 PCA2
Under-Sink Portero Cleaning Agent PCA2 fits in a minimum B15 opening (1 basket removable). PCA1 fits in a minimum B12 opening; comes with bottom, left basket only (removable).No changes in depth, width, or height. Cabinet not included in this price. Hafele’s Arena Champagne. Be aware of sink depth before ordering; does not work with deep sinks. P C A 1 i s 6 3 /8 ” x 1 9 1 /2 ” x 1 5 1 /2 ” . P C A 2 i s 1 0 3 /4 ” x 1 9 1 /2 ” x 2 0 ” .
M
Cut to fit waterproof/water resistant mat for sink cabinet floor. Comes in Maple Natural, Metallic Silver or White. Mat will not be fastened to cabinet floor. Not available in a 48” wide cabinet or diagonal sink base cabinets.
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
PCA2 Shown
USC15 USC18 USC21
Under Sink Caddy UV coated hardwood maple rack with a plastic top tray for sponge and scrub brush storage. Retaining rods and mounting brackets are nickle. Minimum opening height is 20”. Specify right or left door on double door cabinets. USC15 fits SB27”-33” w/ BD USC18 fits SB18 & SB36-39” USC21 fits SB21”-24” single door cabinet & SB42”-48”
USWRO
Under-Sink Wire Roll-Out Floor mounted bottom basket slides out, smaller top basket is removable. 21” minimum cabinet depth. 11” wide unit fits V15 or B15. 14” wide unit fits V18 or B18 & up.
AI
AI
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-54-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Spice Racks 3” & 6” Filler Pull-Outs also available. Refer to Fillers, previously shown in this section.
SPR-(L/R) AI
Wood Spice Rack 2 5/8” deep. Attaches to door and has fixed shelves with dowels to hold spices in place. Number of shelves & size of rack is determined by door height. Natural Beech.
SPRA-(L/R) AI
Adjustable Wood Spice Rack 3 adjustable shelves with a fixed top & bottom shelf. Sized to fit 18”, 21”, 24”, 36” & 39” wide wall cabinets. Natural beech w/chrome rails. 2 5/8” deep.
SPRW
Wire Spice Rack
AI
Cabinet must be 15” or wider. Available in 3 sizes: 7 ¾” x 21, 10 ¾” x 21, or 13 ¾” x 21. Largest possible size used. Minimum cabinet height is 27”. Chrome rails. Approximately 3” deep. Comes with 4 trays.
SPICE
Spice Pull-Out Insert
M
See Base and Wall sections for standard Spice cabinets. 3 shelves are standard. Insert is 1” less than opening. 6” will be frameless and only accessible from 1 side. 9” and up will be accessible from both sides. Chrome rails. Cabinet must be entered as CUSTOM____, then add SPICE as a modification.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-55-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Stain & Touch-Up
AI AL M
Prices listed are valid on standard, no upcharge colors only. Call for a quote on any finish with an upcharge. If the finish is in the LOC book a TUK is available, however, some components may not be available to ship. Natural TUKs will consist of a putty stick and a pre-catalyst that will be sent out in a marker. Keep in mind that touch up of special finishes may not resemble the original color due to the multi-step processes involved. Stain shipped by carriers other than a company truck will include a substantial hazardous materials handling fee that will be added to the freight charge. Call the Shipping Dept. for a quote. Refer to the Information section of this catalog for more details on shipping hazardous material.
GALLON
Gallon 1 Gallon of stain
QUART
Quart 1 Quart of stain
MARKER
Marker Touch Up Marker
TUK
TUK Touch Up Kit Sent automatically with all standard finish orders. All other finishes should be added to the order.
PUTTY STICK
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Putty Stick
AL=Accessory Loose
-56-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Storage Solutions CPB Base
Center Partitions Single 3/4” partition added to cabinet to divide the inside opening equally. Partitions are sometimes required for pull-out shelf installation. If requested to be installed off-center or in more than one opening on double opening cabinets, cabinet will become custom.
AI
CPW Wall AI
CPT Tall AI
CR
Can Rack 5” deep can rack attaches to pantry door and has 6 adjustable shelves. Rack is sized to fit opening; 5” less than door opening in width & 1” less in height. Minimum cabinet width is 18” due to chrome rail availability. Not available in same opening as a POS. Natural Beech.
CLOSET ROD
Closet Rod Chrome closet rod. 48” maximum length.
GBH
Grocery Bag Holder Unit is made of stainless steel and impact resistant plastic; 6 5/8” W x 3 5/8” D x 15 5/8” T. For door mount applications the unit will be mounted to a 9” X 20” piece of 1/2” thick interior edgebanded plywood. Holds up to 30 normal size plastic grocery bags. Can be mounted to door, adjustable shelf or side of cabinet; placement must be specified. On double door cabinets specify left or right door placement.
AI
AI
AI
PANTRY
Wooden Pantry Pull Out Unit Added to Cabinet Use as a modification to a cabinet to add a pantry unit. Enter as CUSTOM____, then add PANTRY as a modification. See Tall Cabinet section for standard Pull Out Pantry Unit.
PLATE HOLDER
Plate Holder Makes organizing plates and dishes quick & easy. Handle allows for easy carrying. 10 5/16” up to 16 9/16” across x 5 5/16” deep x 6 ¾” tall. Accommodates dishes from 7 1/16” to 12 5/8” across. Rubber Feet. Shipped Loose.
P&PC
Pot & Pan Caddy Unit is constructed of two independently operating pullout units. Floor mounted on heavy duty full extension ball bearing slides.Heavy gauge frosted nickel wire frames;UV coated birch veneer plywood platforms. Minimum opening width & height of 21” and 24” depth. Recommended for use in a B24BD or B27.
AI
AI
AI
PRC
Plate Rack
M
14
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Plate Rack Added to Cabinet Refer to Wall section for standard PRC cabinets. Plate Rack Dividers added to interior of cabinet. 1 ½” between dowels and 14” standard height. Available in any cabinet. Interior of cabinet will be the same wood and finish as the cabinet exterior. Enter as CUSTOM____, then add PRC as a modification.
AL=Accessory Loose
-57-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Storage Solutions POPMS
Pop Up Mixer Shelf (Rev-A-Shelf) Available in base depth, full door, 15”-24” wide cabinets. The width of the pop-up shelf is 4 1/2” less than cabinet width. Requires 22 ½” tall opening height and 18” clearance.
POTRD
Pull Out Tray Divider Made with heavy gauge frosted nickel wire frames mounted to a birch veneer base platform. Unit is floor mounted on heavy duty, full extension ball bearing slides; not self closing. Door mount is not available. Available in B12”-15” and BFD12”-15” cabinets. 9” minimum opening width, 15” minimum opening height & 24” minimum depth.
POWB
Pull Out Wire Basket Wire basket is 11” or 14” wide x 14 ¼” tall x 18 ¾” deep. Door Mount not available. 11” fits in a 15” cabinet. 14” fits in an 18” cabinet. 21” Minimum Cabinet Depth.
POWH
Pull Out Wooden Hamper Beech plywood box with air holes in bottom, mounted on ball bearing full extension guides. Hamper is built to utilize the space in cabinet for which it is ordered. 18” maximum height. Door mount available with “L” brackets, order RBDM as a modification. 21” Minimum Cabinet Depth.
WICKER15
Wicker Baskets Wicker Baskets woven over solid beech wood frames and slide on wooden runners. Baskets and runners are pre-finished natural and cannot be stained. Fits B15-B18 cabinets only; no modifications allowed on these cabinets. Wi c ke r 1 5 i s 1 1 5/ 1 6 ” W a n d Wi c ke r 1 8 i s 1 4 5/ 1 6 ” W, b o t h s i ze s a re 7 7/8 ” H x 2 1 1 /4 ” D.
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
WICKER18 AI
TRD
Wire Tray Dividers Wire dividers come in two sizes: 12 ¼ x 19 ¾ or 18 ¼ x 19 ¾ . Largest possible will be used. When ordered, the adjustable shelf will be deleted to make room for the trays.
TRDW
Wood Tray Dividers Wood dividers are custom cut to height x 15 ½” deep. Maximum height is 29 ½” tall. When ordered, the adjustable shelf will be deleted to make room for the trays.
AI
AI
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-58-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Table Legs & Bunn Feet
AL
7 standard styles available , shown below, in two standard widths 3 ½” x 3 ½” or 4” x 4”, and heights 34 ½” or 42”. Constructed of solid wood. No modifications allowed. Dimensioned breakouts are approximate and may vary. Work Table uses a modified Table Leg E.
TABLELEG__336
3 1 /2 x 3 1 /2 x 3 4 1 /2
TABLELEG__436
4 x 4 x 3 4 1 /2
TABLELEG__342
3 1 /2 x 3 1 /2 x 4 2
TABLELEG__442
4 x 4 x 42
22½" 30" 34½" 42"
34½" 42"
12
Style F
S LEG
Style G
S Table Leg Used as a modification to s any of the table legs shown above. Not available on customer supplied product.
ML
TURNED POST1
Turned Post Custom furniture legs, spindles, bunn feet, etc. 4”x4” or smaller custom turned pieces. Available in all wood species. Send a drawing of the style that you want. (50” max. length)
AL
Size is rounded to the nearest foot for pricing only.
TURNED POST
Turned Post Set-Up Charge This charge will be applied to all custom posts. (1 per design)
AL
SLATED BTM M
Slatted Bottom on a Work Table (FTK) Use as a modification to a Work Table for a slatted bottom.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-59-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Table Legs & Bunn Feet
ďƒžAL
BUNN FEET - Turned, solid wood cabinet feet shipped separate. Recommended separate toe kick on cabinet (STK). A & C require that the height of the toe kick be adjusted. Bunn foot A & C will create a non-standard height. Mounting Cleat is left at the top of the bunn foot to help fill any void left by trim molding.
Bunn A
Bunn B 4.5 4 1/2
Bunn C
Bunn D 4.5 4 1/2
Bunn E 4.5 4 1/2
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-60-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Toe Kick Options FTK
Flush Toe Kick Use to modify any cabinet with a recessed toe kick to a 6” tall flush toe. Cannot be ordered as Separate Toe Kick (STK).
FTKB
Flush Toe Kick Back Use as a modification to peninsula base cabinets to flush the toe kick on the back of the cabinet.
HTKSS
Hidden Toe Kick Step Stool This unit is comprised of a steel 2-step stool covered with non slip rubber treads and plastic non slip feet. Available in base cabinets 21” & up; depth must remain 24”. Toe kick space will be built out to form a 17” W cavity to house the step stool. In the collapsed position unit is 3 3/4” tall, leaving only a 3/4” clearance to slide in; this will be an issue with flooring laid after cabinet installation. Handle is not included. Load capacity is 330 lbs. Unit will ship seperate.
STK
Separate Toe Kick Consists of ¾” thick scrap wood, mostly luan material. Order when ceiling height will not allow room to stand the tall cabinets upright. Comes installed centered under the cabinet & attached with screws. May easily removed at jobsite. Not available with Flush Toe Kick (FTK).
NTK
No Toe Kick Will reduce the overall cabinet height by 4 1/2”. Use when applying bunn feet.
RTKB
Recessed Toe Kick Back Use as a modification to a base or tall cabinet to add a recessed toe kick on the back side.
M
M
AI
M
M
RTKF
Recessed Toe Kick Front Use as a modification to a base or tall cabinet that comes standard with a flush to kick; adds a recessed toe kick on the front. 4 1/2" tall x 3 1/4" deep
M
RTKL
Recessed Toe Kick Left Use as a modification to a base or tall cabinet to add a recessed toe kick on the left side.
RTKR
Recessed Toe Kick Right Use as a modification to a base or tall cabinet to add a recessed toe kick on the right side.
TOE DEPTH
Modify Standard Toe Depth Standard toe depth is 3 1/4”.
TOE HEIGHT
Modify Toe Height Standard height is 4 1/2”. Remember to include 1 ½” on flush toe kicks (FTK). Adjusting the toe height does NOT affect the overall height of the cabinet. The opening(s) will be affected.
M M M M
Specify in comments section of order
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
ADA - Special Toe Heights If you need taller toe heights for handicap accessibility, we will change them to 9” tall at no extra charge. Specify any special depth, if needed. Valid on multi-cabinet orders only. Single cabinets will be charged the standard Toe Height charge.
AL=Accessory Loose
-61-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Valances
AL
VAL36 AL
Standard
Radius
VAL42 AL
3” Rise, 3” Flat
VAL48 AL
1 1/2” Rise, 4 1/2” Flat
3” Radius
VAL54 AL
Tapered
Country French 3” Rise, 3” Flat
VAL60 AL VAL66 AL
2 3/4” Rise, 6” Flat
45 degree angles
Cottage
Roman
VAL72 AL
2 3/4” Rise, 1 1/2” Flat
VAL84 AL
2 3/4” Rise, 6” Flat
VAL96 AL Leading bottom edge has an ogee; can be edged to complement the door edge by specifying in the comments. Height can be adjusted to 4 3/4" to match FO5 by request. Finished on front and back but not glazed or distressed on the back. Incorporating a Valance into the Frame Toe kick area is finished when using a valance as a flushed toe. When incorporating a valance into the frame, the valance will not have an edge detail; can be added using EDGE DETAIL. Adding a valance as a bottom rail on a wall cabinet will increase the height of the frame 4”.Minimum cabinet width is 18” when using the Country French as an integrated valance. Minimum cabinet width is 12” when using the Cottage as an integrated valance.
Style
As flush toe
As top rail
As extended bottom rail wall
Standard
VALBRBSTD
VALTRSTD
VALBRWSTD
Straight
FTK
VALTRSTR
EBR 4”
Roman
VALBRBROM
VALTRROM
VALBRWROM
Scalloped
VALBRBSCA
VALTRSCA
VALBRWSCA
Cottage
VALBRBCOT
VALTRCOT
VALBRWCOT
Country French
VALBRBCF
VALTRCF
VALBRWCF
Country Routed
VALCRBRB
VALCRTR
VALCRBRW
Special Valance
VALBRBSP
VALTRSP
VALBRWSP
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-62-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Valances
AL 33” 36” 45” 48”
18”
6”
54” 60” 66” 72”
18”
6”
RPVAL33
Raised Panel Valances Available in 33”, 36”, 45”, & 48” wide & 18” tall. The inside height of the elliptical arch is 6” tall. No applied moldings, mitered or outsourced door styles. The inside edges of the stiles & rails complement the door style. The #30000, #37500, or #70000 panel will be used on all raised panel valances; contact your Account Manager for more information. Custom sizes are available on a per case basis. RPVAL CUSTOM. You should always get a Custom Request approved prior to selling.
RPVAL36 RPVAL45 RPVAL48
Wine Rack SWR
Scalloped Wine Rack
M
WWR
Scalloped Wine Rack Added to Cabinet Rack is sized to accommodate a 4” diameter bottle with a minimum of 1” between bottles. One row can be attached to floor or an adjustable shelf, to get more than one row will be CUSTOMWALL. Available in any single opening wall cabinet. Interior of cabinet will be the same wood and finish as the cabinet exterior. Must charge for finished interior. Cabinet may become custom. A drawing must accompany order. Wine Rack Grid Added to Cabinet 4” spacing on the grid. Available in any standard single opening wall cabinet as a standard modification when entire opening is modified to a wine rack. Adding to any other cabinet will create a custom cabinet and will require prior approval. Must charge for finished interior (FI) in order to receive a finished interior. Don’t forget to order No Doors (ND). See WALLS section for std wine rack cabinets.
M
If only want a portion of the cabinet is modified to have WWR, it must be entered as a CUSTOM____, then add WWR as a modification.
WGH M
Cabinet
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Wine Glass Holders Mounts under a wall cabinet. Number of holders depends on width of cabinet. Cabinet will receive a finished bottom at no additional charge. Add as a modification to the cabinet. AL=Accessory Loose
-63-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wood Hood Accessories
AL
“Silver Metallic” powder-coated metal. Blower pushes 500 cfm, therefore, cannot be used in conjunction with a ductless conversion kit. Liners and blower will not be installed in cabinets. Notched liner is for Hood Fascia Units only. Liners and Blower will not fit wood hoods with changed dimensions.
LINER30R SS
F i t s 3 0 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d
Liners
LINER36R SS
F i t s 3 6 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d
LINER42R SS
F i t s 4 2 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d
LINER30N SS
F i t s 3 0 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d Fa c i a
Notched Liners
LINER36N SS
F i t s 3 6 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d Fa c i a
LINER42N SS
F i t s 4 2 ” Wi d e Wo o d H o o d Fa c i a
WHBLOWER SS
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Blower
AL=Accessory Loose
-64-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Wood Top Specify overall or plywood size and which edges are to have CTE on the WT Form in the FORMS section of this catalog. Wood tops will be built to plywood size unless otherwise specified. Edge routing will complement the door edge unless specified otherwise. Price includes CTE. Can be built-up, upon request, to 1 ½” thick for double the list price. Additional CTE options are available for use on our wood tops. See CTE1, CTE3, & CTE4 earlier in this section. CTE2 will be standard. There is no extra charge for substituting your CTE, just specify on your order & on the Wood Top Form. Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time. Maximum sized top shipped assembled with a spline or splines is 48” x 48”. Anything larger will be sent prepped for splines (subject to Spine charge) . Knotty Alder tops not recommended due to open knots. We strongly suggest using Clear Alder.
WT WT 1.5
END VIEW
Wood Top
3/4"
Up to 48” x 96”, ¾” Veneered plywood.
AL
WTL WTL 1.5
3/4"
3/4" VENEER PLYWOOD CTE
*CTE2 Shown
1 1/2"
Wood Top Long Up to 48” x 120”, ¾” Veneered plywood.
AL
DOG BONE
Dog-Bone Joint System Used for spline joints when the top will be assembled on-site. Shipped loose.
AL
SHAPE TOP
Spline For custom shaped wood top, such as clipped corners; a drawing must be provided.
SPLINE
Spline Maximum ¾” plywood panel size is 48” wide x 120” long. SPLINE is used as a modification to a ¾” plywood panel over the maximum size. Specify placement. There is no guarantee that the grain will match up.
M M
DISTRESS BBT
Distressed Butcher Block Top Alder Butcher Block Top. 3” Thick. 32” maximum width & 96” maximum length. Heavily distressed and worn. Specify what edges will be exposed and need to be distressed & finished. See Distressed Wood Top photo in the LOC book for choice of 7 finishes (unfinished, Flint Hills, Auburn Hills, Prairie Rose, Natural, Smoky Hill, & Sunflower). Not recommended for food preparation.
BBT
Standard Butcher Block Top Maple Butcher Block Top; unfinished. 1 ½” thick with ¾” strips, glued up Maple Butcher Block Top. 32” maximum width. Finish with walnut oil to preserve wood. No Warranty!
AL
AL
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-65-
M=Modification
Accessories & Modifications HEARTLAND CATALOG 05-14
Mirror Frames
MIRRORA
MIRRORB
Outside profile matches door edge
MIRRORC
Mirror Frames will be offered in three unique designs and 9 door edge specific options. Available in all woods and finishes to provide a perfect match to the cabinetry. Entire frame with the exception of the back plane will be finished. Frames will be constructed of solid stock material and will feature a 5/16" deep x 1/2" wide rabbet in order to accommodate 1/8" or 1/4" thick glass. Pricing will be figured by calculating the lineal foot of molded material needed and adding the design fee. Loose rail material available for lineal foot price. Frame
Loose Rail
MIRROR A
MIR A RAIL
4 7/8" wide; 1" thick material. Mitered construction.
MIRROR B
MIR B RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Outside edge matches door edge.
MIRROR C
NA
3 1/4" wide stiles & top rail; 4 1/4" wide bottom rail; 3/4" thick material. Butt joint construction. Front view shown
MIRROR#10
MIR 10 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #10 door edge.
MIRROR#13
MIR 13 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #13 door edge.
MIRROR#15
MIR 15 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #15 door edge.
MIRROR#35
MIR 35 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #35 door edge.
MIRROR#60
MIR 60 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #60 door edge.
MIRROR#65
MIR 65 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #65 door edge.
MIRROR#66
MIR 66 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #66 door edge.
MIRROR#67
MIR 67 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #67 door edge.
MIRROR#70
MIR 70 RAIL
4" wide; 3/4" thick material. Mitered construction. Inside & outside edge features the #70 door edge.
AI=Accessory Installed w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
AL=Accessory Loose
-66-
M=Modification
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Index: Sales Aids Brochures..................................................................................... 4
Mini Base & Wall Cabinets..................................................... 5
Color Blocks................................................................................ 6
Miscellaneous Items................................................................. 4
Door Store................................................................................... 3
Sales Aids Notes........................................................................ 2
Faceframe & Door Samples.................................................. 8
Sample Door & Front............................................................... 8
For Ordering............................................................................... 4
Sample Doors..............................................................................7
Lending Library.......................................................................... 3
Special Samples..........................................................................7
Library of Color Book.............................................................. 4
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-1-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Sales Aids Notes There are three different ways to order your sales aides: •• Place your order on our website •• Fax your order in to (316) 219-2798. Forms can be downloaded from our website. •• Email with correct documents attached Due to human error we no longer accept orders via email (without the proper documents attached) or a phone call. Please use the proper forms to order your sales aids to ensure accuracy with what you are trying to order. HELP yourself by submitting these documents. Orders filled out incorrectly or submitted on the wrong form may result in delays. If you cannot find the forms in your catalog or on our website please call Sales and Marketing and we will be happy to fax them to you! Items in this section do not apply towards display allowance. Please refer to page 14 of the Information Section or call your Sales Representative for questions pertaining to Dealer Display Programs.
Door Store Custom Cupboards offers a unique service in providing a variety of popular door style and color combinations on sample doors, ready to ship the same day. These colors and door styles are chosen based on what our dealers are ordering. Available doors can be found on our website at www.customcupboards.com. Go to “For the Pros”, “Dealers Only”, and “Door Store”.
Standard Door Store Sample Door Standard Stain, with or without glaze Nomenclature: DSD STANDARD
Packaged Finish Door Store Sample Door Packaged Finish Nomenclature: DSD
Sample Bag Keep your most popular selling doors safe and neatly in one place. It can store up to 7 doors. The door bad has handles and a shoulder strap for easy carrying. (Doors not included)
7 Door Sample Bag - Black Dimensions: 16 1/2” x 8” x 13” x 8” (width x side x height x bottom) Material color: Black material Logo: White stitching for logo Dividers: 6 internal dividers (holds 7 doors) Business card holder: Yes (located on top panel)
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
Nomenclature: SAMPLE BAG
-2-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Lending Library Custom Cupboards maintains an extensive library of standard & special colors available for loan to assist you and your client in your color selection process. These doors can be checked out for a period of two weeks. Please call the Librarian for details at ext. 171 or use the form which is available to download from our website. Use the Library Door Order Form from the Form Section of the catalog & fax the Librarian with your selection. Phone: (316)529-3431; ext. 171 Fax: (316)219-2798 E-mail: library@customcupboards.com
••
The Librarian will ship the door(s) to you via UPS. You must specify Next Day, Two Day, or Ground, if not it will automatically be sent Ground. If you want your shipment to go out today, you need to have your request in no later than 1:00 p.m. CST.
••
Please note that we charge a $10 handling fee on each package, on top of your regular shipping cost.
••
Custom Cupboards covers Ground freight on library doors TO you. You will be billed for the difference if you choose to have your doors shipped quicker than Ground, such as 2nd Day or Next Day. You are responsible for the shipping fee to get the door(s) back to us.
••
Keep your package, including the packing, to use for the return of the door(s).
••
The library’s main purpose is to provide a color to you. If you need a particular door style or knotty/rustic wood, please be sure to state it on your order. The Librarian may send multiple doors for color, style, etc.
••
Your package will have a slip included that states the number of doors sent, their due date, & the amount due if the doors are not returned by the date requested.
••
Ship the door(s) back using the original box. You should ship the door(s) no later than the date noted on your information slip. If you know you’re going to need the door(s) longer, please contact the Librarian so she will not bill you for the door(s). You will not be billed for the door(s) if you contact us.
••
Final Notices will be faxed out weekly. If we have not heard from you or seen the door(s), your account will be billed $150 net per door and credit WILL NOT be issued.
••
Additional door requests will be denied as long as there are delinquent doors or unpaid balances on your library account.
••
We strongly suggest that you make a copy of the return shipping label so we can track the package. If you say you have returned the door, we will ask for proof by means of tracking information. If this information is not able to be provided you will be billed for the missing door(s).
••
If you are billed for a door, it is yours to keep as it will be automatically replaced once it has been billed. This fee is nonrefundable.
Remember, the lending library is a very resourceful tool if you use it wisely. It is very important that you follow these guidelines so it is beneficial to everyone.
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-3-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Library of Color Book Library of Color Book The purpose of this photo album is to acquaint you with the vast array of colors available for your viewing through our lending library. Please see an actual door & do not order from a photograph. Nomenclature: LOC
Brochures Door Brochure
Nomenclature: BROCH DOOR25
NEW fold out brochure featuring almost every door style we offer as well as some finish, wood species, edge profile and accessories images. Comes in packages of 25.
Additional brochures, door hangers, posters, and direct mail pieces available on the Custom Cupboards Virtual Marketing Portal. Register today and begin customizing literature to fit your needs. Access the link on our website.
For Ordering Product Catalog Specify Heartland, Discovery, or Revola
Pricing Program Use our pricing program to electronically submit your order. New install & updates are available in the dealers only section of our website. Please contact Jason Harris at ext. 129 or Andrew Burkhart at ext. 111 if you need assistance with updates.
Nomenclature: CATALOG
Forms All forms can be downloaded and printed from our website
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
No charge.
-4-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Miscellaneous Items Plaque Cherry with a chestnut/burgandy glazed finish. Display on counter or wall. Nomenclature: PLAQUE LOGO
Molding Chain Consists of 20 pre-selected moldings. BBM, CAP1 & 2, CMM, CMT, CR3, 4 & 5, CTE1, DM, FBLB, ICDM, ICM, M1402, M1404, M5203, Rope, SCR3, UCM & UCM3. Nomenclature: MOLDINGCHAIN
Molding Samples 1’ unfinished sample of any of our moldings listed in the catalog. Wood species will vary. Please specify molding type in the notes of the entry. Nomenclature: MLDG SAMPLE
Edge Profile Chain Door front edge options Price: No charge Nomenclature: EDGE SAMPLE
Mini Base & Wall Cabinets •• ••
Order on an ESO Styling charges, such as wood, color, door style, etc. apply
Mini Wall 12” W x 18” T x 7” D Nomenclature: MW
Mini Base 12” W x 24” T x 15 1/4” D Nomenclature: MB
As a service to you, Custom Cupboards keeps several mini bases in stock for immediate shipment. For a list of available mini bases, please contact the Librarian at ext. 171. To order your own cabinet, submit on an ESO. All applicable fees apply (color, wood, hinge, etc.).
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-5-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Color blocks Do not order color based on color blocks. You must view a larger door sample before ordering. If you do send us a color block to match, your order will be subject to applicable stain match charges. Following the passing of any Color Block expiration date, the block will not be eligible for recertification. This procedure will ensure that only the most current blocks are used in representation to customers and potential clientele. The substantially lower cost of the Color Block in contrast to a sample door compounded with the nature in which Color Blocks are produced enable Custom Cupboards to realize our goal of supplying our sales representatives and dealers with accurate, current sales aids.
Color Block Sets by Wood Type Alder Color Blocks Set of 22 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKA
Maple Color Blocks Set of 22 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKM
Beech Color Blocks Set of 19 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKB
Oak Color Blocks Set of 22 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKO
Cherry Color Blocks Set of 22 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKC
Quarter-Sawn Oak Color Blocks Set of 22 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKQS
Hickory Color Blocks Set of 21 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKH
Paint Color Blocks Set of 18 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCKP
Individual Color Blocks Individual Color Block 3” x 7 1/2” - Must specify color Nomenclature: COLOR BLOCK
Color Block Sample Box Logo engraved, dovetail sample box holds 84 color blocks - 3” x 7 1/2”. Nomenclature: SAMPLE BOX
Individual Glaze Block 3” x 7 1/2” - Must specify color Nomenclature: GLAZE BB
Full Color Block Sets Full Set of Standard Color Blocks Set of 168 - 3” x 7 1/2” Nomenclature: CLR BLK SET Full Set of Glaze Blocks Set of 19 - 4” x 10” Price: $152 LIST Nomenclature: GLAZE BB SET
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-6-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Sample Doors •• •• •• STOP
Check the Door Store on our website for pre-made, ready to ship doors at a discounted price! Other styles are available but not in stock. Sample doors are sized at 11 ½”W x 14 ½”L. Sample drawer fronts are sized at 6 1/4” T x 14 1/2” W Wood Products and the finishes applied to them will age over time. Due to this, samples need to be replaced every 18 months. Cherry samples must be replaced yearly. Price doesn’t change because of finish or door style.
Sample Door or Front Standard Stain Door - 11 1/2” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDS
Sample Door or Front Standard Stain with Glaze Door - 11 1/2” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDS
Door - 13” x 18 1/2” Nomenclature: SD
Door - 13” x 18 1/2” Nomenclature: SDG
Drawer Front - 6 1/4” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDF
Drawer Front - 6 1/4” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDFSG
Sample Door or Front Packaged Finish Door - 11 1/2” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDS
Sample Door Color Development Fee Due to the high cost associated with developing or matching special finishes, this fee will be charged whenever we attempt a color match. This fee will include the (SDS) sample.
Door - 13” x 18 1/2” Nomenclature: SD CUSTOM
Nomenclature: SDCDF
Drawer Front - 6 1/4” x 14 1/2” Nomenclature: SDF CUSTOM
Special Samples Distressing Sample 11 1/2” x 14 1/2” - Points out all 10 of our standard distressing on an Alder, Fruitwood 30000-10 door.
Peg/Nail Sample 11 1/2” x 14 1/2” - Shows all of our peg and nail options on Alder Rocky Mountain door.
Nomenclature: SDD
Nomenclature: SDS PEGS
Sheen Sample Two slab fronts strapped together to show the difference between standard and flat. Done on cherry door w/ a carrington finish. Nomenclature: SDS SHEEN
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-7-
Sales Aids HEARTLAND CATALOG 03-14
Faceframe & Door Samples •• Face Frame is 15” x 26 3/4” •• Hinge type must be selected •• Wood Products and the finishes applied to them will age over time. Due to STOP
this, samples need to be replaced every 1 1/2 years. See expiration date. Cherry samples must be replaced yearly.
FF&D Sample Pick your finish, door style and drawer front. Nomenclature: FFD
Full Door FF&D Sample Pick your finish and door style Nomenclature: FFDFD
Designer Overlay Drawer Front = 6 ¼” x 14 5/8” (for 3/4” top reveal) Drawer Front = 6 ¾” x 14 5/8” (for 1/4” top reveal) Door = 14 5/8” x 19 1/4” Full Height Door = 14 5/8” x 25 3/4”(for 3/4” top reveal) Full Height Door = 14 5/8” x 26 1/4”(for 1/4” top reveal)
Standard Overlay Drawer Front = 5 ¾” x 13” Door = 13” x 18 Full Height Door = 13” x 24 1/2”
Sample Door & Front •• •• •• •STOP •
No frame - metal brackets screwed in from the back Drawer Front = 6 1/4” x 14 1/2” Door = 14 1/2” x 19 1/2” 1/2” gap between the door & drawer front Wood Products and the finishes applied to them will age over time. Due to this, samples need to be replaced every 1-2 years. Cherry samples must be replaced yearly.
Sample Door & Front Standard Stain with or w/out glaze Nomenclature: SD&F
Sample Door & Front Packaged Finish Nomenclature: SD&F SP
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
-8-
Forms Index: Forms Section APPLIANCE PANEL CUTOUT FORMS Heartland Base Oven Cutouts1 ................................................ 1 Heartland Base Oven Cutouts2 .............................................. 2 Heartland Tall Oven Cutouts1 .................................................. 3 Heartland Tall Oven Cutouts2 ................................................. 4 Heartland Wall Micro Cutouts1 ................................................ 5 Heartland Wall Micro Cutouts2 ............................................... 6 MISCELLANEOUS REQUESTS FORMS Coop Claim Form ..........................................................................7 Logo Engraver Setup Fee Form ............................................. 8 New Product Request Form .................................................... 9 Quote Request Form ................................................................. 13 ORDER PROCESSING FORMS Consumer Information Form ..................................................14 Dealer Supplied Outsourced Product Form ..................... 15 Display Discount Request Form ............................................16 Display Guidelines Form........................................................... 17 Expedited Service Order Form ..............................................18 Jobsite Delivery Form ...............................................................19
w w w. C u s t o m C u p b o a r d s . c o m
SALES AID FORMS Color Block Form .......................................................................20 Color Block Information Form ............................................... 21 Dealer Starter Kit........................................................................ 23 FF and D Sample Order Form ............................................... 25 Library Door Order Form ........................................................26 Sales Aid Order Form ............................................................... 27 SD and F Sample Order Form ...............................................28 Standard Sample Order Form ...............................................29 Starter Kit Booklet (Download Complete from web) ..30 WARRANTY FORMS Lifetime Warranty ...................................................................... 37 Out of Square Form ..................................................................38 Warranty ........................................................................................39 WOOD TOP FORMS Wood Top Angled Form ......................................................... 40 Wood Top L Shaped Form ......................................................41 Wood Top Straight Form ........................................................42 Wood Top U Shaped Form .....................................................43
Heartland Base Oven Cut-Out Form DATE: ___/___/___
WO#: _____________
NOTES r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________
r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions. r See catalog for pricing and additional information
SALESPERSON: ___________________
PLEASE FAX, EMAIL OR ATTACH FORM AS PDF TO YOUR ORDER IN THE PRICING PROGRAM.
BOC _
TOHH
1 1/2 X
Varies w/ cutout 1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Varies w/ cutout 1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW: ________ x TOHH:__________
Rules: Drawer Stack w/ Warming Drawer in Middle -Cut-outs must be specified -Top opening is 5” tall; bottom opening varies w/ cut-out -3” mid-rails above & below cut-out
Cabinet Width
TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ FTO: ______ (optional)
TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______
Rules: Base Warming Drawer Rules: Base Warming Drawer -Cut-outs must bebe specified - Cutouts can specified for upper -Two equal size below opening, 9"T openings X 3 less than cabinet
Rules: Base Oven Cabinet - Cutouts must be specified. - Top & bottom rails are equal size.
width is standard.. - Two equal sized drawers.
- Maximum cutout height is 28 1/2
BMWB _
BWD__WD
RF _
1 1/2 X
TOHH
3 X varies
RTK (toe kick)
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW: ________ x TOHH:__________ Rules: Warming Drawer Cabinet w/ Drawers -Cut-outs must be specified -3” mid-rail below cut-out
TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ Rules: Base Microwave Built-In - Cutouts must be specified for upper opening. - Height of drawer opening varies with the cutout sizes. - Finished interior is optional.
1 1/2 X
TOHW
Cabinet Height
TOHH
1 1/2 X
TOHH
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
TOHW
oven cutouts
must be specified specified can be
FTO
oven cutouts must be specified
TOHW
TOHW
FTO (if given) 14" std.
RTK (toe kick)
1 1/2 X
equal openings
TOHH
TOHH
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
equal openings
1 1/2 X
TOHW
oven cutouts must be specified
TOHW 3 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
9" Std. or TOHH
1 1/2 X
BWD _
BWDM
10 X glued up stock RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ FTO: ______ (optional) Rules: Range Front Rules: Range Front -Cut-outs bespecified. specified - Cutoutsmust can be
- Maximum cutout height is 20 1/2
Oct. 2010
Heartland Base Oven Cut-Out Form DATE: ___/___/___
WO#: _____________ DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
NOTES r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions. r See catalog for pricing and additional information
PLEASE FAX, EMAIL OR ATTACH FORM AS PDF TO YOUR ORDER IN THE PRICING PROGRAM.
CT2D
FSB
FSOH
OH
Cabinet Height
Cabinet Height
Cabinet Height
FSOW
OW
RDW
46 1/2”
TOHW
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width FSOW:_______ x FSOH:_______ Rules: Farm Sink Base -Cut-outs or solid top rail width must be specified.
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width OW:_______ x OH:_______ or TRW:_________ Rules: 2 Drawer Cooktop Cabinet -Cut-outs or solid top rail width must be specified.
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW:_______ Rules: Raised Dishwasher -Cut-out width must be specified; cut-out height is 34 1/2” & cannot be changed. -Specify how far up the removable drawer front using DWR EXT.
Oct. 2010
Heartland Base Oven Cut-Out Form DATE: ___/___/___
WO#: _____________ DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
NOTES r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions. r See catalog for pricing and additional information
PLEASE FAX, EMAIL OR ATTACH FORM AS PDF TO YOUR ORDER IN THE PRICING PROGRAM.
CT2D
FSB
FSOH
OH
Cabinet Height
Cabinet Height
Cabinet Height
FSOW
OW
RDW
46 1/2”
TOHW
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width FSOW:_______ x FSOH:_______ Rules: Farm Sink Base -Cut-outs or solid top rail width must be specified.
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width OW:_______ x OH:_______ or TRW:_________ Rules: 2 Drawer Cooktop Cabinet -Cut-outs or solid top rail width must be specified.
RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width TOHW:_______ Rules: Raised Dishwasher -Cut-out width must be specified; cut-out height is 34 1/2” & cannot be changed. -Specify how far up the removable drawer front using DWR EXT.
Oct. 2010
Heartland Tall Oven Cut-Out Form
NOTES
WO#: _____________
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time.
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions.
DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________
PLEASE FAX IN WITH YOUR ORDER
3X
3X 18" is std. or TOHH
TOHH 1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
3X
oven cutouts must be specified
oven cutouts must be specified
W - 3" is std. or TOHW 1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
Height changes in this opening
Height changes in this opening
3X Finished Interior
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
______”
OVD_ _
1 1/2 X Height changes in this opening
Top Oven Hole Height TOHH
TOHW
TOHH
27 361/2
Bottom Oven Hole Height BOHH ______”
Floor to Oven FTO
27 1/2
3X 5
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
Cabinet Width
Cabinet Width
OV2D_ _
OVMWD_ _
Rules: Oven Open-Shelf - OVOS Rules:shelf OvenisOpen-Shelf -Open 3” less than cabinet - Open 3" less than cabinet width byshelf 18”T,isbut cut-outs can be width by 18"T, but cutouts can be specified. specified. -Height of lower opening is 36” unless - Height of lower opening is 36" FTO is given. -Open has finished interior unlessshelf FTO area is given. and a 1/4” back. - Open shelf area has finished interior -Butt doorspanel. are standard. and back - Butt doors are standard. Rules: Tall Oven - OV -Cut-outs must be specified. Rules: of Talllower Ovenopening is 27 1/2” -Height - Cutouts must be specified. unless FTO is given. Height of lower opening is 27 1/2" -Butt doors are standard. unless FTO is given. Butt doors are standard. Rules: Oven with Drawer - OVD -Cut-outs must be specified. -FTO is 13 1/2”, but can be increased. Rules: Tall Oven with Drawer -Butt doorsmust are be standard. - Cutouts specified. - Drawer opening is 5" unless FTO is Rules: given. Oven with 2 Drawers - OV2D -Cut-outs must specified. - Butt doors arebe standard. -FTO is 20”, but can be increased. -Butt doors are standard.
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
______” Height changes in this opening
Height changes in this opening
3X
3X
microwave oven cutouts cutouts mustbe be must specified specified
TOHH
TOHW 3X
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
TOHH
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
oven cutouts must be specified
oven cutouts must be specified BOHH
TOHW BOHW 5 1 1/2 X 5 1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
3X 5 1 1/2 X RTK (toe kick)
Cabinet Width
FTO (if given) 13 1/2" std.
3X FTO (if given) 20" std.
Cabinet Height
TOHW
FTO (if given) 13 1/2" std.
______”
(if given) FTO FTO (if given), 36 is standard
3X FTO given), 45 36"isisstandard standard FTO (if (if given),
Bottom Oven Hole Width BOHW
OV_ _
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
OVOS_ _
______”
1 1/2 X
Top Oven Hole Width TOHW
1 1/2 X
Cut-Outs
r See catalog for pricing and additional information
SALESPERSON: ___________________
1 1/2 X
DATE: ___/___/___
Rules: Oven Tall Oven with Two Drawers Rules: & Micro. - Cutouts must be specified. with Drawer - OVMWD Drawer openings are 5" unless FTO -Cut-outs must be specified. is given. -FTO is 13 1/2”, but can be Butt doors are standard. increased. -Butt doors are standard. -Microwave opening has a 1/4” back Oven & Micro. with Drawer &Rules: Finished interior. - Both cutouts must be specified. - Drawer opening is 5" unless FTO is given. - Butt doors are standard.
Oct. 2010
HT Tall Oven Heartland TallCut-Out Oven Cut-Out Form Form DATE: ___/___/___
WO#: _____________
NOTES r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time.
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________
r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions. r See catalog for pricing and additional information
SALESPERSON: ___________________ Cut-Outs Top Oven Hole Width TOHW
PLEASE FAX IN WITH YOUR ORDER
OVMW2D_ _
______”
OVMWWD_ _
11/2X
Top Oven Hole Height TOHH
OVEN & MICROWAVE WITH 2 DRAWERS - OVMW2D
11/2X
Rules: • Cut-outs must be specified • FTO is 20”, but can be increased • Microwave opening has a 1/4” back & finished interior • Oven opening has no back • Butt doors are standard
Height changes inthis opening
Height changes inthis opening
______” 3X
3X
microwave ov encutouts cutouts mustbe be must specified specified
TOHH
Bottom Oven Hole Height BOHH
OVEN & MICROWAVE WITH WARMING DRAWER - OVMWWD Rules: • All 3 cut-outs must be specified • The warming drawer opening must be specified & will determine the FTO • Butt doors are standard
1 1/2 X
3X ovencutouts must be specified
BOHH BOHH
BOHW BOHW
______”
3X FTO(if(ifgiven) given) FTO 20” standard 20" std.
5 11/2 X RTK(toekick)
3X BOHW WDHW
Cabinet Width
Cabinet Width
OVWD_ _
Height WDHH
OVWBR_ _
11/2X Height changes inthis opening
______”
3X
TOHW
TOHH
WDHH BOHH
FTO(ifVaries FTO given) w/ Cutout
TOHW
3X
Cabinet Width
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
TOHH
11/2 X RTK(toekick)
OVEN WITH WIDE BOTTOM RAIL - OVWBR Rules: • Cut-outs must be specified • FTO must be specified • Butt doors are standard
ovencutouts must be specified
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
ovencutouts must be specified
BOHW WDHW
Rules: • Cut-outs must be specified • The warming drawer opening must be specified & will determine the FTO • Butt doors are standard
Height changes inthis opening
3X
Floor to Oven FTO
OVEN WITH WARMING DRAWER - OVWD
11/2X
1 1/2 X
______”
BOHH WDHH
11/2 X RTK(toekick)
RTK(toekick)
FTO (if Required given)
Warming Drawer Opening Width WDHW
w/ cutout
11/2 X
FTO(ifvaries FTO given)
5
______”
TOHH
TOHW
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
3X
Cabinet Height
TOHW
1 1/2 X
______”
Cabinet Height
Bottom Oven Hole Width BOHW
microwave ovencutouts cutouts must be must be specified specified
Cabinet Width
Oct. 2010
Heartland Wall Microwave Cut-Out Form WO#: _____________
DATE: ___/___/___
NOTES
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time.
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions. r See catalog for pricing and additional information
PLEASE FAX, EMAIL OR ATTACH FORM AS PDF TO YOUR ORDER IN THE PRICING PROGRAM.
MWB__ __ 3X
1 1/2 X
17 1/4" Std. or TOHH
TOHH
TOHW 1 1/2 X
TOHW 1 1/2 X
Cabinet Width
Cabinet Width
TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______
TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______
Rules: Microwave Wall - Microwave shelf protrudes 7" from frame - Use of a trim kit is optional, specify TOHW & TOHH. When specifying frame cut-out include 3/4" for protruding shelf. - Microwave opening is 17 1/4" tall unless otherwise stated.
Rules: Microwave Wall Built-In - Cabinet is 21" deep. - Interior of the microwave opening is NOT FINISHED and requires the use of a trim kit, specify TOHW & TOHH. - CUTOUTS MUST BE SPECIFIED.
MWCD__ __
MWCT__ __
3X
Finished Interior is standard
18" Std. or TOHH
TOHW 3X 5 1 1/2 X
Cabinet Width TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ Rules: Microwave Wall Counter Top - Cabinet is 21" Deep - Microwave opening is 18" tall unless otherwise stated. - Use of trim kit is optional, supply TOHW & TOHH.
1 1/2 X
3X 1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
3X
Rules: Microwave Wall Counter Top -Microwave opening is 18” tall & 3” less than cabinet width unless otherwise stated. -Use of a trim kit is optional.
Cabinet Height
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
1 1/2 X
3X
Rules: Microwave Wall Built-In -Cabinet is 21” deep. -Interior of the microwave opening is NOT FINISHED and requires the use of a trim kit, specify TOHW & TOHH. -Cut-outs must be specified.
Finished Interior is standard
Rules: Microwave Wall Corner Diagonal -Butt doors are standard. -Microwave opening is 26 3/4” wide unless otherwise stated. -Use of a trim kit is optional.
1 1/2 X
Protruding Microwave Shelf
Rules: Microwave Wall -Microwave shelf protrudes 7” from frame. -Use of a trim kit is optional. When specifying frame cut-out include 3/4” for protruding shelf. -Microwave opening is 17 1/4” tall & 3” less than cabinet width unless otherwise stated.
1 1/2 X
1 1/2 X
3X 1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
3X
1 1/2 X
Cabinet Height
MW__ __
TOHH
TOHW 1 1/2 X
Frame Width TOHW: _______ X TOHH: _______ Rules: Wall Microwave Corner Diagonal - Butt doors are standard. - Microwave opening is 18" tall unless otherwise stated. - Use of trim kit is optional, specify TOHW & TOHH.
Oct. 2010
Heartland Wall Microwave Cut-Out Form Wall Microwave Cut-Out Form WO#: _____________
DATE: ___/___/___
NOTES
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time.
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
r Maximum cut-out is 1 1/2” less than cabinet width. See cabinet description in the Heartland Catalog for exceptions.
DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________
r See catalog for pricing and additional information
SALESPERSON: ___________________
PLEASE FAX, EMAIL OR ATTACH FORM AS PDF TO YOUR ORDER IN THE PRICING PROGRAM.
MWB__AG (D)
MWCD__AG (D) Rules: Microwave Built-In w/ APG -Interior of the microwave opening is NOT FINISHED and requires the use of a trim kit, specify TOHW & TOHH. -Cut-outs must be specified.
1 1/2”
3”
Rules: Microwave Wall Corner Diagonal w/ APG -Butt doors are standard. -Microwave opening is 26 3/4” unless otherwise stated. -Use of a trim kit is optional.
1 1/2”
TOHW
1 1/2”
TOHH
1 1/2”
Cabinet Height
1 1/2”
TOHH
1 1/2”
Cabinet Height
3” 3”
TOHW 3”
3”
Cabinet Width
Cabinet Width
TOHW:_____ X TOHH:_____
TOHW:_____ X TOHH:_____
WCDC__AG (D) Rules: WCDC w/ APG & Cut-out -Interior of the microwave opening is NOT FINISHED and requires the use of a trim kit, specify TOHW & TOHH. -Cut-outs must be specified.
1 1/2”
TOHH 1 1/2”
1 1/2”
Cabinet Height
3”
TOHW 3”
Cabinet Width
TOHW:_____ X TOHH:_____ Oct. 2010
Co-Op Advertising Claim Form Custom Cupboards Co-Op Advertising Policy: Custom Cupboards will reimburse up to half of 1% of your previous fiscal year’s invoiced sales. Claims are subject to the guidelines outlined below.
DEALERSHIP:________________________
DEALER CODE:_______-_______
Name: _____________________________
DATE: ___/___/___
r
Magazine / Newspaper
r
Sample Doors / Sales Aids
r
Broadcast (TV, Radio)
r
Direct Mail
r
Billboards
r
Open House / In-House Promotion / Home Show
A full-page tear sheet showing the publication name and date must be submitted for approval. If the same ad runs more than one time, you only need to submit one tear-sheet per request as long as the invoice clearly states how many days the ad ran. A legible copy of the paid invoice for the ad(s) must be submitted.
We will reimburse up to 25% of your total order on sales aids, sample doors, and door store doors. Once you are invoiced for your sales aids, fax in a copy of invoice to receive credit.
A legible copy of the paid invoice showing the net amount of the ad(s) and the dates and times it aired must be submitted. A video tape of a television commercial ad must be submitted.
A copy of the direct mail piece, a copy of the paid invoice for printing, postage costs, and certification of mailing, showing quantity, date and type of mail must be submitted. Production charges such as typography, layout, paste-up, and artwork are not eligible.
A photo of the billboard and legible copy of the paid invoice showing the date the sign was installed must be submitted.
Documentation must include: photographs of the event or CCI representation, photographs of your display, copy of paid invoices for event items.
REIMBURSEMENT INSTRUCTIONS: Mail completed copy and requested materials to: Custom Cupboards, Inc. Attn:Tina Blasi 3738 S. Norman Wichita, KS 67215
Office Use Only
Phone: (316)529-3431; ext. 158 Fax: (316)219-2798
Co-Op Available:
___________
Co-Op Used:
___________
Co-Op Remaining: ___________ Jan. 2013 8
Please fax to (316)219-2798
STEP 1: ____ I agree to pay the VPDOO one time set-up fee charged to prepare our logo for use with the Epilog Laser Engraver. I understand that I will receive a sample to approve before the logo is used on our first order. ______________________________
_______________________________
Dealership
Signature
STEP 2 (to be completed upon receipt of sample): ____ The logo sample I received has been approved for use in production ____ The logo sample I received requires the following modifications:
____ The logo sample I received has NOT been approved. Please explain:
______________________________
_______________________________
Dealership
Signature
PLEASE DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE – OFFICE USE ONLY ___/___/___ Custom Cupboards received logo ___/___/___ Custom Cupboards received signed payment agreement ___/___/___ Custom Cupboards sent sample to customer for approval ___/___/___ Custom Cupboards received approval from customer Phone: (316)529-3431 Customer Service Fax: (316)529-1738
Sales & Marketing Fax: (316)219-2798 ESO Department Fax: (316)858-5295 9
New Product Request Thank you for considering Custom Cupboards, Inc. for your product idea. If you would like to submit an idea, please complete and submit the following pages via mail or fax to the address below. Please include any photos, drawings or samples that may help us understand your invention. Mail your completed requests and submission form to: CUSTOM CUPBOARDS, INC. Attn: Todd Johnson 3738 S. Norman Wichita, KS 67215 WRGG#&XVWRP&XSERDUGV FRP Or fax to: (316)219-2798
Custom Cupboards, Inc. 3738 S. Norman Wichita, KS 67215 Phone: (316)529-3431; ext. 110 Fax: (316)219-2798 todd@customcupboards.com
Oct. 2010
10
NEW PRODUCT REQUEST
If you cannot answer a question, simply leave blank, otherwise do your best to answer all questions.
1. Product Name: ______________________________________________________________ 2. Is this a: NEW PRODUCT PRODUCT MODIFICATION 3. Describe the product: (If drawings are available, include with submission. Be as detailed as possible – including how used.) __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ 4. How should the product be used? _______________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ 5. Does anyone currently make this product? Yes No. If yes, who? _________________ 6. Why do we need this product? __________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 7. When would you like to see this product available? __________________________________ 8. How often do you think you will sell this product? ___________________________________ 9. Which product lines should offer this product? Heartland 5HYROD 10. If there is outsourced product / hardware that may be needed to produce this product, do you know the origin? ____________________________________________________________ 11. What range of sizes should we offer (if applicable)? ________________________________
Requestor’s Name: _________________________________________
Date: ____/____/____
Dealership: ____________________________________________________________________ Send your completed request to:
CUSTOM CUPBOARDS, INC. Attn: Todd Johnson 3738 S. Norman Wichita, KS 67215
WRGG#FXVWRPFXSERDUGV FRP Fax: (316)219-2798
*Please include this form along with the drawing and or photos of the product you are requesting
Oct. 2010
11
NEW PRODUCT REQUEST
Please draw or attach a picture of the proposed product below.
Oct. 2010
12
CUSTOM CUPBOARDS, INC. POLICY ON SUBMISSION OF NEW PRODUCT DISCLOSURES 1. Each year many people contact us with suggestions for new products and accessories for existing products which they consider to be new, practical and valuable. The following information explains something about the problems we encounter in evaluating the ideas submitted to us by our dealers and also sets out our policy regarding consideration of such ideas. Please read this carefully. 2. In our continuing effort to improve product quality, maintain our competitive market position and increase efficiency, our engineers are constantly working to develop ideas for new products, additional features and better methods of manufacturing. As a result of this extensive effort, some of the suggestions which come to us, from your requests, duplicate or are similar to, ideas which we have either already developed or have already considered. 3. Any disclosure made to us must be in writing. All communications relating to the submission of ideas to us should be marked to the attention of Jack Campbell at the previously mentioned address. Once we have received the request, someone other than Jack Campbell may contact you for further questions. 4. While we appreciate the interest you have shown, our experience has shown that we are not in a position to develop or use all of the suggestions submitted. In this case, we will notify the submitter that we are not in a position to further consider the suggestion offered to us.
Oct. 2010
13
Quote Request Form 3738 South Norman ▪ Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.529.1738 ▪ CustomCupboards.com
Dealer ID#
Date:
Dealer Name:
Quote Requested By: PO#/Job ID
Product Line:
SELECT ONE
Heartland
Revola
Account Manager:
Urgency:
SELECT ONE
Same Day
Next Day
THIS COMPLETED AND APPROVED FORM MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE ORDER WHEN SUBMITTED
MUST PROVIDE CORRECT DIMENSIONS AND BREAKOUTS OF CABINET
OFFICE USE ONLY BELOW THIS LINE
Quote # PLEASE REFERENCE QUOTE # WHEN SUBMITTING THESE ITEMS
Approved
Rejected
Conditions of approval / Reasons for Rejection:
PRICE QUOTE NOTE: All price quotes are for base price only. Be sure to add for any applicable upcharges such as, door/drawer front style, hinge, interior, wood, finish, etc. See attached page for line entry and base pricing. Price good for 90 days from date stated above.
CONSUMER INFORMATION FORM PO# ______________________ Congratulations on your decision to purchase finished cabinetry from Custom Cupboards. With over twenty-five years of experience in crafting fine cabinetry, we are certain that you will be pleased with your purchase for many years to come. All of us at Custom Cupboards want you to be a truly satisfied customer, therefore, we take this opportunity to explain the characteristics of the finish that you have selected. We stress the differences you may experience with these finishes and require this letter of agreement to ensure that you are properly educated on the inherent nature and characteristics involved with these finishes and woods. The window of acceptance on special finishes is naturally wider than our standard finished products. Adding or deleting just one step can dramatically alter the final look.
PLEASE READ AND INITIAL ALL THAT PERTAIN TO THE FINISH YOU SELECTED: I. GLAZE FINISHES: Glazed finishes are the result of a hand-applied process before the final topcoat. Due to the nature of this procedure, each individual kitchen will have its own set of characteristics i.e. no two doors or drawer fronts will have the same look. Depending upon the base color, some glazes may tend to create a haze on the surface. The glazing will have a tendency to be more dominant or “hang-up” in areas of the cabinetry with sharp edges, corners, and recesses. For example, the exact same finish on cabinetry that has intricate doors and ornate moldings will appear darker than an uncomplicated shaker style kitchen. Glaze is not applied to the backs of doors and drawer fronts. ______Initials
V. AGING (DISTRESSING): Aging (Distressing) is the creation of an artistic touch applied by skilled artisans. The various methods that are employed to achieve this aged look lend each kitchen its own uniquely individual characteristics. Due to the nature of these procedures, each kitchen, and more specifically each individual door and/or drawer front, will have their own identity i.e. no two doors or drawer fronts will have the same look. Adding or removing any of these processes from a finish will drastically alter the final appearance of that finish. Aging (Distressing) is not applied to the backs of the doors and drawer fronts. ______Initials
II. NATURAL AND LIGHT FINISHES: Custom Cupboards cabinetry features select Alder, Knotty Alder, Cherry, Rustic Cherry, Hickory, Maple, Oak, Knotty Oak, Beech, Rustic Beech, and Quarter-Sawn Oak woods and veneers. These woods vary in color. Shades of white, brown, black, red, yellow, and even green are noticeable in lighter finishes. Mineral streaks, wormholes, and nature’s imperfections will be more prevalent. Grain and texture will vary from “even” to “wild”. These are normal characteristics found in wood. ______Initials
VI. PAINTED / OPAQUE FINISHES: Custom Cupboards uses only the highest quality woods and veneers. The inherent character of wood causes it to expand and contract in an unpredictable manner, depending upon the surrounding temperature and humidity. The opaque varnish is suspended over the top of the wood and cannot expand and contract, therefore, the surface may show small hairline fractures or “cracks” on the joints and some flat surfaces. You must be prepared to accept this risk and understand that no warranty can insure against this. All other parts of our warranty will remain in effect. Our opaque finishes do not allow the wood grain to show through. Depending on the type of paint ordered your cabinets will receive one or two coats of primer, a coat of paint, and a topcoat. ______Initials
III. CRACKLE FINISHES: Crackling is a non-controllable finishing process that can range from very subtle to a very heavy and extreme cracking appearance. Custom Cupboards cannot guarantee the consistency of this process, therefore, inconsistency in the size, shape and amount of crackle is not cause for replacement. Crackle is not applied to the backs of the doors and drawer fronts. ______Initials
VII. SEMI-OPAQUE FINISHES: Our semi-opaque finishes vary from Paints and Opaque Finishes in that a certain degree of the wood’s natural beauty is designed to be visible. In most cases nail holes, joints, and minor surface defects are not puttied in order to allow the texture of the wood to show through and create an aged look. The amount of visible grain is affected by the texture of the wood and may not exactly match the sample you have viewed. ______Initials
IV. UNFINISHED CABINETRY: Custom Cupboards cannot be responsible for your own finishing or the results of others. Our finish is designed to provide protection from the drastic changes in the moisture content of the wood. These changes can cause warping of the wood, cracking and splitting, as well as moisture spots. Therefore, our warranty will apply only to workmanship and will assume no responsibility for the finish or areas related. ______Initials
I have reviewed the foregoing and have advised my customer on the finish they have selected. It is understood that the finish application is an artistic touch and find the above inherent variations in wood and finish to be acceptable. I agree not to hold Custom Cupboards responsible in the event that I find these variations to be less desirable than I expected as so explained in detail to my customer. Consumer Signature: _______________________________________________ Date: _____/_____/_____ Dealer Signature: __________________________________________________ Date: _____/_____/_____
We call your attention to these variations because you have probably seen only a small sampling of our product. These variations will create a completely different effect on an entire kitchen, bath or living area. We have always been, and will continue to be, accountable to produce products that are within our window of acceptance that meet our high standards. It is important that you realize that neither Custom Cupboards nor any dealer of our products can be held responsible for the type or degree of variation that can occur in these products. Even by returning the sample that you ordered does not guarantee an exact match of this finish. If you consider any of these variations to be unacceptable, then you may wish to choose a different finish. These characteristics and variations are not cause for replacement. Oct. 2010 15
Dealer Supplied Outsourced Product 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Following is a list of OUTSOURCED product(s) that I, (the dealer) have ordered and will be sending to you (CCI) to be finished.
Dealer Name PO#
WO#
Manufacturer
QTY
Expected Delivery Date
Tracking#
Description
Manufacturer
QTY
Expected Delivery Date
Tracking#
Description
Manufacturer
QTY
Expected Delivery Date
Tracking#
Description
NOTE TO DEALER If ordering outsourced product for multiple PO#’s and/or rooms, PLEASE use a separate form for each. IF CCI WILL BE ATTACHING OUTSOURCED ITEMS AT THE FACTORY, PLEASE INCLUDE A DRAWING OF HOW TO ATTACH. Customer may choose to proceed with confirmation by removing finish outsourced product “Finish-Step” line item, and submitting on separate order when ready to proceed. Color is subject to variation with any order when ran at separate time. FORMS>DealerSuppliedOutsourcedProduct
DISPLAY DISCOUNT REQUEST FORM This form must be filled out completely for consideration of a discount. PLEASE FILL OUT ALL INFORMATION BELOW:
Work Order #____________________
PO #: ______________________
r
5% rebate program on orders received, after display has been delivered, for a period of 1 year. (In dealer showroom only)
r
15% flat discount program. A one time additional 15% discount will be taken off the invoice for the Display cabinet. (In dealer showroom only)
r
10% Model home program
r
5% Model home program / Parade of Homes
r
Other (explain below)
Other discount request:
___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Dealership Address:
Model Homes Only: Opening Date:___/___/___ Closing Date:___/___/___
Model Home Address:
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
________________________________________________
_____ / _____ / _____
________________________________________________
_____ / _____ / _____
Dealer Signature
V.P. of Sales & Marketing Signature
Date
Date
Discount does not apply to the freight charges. A detailed layout must be submitted for review by VP of Sales & Marketing.
Notes: ________________________________________________________ CC: VP of Sales & Marketing Customer Service Representative Sales Representative
________________________________________________________
17
DISPLAY GUIDELINES: Listed below are various display/discount programs that we offer.
1.
5% REBATE PROGRAM:
2.
15% FLAT DISCOUNT PROGRAM:
3.
10% MODEL HOME PROGRAM:
4.
5% MODEL HOME / PARADE HOME PROGRAM:
*The invoice for the display will be paid back to the dealer by issuing a 5% rebate on each order processed AF TER the display order has been produced and invoiced. This 5% rebate will cover all orders within a one-year period or until the display cost has been recovered, whichever comes first. The REQUEST FOR DISPLAY APPROVAL form and detailed layout must be submitted and reviewed by a Custom Cupboards Marketing Rep. and V.P. of Sales and Marketing for approval. ***This display must be located in the dealership retail showroom and manned for daily operations. Note: If approved, note in comment area of order: Display = 5%. *A one time 15% discount will be taken off the invoice for the display of cabinetry. The REQUEST FOR DISPLAY APPROVAL form and detailed layout must be submitted and reviewed by a Custom Cupboards Marketing Rep and V.P. of Sales and Marketing for approval. The display must be located in the dealership retail showroom and manned for daily operations. Note: If approved, note in comment area of order: Display = 15%.
*This is an additional 10% for a model home that meets the following requirements. *Open to the public on a daily basis. *Must be open for a minimum of 3 months. *Have Custom Cupboards literature and logo visible to the public. This is an extension of your showroom so it must be manned for daily operations. The REQUEST FOR DISPLAY APPROVAL form and a detailed layout must be submitted and reviewed by a Custom Cupboards Marketing Rep. and V.P. of Sales and Marketing for approval. The times and dates must be submitted for the model home. A Custom Cupboards Sales Rep. will visit during normal operations of the model home.
*This is an additional 5% for a model home that meets the following requirements. *Open to the public on a daily basis. *Must be open for a minimum of 1 month or more. *Have Custom Cupboards literature and logo visible to the public. This is an extension of your showroom so it must be manned for daily operations. The REQUEST FOR DISPLAY APPROVAL form and a detailed layout must be submitted and reviewed by a Custom Cupboards Marketing Rep. and V.P. of Sales and Marketing for approval. The times and dates must be submitted for the Model Home/Parade Home. A Custom Cupboards Sales Rep. will visit during normal operations of the model home.
***NOTE: Custom Cupboards, Inc. reserves the right to question or adjust style and color choice of displays. Custom Cupboards, Inc. reserves the right to limit the total dollars that qualify for either display plan.
PRODUCTS INCLUDED IN DISPLAYS: HEARTLAND DISCOVERY REVOLÄ€
18
EXPEDITED SERVICE ORDER DATE:___/___/___
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS:
Fax to: (316) 858-5295
Dealer Code: ___ ___ ___ - ___ ___ ___ Dealership: _______________________ Ordered By: ______________________ ORIGINAL WO#__________________ PO#______________________________
r GROUND r NEXT TRUCK
r NEXT DAY r COMMON CARRIER
SHIP TO:
_____________________________ _____________________________ _____________________________ _______________________________
EESO’S ARE FOR JOB COMPLETION ONLY. PLEASE INCLUDE ORIGINAL WO#S FOR BETTER SERVICE.
WOOD: ________________________________ FINISH: ________________________________ HINGE: ________________________________ UPPER DOOR-EDGE: ____________-_____ LOWER DOOR/EDGE: ___________-_____ DRAWER FRONT: _______________
LINE #
QTY
ITEM #
HINGE
INTERIOR: _____________________________ GUIDE TYPE: ___________________________ rLOGOS rFISL DOORS rFISL DRWRS
FIN. END
COMMENTS
LIST PRICE
COMMENTS: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Oct. 2010 19
JOBSITE DELIVERY FORM
WO# _________________
Customer Name: ____________________________
PO# ______________________
After Hours # (Very Important): (_______)_______-__________
Jobsite Address: _________________________________________
City: _____________________ State: _________
*****ZIP CODE:________________ MUST SUPPLY - VERY IMPORTANT*****
Map to the Jobsite: (List the major crossroads and place an “X” at the jobsite location) INTERNET MAPS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE, MUST BE HAND DRAWN
Short instructions to find the jobsite: __________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________
Jobsite requirements: •
• •
The dealer must evaluate the delivery route to the jobsite, insure accessibility, and notify local authorities if necessary. The jobsite must meet local and state guidelines for delivery vehicles of this size. The evaluation is to include bridge weight limits of not less than 48,000 lbs. gross weight minimum, low hanging obstacles (such as overpasses, power lines / cables, & tree limbs) with a minimum height of 14 feet required. The jobsite must be able to accommodate a 53’ semi tractor-trailer with no dead ends or cul’de’sacs. If the driver deems the jobsite undeliverable, due to failure to meet any one of the above requirements, or due to current weather and/or road conditions, the job will be delivered to the dealer’s warehouse or to the dealer’s truck. However, if a jobsite delivery is attempted or if the order changes from a jobsite to a warehouse delivery after the truck has been loaded, the jobsite fee will still apply. It is mandatory that the dealer and/or sales person meet the driver at the showroom or other agreed upon convenient location and lead the driver to the jobsite.
Signature: ___________________________________________________________
I have read the above and agree to the terms of this jobsite and acknowledge that failure to meet the above criteria may result in the loss of jobsite privileges on future orders.
Please fill out the following: • Your Name: ____________________________________ •
Name of person driver is to contact: __________________
•
Phone # of above contact: ________________________ or
Date: ______/______/______
•
Can the jobsite be accessed by a 53’ semi-trailer with a combined tractor length of 70-75 feet? Y / N
•
Are there any cul’de’sacs, dead ends, low-hanging branches, or any other obstructions? Y / N
•
Will someone meet the driver at a convenient location and take him to the jobsite? Y / N
•
Will there be people at the jobsite to help unload? Y / N
_______________________
Oct. 2010 20
Color Block Order Form 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Our standard finishes are shown on 3” x 7 1/2” color blocks. A color block represents a small sampling of the finish on a single piece of wood. Due to the inherent characteristics in grain and texture of wood, slight variations in finish can be expected. The Color Block Information Form is available to help you provide a better understanding of finished wood product to your customer. This form can be found in the forms section of the website. Color blocks are not available in knotty or rustic woods.
Full Sets Full Set of 168 Standard Color Blocks (Includes Alder, Beech, Cherry, Maple, Oak, Hickory, Quarter-Sawn Oak and Paint) CLR BLK SET - $504 List Full Set of 22 Alder Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKA - $66 List
Full Set of 22 Oak Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKO - $66 List
Full Set of 19 Beech Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKB - $57 List
Full Set of 21 Hickory Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKH - $63 List
Full Set of 22 Cherry Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKC - $66 List
Full Set of 22 Quarter-Sawn Oak Standard Color Blocks COLORBLOCKQS - $66 List
Full Set of 22 Maple Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKM - $66 List
Full Set of 18 Paint Standard Color Blocks COLOR BLOCKP - $54 List
Individual Color Blocks
Display Your Color Blocks
Standard Color Block COLOR BLOCK - $3 List Order an individual block from the standard color block set using the selection boxes below
Color Block Sample Box SAMPLE BOX - $40 List Dovetail sample box, laser engraved with Custom Cupboards logo, holds 84 color blocks
Standard Color Block w/ Glaze GLAZE BB - $7 List Order an individual block from the standard color block set and add one of four standard glazes using the selection boxes below • • • •
1
Midnight Frost (MFG) Van Dyke Brown (VDB) Burgundy (BURG) Pewter (PTG)
Wood: __________________________
Wood: __________________________
3
Wood: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Select glaze if applicable
Select glaze if applicable
Select glaze if applicable
MFG
4
2
VDB
BURG
PTG
Wood: __________________________
MFG
5
VDB
BURG
PTG
Wood: __________________________
MFG
6
VDB
BURG
PTG
Wood: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Color: __________________________
Select glaze if applicable
Select glaze if applicable
Select glaze if applicable
MFG
VDB
Shipping Instructions Dealer ID
BURG
Ground
PTG
MFG
2nd Day
Next Day
VDB
BURG
PTG
MFG
VDB
BURG
PTG
Ship to
Date
Dealer Name Ordered By FORMS>ColorBlockForm v2-12
PO# * Sales Aids cannot be shipped on company trucks without prior approval
Color Block
INFORMATION FORM
Wood is a natural material; expect variations in finish due to the inherent characteristics in grain and texture of wood. A COLOR BLOCK represents one piece of wood. Cabinets and cabinet doors are made of multiple pieces of wood which will vary slightly from piece to piece. The COLOR BLOCKS shown below were manufactured and finished at the same time, using the same processes and materials. The slight variations in color are strictly due to the characteristics of wood. To have a better idea as to the overall look of your kitchen, we strongly recommend you view a sample door. We call your attention to these variations, as COLOR BLOCKS represent a small sampling of an order.
IMPORTANT — I have reviewed the foregoing and have advised my customer on the finish they selected. It is understood that the finish application is an artistic process and find the variations in wood and finish to be acceptable. I agree not to hold Custom Cupboards responsible in the event that I find these variations to be less desirable than I expected as so explained in detail. (FAX FRIENDLY FORM ON BACK) CUSTOMER SIGNATURE:
DATE:
DEALER SIGNATURE:
DATE: Š 2012 Custom Cupboards, Inc. All rights reserved.
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 SM>MM>AC>ColorBlockInformationForm
316.529.3431
Fax 316.219.2798
www.CustomCupboards.com
Color Block Waiver Form 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.529.1738 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Wood is a natural material; expect variations in finish due to the inherent characteristics in grain and texture of wood. A COLOR BLOCK represents one piece of wood. Cabinets and cabinet doors are made of multiple pieces of wood which will vary slightly from piece to piece. The COLOR BLOCKS shown in the “Color Block Information Form” were manufactured and finished at the same time, using the same processes and materials. The slight variations in color are strictly due to the characteristics of wood. To have a better idea as to the overall look of your kitchen, we strongly recommend you view a sample door. We call your attention to these variations, as COLOR BLOCKS represent a small sampling of an order.
IMPORTANT —
I have reviewed the foregoing and have advised my customer on the finish they
selected. It is understood that the finish application is an artistic process and find the variations in wood and finish to be acceptable. I agree not to hold Custom Cupboards responsible in the event that I find these variations to be less desirable than I expected as so explained in detail.
I have read and understand the “Color Block Information Form”
WO#:
Color:
Dealer Name:
Dealer Code:
Dealer Signature:
Date:
Customer Name: Customer Signature:
SM>FORMS>ColorWaiver
Date:
Dealer Starter Kit 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Welcome to the Custom Cupboards family! We pride ourselves on our innovative customer service initiatives that benefit both our dealers and their customers. We look forward to working with you!
What’s Included A
B
168 Standard Color Blocks
Sample Box
E
C
9 Edge Profile Blocks w/laminated SS/CTE Chart
F
D
1 set of Discovery, Heartland & Revola Catalogs PDF’s available online
G
H
Pegs
1 set of Discovery, Heartland, Expressions, Revola PB/PLY interior blocks
Nails
1 set of 11 mirror molding blocks
E
Flat
1 peg / nail door sample
F
Satin
Sheen Sample
G
H
Beech
Birch
Maple
1 set drawer box logo sample (You can customize with your logo)
Distressing sample
I
25 Door Style Library brochures. Over 60 different door styles. PDF available online
Library of Color book. Over 200 door images. PDF available online
J
Dealer Only access to our website
Silver
White
1 set of sink mat samples
K
Dedicated Account Manager Contact
L
20 Sample Doors
Dealer Starter Kit 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
L
Dealer Starter Doors
Choose 20 Doors from these preselected door style/finish combinations (shown) & available door store selections
Espresso Bean
Tattered Fence
Cracked Pepper
Huron
Chisholm Beaded-15 Maple
Mesa Beadboard-60 Hickory
Salem-66 Alder
Alcott-13 Oak
Charleston-66 Alder
French Vanilla
Espresso WB
Sienna VDB
Bark
Sandalwood
Bark
Ralston Flat-60 MDF Paint
Clairmont-65 Beech
Taos-65 Cherry
Modesto Mission-65 Alder
Salem-10 Rustic Beech
Ralston Beadboard-60 Beech
Dolphin Grey
Cranbrook
Snickerdoodle
Café
Black Forest
Sea Cliff Heights
Spiced Cider
Stafford-10 MDF Paint
Stafford-15 Alder
Valley Forge Beaded w/AM2-10 Knotty Alder
Vallejo Mission-65 Beech
Charleston w/AM3-10 Cherry
Timberline-65 MDF Paint
Chisholm Beaded-15 Rustic Beech
Café
Natural
River Rock
Butter Pecan
Canyon Sunset
Natural
Sienna
Barn Yard Red
Hamilton-10 Cherry
Mesa Flat-60 Cherry
Santiago Mission-15 Hickory
Chisholm Beaded-15 Beech
Tuscan-13 Cherry
Shaker-60 Maple
Sterling Raised Panel-65 Alder
Valley Forge-10 Knotty Alder
Slate
Espresso Bean
Shalimar
Cracked Pepper
Charcoal Slate
Tudor Brown
Doc Holiday
Calico BURG
Modesto Mission-65 Maple
Ralston Flat-60 Quarter-Sawn-Oak
Valley Forge Raised-35 Knotty Alder
Modesto Mission-70 Maple
1-pc Valley Forge-65 Craftwood
Tuscan-67 Hickory
Delano-65 Alder
Stonewall-11 Cherry
Espresso Bean
Butter Pecan MFG
Concord-60 Cherry
Heritage Beaded w/AM2-65 Rustic Cherry
Pitch Black
Bright White
Natural MFG Flat
Shaker-60 Oak
1-pc Shaker-65 Craftwood
Cambria-65 Alder
Butter Pecan
English Leather
Contempo I-65 Quarter-Sawn-Oak
Bradford-65 Alder
London Fog Contempo II-60 Cherry
Sweet Mist
FF&D SAMPLE ORDER FORM DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
15” x 27 1/4”
DATE: ___/___/___
DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________ DADDED ADDED DOOR FEATURES (APPLIED MOLDING, PEGS, & NAILS) WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE.
r FFD - STD COLOR
r FFD - STD COLOR
r FFD - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r FFD - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r FFDSP - CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r FFDSP - CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r FFDFD - FULL DOOR - STD FINISH
r FFDFD - FULL DOOR - STD FINISH
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________
HINGE: rFULL OVERLAY
HINGE: rFULL OVERLAY
rCONCEALED
rCONCEALED
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
______________________________________
______________________________________
r FFD - STD COLOR
r FFD - STD COLOR
r FFD - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r FFD - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r FFDSP - CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r FFDSP - CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r FFDFD - FULL DOOR - STD FINISH
r FFDFD - FULL DOOR - STD FINISH
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________
HINGE: rFULL OVERLAY
HINGE: rFULL OVERLAY
rCONCEALED
rCONCEALED
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
______________________________________
______________________________________
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS r GROUND r 2ND DAY r NEXT DAY
SHIP TO: ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________
SAMPLE DOORS CANNOT BE SHIPPED ON COMPANY TRUCKS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL.
NOV. 2010
LIBRARY DOOR ORDER FORM DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
DATE: ___/___/___
DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
r I would like to be added to a waiting list if my request is not available
SHIP TO: ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS r GROUND r 3 DAY (CA, AZ) r 2ND DAY STD r 2ND DAY 10:30 A.M. r NEXT DAY 8 A.M. r NEXT DAY 10:30 A.M. r NEXT DAY 3 P.M. SAMPLE DOORS CANNOT BE SHIPPED ON COMPANY TRUCKS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL
ORDERS RECEIVED BY 1:00 P.M. CST WILL SHIP THE SAME DAY, IF AVAILABLE.
1
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH (Rarely Possible)
2
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE FOR DOOR STYLE
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH (Rarely Possible)
4
(Rarely Possible)
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE FOR DOOR STYLE
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH (Rarely Possible)
6
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH (Rarely Possible)
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE
r SEND A DOOR FOR COLOR AND ONE
FOR DOOR STYLE
Library Contact Information Phone: (316)529-3431 ext. 171 Fax: (316)219-2798 Email: library@customcupboards.com
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE FOR DOOR STYLE
5
(Rarely Possible)
r OK TO SEND DIFFERENT DOOR STYLE FOR DOOR STYLE
3
r ONLY WANT EXACT MATCH
FOR DOOR STYLE
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ Oct. 2010
Sales Aid Order Form 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Quantity
Ordering
Sales Tools Quantity
Quantity
Heartland Catalog
_____
Library of Color Book (LOC)
_____
Discovery Catalog
_____
Set of 9 Edge Profile Blocks
_____
Set of 11 Mirror Molding Blocks
_____
Revola Catalog
_____
Set of 4 Interior Blocks
_____
Set of Sink Mat Samples
_____
Drawer Box Logo Sample
_____
Individual Molding Sample
_____
Forms
Available Online
Pricing Program
Available Online
2020 Catalogs
Available Online
PDF Catalogs
Available Online
Heartland, Discovery, Revola Ply, & Revola PB
Beech & Birch
1’ pc unfinished
selection: ___________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
Literature & Advertising Quantity
Special Sample Doors Quantity
Door Brochure (fold out)
25
Distressing Sample
_____
Laser Engraved Plaque
_____
Sheen Sample
_____
Peg/Nail Sample
_____
To view, customize & order additional cabinet line brochures, direct mail, & posters, visit our Virtual Marketing Portal at https://cci.rastar.com/
Door Store For availability + finish + style, visit our door store online! www.CustomCupboards.com/ForThePros/DealersOnly/DoorStore
Standard Finishes & Doors (with/out glaze) Packaged Finishes & Mitered Doors Applied Molding Doors
Shipping Instructions Dealer ID
Ground
2nd Day
Next Day
Ship to
Date
Dealer Name Ordered By
FORMS>SalesAidFormMar2013_v3-13
PO# * Sales Aids cannot be shipped on company trucks without prior approval
SD & FRONT SAMPLE ORDER FORM DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
14 1/2” x 26”
DATE: ___/___/___
DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________ DADDED DOOR FEATURES (APPLIED MOLDING, PEGS, & NAILS) WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE.
r SD&F - STD COLOR
-
r SD&F - STD COLOR
-
r SD&F - STD COLOR/GLAZE -
r SD&F - STD COLOR/GLAZE -
r SD&F SPECIAL - PACKAGED FINISH -
r SD&F SPECIAL - PACKAGED FINISH -
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
r SD&F - STD COLOR
r SD&F - STD COLOR
-
-
r SD&F - STD COLOR/GLAZE -
r SD&F - STD COLOR/GLAZE -
r SD&F SPECIAL - PACKAGED FINISH -
r SD&F SPECIAL - PACKAGED FINISH -
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________ DRAWER FRONT: __________ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS r GROUND r 2ND DAY r NEXT DAY SAMPLE DOORS CANNOT BE SHIPPED ON COMPANY TRUCKS
SHIP TO: ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ Oct. 2010
STANDARD SAMPLE ORDER FORM 11 1/2 X 14 1/2
DATE: ___/___/___
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
DADDED DOOR FEATURES (APPLIED MOLDING, PEGS, & NAILS) WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE.
r SDS - STD COLOR
r SDS - STD COLOR
r SDSG - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r SDSG - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r SDS CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r SDS CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r
SDS-SDCDF - CUSTOM MATCH
r
SDS-SDCDF - CUSTOM MATCH
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
__________________________________
__________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
r SDS - STD COLOR
r SDS - STD COLOR
r SDSG - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r SDSG - STD COLOR/GLAZE
r SDS CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r SDS CUSTOM - PACKAGED FINISH
r
SDS-SDCDF - CUSTOM MATCH
r
SDS-SDCDF - CUSTOM MATCH
WOOD: ________________________
WOOD: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
COLOR: ________________________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
DOOR STYLE/EDGE: _______________
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
__________________________________
__________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS r GROUND r 2ND DAY STD r 2ND DAY 10:30 AM r NEXT DAY 8 AM r NEXT DAY 10:30 AM r NEXT DAY 3 PM r 3 DAY (CA & AZ only)
SHIP TO: ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________
SAMPLE DOORS CANNOT BE SHIPPED ON COMPANY TRUCKS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL.
Nov 2010
Dealer Starter Kit
Qualifies for display program
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Welcome to the Custom Cupboards family! The following kit has been put together for your convenience. Additional items can be ordered on the Sales Aid form. If you have any questions concerning our
The Basics
___ Heartland Catalog(s) ___ Discovery Catalog(s) ___ Revola Catalog(s) 1 Library of Color Book 1 Set Interior Blocks (heartland, discovery, revola ply&pb)
1 1 1 1 1 1
Set of 9 Edge Profile Blocks Set of 11 Mirror Mldg Blocks Peg / Nail Door Sample Sheen Sample Distressing Sample Set Sink Mat Samples
25 Door Brochure
(silver, maple & white)
1 Set Drawer Box Logo Sample (Beech & Birch)
1 Sample Box (color block tray) 1 Set (168) of Standard Color Blocks 20 Starter Doors (See page 2) (Choose from preselected door style/finish combinations. Please call for availability)
company or products, let us know. We look forward to working with you.
Minibases
*
*All applicable charges will apply to finish, door/front style, hinge type, etc.
12” W X 24” T X 15 1/4” D
Wood Species
Door Style/Edge
Finish
Glaze
Drawer Front Aging
Topcoat
Interior Discovery
Hinge
Heartland (-12%)
Knife Hinge Concealed Full Overlay Designer Overlay
Revola Particleboard Revola Plywood
Heartland Plus
1/4” Reveal at top 3/4” Reveal at top
Frameless Add Soft Close Hinge
Add Soft Close Hinge Drawer Box/Guide Discovery w/ Sidemount Aspen Dovetail w/ Solo Undermount Aspen Dovetail w/ Blumotion
Beech Dovetail w/Solo Undermount Beech Dovetail w/ Blumotion
Optional Pull-Out Shelves
Finished End Options
Discovery w/ Sidemount Aspen Dovetail w/ Solo Undermount Aspen Dovetail w/ Blumotion
Finished End ___Right ___Left ___Both Flush Finished End ___Right ___Left ___Both Applied Panel End ___Right ___Left ___Both Raised Panel End ___Right ___Left ___Both 3/8” Beadboard End ___Right ___Left ___Both
Beech Dovetail w/Solo Undermount Beech Dovetail w/ Blumotion
3/16” Beadboard End ___Right ___Left ___Both Factory Applied Finished End ___Right ___Left ___Both Applied Panel End ___Right ___Left ___Both
Shipping Instructions Dealer ID
Ground
2nd Day
Next Day
Ship to
Date
Dealer Name Ordered By FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
PO# * Starter kits cannot be shipped on company trucks without prior approval
Dealer Starter Kit 3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Welcome to the Custom Cupboards family! We pride ourselves on our innovative customer service initiatives that benefit both our dealers and their customers. We look forward to working with you!
What’s Included A
B
168 Standard Color Blocks
Sample Box
E
C
9 Edge Profile Blocks w/laminated SS/CTE Chart
F
D
1 set of Discovery, Heartland & Revola Catalogs PDF’s available online
G
H
Pegs
1 set of Discovery, Heartland, Expressions, Revola PB/PLY interior blocks
Nails
1 set of 11 mirror molding blocks
E
Flat
1 peg / nail door sample
F
Satin
Sheen Sample
G
H
Beech
Birch
Distressing sample
I
25 Door Style Library brochures. Over 60 different door styles. PDF available online FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
Maple
1 set drawer box logo sample (You can customize with your logo)
Library of Color book. Over 200 door images. PDF available online
J
Dealer Only access to our website
Silver
White
1 set of sink mat samples
K
Dedicated Account Manager Contact
L
20 Sample Doors
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
A
168 Standard Color Blocks
C
9 Edge Profile Blocks w/laminated SS/CTE Chart
B
Sample Box
Photographs may vary from actual color, due to limitations of the printing process. ©2011 Custom Cupboards, Inc. All rights reserved. FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Pegs
D
E
1 set of Discovery, Heartland & Revola Catalogs PDF’s available online
1 set of Discovery, Heartland, Expressions, Revola PB/PLY interior blocks
G
1 peg / nail door sample
F
Nails
1 set of 11 mirror molding blocks
Photographs may vary from actual color, due to limitations of the printing process. ©2011 Custom Cupboards, Inc. All rights reserved. FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
Flat H
Satin
Sheen Sample E
Distressing sample
Beech
Birch
F
1 set drawer box logo sample (You can customize with your logo)
Maple
Silver
H
1 set of sink mat samples
Photographs may vary from actual color, due to limitations of the printing process. ©2011 Custom Cupboards, Inc. All rights reserved. FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
White
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
I
G
25 Door Style Library brochures. Over 60 different door styles. PDF available online
Library of Color book. Over 200 door images. PDF available online
Photographs may vary from actual color, due to limitations of the printing process. ©2011 Custom Cupboards, Inc. All rights reserved. FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
L
Dealer Starter Doors
Choose 20 Doors from these preselected door style/finish combinations (shown) & available door store selections
Espresso Bean
Tattered Fence
Cracked Pepper
Chisholm Beaded-15 Maple
Mesa Beadboard-60 Hickory
Salem-66 Alder
Alcott-13 Oak
French Vanilla
Espresso WB
Sienna VDB
Bark
Sandalwood
Bark
Ralston Flat-60 MDF Paint
Clairmont-65 Beech
Taos-65 Cherry
Modesto Mission-65 Alder
Salem-10 Rustic Beech
Ralston Beadboard-60 Beech
Dolphin Grey
Cranbrook
Snickerdoodle
Café
Black Forest
Sea Cliff Heights
Spiced Cider
Stafford-10 MDF Paint
Stafford-15 Alder
Valley Forge Beaded w/AM2-10 Knotty Alder
Vallejo Mission-65 Beech
Charleston w/AM3-10 Timberline-65 Cherry MDF Paint
Chisholm Beaded-15 Rustic Beech
River Rock
Butter Pecan
Canyon Sunset
Natural
Sienna
Barn Yard Red
Chisholm Beaded-15 Beech
Tuscan-13 Cherry
Shaker-60 Maple
Sterling Raised Panel-65 Alder
Valley Forge-10 Knotty Alder
Cracked Pepper
Charcoal Slate
Tudor Brown
Doc Holiday
Calico BURG
Modesto Mission-70 Maple
1-pc Valley Forge-65 Craftwood
Tuscan-67 Hickory
Delano-65 Alder
Stonewall-11 Cherry
Pitch Black
Bright White
Natural MFG Flat
Shaker-60 Oak
1-pc Shaker-65 Craftwood
Cambria-65 Alder
Butter Pecan
English Leather
Contempo I-65 Quarter-Sawn-Oak
Bradford-65 Alder
London Fog Contempo II-60 Cherry
Café
Natural
Hamilton-10 Cherry
Mesa Flat-60 Cherry
Santiago Mission-15 Hickory
Slate
Espresso Bean
Shalimar
Modesto Mission-65 Maple
Ralston Flat-60 Quarter-Sawn-Oak
Valley Forge Raised-35 Knotty Alder
Espresso Bean
Butter Pecan MFG
Concord-60 Cherry
Heritage Beaded w/AM2-65 Rustic Cherry
Sweet Mist
Huron Charleston-66 Alder
3738 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
FORMS>DealerStarterKit-120512
Limited Lifetime Warranty Custom Cupboards, Inc. (CCI) warrants all of its cabinetry to be free of defects in material and/or workmanship when subject to normal use for as long as the original purchaser owns it. Subject to the provisions that follow, provided that the original purchaser retains ownership and is able to establish the date of purchase and the original cost of the defective product to CCI’s reasonable satisfaction, Custom Cupboards, Inc. will at its sole option elect to either repair or replace, at its discretion, the defective material or components, free of charge.
The color of the wood and finish may change during the lifetime of the product due to exposure to direct or indirect sunlight or other factors. The color change, known as mellowing, occurs in both the finish and the wood itself and is part of the natural aging process. This process is not to be considered a defect in material or workmanship.
The lifetime coverage offered by this warranty automatically ends upon the sale of the property or the death of the last original homeowner at the time of purchase of the product.
To file a warranty claim, the purchaser should contact their local authorized Custom Cupboards dealer/distributor. The dealer/distributor will then obtain the information necessary to make the claim decision and forward such information in writing to Custom Cupboards for action on the claim. Warranty claims must include a complete description of the defect.
No dealer or other person(s) or entity is authorized to modify the foregoing warranty or to make any other warranty on behalf of Custom Cupboards, Inc.
The lifetime coverage in this warranty applies only to individual homeowners. Custom Cupboards Inc. also warrants its dovetail drawer box, hinges, and drawer suspension system to be free from defects in material and/or workmanship under normal usage to the original purchaser for the lifetime of the cabinets. This is a parts warranty only and excludes labor for removal or replacement of defective parts. This warranty shall not apply to cabinetry ordered unfinished, nor to cabinetry or parts of our cabinetry that have been subjected to alterations, abuse, misuse, negligence, or improper installation, storage and handling.
ITED LIM
Our warranty does not cover expansion or contraction defects and/or joint separations that occur as a result of low (below 25%) or high (above 55%) humidity or moisture conditions or exposure to extremes of temperature.
AR
Y
LIFETIME
W
RAN
T
Dealership
Street Address
City
Original Work Order
State
Zip
PO#
Custom Cupboards, Inc. ▪ 3778 South Norman, Wichita, Kansas 67215 ▪ T 316.529.3431 F 316.219.2798 ▪ www.CustomCupboards.com
LimitedLifetimeWarranty0611 Effective June ‘11
38
OUT-OF-SQUARE CABINET DIAGRAM DATE:___/___/___
Fax to: (316) 529-1738
Dealer Code: ___ ___ ___ - ___ ___ ___ As there are many variables that can lead to an out Dealership: _______________________
of square cabinet box please describe the defect so that we may better address your problem.
Ordered By: ______________________ ORIGINAL WO#__________________ Line #__________________ PO#______________________________ EPLEASE CHECK AS MANY AS NEEDED TO DESCRIBE THE PROBLEMS YOU HAVE HAD
rUnequal Length Sides
rBowed Stiles
rUnequal Width Sides
rBowed Rails
rUnequal Length Stiles
rBowed Sides
rFaceframe Not Seated to Side Other: _______________
_____________________
rUnequal Length Rails
Cabinet Side View Cabinet Front View
___"
___" ___"
___"
Cabinet Top / Bottom View ___"
___"
Faceframe - Front View
Side View
Stiles Bowed Out / In Bottom Rail
Right Stile
Left Stile
Top Rail Frame not seated fully against side
Please describe defect: _________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Oct. 2010 39
WARRANTY FORM
FAX TO (316) 858-5295, QUALITY ANALYSIS
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DATE: ___/___/___
ORIGINAL WO/ESO#: ____________________ ADDITIONAL ESOs: ______________________
DEALERSHIP: ______________________________
*TO PROCEED,THIS REQUEST MUST INCLUDE A WO#. SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS: r GROUND r 2ND DAY r NEXT DAY r COMMON CARRIER r NEXT TRUCK*
PO# _____________________________________
*NO JOB SITE DELIVERY
CITY/STATE: ______________________________
WHY ARE YOU NOT SATISFIED? _________________________________________
ORDERED BY: _____________________________
_________________________________________
SHIP TO: _____________________________ _____________________________
_________________________________________
_____________________________
_________________________________________
_____________________________
ITEMS OVER 6 MONTHS OLD MUST BE RETURNED TO THE FACTORY BEFORE WORK CAN BEGIN
WOOD: _______________ STAIN: ________________
LINE #
QTY
ITEM #
SIZE (W X L)
DEFECT DESCRIPTION
GLAZE/SPECIAL: _________________________
INTERIOR: _______________________ HINGE: _______________________ UPPER DOOR / EDGE: _____________--______ LOWER DOOR / EDGE: _____________--______ DRAWER FRONT: _______ GUIDE TYPE: _______________________ r r r
FISL DOORS FISL DRWRS LOGOS
OFFICE USE ONLY: WARRANTY CODE: ________
AUTHORIZED BY: _____________________________ Oct. 2010 40
WOOD TOP ORDER FORM DATE: ___/___/___ r Sizes include CTE r Sizes exclude CTE r Please send the “Dog Bone” joint system
NOTES r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time
WO#: _____________ DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __ DEALERSHIP:_________________
r Shaped top will be shipped prepped for spline only. r See catalog for pricing and additional specifications
DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
SPECIFY EDGE DETAIL:
PLEASE PUT AN “X” ON THE SIDES THAT REQUIRE CTE TO BE ATTACHED & CIRCLE GRAIN DIRECTION ON EACH PIECE
#_____
ANGLED
10,13,15,35,60,65,66,67,70 (OTHERWISE IT WILL MATCH YOUR DOOR DETAIL)
CTE CHOICE r CTE 1
_____” CTE - Y / N?
CTE - Y / N?
CTE 3
_____”
r
Drawing is based off of a 45º angle. If CTE does not fit a complementary edge will be added.
_____”
CTE 2
CTE - Y / N?
r
• •
_”
TE
C
__
__
135º
-Y
CTE 4
/ ? N
r
_____”
-Y ?
N 135º
CTE - Y / N? _____”
41
_____”
/
_”
__
__
CTE - Y / N?
TE C
CTE - Y / N?
WOOD TOP ORDER FORM DATE: ___/___/___ r Sizes include CTE r Sizes exclude CTE r Please send the “Dog Bone” joint system
NOTES
WO#: _____________
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
r Shaped tops will be shipped prepped for spline only.
DEALERSHIP:_________________
r See catalog for pricing and additional specifications
DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
SPECIFY EDGE DETAIL:
PLEASE PUT AN “X” ON THE SIDES THAT REQUIRE CTE TO BE ATTACHED & CIRCLE GRAIN DIRECTION ON EACH PIECE
#_____
“L” SHAPED
10,13,15,35,60,65,66,67,70 (OTHERWISE IT WILL MATCH YOUR DOOR DETAIL)
CTE CHOICE r CTE 1
_____”
• •
CTE 3
CTE - Y / N?
r
Drawing is based off of a 45º angle. If CTE does not fit a complementary edge will be added.
_____”
CTE 2
CTE - Y / N?
r
_____”
CTE - Y / N?
_____” CTE - Y / N?
CTE 4
CTE - Y / N? _____”
42
_____”
CTE - Y / N?
r
WOOD TOP ORDER FORM DATE: ___/___/___ r Sizes include CTE r Sizes exclude CTE r Please send the “Dog Bone” joint system
SPECIFY EDGE DETAIL:
NOTES
WO#: _____________
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
r See catalog for pricing and additional specifications
DEALERSHIP:_________________ DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________ PLEASE PUT AN “X” ON THE SIDES THAT REQUIRE CTE TO BE ATTACHED & CIRCLE GRAIN DIRECTION ON EACH PIECE
#_____
STRAIGHT
10,13,15,35,60,65,66,67,70 (OTHERWISE IT WILL MATCH YOUR DOOR DETAIL)
CTE CHOICE r CTE 1
r
CTE - Y / N?
CTE 3
_____”
r
• •
CTE 4
CTE - Y / N? _____”
43
_____”
CTE 2
CTE - Y / N?
CTE - Y / N?
r
_____” Drawing is based off of a 45º angle. If CTE does not fit a complementary edge will be added.
WOOD TOP ORDER FORM DATE: ___/___/___ r Sizes include CTE r Sizes exclude CTE r Please send the “Dog Bone” joint system
NOTES
WO#: _____________
r Failure to supply all relevant information will affect your lead time
DEALER ID: __ __ __ - __ __ __
r Shaped top will be shipped prepped for spline only.
DEALERSHIP:_________________
r See catalog for pricing and additional specifications
DEALER PO#: _______________ SALESPERSON: ___________________
SPECIFY EDGE DETAIL:
PLEASE PUT AN “X” ON THE SIDES THAT REQUIRE CTE TO BE ATTACHED & CIRCLE GRAIN DIRECTION ON EACH PIECE
#_____
“U” SHAPED
10,13,15,35,60,65,66,67,70 (OTHERWISE IT WILL MATCH YOUR DOOR DETAIL)
CTE CHOICE r CTE 1 • •
_____” CTE - Y / N?
CTE - Y / N? _____”
44
CTE - Y / N?
_____”
CTE - Y / N?
_____”
CTE - Y / N?
CTE - Y / N?
CTE - Y / N?
CTE 4
_____”
_____”
r
CTE 3
_____”
CTE - Y / N?
r
CTE 2
_____”
r
Drawing is based off of a 45º angle. If CTE does not fit a complementary edge will be added.